P. 1
eie

eie

|Views: 176|Likes:
Published by Vishal Nair
eie
eie

More info:

Published by: Vishal Nair on Apr 18, 2013
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

02/28/2015

pdf

text

original

DIVISION OF

ELECTRONICS & INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Code No. EI201 EI202 EI203 EI204 EI205 EI206 EI207 EI208 EI209 EI210 EI211 EI212 EI213 EI214 EI215 EI216 EI217 EI218 EI219 EI220 EI221 EI222 EI 301 EI 302 EI 303 EI 304 EI 305 EI 306 EI 307 EI 308 EI 309 EI 310 EI 311 EI 312 EI 313

Subject Name Sensors and Transducers Sensors and Transducers Laboratory Control Systems Control Systems Laboratory Measurement Systems Embedded Instrumentation System Measurement Laboratory Signal Conditioning Circuits Signal Conditioning Circuits Laboratory Process Dynamics and Control Computer Based Process Control Laboratory Industrial Instrumentation Microprocessor Based Instrumentation System Digital Control Systems Logic and Distributed Control Systems Biomedical Instrumentation Instrumentation and Control Laboratory Instrumentation and Control Laboratory Measurements and Instrumentation Measurements and Instrumentation Laboratory Embedded System Laboratory Instrumentation and Control Systems Industrial Instrumentation Process Control Advanced Digital Signal Processing Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation Biomedical Instrumentation and Image Processing Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory Advanced Control System Computer Control of Process Distributed Control System, Networks and Protocols Automotive Instrumentation Virtual Instrumentation Real Time and Embedded Systems Embedded System Laboratory

Credit 3:1:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 0:0:1 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:1 4:0:0 0:0:2

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering

1

EI 201 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit I : Science of Measurement Measurement systems – Significance of Measurements, Methods of Measurements – Direct and Indirect Methods, Classification of Instruments –Deflection and Null Type, Generalised Measurement System, Characteristics of Instruments – Static and Dynamic, Types of errors, Error analysis, Units and Standards.

Unit II : Classification and Characteristics of Transducer Transducer – Definition, Classification of Transducer – analog and digital transducer- primary and secondary transducer- active and passive transducer-Inverse transducer, Characteristics and choice of transducer, Factors influencing choice of transducer.

Unit III : Resistance and Inductance Transducer Resistance Transducer-Basic principle, Potentiometer – Loading effects, Resolution, Linearity, Non-linear Potentiometer, Noise in potentiometer, Resistance strain gauge – Types, Resistance thermometer, Thermistors – characteristics, Thermocouple – Compensation circuits – junction and lead compensation, merits and demerits. Inductance Transducer:- Basic principle, Linear variable differential transformer, RVDT, Synchro, Induction potentiometer, variable reluctance accelerometer, microsyn. Unit IV : Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducer Capacitance Transducer – Basic principle, tranducers using change in - area of platesdistance between plates- variation of dielectric constants, frequency response, Merits, demerits and uses. Piezoelectric transducer- Basic principle, Mode of operation, properties of piezoelectric crystals, loading effects, frequency response and impulse response uses. Unit V : Pressure, Digital and other Miscellaneous sensors Pressure sensors – bourdon tube, bellows, diaphragm. Digital Transducer – shaft encoder, optical encoder,digital speed transducer. Hall effect transducer, sound sensors, vibration sensors – seismic tranducer, chemical sensor – PH sensor, velocity transducer, Introduction to smart sensors.

a K

Text Books 1. A.K. Sawhney “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation” – Dhanpat Rai & Co., (Pvt) Ltd., 2000. 2. S.Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited, 1999. Reference Books 1. Ernest O. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing company, 1990. 2. Woolvert, G.A., “Transducer in Digital Systems” Peter Peregrinus Ltd., England, 1998. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 2

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

3. D. Patranabis “Principles of Industrial Instrumentation” Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1996. EI202 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 1) Study of characteristics of straingauge 2) Characteristics study of Load cell 3) Characteristics study of LVDT 4) Characteristics study of RTD 5) Characteristics study of Thermocouple 6) Characteristics study of pressure transducer 7) Characteristics study of LDR

8) Measurement of speed using optical sensor

9) Measurement of Torque using Torque transducer

10) Characteristics study of loudspeaker and microphone 11) Characteristics study of resistive potentiometer

12) Characteristics study of optocoupler and photocell

Unit I : Introduction Open loop and closed loop systems - transnational and rotational mechanical systems and analogous electrical systems - Basic components of control systems - potentiometer synchros - tachogenerator - a.c and d.c servo motor. Mathematical representation, block diagram, signal flow graph and transfer function of electrical systems.

a K

Unit II : Time Response Time response - step response of first order and second order systems - time domain specifications - type and order of a system - steady state error - static error and generalized error coefficients - frequency response - frequency domain specifications estimation of the specifications for a second order system. Unit III : Stability Analysis Stability - characteristic equation - location of roots in s plane for stability - Routh Hurwitz criterion -Root Locus Techniques Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

EI203 CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1:0 Marks: 40 + 60

3

Unit IV : Frequency Response Bode plot - Nichol's chart - Nyquist stability criterion - applications of Bode plots and Nyquist stability criterion, polar plot. Unit V : PID Controllers P, PI, PD and PID controllers Design and application - Fuzzy controller - Introduction and application – Fuzzy controllers to reduce settling time, overshoot and oscillations – Temperature controller – Pressure controller – flow and level controller using fuzzy neural network controllers computer based control of processes. Text Books 1. Ogata, K., "Modern Control Systems Engineering", PHI,1997. 2. Nagrath and Gopal.,:"Control System Engineering", II Edition, Wiley & Sons.1982. Reference Books 1. Gopal, M., : "Control System - Principles & Design", TMH, 1997. 2. Benjamin C. Kuo., :"Automatic Control Systems", III Edition PHI 1987.

EI204 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY

1. Study of Temperature On-OFF controller 2. Speed-Torque characteristics of AC servometer 3. Study of open and closed loop DC motor speed control system 4. Study of controllers 5. Transfer function of separately excited DC generator 6. Transfer function of field controlled DC motor 7. Transfer function of Armature controlled DC motor 8. Characteristics of Synchros and Resistive potentiometers 9. Magnetic Amplifier characteristics 10. Study of position control system 11. Stepper motor control 12. Response of RC and RL network

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50

EI205 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60

Unit I : Measurement Of Voltage Current, Power and Energy Principles of operation of permanent magnet moving coil, moving iron, dynamometer – calibration of voltmeters and ammeters – Power measurement by three ammeter and three voltmeter method – induction type wattmeter – energy meter – calibration of energy meter & wattmeter. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 4

Unit II : Measurement of RLC Whetstone, Kelvin, Wien, Hay, Maxell, Anderson and Schering bridges – Q meter – Potential transformer & current transformers – KVA meters – Power factor meter – Megger. Unit III : Electronic Analog Meter DC and AC voltmeters - differential voltmeters - AC current measurements – multimeters – vector impedance meter - power meter - Review of signal sources - signal generator – wave analyzer – harmonic distortion analyzer - spectrum analyzer correlator.

Unit IV : Digital Measurement Digital displacement transducers, increment and absolute – Digital method of measuring displacement & velocity – Digital alpha numeric display – digital methods of measurement of frequency – phase difference. Unit V : CRO & Recorders General purpose oscilloscope – CRT screen characteristics – vertical & horizontal amplifiers –delay line – time base and sweep trigger circuits synchronization – sampling oscilloscope – digital storage oscilloscope – typical measurements using CRO – moving coil recorders – XY plotters – UV recorders – digital recording.

Text Book: 1. Golding, E.W. and Widdis, F.C.: “Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”, Pitman, 1963. 2. Swahney, K.A., “Course in Electrical & Electronics Measurement & Instrumentation”, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 1982. 3. Kalsi, G.C., “Electronic Instrumentation” TMH, 1998. Reference Books 1. Cooper, W.D., and Helfrick, A.D., “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 1991 2. Cidwell, W., “ Electrical Instruments and Measurements”, TMH, 1969. 4. Woolvert, G.A., “Transducers in Digital Systems”, Peter peregrinvs Ltd., England, 1988. 5. Bouwens, A.J., “Digital Instrumentation”, McGraw Hill, 1986.

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

EI206 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60

Unit I : Introduction Embedded system evolution trends – basic real time concepts – real time design issues – 68HCII Microcontrollers – architecture – instruction set – interrupt handling – integrating interrupts in a system – examples – the shared data problem – software architecture.

Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering

5

New york. Bhur and Donald L. “An Embedded Software Primer”. 2000 4.. USA. 2. Prentice Hall of Inc. “An Introduction to Real Time Systems: From Design to Networking with C/C++”. 4. “Design with Microcontrollers”. failures. 1997 a K 1. Prentice Hall of India. edition. Analysis and Optimization Response – time calculation – interrupt latency – time loading and its measurement – scheduling – reducing response times and time loading – analysis of memory requirements – reducing memory loading – input – output performance. Unit V : Real Time Applications Real time system as complex systems – real time databases – real time image processing – real time Unix – building real time applications with real time programming languages. “Real Time Systems”. 1988 3. 2000 2. Valvano.Unit II : Real Time Operating Systems (RTOS) Real time specifications – real time kernels – inter-task communications and synchronizations – real time memory management.A. frequency & using CRO Measurement of phase difference by CRO using Lissajous figures Measurement of resistance using Kelvin double bridge and Wheatstone bridge Measurement of inductance using Hay’s and Owen’s bridge Measurement of Inductance using Anderson and Maxwell bridge Measurement of Capacitance using Schering’s bridge 6 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering . New Delhi. 3. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI207 MEASUREMENT LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 Measurement of voltage. New Delhi. bugs and effects – reliability – testing – fault tolerance – host and target machines – linker / locators for embedded software – getting embedded software into target system. Raymond J. Unit III : System Performance. New Delhi. 6. Laplante. David E. Bialey. Simon. Krishnan and Kang G. McGraw Hill. McGraw Hill Book Co.Peatman. 1999 2. Brooks/Cole..M. John B. Unit IV : Debugging Techniques and Development Tools Faults. Philip A. Jonathan W. “Real Time Systems Design and Analysis: An Engineer’s Handbook”. “Embedded Micro Computer System: Real Time Interfacing”. 5. An example : The tank monitoring system Text Books 1. Addision Wesley. C. 2000 Reference Books 1. Shin. New Jersey.

schimitt trigger. ADC and DAC: Basic principles -phase detector and comparator: analog and digital voltage controlled oscillator .723 general-purpose regulator Multiplying DC voltage .precision rectifiers. Calibration of Wattmeter 11. Calibration of Energy meter 10.frequency shifting.AMP characteristics DC : Bias.phase shift oscillators .Hartley .AMP circuits used in instrumentation .phase angle detection .switched capacitor filters.Isolation amplifiers . Unit II : Signal Sources and Oscillators Signal Sources . multiplier and divider. inverter and non inverter.crystal oscillators square wave and pulse generator circuits . V to I converter . comparators. " Linear Integrated Circuits". Measurement of Capacitance using Desauty's bridge. EI208 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS Unit I : Operational Amplifier Ideal OP AMP. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 7 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 y it .Filters .Wien bridge .monolithic PLL .inverting mode. AC: BW.charge amplifiers .state variable filter . Unit III : Amplifiers and Filters Buffer Amplifier.LC oscillators.. astable multivibrator.their characteristics. 1991. slew rate. differentiator. Text Books 1.clipper and clamper .frequency doubling .use of operational amplifier with capacitive displacement transducers. non ideal OP -AMP. inverting mode. ADC and DAC: techniques .Colpits . OP . Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain.frequency translation . Differential Amplifier . monostable multivibrator .. Wiley Eastern Ltd.triangular wave generator -saw tooth wave generator.Low pass.First order second order transformations . High pass. offsets and drift.AM detection .OP .FM detection FSK demodulation.AM modulation/demodulation SSB modulation/demodulation .Scale changer.Instrumentation amplifiers .Passive and Active filters . Adder.IC voltage regulators .Three amplifiers configuration . logarithmic converter. Measurement of angular displacement using potentiometer 8. Subtractor. Noise and frequency compensation . Band pass and Band reject filter .Low pass filter .applications of PLL: frequency multiplication -division . I to V converter .AMP regulator . Non. integrator.sample and hold circuit. Unit IV : Voltage Regulators and Multipliers Series OP. Calibration of Voltmeter 9. Calibration of Ammeter 12.RC oscillator .Oscillators: Classification of feedback oscillator .7. Unit V : PLL Circuits PLL.

Sawhney. Design and testing of active filters. Input offset voltage.2. 1986. CMRR. 2.Mathematical model of liquid process.) Ltd. Differentiator. 1992. " Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuit". 6. EI209 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY 1. Integrator.. 3. Helfrick. 1997. 15.. Verification of truth table of JK. Design and testing of a crystal oscillator using logic gates and counters. 11. Testing of parallel-to-serial and serial-to-parallel shift register.. Testing of A/D and D/A converters.: " Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques". OR. Full-adder and ALU modules. William David Cooper and Albert D. D and T flip-flops. Input Offset current. 7. Testing of Half-adder. 9. Ltd. slew rate). Denton J. 14. Sinusoidal oscillators using RC phase shift and Wien Bridge. Decoders. 12. Coughlin and Discol. Triangular. Characteristics of OP-AMPs and applications: Summer. Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Characteristics of liquid system. Design and testing of waveform generators using OP-AMPs: Square.. 2. 10..(I & II order). 5. Design and testing of an Instrumentation amplifier. Measurement of OP-AMP parameters (Gain. Dhanpat Rai and Company (Pvt..: "A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurement and Instrumentation". 1989. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 EI 210 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit I : Process Dynamics Elements of process control . " Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuit". McGraw Hill. 8. gas Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 8 . V to I and I to V convertors. Dailey.degrees of freedom . Design and testing of precision rectifier. K. RS. Reference Books 1. Ltd.. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. output voltage... Simplification of a logic function and its realization using (i) AND.. 13. thermal system . encoders and Interfacing TTL and CMOS gates.. 4. Bias current. Design and testing of a frequency multiplier using PLL. NOT gates and (ii) Universal gate. 3.process variables . gas system.

averaging control .globe. 3.Integral wind up . D. proportional.Feed Forward control .Ziegler . Text Books 1. : “ Process Systems Analysis and Control” .Nichol's tuning . pressure and temperature.1996. integral and derivative modes ..Auto . Curtis Johnson.reflux ratio . Patranabis. 5.: “ Principles of Process Control”..Batch process and continuous process . butterfly. flow process.steam boiler .composite control modes . damped oscillation method . PD and PID control modes .control valve . EI211 COMPUTER BASED PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it ON-OFF Controllers P + I + D Controller Temperature Control Loop Pressure Control Loop Flow Control Loop Level Control Loop 9 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering . Unit V : Applications Distillation column . 2.manual transfer . Coughanoner. 4.drum level control and combustion. 3. Eckman.valve body .valve positioner .control of top and bottom product compositions . Peter Harriot. flow.Selection of control mode for different processes .Typical control schemes for level.continuous cycling method. Unit III : Optimum Controller Settings Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method .Ratio control . diaphragm ball valves .1/4 decay ratio .control valve sizing Cavitation.1985. “ Automatic Process Control” . TMH 1981.process.control of heat exchangers ..Characteristics of control valve .control of chemical reactor . D. mixing process .PI.. Wiley Eastern. Prentice Hall Of India.multivariable control. Unit IV : I/P and P/I Converters Pneumatic and electric actuators . Unit II : Basic Control Actions Characteristics of on-off. and Koppel. TMH 2.Response of controllers for different types of test inputs . TMH 1991.P.Response of pneumatic transmission lines and valves. thermal process. D.cascade control .. 2. single -speed floating control. flashing in control valves . Reference Books: 1.Self regulation. 6. a K 1. “ Process Control Instrumentation Technology” .: “Process Control” .

: Resistance. Viscometer and pH meter 8.enclosures. Smart and intelligent flowmeters.pitot tubes.ultrasonic. P/I converter and I/P converter 12. Process control simulator 13. float level devices. Control valves with and without positioner 11. flow tubes. filtering and shielding. windows in data acquisition. Calibration of pressure gauge using Dead weight Tester 10. Level measurement: Introduction. flowmeter calibration concepts. D/P Transmitter 9. Vortex flowmeters. radar and vibrating type level sensors . Explosion hazards and intrinsic safety. Unit V : Virtual Instrumentation And EMC Virtual instrumentation: Definition. gyroscopic and heat transfer type mass flow meters. NEMA types: personnel safety.definitions and units. Laser Doppler anemometer (LDA). Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 10 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 y it . flow switches. EMC: Introduction.Transmitters: Introduction. twin turbine. Doppler. Unit IV : Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Introduction: Various methods for NDT . Integration of intelligent transmitters into knowledge based process management systems. thermal . Linearisation of thermocouple and RTD – based temperature transmitter EI212 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Unit I : Flow Measurements Introduction . conductivity. angular momentum. orifice meters.advanced NDT techniques . Electrical and intrinsic safety. Smart and Intelligent temperature. Unit II : Anemometers And Flow Meters Mechanical anemometers. cross correlation flowmeters. purge flow regulators. capacitance and RF probes: radiation. microwave. ultrasonic flowmeters. venturi tubes. flow nozzles. terminology. features of smart and intelligent transmitters. displaced level detectors. parts of the system.Level sensor selection and application. electromagnetic flowmeters. hot wire / hot film anemometer. field effect. constant torque hysteresis clutch. Measurement of mass flow rate: Radiation. pressure and differential pressure transmitters. turbine and other rotary element flowmeters. instrument drivers.7. interface coupling mechanism. coriolis.interface. rotating paddle switches. variable area flowmeters.flowmeter selection and application. impeller turbine. Other smart and intelligent measurement systems. positive displacement flowmeters. personal computers for DAS and instrument control. Unit III : Flowmeters And Level Measurements Target flowmeters: V-cone flowmeters.classification of flowmeters . diaphragm and differential pressure detectors. basics of circuit layout and grounding . PLC 14.

D.process interrupt card.: “Instrumentation Reference Book”.: “ Measurement Systems Application and Design” . Flow measurement. a K Unit IV : Applications Water level monitoring in mining .O. Unit III : Interface Chips Principle. Noltingk. Liptak.. programming examples Unit II : Organisation of 8086 Organisation of 8086 microprocessor .Addressing bytes and words Address formation .: “Process Instruments and Control & Handbook".: “Process Measurement & Analysis”. 2.Position control using stepper motor.minimum mode and maximum mode multiprocessing. fourth edition McGraw Hill International.memory segmentation .Digital output card . “Practical Guides for Measurement and Control” .interfacing memory and I/O devices with 8085and 8086 microprocessor.1996.. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 11 . McGraw Hill 1985. 3...Bus cycles. EI213 MICROPROCESSOR BASED INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM Unit I : Organisation of 8085 Organisation and architecture of 8085 microprocessor . 4.DC motor control Temperature control .M. Unit V : Introduction To Multiprogrammer Introduction to HPIB Multiprogrammer . Considine. 1991. instruction cycle. ISA publication. Reference Books 1. Doebelin. 8259 and 8279 . 2. W. Chilton Book company 1995. B. “Applied Instrumentation in Process Industries” .Multiprogrammer capabilities and applications Digital input card .G. E.Instruction set . block diagram and control word formats for 8251.8255 and 8253..1978.a survey Vol-I Gulf Publishing company.G.Addressing modes Assembly language programming .E.Text Books 1. IV Edition.Turbine monitor in thermal plant . Anderew. B.Addressing modes in 8086 . 8257. II edition Butterworth Heinemann.

Auslander.Steady state errors .1984.Sampled Data Control system. Successive approximation A/D.Review of Z and Inverse Z transform .: “Handbook of Microprocessor Based Instrumentation and Control”.Shannon's sampling theorems . . 3. and Paul Sagues.Bilinear transformation . Osborne/McGraw Hill.Text Books 1.From Chips to Systems”. Ramesh Gaonkar..Z domain equivalent . Unit V: Applications System models.Stability studies .Sampled data model for continuous system Controllability and observability. Kenneth Ayala. Reference Books 1.Pulse transformation function by direct. Unit II : System Response Response of sampled data systems to step and ramp inputs . 3. "Microprocessor Architecture... cascade and parallel realization . Lenk. a K Unit IV : Digital Process Control Design Digital PID algorithm . John .Interfacing of stepper motor to microprocessors. BPB Publications.. Programming & Applications with 8085/8080A" – Penram International .solutions . Prentice Hall Inc.Operational features of stepper motors .1997. S.1981.General description of microcontrollers . Ramp type A/D.. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 3: 1:0 Marks: 40 + 60 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 12 .1985.Jury's stability test. Programming & Applications" – Penram International publishing-1996. Digital to Analog conversion – Analog to Digital conversion.Reconstruction .Positional and incremental forms . : “An introduction to Microprocessors .A/D & D/A converters . M. Tata McGraw Hill. 2."The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture. Unit III : Function Realisation State sequences for sampled data systems .D..Dead-beat algorithm-Ringing Dahlin's and Kalman's algorithms . Rodney Zaks. David. J.Implementation of control algorithms using microprocessors .Zero Order Hold.: “Microprocessors for Measurement and Control”..: “Microprocessor Based Data Acquisition System Design”.1987. EI214 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS Unit I : Sample Theory and Converters Review of Sample theory .Drive circuits . control algorithms and their implementation for micro processor based position and temperature control systems . Dual slope A/D.Digital quantization. 2. Krishna Kant.

“Discrete Control systems” . M. TMH.timer functions . PLC-PID functions PLC installation .I. Wiley & Sons. error.concept . computer control hierarchy levels. Case studies in DCS.structure . Auxiliary commands and functions . Nagrath. “ Control System Engineering” .trouble shooting and maintenance . PLC basic functions . DCS . Constantine Houpis. Communication in DCS.international field bus standards.system integration with PLC and computers.number comparison functions .Wiley Eastern Publications.utilizing digital bits .operation.operator stations .processes with PLC . 1985 3.data move systems.operating conditions and applications.. PLC Advanced intermediate functions.controlling a robot . General PLC programming procedures . Unit II : Programmable Logic Conntroller (PLC) Basics Definition.detailed descriptions and functions of field control units .DCS. 1988 Reference Books 1.counter functions.building blocks .skip and MCR functions . Digital Controller modes. S. Unit IV : Interface And Backplane Bus Standards For Instrumentation Systems Field bus: Introduction . : “ Microprocessors with Applications in Process Control” . Hardware and Software.1985.Input/ Output modules .creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions. Unit V : Distributed Control Systems (DCS) Evolution of DCS . Unit III : PLC Intermediate Functions Arithmetic functions . Ahson. Supervisory digital control (SCADA).Theory. Characteristics of digital data.. 1984.design of inter locks and alarms using PLC. Controller software.Power supplies –ISO slots.overview of PLC systems . a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 13 .supervisory computer tasks and configuration .M: “Digital Control Engineering”. and Gopal.redundancy concepts.register basics . EI215 .programming on-off outputs. Direct Digital control (DDC).sequencer functions PLC Advanced functions: alternate-programming languages .. 2.J. proportional. McGraw Hill. J.LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS Unit I : Review Of Computers In Process Control Data loggers: Data acquisition systems (DAS): alarms. HART protocol: method of operation .data highways . Linearization. derivative and composite controller modes. and Garry Lamont. Gopal.Text Book 1.

.T. New Jersey.Text Books 1..R. . New York .Eye – ERG Unit II : Measurement and Physiological Parameters Physiological Transducers .: “ Programmable Logic Controllers”. Hughes. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.. Richard Aston.: “ Programmable Logic Controllers Principles and Applications”.Cardiac output measurement – heart rate – respiration rate – measurement of lung volume – Oximeters – Audiometer.1986. 3. ISA Press 1995. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 14 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 . Ronald Reis. Lukcas . D. ISA Press. W. Merrill publishing company. 1990. Unit III : Therapeutic and Surgical Equipments Electro Surgical unit – short wave & microwave diathermy – Laser surgical unit – Anesthesia machine – Pacemakers – Total artificial heart (TAH) – Dialyser – Heart lung machine – Defibrillators – Ventilators – Nerve stimulators – centralized and Bedside patient monitoring system – Nerve stimulators. 5. P. John Webb. EI216 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Unit I : Electrophysiology and Biopotential Recorders Neuron – Axon – Axon potential – Electrophysicology of Cardiovascular system – ECG – Phonocardiography – Neurophysiology – Central nervous system – EEG – Respiratory system – Muscular system . Unit V : Biomedical Equipments and Electrical Safety Flame photometer – spectrophotometer – chromatography – PH. Reference Books 1.: “Real Time Control Networks” .. PCO2. 4. Prentice Hall India.: “ Elements of Process Control Applications” . 2. : “ Digital Control Devices” . and Ash .H. 1995. 2. 3/e. Deshpande. “ Computer based Industrial Control”. 1986. 1997. Krishna Kant. Unit V : Imaging Systems and Telemetry Computerized Tomography (CT) – MRI instrumentation – Ultrasound scanner – X-ray machine – Fluroscopic techniques – angiography – Cardiac catherisation lab – Echo cardiograph – vector cardiograph – Biotelemetry. ISA Press 1994. Text Books 1. Moore.: “ Distributed Control Systems”.Measurement of Blood pressure – Blood flow .EMG... ISA Press 1994.P. Mckloni.. A. M.. analysis – sterilizers – Electrical safety hazards in hospitals.B.: “Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement”. T. Prentice hall Inc..

. Study of characteristics of strain gauge 2. 7. Study of characteristics of Micropohone 9.E. 10. Study of characteristics of RTD. Study of controllering. Publishers. Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer. EI217 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY 1. Study of characteristics of thermocouple 6. n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 0: 0: 1 Marks: 25 + 25 y it Credit 0 : 0 : 2 Marks 50 + 50 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 15 . Study of characteristics of Thermocouple 6.2. 3. Geddes. Study of Tachogenerator characteristics. Study of characteristics of Loudspeaker 8.. 1989. Kandpur.. Kumbakonam. Study of characteristics of strain gauge . M. Study of characteristics of Pressure transducer 10.: “Biomedical Instrumentation”. 1987. Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer 7. L. Study of characteristics of LVDT 4.. Study of characteristics of Loud speaker 8. TMH. 5. Anuradha Agencies. : “ Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. John wiley. 1992. L. 2. R.A. Study of characteristics of Load cell.S. 2. and Baker. Arumugam. Study of characteristics of LVDT 4. 11. Study of characteristics of Microphone 9. Study of characteristics of RTD 5. Study of characteristics of Load cell 3.. Study of Temperature ON-OFF control. Reference Books 1.: “ Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”. Study of Tachogenerator characteristics EI218 INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL LABORATORY a K 1.

. flows.digital plotters and printers .EI219 MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0:0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit I : Introduction Functional elements of an instrument . "Principle of Measurement and Instrumentation" Prentice Hall of India.S. 1995. Unit II : Transducers Classification of transducers .optical and digital transducers . "Instrumentation for Engineering Measurement".V. Stout MoB. 1990.. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 16 .G. W. speed. frequency. phase. K. Ltd. 2. level. A. " Transducers and Instrumentation".. and Meconnel.differential and instrumentation amplifiers filter circuits . 4. capacitive and inductive transducers. Moorthy.S/H circuit. McGraw Hill Publishing Company.: " Measurement Systems.magnetic measurements . 3. John Wiley & Sons.P/I and I/P converters . viscosity and moisture. Riley.Application and Design".. 2.F.W.static and dynamic characteristics-errors in measurement-statistical evaluation of measurement data -standard and calibration. D. pressure. J.pH electrodes transducers for measurement of displacement.instrument transformers . a K Reference Books 1. prentice Hall of India Pvt. McGraw Hill. " Basic Electrical Measurement".. Text Book: 1.F.piezo electric transducers .instruments for measurement of torque. velocity and acceleration. Coombs. E. UNIT V : Electrical and Electronics Instruments Principle .S. UNIT IV : Storage and Display Devices Magnetic disc and tape recorders . Mooris. 1995.. Dalley.selection of transducers resistive. 1999. temperature..digital CRO LED..CRT displays . 1986. LCD and Dot matrix displays. Prentice Hall of India.analog and digital ammeters and volt-meters-single and three phase watt meters and energy meter. C. "Electronics Instrument Hand Book".V to I and I to V converters . 1999. Doebeling. UNIT III : Signal conditioning Circuits Bridge circuits . A/D and D/A converters -multiplexing and demultiplexing -data acquisition systems -grounding techniques.O..

Measurement of capacitance using Desauty’s bridge. Study of temperature measuring transducers (RTD. Simple programmes for basic arithmetic operations: Addition. 2. Study of programmable I/O ports of 8051 microcontroller 17 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering . 8. 11. sorting 8086 Assembly Language Programme 4. Measurement of inductance using Anderson and Maxwell’s bridge. Programms involving string instructions a K 8051 Assembly Language Programme 6. Calibration of ammeter. 3. Multiplication and division. 3. Measurement of phase difference by CRO using Lissajous figures. 5. 14. 13. Measurement of voltage and frequency using CRO. 10. BCD to seven segment code Binary to Hexadecimal. 2. 7. Calibration of wattmeter. Measurement of resistance using Kelvin’s double bridge and Whetstone Bridge 4. Subtraction. Search and sort 5. 6. Measurement of inductance using Hay’s and Owen’s bridge. Measurement of capacitance using Schering’s bridge. thermocouples and IC 590). Calibration of voltmeter. Code Conversion: BCD to Binary. DAC motor interface using 8085 10. Simple programs involving timers and counters Interfacing 7. ADC motor interface using 8085 9. Study of interrupt structures of 8085.EI 220 -MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 1. Binary to BCD. factorial. Stepper motor interface using 8085 8. 12. 8086 and 8051 11. 9. Square root of a number. Study of displacement and pressure transducer EI221 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 2 Marks: 50 + 50 8085 Assembly Language Programme 1. Measurement of angular displacement using potentiometer. Calibration of energy meter.

C. block diagram algebra. transfer functions. Precision and accuracy. signal flow graphs.V. Polar and Bode plots. Text Books: 1. accelerometer etc.. Routh stability criterion. calibration. New Delhi. 2. servomechanisms. Nagoor Kani. and Gopal. RBA Publications. bourdon. A. Simple problems. magnetic flow meter. 1989. wheatstone circuit. frequency. 3. Lewis Buck. ‘Mechanical Measurements’. Reference Books: 1. differential and integral control. types. recorders and integrators – their working principles. M. and hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. I.J. Dew point meter. efflux viscometer. Nyquist stability criterion. ‘Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation’. Narosa Publishing House. 1993. . Measurement of error and analysis. Collet. concept of stability. measurement of high and low pressure.D. time. Maragoni. Classification of instruments as indicators. pressure cells. N. speed. strain gauge.. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 18 . ‘Control Systems Engineering’. electrical torsion meter. UNIT II Measurement of displacement. Sawheny. A.K. ‘Control Systems’. temperature compensation. pyrometer and thermistors. ‘Engineering Measurements’. acceleration – vibrometer. Nagrath. ultrasonic flow meter. proportional control. Force measurement: Scales and Torque measurement: Mechanical torsion meter. gauge rosettes calibration.. Strain: Strain gauges. Wiley Eastern Limited. necessary condition for stability. resistance thermometer. generalised measurement system. Humidity: absorption hydrometer. 2. UNIT V Time response of first order and second order systems. Temperature measurement: Bimetallic. UNIT III Viscosity: Capillary tube viscometer. 1991. Simple problems. 1998 (For Units IV & V). thermocouples. 2nd Ed. UNIT IV Control Systems: Open and closed systems. elastic transducers. Pressure measurement: Gravitational. A. Thomas G Beckwith.Roy D.. and Hope.. Hot-wire anemometer. Two-way control.EI 222 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT I General Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation. ELBS. Dhanpat Rai & Co.

Calibration of flowmeters . Doeblin E.MTTR . Renganathan.Differential pressure transmitters Installation and maintenance of pressure gauges UNIT: II -Flow Measurement Positive displacement flowmeters . New Delhi.Optical Pyrometer-Installation. Barney G. 1990 ISBN 0-85226206. ‘Industrial Instrumentation’. 1995 ISBN 0-7506-2255.Pressure gauge method Diaphragm box-Air purge system-Differential pressure method – Hydro-step for boiler drum level measurement .Resistance thermometer.. ‘Measurement Systems’: Application and Design.Maintainability . UNIT: IV -Level Measurement Visual techniques .IC temperature sensors . 1997.Smart transmitter with HART communicator.capacitive sensors -Ultrasonic method . a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Reference Books rd 1.Ultrasonic flowmeter-Coriolis mass flowmeter. 3 Edition Chilton book company Radnor. pennsylvania. D.Point level sensors-Solid level measurement UNIT: V -Smart Instrumentation and Reliability Engineering Smart intelligent transducer.Conductive sensors . Chennai 1999 3.Installation and maintenance UNIT: III.Inferential flowmeter-Turbine flowmeter-Variable head flowmeters -Rotameter .Electrical methods . maintenance and calibration of thermometers and thermocouples.Laws of thermocouple . D.. 2.P.V.Reliability Engineering.. -Temperature Measurement Temperature standards .Dead weight tester .fixed points -filled-system thermometers .Elastic elementsElectrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges . Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Definition of reliability -Reliability and the failure rate – Relation between reliability and MTBF.Different types of manometers . Wiley Eastern Ltd.Mcleod gauge .. Liptak B.. Ltd. New Delhi.Cold junction compensation.Radiation pyrometer. Newyork.S.Measuring circuits Speed of response -linearization .Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge.Self diagnosis and remote calibration features.C. Fourth Edition. Patranabis.Comparison with conventional transducers. 2.Float operated devices . 1992 ISBN 0-07-100697-4.Displacer devices . ‘Transducer Engineering’. Eckman. Allied publishers. ISBN 0074623346 3. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 19 ..EI 301 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 UNIT: I -Pressure Measurement Pressure standards .Availability – Series and parallel systems Text Books 1. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. McGraw Hill. ‘Intelligent Instrumentation’.O. Ltd.3 lead and 4 lead connections thermistors .Bimetallic thermometerThermocouple . ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’. ‘Principles of Industrial Instrumentation’.Electromagnetic flowmeter .

Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.Types of valves.Design and characteristics of Control valveControl Valve selection and sizing. M. integral and derivative models.model equations for a binary distillation column.Ziegler Nichol’s tuning-Cohen Coon method -Pole placement method UNIT: III -Design of Controllers for Stable Unstable and Multivariable System Design of PI.Control of heat exchanger.Self regulation UNIT: II.Design of nonlinear controller with input multiplicities –Introduction to multivariable system-evolution of loop interaction –evolution of relative gains. gas process.Control of steam boiler drum level control and combustion.single loop and overall stability. ISBN 0134689437 4. ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’. damped oscillation method.. 1995 ISBN 8170237963 2. thermal process.Objective of modeling.Intelligent contro1 Text Books 1.Process variables. gas system.Ratio control.Elements of process control. ‘Process Control’.Inferential control-Model predictive control.Centralized controller.Case study on design of decentralized controllersPairing criteria for unstable system UNIT: IV -Complex Control Techniques and Final Control Elements Feed forward control. New Delhi.Split range control.Dynamic matrix control-model -Generalized predictive control.Cascade control.1985. 2000 ISBN 1852332085 EI 302 PROCESS CONTROL Credit: 3:1:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I. thermal system-Mathematical model of liquid process. Harriot P.Chidambaram. Tatamangalam R. mixing process.. time delay systems.Cavitation and flashing-I/P & P/I converters a K UNIT: V -Industrial Application Control of distillation column-control of top and bottom product compositions.Continuous cycling method. -Control Action and Controller Tuning Basic control action.Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs-selection of control mode for different process with control scheme-Optimum controller settings.P&I diagrams..Batch process and continuous process.Degrees of freedomCharacteristics of liquid system.ActivatorsPositioner. flow process.Averaging controlMultivariable control. Allied Published.Transfer function matrix-Method of inequalitiesDecoupling control. dead time.Internal model control.Adaptive control. PID controller for integrator.Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method.Control of chemical reactor.Chemical reactionModeling. ISBN 0070404917 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 20 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . 1998. Springer Verlog. ‘Applied Process Control’. -Introduction to Process Control Process dynamics.Control valve. proportional floating control.Characteristic of ON-OFF.

Chilton Book company. ISBN 0849398711. Third Edition. Wisle Eastern limited. Computational advantages of FFT over DFT-Decimation in time FFT algorithm-Decimation-in Frequency FFT algorithm –MATLAB exercises. CRC Press LLC. ‘Process Control System’. Noise-Classification of continuous time signals and Discrete time signals classification and properties of systems.. FIR Filter design based on windowed Fourier series. ISBN 8120306651 Reference Books 1. Curtis D. 1998. T. Eckman. ISBN 0876645295 6. phase FIR filter design using MATLAB. -IIR Digital Filter Design using MAT LAB Block diagram Representation of digital filter-Basic IIR digital filter structures. New Delhi 1999. Prentice Hall. Marlin. Liptak B. Frequency sampling method. ‘Chemical Process Control: An Introduction Theory and Practice’.E. Least square error FIR filter design using MATLAB a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 3:1:0 Marks: 40+60 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 21 . ‘Automatic Process Control’. D.G ‘Process Control’.Structure Realization Using MATLAB-Preliminary consideration in digital filter design – Bilinear Transformation. ISBN 0070404917 3. New Delhi ISBN 0-852262051 5. equiripple linear. 1995 ISBN0750622547 4. -Transforms: Z-Transform and its properties –Inverse Z-transform –Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT) and its properties-Radix 2FFT. Structure realization using MATLAB. Singapore.Digital signal processing (DSP) advantages of DSP UNIT: II. Seventh Edition. Stepanopoulos. 2. Florida.3. UNIT: III. Forth Edition. MC Graw Hill. ‘Instrumentation for Process Measurement and Control’. Prentice Hall New Delhi 2000 ISBN 8120309871 EI 303 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING UNIT: I. window based FIR filter design using MATLAB. ‘Process Control Instrumentation Technology’. Johnson. Sampling Theoram-sampling-digitizingaliasing-anti-alias filter. 1996. Norman A Anderson. Sinskey. Pennsylvania.-Introduction to DSP: Signals and their orgin. Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork. Convolution theorem-linear convolution and circular convolution Applications of filters and . -FIR Digital Filter Design Using MATLAB Basic FIR Filter Structure. UNIT: IV.P. ‘Process Control’. 2000.

John .TMS320C5X Introduction to programmable DSPS. Ramp signal generation.removal and vaporization Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering n u r a y i n U s r e v y it 22 . Triangular wave generation.UNIT: V.LED -LD .ISBN-81-203-1129-9. Text Books 1.G. Digital Signal Processors. liquid lasers . Instruction Pipelining in C5X.2001. melting and trimming of materials .fiber optic gyroscope .PIN and APD UNIT: II -Industrial Application of Optical Fibers Fiber optic sensors . current. length.Venkataramani.ISBN 0-07-047334-X References 1. voltage.measurement of pressure. TMS 320C5X Assembly language Instructions. TMS 3205X User's Manual. EI 304 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Optical Fibers and their Properties Principles of light propagation through a fiber-Different types of fibers and their properties Transmission characteristics of optical fiber-absorption losses-Scattering losses-Dispersion Optical fiber measurement . Sanjit . Texas Instruments. Square wave generation. liquid level and strain .laser heating.resonator configuration . Mitra “Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach ‘Tata McGraw Hill Edition . temperature.Polarization maintaining fibers a K UNIT: III -Laser Fundamentals Fundamental characteristics of Lasers .Ifeachor Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach .material processing .Pearson Education Asia. -DSP Processor.switching and mode locking . welding. Emmanuel C.three level and four level lasers .ISBN 0-07-044705-5 2. acceleration.Optical detectors .Interferometric method of measurement of lengthMoire fringes .Optical sources .Proakis . voltage and atmospheric effect .Digital Signal Processing Principles. Addision – Wesley 2002.ISBN 81-7808-609-3. current. B.2002.Algorithms and Applications .Q. velocity. M Bhasker. 1993. Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishing company limited .semi conductor lasers UNIT: IV -Industrial Application of Lasers Laser for measurement of distance. Architecture of TMS 320 C5X. 2. Programming using DSP Processor: Convolution using MAC and MACD Instructions.Different types of modulatorsDetectors-Application in Instrumentation .2002. solid lasers.K.properties of laserlaser modes .cavity dumping Types of lasers Gas lasers. 3.Fiber optic Instrumentation system .

translation-periodicity.GSR measurement UNIT: III.Image processing Applications . John and Harry.Grounding and isolation UNIT: II -Bio-medical monitoring Systems Blood pressure measurement . Semi Conductor Optoelectronics.Resting and action potential.Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) system -Ultrasonic imaging system . 1997 ISBN 0125839618 3. Industrial Applications of Lasers. methods. average value. Holography for non-destructive testing -Holographic components . plastic surgery. -Electro-physiological Measurements Electro Cardiograph (ECG) .Cardiac output . Monte Ross. Industrial Lasers and their Applications.Image Transforms.different types of electrodes Equivalent circuits for electrodes .Image formationsampling and quantization. brain surgery. 1968 ISBN 0124319025 EI 305 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION AND IMAGE PROCESSING UNIT: I -Introduction to Physiological System Bio-potential .Selection Criteria for Transducers and Electrodes . Optical Electronics Foundation book .Partial pressure measurements Recent instrument for blood cell count . Laser Applications.Measurement of heart rate .K.Design of low noise preamplifiers .Electrical safety . DFT. 1989 ISBN 052134089 Reference Books 1.measurement of blood flow . Electromyograph (EMG) Phonocardiograph (PCG). TMH.UNIT: V -Hologram and Medical Application Holography .Electrocculograph (EOG).Computer Tomography (CT).Medical applications of lasers.FFT algorithm-Walsh transform-Hademard transform-discrete cosine transform Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 23 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 . gynecology and oncology. rotation.heart sound .Differentia! Amplifiers Chopper amplifiers .Laser instruments for surgery. McGraw Hill.laser in biomedical UNIT: IV -Digital Image Fundamentals Elements of a digital image processing system structure of the human eye.Electro Encephalograph (EEG) -.Separability. Ghatak A.Sensors used in Medical Diagnosis .Fourier transform. Jasprit Singh.Properties of two dimensional FFT. removal of tumors of vocal cords.. laser and tissue interaction .Measurement of respiration . Electroretinogram(ERG) .Basic principle. McGraw Hill 1974 ISBN 0070844437 2.X ray machine .1995 ISBN 0070576378 2. and Thiagarajar K. Text Books 1. Academic Press. Electrodes . John F Ready. some basic relationships between pixels. McGraw Hill. Cambridge University Press. Holographic Interferometry and applications.

Asia. Pressure to current converter 4. ‘Digital Image Processing’. John G. On line control of PC based liquid level system 18. smoothing spatial filters. Study of PID flow control system 10. Gonzalez. Experiments using MATLAB SIMULINK package 15.S. Calibration of thermocouple and RTD 9. ISBN 997151270 – x a K EI 306 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:2 Marks: 50+50 1. ‘Hand book of biomedical instrumentation’. Arumuam M... ISBN 8178086298 Reference Books 1. Prentice Hall of India. Tata McGraw Hill. Experiments in flow process control training plant n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 24 . 1999. Design of data acquisition system using PCI /NI card 16. methods-Some simple Gray level Transformations. Study of PH meter 12. 2000. Study of PID level control system 11. ‘Medical Instrumentation Application and Design’.Smoothing frequency-domain filter. John Wiley & Sons.Frequency Domain Methods.Image Processing tool box in Matlab. Webstar. Khandpur R.Basics of spatial filtering. 2001. ‘Biomedical Instrumentation’. ISBN 818772112-x 3. Current to pressure converter 3. sharpening spatial filters. ISBN 8120306538. Anuradha Agencies. Richard E. Cromwell L. ISBN 007451725. ‘Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements’. Response of system to various inputs 5. Study of the characteristic of pneumatic control valve 8.Sharpening frequency domain filtersHomomorphic filtering. Design of digital control algorithms for first order system. 1996. Identification and control of air temperature control system 17. Rafeal C. Woods. Inc.Combining spatial Enhancement Methods. 2. 14.UNIT: V -Image Enhancement Spatial Domain. 2. Software simulation of PLC Ladder diagram 6. 2002. Determination of viscosity using Redwood viscometer 2. Histogram processing Enhancement using Arithmetic / Logic operations.Implementation of simple Image processing application using Matlab Text Books: 1. Pearson Education.. Pressure Gauge calibration using Dead Weight Tester 7. Simulation of first order and second order system with and without dead time 13.

Inverted Pendulum – Numerical methods – Liberalization of Differential Equation –Describing function method. Prentice Hall. ‘Systems and Control’. 2000m ISBN 0471366013 3. 2000. Godwin. Friedland. ‘Nonlinear Dynamic Systems’. Oxford University Press. New Jersey.Permanent Magnet stepper motor. ISBN 0195150112 2. ‘The Control Hand Book’. ISBN 0139586539. 2001.K. ISBN 0849385709 3. Norman S. Ogata. Prentice-Hall Publication. ‘Modern Control Engineering’. ISBN 0442304862 5. ‘Control Systems Engineering’. and Salgado. Peter Cook. Prentice Hall.Study 20. IEEE and CRC Press. ISBN 0130609072 a K Refence Books: 1. McGraw Hill.19.. Virtual Instrumentation package . Design of fuzzy logic controller using fuzzy logic toolbox EI 307 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM Credit: 3:1:0 Marks 40+60 UNIT: I -Modeling of Dynamic Systems Centrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle. USA. C.‘Stability of Nonlinear Systems’. 2. ‘Control System Design’. Levine.F.A. 1996..P. 1987. UNIT: II -Linear System Analysis Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability –Companion forms – Controller / Observer form – State feed-back control – State estimator – Full order and reduced order Estimator UNIT: III -Stability Definition of stability – Stability of linear system – Hurwitz and Routh stability criteria – Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov’s Indirect method UNIT: IV -Optimal Control Performance Indices – Calculus of variation – Linear Quadratic Regulator – Dynamic programming –Pontrgagin’s minimum principle UNIT: V -Heuristic and Evolutionary Control Systems Fuzzy systems – ANN – Genetic Algorithms – Based Controllers Text Books: 1. 2003. ‘Control System Design’. William S. John Wiley and Sons. 1991 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 25 .1980. Stanislaw Zak. Atherton D.Nice. B. ISBN 0070224412 4. Graebe.Prentice Hall.

1989 2. ‘Programmable Controllers’.PLC basic functionsRegister basics-Timer and counter functions UNIT: IV -PLC Intermediate Functions Arithmetic functions. Houpis C.M.B. ISA Publication. ‘Computer Process Control’. ISA Press. Tata Mc Graw Hill.Comparison function-SKIP and MCR function-Data move system-PLC advanced intermediate function.Design of feed forward controller. Hardware and Software. P. HughesT.EI 308 COMPUTER CONTROL OF PROCESS Credit: 3:1:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Introduction to Computer Process Control Review of sample theory-Response of sample data system to step and ramp input.Overview of PLC systems. McGraw Hill. 1985.Sample data model for continuous system bilinear transformation. Reference Books 1.. Kuo.Matrix functionsPLC advanced function. G. Mc-Graw Hill Book Co. Despande. 1989 3. Mc-Graw Hill Book Co. level process Text Books 1. ‘Programmable Logic Controllers’.PLC installation.Drive circuits.Theory. 2.Alternate programming language.Interfacing of computer with temperature flow.Analog PLC operationNetworking of PLC.Linear transformation..H.Sequencer functions.Three way traffic light problem. Steponopoulous.Pulse transfer function-Modified Ztransform. Petrezeulla.B..G.Auxiliary commands and functions.Creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions. 3. ‘Digital Control System’. ‘Chemical Process Control’.Jury’s Stability test UNIT: II -Design of Digital Controller Digital PID –Deadbeat. and Ash R. 1996..B.steady state error-Z domain equipment.Dahlin’s algorithms-Pole placement controller-Kalman’s algorithmsDesign for load changes.Annunciator problem-Trouble shooting and maintenance UNIT: V -Applications Implementation of microprocessor based position and temperature control systemsOperational features of stepper motor.Predictive controllerImplementation of control algorithm using microprocessor.Interfacing of stepper motor to computer. Lamount.Power supplies General PLC programming procedures-Programming ON-OFF outputs. 1986 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 26 ..Position and Velocity forms-Dead time compensation and smith predictor algorithm UNIT: III -Programmable Logic Controller Introduction.Utilizing digital bits.I/O Modules. 1995. ‘Digital Control Systems’ .Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC.

Study of anyone popular DCS available in market .Public key encryption.HART Communication protocol – Communication modes . Tanenbaum.Cyclic redundancy checks. Security and Integrity Data Compression – Huffman code. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. ‘Computer Networks’.General field bus architecture . UART. NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Computer Networks Common bus topology.ASCII.CRC implementation .Burst error detection. TCP/IP.Factors to be considered in selecting DCS .Basic requirements of field bus standard . Prentice-Hall of India.Runlength encoding-relative encoding-Lempel. 1986 Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 27 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it .Data Security.Operator interface .HART commands – HART field controller implementation .Command/response Token passing .Interoperability .Data encryption protection.Internetworking.Authentication using Hash-Based schemes UNIT: III -Data Network Fundamentals Network hierarchy and switching .DisplaysEngineering interface-alarms and alarm management-DCS Case study . Text Books 1.Image compression.Polynomial divisionAnalysis of CRC.RSA algorithms and digital signatures. RS422.JPEG. Michal P.Protocols and protocol architecture. UNIT: II -Data Compression. a K UNIT: V -HART and Field Bus Introduction .Introduction .Error correction.Open system with gateway configuration ..HART networks -Control system interface .Interchangeability.Media Access protocol .EI 309 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM.Asynchronous and Synchronous Communication USART.Star topology.Hamming codes.Fully connected topology.Evolution of signal standard .Open system interconnection model of OSI .HDLC .Single error correction.Combined topologies.Routers .Gateways Open system with bridge configuration .Data coding methods.Caesar Cipher Bit level ciphering.Ring topology.BISYNC . 2. RS485 – Multi-drop Communication.Serial data transmission standard – RS232.Multi-bit error correction.Bridges .HART and the OSI model – Field bus .S.Local control unit . Third Edition.Different architectures .Comparison of error detection and correction.Case studies in DCS.Standard ETHERNET and ARCNET configuration – Special requirement for networks used for control. Baudot. MPEG.Deribie bit error detection.SDLC . Morse and BCD Codes-Digital encoding schemes. UNIT: IV -Distributed Control Systems Evolution . Lucas.Data Integrating –Error parity checking analysis.CSMA/ CDMA. 1996.Encryption and decryption. ‘Distributed Control Systems’.Data link control protocol . EBCDOC. ISBN 8130311655.Field bus topology . A.

2. ‘Understanding Data Communications and Networks’. Flush Switches. 1971. Air Pressure Sensors.F. Flash System. Air Horn. Unit: II -Indicating Instrumentation Design Moving Coil Instrument Design. William A Shay. Vehicle Speed Sensor Design. TMH 2000. Chapman and Hall. ISBN 0070435034 Reference Books 1. 2 Edition. Engine Cooling Water Temperature Sensors Design. London. Horn Design. Instrument Wiring System and Electromagnetic Interference Suppression. Electronic Instruments. Ignition Lock. Speed Sensor. Moving Iron Instruments. Gear Neutral Indicator. Ammeter and voltmeter. ‘Modern Electric Equipments for Automobiles’. Toggle Switches. Windshield Wiper.A. Courtesy Lamp. A division of Thomson Learning. Traficators. Engine Oil Temperature Sensor. Non-contact Switches Text Books 1. Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Design. Wiring Circuits for Instruments. ‘HART application Guide’.W. Music Horns UNIT: IV -Dash Board Amenities Car Radio Stereo. Walter E. ‘Automotive Electric Systems’. Cole Publishing Company. Dipper Switches.Sensor for Fuel Level in Tank. ‘Data Communication and Networking’. American Technical Society. Window Washer. Limit Switches. Relay and Solenoid. Billiet and Leslie .Panel Meters.3. Balancing Coil Indicator Design. Behrooz A. Speed Warning System. Car Fan.Odometer and Taximeter Design. Permanent Magnet Horn. Pull and Push Switches. HART Communication Foundation.F. Cigar Lamp. Timepiece.Controllers. 1999. 1975. ISBN 053495954 . Chicago. Judge. Goings. Ignition Key. Oil Pressure Warning System. 2.Y nd EI 310 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION Unit: I -Automobile Panel Meters And Sensor Design Ergonomics. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 3:0:0 Marks: 40+60 y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 28 .. Design of Alphanumeric Display for Board Instruments UNIT: III -Warning And Alarm Instruments Brake Actuation Warning System. Engine Overheat Warning System. Dash Board Illumination UNIT: V -Switches And Controls Horn Switches. Air Pressure Warning System. Door Lock Indicators. Romilly Bowden. 2001.

Reliability and maintenance of LabVIEW programs Text Books 1. Sonde. ‘Transducers and Display System’. Ltd. Wells Jeffrey Travis. ISBN 013065096 2. E. New Delhi.LabVIEW environment. ‘LabVIEW for Everyone’. National Instruments Release. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.VI customization. 3. ‘LabVIEW – Applications and Solutions’.B.. National Instruments Release. MIR Publishers. Rahman. and Herbert Pichlik.Reference Books 1.F. ISBN 0130964239 2. Editing and debugging a VI in LabVIEW. ‘Electronic Measurements’. 1977. ‘Basic Metrology and Electrical Measurements’.Performing analog input and analog output.Simple problems UNIT: II -VI using LabVIEW Creating.Scanning multiple analog channels. National Instruments Release. National Instruments LabVIEW Manual Reference Books 1. 1989 EI 311 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION UNIT: I -Introduction Programming paradigms.Time frequency analysis of signals.Virtual Instrumentation.File I/O.Fourier transform analysis. London.Loops and chartsCase and sequence structures. ‘Sensors and Transducer and LabVIEW’.Designing digital filters. Moscow.Dushin. 2.LabVIEW basics. Walter.Buffered data acquisition-Simple problems UNIT: IV -LabVIEW for Advanced Systems Bio-bench control and simulation using LabVIEW. Lisa K. W. ISBN 0130811556 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit: 3:0:1 Marks: 40+60 y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 29 ..Organization of the DAQ VI System.S. Macmillan Press Ltd.Commercial communication applications.Integrated design Environment for dynamic systems.Quality.LabVIEW based fuzzy logic and genetic algorithms UNIT: V -LabVIEW and Automation Technology Mathematics and simulation in LabVIEW..Driving the digital I/Os.Creating a sub VI..Simple problems UNIT: III -Data acquisition and control in VI Plug-in DAQ boards.Definition to Virtual Instrumentation (VI)– LabVIEW software.

Buhr. New Jersey. Asia. Narayan S. Typical application scenario of embedded systems UNIT: II -Interface Issues Related to Embedded Systems A/D. PTR Prentice Hall. Language and Operating Systems Event based. ‘An Introduction to Real Time Systems’. ‘Microprocessor based Design. ISBN 0792398947 2. UNIT: V -Case Studies Discussion of specific examples of complete embedded systems using MC 68 HC11. ‘Real Time Systems’. M. Vahid. Intel 8051. Raymond J. Ball S. ISBN 007057043.B. Academic Press. timers. Slater..M. PIC series of micro controller. ASIC. Reference Books 1.Krishna. Pearson Education. ISBN 0122748808 3. 1997. clocking communication and synchronization. Classifications and brief overview of micro-controllers microprocessors and DSPs. Santa Clara. Bailey. ‘Embedded Microprocessor Systems’..Real time languages Real time kernel.R.. Gajski. ‘Real Time systems . Ganssle J.J. Prentice Hall. OS tasks. D/A converters. 1994. process based and graph based models. 6.A. 2001.Real World Design. A Comprehensive guide to effective Hardware Design’. ISBN 0136060706. actuators. ISBN 00704923 5. 2. Prentice Hall. Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 30 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . 4. 1991. 1999. task states. interrupt processing... F. memory requirements and control. ISBN 0750675349. ‘Design with PIC Micro Controllers’. Embedded processor architectural definitions. ADSP2181. Kang G. C. Prentice Hall International.EI 312 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -System Design Definitions.. Kluwer Academic. Java based embedded system design. Peatman. kernel services. 1996.Programming using Macro assemblers Text Books 1. UNIT: IV -Real time Models. High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system. D. FPGA. 1989. task scheduling. ISBN 0131507311. 3. McGrawHilF. 1992.D. ‘Art of Programming Embedded Systems’. ‘Specification and Design of Embedded Systems’. control blocks. ISBN 0135822483. Shin. Simulation and Emulation of embedded systems.Design for Distributed Embedded Applications’. Herma K. Intel Manual on 16-bit Embedded Controllers. 1997. diagnostic port UNIT: III -Techniques for embedded Systems State Machine and state Tables in embedded design. Petrinet models . Donald L.

Simple programs involving timers and counters 2. FFT Implementation in TMS Processor a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 31 . Factorial. Signal generation using TMS320 3. Sorting Motorola Micro Controller Programming 1. subtraction. ADC interface using 8051 Interfacing 1. Code Conversion: BCD to Binary. 2. Design of Digital filter using DSP tool box 2. Speed control of DC motor using microcontrollers. Simple programmes for basic arithmetic operations: Addition. BCD to seven segment code. Stepper motor interface using 8051 2. Multiplication and division. Digital Signal Processing 1. Square root of a number. DAC interface using 8085 3. Study of interrupt structures of Atmel 8051 and Motorola MC 68 HC 11 3. Convolution Algorithm Implementation in TMS Processor 4. 4.EI 313 EMBEDDED SYSTEM LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:2 Marks: 50+50 Atmal 8051 Programming using Keil C 1. Binary to Hexadecimal 3. Binary to BCD. Traffic light Interface using 8051.

local and global variables. DMA. block diagram and architecture of a virtual instrument.ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code No EI223 EI224 EI225 EI226 EI227 EI228 EI229 EI230 EI231 EI232 EI233 EI314 EI315 EI316 EI317 EI318 EI319 EI320 EI321 EI322 Subject Name Virtual Instrumentation Neural Networks And Fuzzy Logic Control Instrumentation And Control In Petrochemical Industries Instrumentation And Control In Paper Industries Instrumentation In Iron And Steel Industries Instrumentation For Pollution Control Ultrasonic Instrumentation Telemetry And Telecontrol Aircraft Instrumentation Robotics and Automation Digital Control Lab Process Control Biomedical Instrumentation Advanced Control System Distributed Control System. data-flow techniques. graphical programming in data flow. clusters and graphs. case and sequence structures. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 158 . interrupts. timing. PC Hardware structure. DIO. DAC. advantages. software and hardware installation. a K UNIT – II VI programming techniques: VIS and sub-VIS. counters & timers. loops and charts. arrays. formula nodes. comparison with Conventional programming. Networks and Protocols System Identification And Adaptive Control Optimal Control Systems Robotics And Automation Digital Image Processing Techniques Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory Credit 3:0:1 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 EI223 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 3:0:1 UNIT –I Review of virtual Instrumentation: Historical perspective. string and file I/O UNIT –III Data acquisition basics: ADC.

image acquisition and processing. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 159 . 1997. Newyork. 2. References 1. McGraw Hill. design of fuzzy logic controllers. EI224 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT – I Introduction to neural networks. Articulation Control) UNIT – III Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets. UNIT – V Use of analysis tools: Fourier transforms. optimizing the membership functions and the rule base of fuzzy logic controllers using neural networks. fuzzy conditional statements.SCXI. Hopfield’s networks.. Labview for everyone. Motion control. UNIT – II Neural networks for control systems: Schemes of neuro-control. Basic concepts of Labview 4. windowing & filtering. case studies(Inverted Pendulum. Sokoloff. Second edition. VISA and IVI. System buses. wells & Jeffrey Travis. New Jersey. defuzzification interface. back propagation algorithm. Rosenblott’s perceptrons. RS 232C/ RS485. interface buses: USB. identification and control of dynamical systems . fuzzy learning algorithms. Textbooks 1. fuzzification interface. VXI. Articulation Control) UNIT – V Neuro-fuzzy and fuzzy-neural control systems: Adaptive fuzzy systems . 1997. etc. multi layer perceptrons. case studies(Inverted Pendulum. PXI. adaptive resonance theory. Prentice Hall. Labview Graphical Programming . power spectrum. New Jersey. decision making logic. networking basics for office & Industrial applications. Prentice Hall. GPIB. Kohnen’s self organizing maps. fuzzy transfer functions in neural networks. fuzzy relations. Gary Johnson. correlation methods. knowledge/rule base. Lisa K.UNIT –IV Common instrument interfaces: Current loop. fuzzy rules. VI applications in various fields. different architectures of neural networks. a K UNIT – IV Fuzzy logic for control systems : Fuzzy logic controllers. PCMCIA. 1998.

steam heaters. EI225 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT – I Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: Distillation equipment.. ISBN–0–7506–2254-7 2. UNIT – III Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: Variables and degrees of freedom .conductivity. Fourth edition. vapour distillate and inserts. ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’. cascade and feed forward controls.Ross. 1993. McGraw Hill. Singapore. control of feed in reboiler and reflux. Instrumentation and control in dryers: Batch dryers and continuous dryers.1995. use of cascade and feed forward control UNIT – IV Instrumentation and control in evaporators: Types of evaporators. Process Measurement and Analysis. ISBN-0-07-012445-0 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it 160 . variables and degrees of freedom. Pennsylvania. New Delhi . Third edition . 1991.. measurement and control of column pressure.Van Nortland Reinhold. UNIT – II Instrumentation and control in chemical reactors: Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors. B. reboilers and vaporisers. Pennsylvania. 1995. Third edition . density. Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems : A Dynamical Approach to Machine Intelligence. 1997 – ISBN-0-07-144711-X References` 1.1997. Liptak B. measurement and control of absolute pressure. ISBN-07506-2255-5 Reference 1. precipitation and biological control.M.Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications. Considine D. 1995. UNIT – V Instrumentation and control in effluent and water treatment: Chemical oxidation. Text Books 1. Chilton Book Company. ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’.Text Books 1. Process Control . Zurada.D. chemical reduction. differential pressure and flow. G. 3. Chilton Book Company. Kosko. Jaico Publication House. Neural Computing Theory & Practice . neutralization. 2. Wasserman P. J. Jacek M. liquid distillate. condensers. liquid to liquid heat exchangers. Liptak B. G. Prentice Hall.

flow weight. thickness and shape. Sand casting old control. raw steel making . Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 161 . blast furnaces . a K UNIT – II Casting of steel: Primary rolling . UNIT – IV Control and systems: Blast furnace stove combustion control system. stoves. iron making. electric furnace. UNIT – III Instrumentation: Measurement of level. Unit II Measurements of basic weight – density – specific gravity – flow – level of liquids and solids – pressure – temperature – consistency – moisture – pH – oxidation – reduction potential – graphic displays and alarms Unit III Blow tank controls – digester liquor feedpump controls – brown stock wacher level control – stock chest level control – basic weight control – dry temperature control Unit IV Dissolving tank density control – white liquor classifier density control – white liquor flow control – condensate conductivity control Unit V Computer applications in pulping process control. cold rolling and finishing. pressure. graphic displays and alarms. temperature. basic oxygen furnace.EI226 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit I Raw materials-pulping process – chemical recovery process – paper making process – converting. Karunya Notes EI227 INSTRUMENTATION IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT – I Flow diagram and description of the processes: Raw materials preparation. liquid level control and input stock control Text Book 1. gas and water controls in BOF furnace . density.

New Delhi. Arceilala. UNIT – II : Air Pollution Monitoring Air Pollutants. 1993 – ISBN-0-07-012445-0 EI228 INSTRUMENTATION FOR POLLUTION CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT – I : Environmental Monitoring Classification.water pollution monitoring instruments.basics of monitoring technologies like conductimetry. Khanna Publishers. Soli J.N. ambient environmental monitoring –source monitoring –implant environment monitoring-personal monitoring.ISBN-0-07-457871-2 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 162 . “Air Pollution”. UNIT – III : Water Pollution Monitoring Water pollutants –basic techniques –spectrometric methods. annealing process control Computer (center utilities dispatch computer). M. McGraw Hill. London. Reference Books 1.coulemetry – pizeo eletric oscillations methods-paper tape method. Text Books 1. Introduction to Modern Steel Making.M.Rao.emission spectrograph. 1995 2.H. Tata McGraw Hill. a K UNIT – IV : Noise pollution monitoring Noise pollution and its measurement UNIT – V : Industrial pollutants and its monitoring Monitoring Instruments of industrial pollution. HVN Rao. Considine D. ISBN-0-07-463002-4 2. Singapore. Instrument Engineers Handbook. Tupkary R.atomic absorption spectra photometry. 1986 . Tupkary R. “Waste Water Treatment for Pollution Control”. 1989 – IV Edition. Introduction to Modern Iron Making . Fourth edition. CRC press. Tata McGraw Hill. volume 2. G. Third edition. Khanna Publishers. rolling mill control. Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook. 1998.optical method-air pollution monitoring instruments.UNIT – V Computer applications: Model calculation and logging. Liptak B.II Edition 2.. Text Books 1. 2000. Process Control. New Delhi.H.

163 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . UNIT – V Ultrasonic applications: Ultrasonic applications in medical diagnosis and therapy. UNIT – II Generation of ultrasonic waves: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects. ISBN-817556-186-6. B. Text Book 1..electrical. EI229 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT – I Ultrasonic waves: Principles and propagation of various waves. pneumatic. 2 nd edition Wiley Interscience Inc. 1998. 1972. “Noise Pollution & Its Control”. resonance. Reference Book 1. functional blocks of telemetry and tele control system methods of telemetry. search unit types. 2000.L. variables affecting ultrasonic testing in various applications.. UNIT – III Ultrasonic test methods: Pulse echo. intensity and attenuation of sound beam. and Atkinson A. ISBN – 81-7008-091-6 4. hydraulic and optical telemetry-state of the art-telemetry standards. “Waste Water Engineering”. acoustical holography. characterization of ultrasonic transmission. medium parameters. UNIT – IV Ultrasonic measurement: Ultrasonic method of measuring thickness. depth and flow. Punmia.P. principle. Power level. : “Air pollution”. Ashok Jain. construction and characteristics.A. V. Laxmi Publication. reflection and transmission coefficients.3. transit time. Karunya Notes a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks: 40+60 y it EI230 TELEMETRY AND TELECONTROL Marks: 40+60 Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT I : Telemetry Fundamentals Classification: Fundamental concepts: significance. New York. direct contact and immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection. Pragari Prakasan.. Kuderia.C. Faith W.

panels. tele control apparatus-remote adjustment. Pallett.digital coding methods advantages of PCM. UNIT III : Radio Telemetry Block diagram of a radio telemetry system transmitting and receiving techniquesAM. UNIT. aircraft magnetism.PPM.FM.PWM.PM multiplexing -transmitting and receiving techniques. : " Aircraft Instruments -Principles and applications". cock.Compass errors gyro magnetic compass.example of a tele control system. Text Book 1. Pitman and sons. Text Books 1.accelerometer.current systems-voltage systems synchro systems-frequency systemsposition and pulse systems-example of a landline telemetry system.V : Power Plant Instruments Fuel flow -Fuel quantity measurement.J . UNIT-IV: Aircraft Computer Systems Terrestrial magnetism.optical detectorstrends in fibre optic device development-example of an optical telemetry system. exhaust gas temperature measurement and pressure measurement.FSK-Delta modulation coding and decoding equipment example of a radio telemetry system. 1981.. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 164 . Karunya Notes EI231 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT I: Introduction Classification of aircraft ~instrumentation -instrument displays.pit layout. E. Guidance and regulation Tele control using information theory. UNIT-III: Gyroscopic Instruments Gyroscopic theory -directional gyro indicator artificial horizon -turn and slip indicator. UNIT IV : Optical Telemetry Optical fibres for signal transmission -sources for fiber optic transmission . UNIT-ll: Flight Instrumentation Static & pitot pressure source -altimeter -airspeed indicator -machmeter -maximum safe speed indicator. Direct reading magnetic components.B.UNIT II : Landline Telemetry Electrical telemetry'. UNIT V : Telecontrol Methods Analog and digital techniques in tele control.

1986. Chemical plants-Industrial Automation-Typical EGS of automated industries. Thermal. ISBN-0-07-100534-X 2. 1980.Elements of process control.Degrees of freedomModeling of liquid process.EI232 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT-I Robots introduction -Basic components.-Classification—Characteristics-Drives & Control systems –Actuators-Control loop UNIT-II Transducers & Sensors-Tactile sensors-Proximity & Range sensors-Image Processing & Analysis-Image Data reduction-Feature extraction-Object Recognition UNIT-III End effects – Types-Mechanical Grippers-Vacuum Cups-Magnetic Grippers-Robot/End effector Interface-Software for industrial robots positive stop PGM. thermal process. “Industrial Robots – Technology Programming & Applications” McGraw Hill Ltd. flow process. CP UNIT-IV Robot motion analysis–Kinematics-Homogenous Transformations-Robot Dynamics Configuration of Robot controller UNIT-V Industrial Robots –welding painting-Assembly-Remote Controlled Robots for Nuclear. Mikell P. gas process.. PTP. mixing processChemical reaction-Modeling Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 165 . Oran Koren.Process variables. ISBN-0-07-100442-4 Credit : 0:0:2 a K Credit : 3:1:0 n u r EI233 DIGITAL CONTROL LABORATORY Marks: 50+50 a y i n U s r e v y it 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI314 PROCESS CONTROL Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Introduction to Process Control Process dynamics. Text Books 1. “Robotics for Engineers”. Groover etal. McGraw Hill.

Marlin.E. T. New Delhi.Cascade control. Wiley Eastern Limited. Seventh Edition. New Delhi. D..model equations for a binary distillation columnTransfer function matrix-Method of inequalities. 1996 ISBN 0876645295 5.Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs-selection of control mode for different process with control scheme-Optimum controller settings. Prentice Hall. New Delhi 1999 ISBN 8120306651 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 166 .Split range control.Continuous cycling method. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. PID controller for integrator.single loop and overall stability. ‘Process control’. dead time. 1998 ISBN 0849398711 2. Automatic Process Control. Forth Edition. Process Control System. damped oscillation method. Curtis D.Adaptive control. Sinskey. Eckman.Averaging control. Process Control.Internal model control. Allied Publishers. integral and derivative models. ‘Chemical Process Control: An Introduction Theory and Practice’. Harriot P.Inferential control-Model predictive control.Centralized controller UNIT: V -Complex control techniques Feed forward control.Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method. Singapore.Ziegler Nichol’s tuning-Cohen Coon method -Pole placement method UNIT: III -Design of Controllers for Nonlinear Systems Design of PI. Stepanopoulos. Prentice Hall.Ratio control.UNIT: II. M. proportional floating control.Dynamic matrix control-model -Generalized predictive control Text Books 1. Process Control Instrumentation Technology. time delay systems. McGraw Hill.. 1998 ISBN 8170237963 Reference Books 1. 2000 ISBN 8120309871 6. 1995 ISBN 8170237963 2. -Control Action and Controller Tuning Basic control action. Johnson. CRC Press LLC. 2000 ISBN 0070404917 3.Decoupling control. Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork. Norman A Anderson. Florida. New Delhi ISBN 0852262051 4.P. Instrumentation for process measurement and control.Chidambaram.Design of nonlinear controller with input multiplicities UNIT: IV -Design of Controllers for Multivariable Systems Introduction to multivariable system-evolution of loop interaction –evolution of relative gains. ‘Applied Process Control’.Characteristic of ON-OFF.

Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements.Physiology of eye– ElectroRetinogram(ERG). Tata McGraw Hill.Centralized patent monitoring system Text Books 1 Khandpur R. Inc.Oxygen saturation of blood. Introduction to Biomedical equipment Technology.Measurement of Respiration.Cardiac output.Heart sound. Anuradha Agencies.Equivalent circuits for electrodes – Types of electrodes. 2000 ISBN 0074517252 2 M.Electromyography (EMG) UNIT: III .Phonocardiograph (PCG)Physiology of brain.Computer Tomography (CT). Hand book of Biomedical Instrumentation. Arumugam.Biochemical electrodes. Medical Instrumentation Application and Design.Ultrasonic imaging system – Computer in medicine UNIT: V –Therapeutic Instruments Defibrillator Principle. Webstar.Blood cell counters UNIT: IV –Bio Imaging X ray machine . Pearson Education Inc.Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) system . a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 167 . John Wiley & Sons.EI315 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Introduction to Physiological System Cell and its structure.Design of low noise preamplifiers – Isolation Amplifier.S.Electrode theory. John G. IV edition ISBN-81-7808-327-2. – Heart.Electrical hazards and safety in hospital UNIT: II .Resting and Action Potential.Chopper Amplifiers . 2001. 1999...Lung volumeMeasurement of Heart rate.Microprocessor based ventilator .Defibrillator circuit. Prentice Hall of India. ISBN 997151270-X.Applications of laser medicine . 2001 ISBN 818772112-X Reference Books 1. 2000 ISBN 8120306538 2.Electro Cardiograph (ECG) .Lung monitoring Systems Measurement of Blood flow. Biomedical Instrumentation.Demand pacemaker.Electro-physiological Measurements Physiology of heart.Kidney machine . Leslie Cromwell L. 3 Joseph Carr.Electro Encephalography (EEG).

IEEE and CRC Press..State space representation of systemCentrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle. Godwin. 2003 ISBN 0195150112 2. Gopal M.Predictor Corrector method. 1996 ISBN 0849385709 3.Phase plane.Isoclines. William S.F. ISBN 0070483027 Reference Books 1. C. Tata McGraw Hill Pub. Systems and Control.Runge Kutta method.Mathematical modeling.Hurwitz and Routh stability criteria UNIT: V –Stability of Nonlinear System Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems. 2001 ISBN 0130609072 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 168 . Prentice Hall.Combined controller estimator compensator UNIT: IV –Stability of Linear System Definition of stability – Stability of linear system – Asymptotically Stable System. Ogata. Modern Control Engineering . New Jersey.Lyapunov function for nonlinear system.Inverted Pendulum UNIT: II –Analysis of Mathematical models State space method. Control Systems Engineering.Euler’s method. Graebe. Norman S. ‘Digital Control and State Variable Methods’.. Levine. Prentice-Hall Publication.Permanent Magnet stepper motor. John Wiley and Sons. Oxford University Press. Control system design.K. and Salgado.Numerical methods. 2003. The Control hand book. USA. Nice. 2001 ISBN 0139586539 2.Principle of Linearization of Differential Equation –Describing function method for nonlinear system UNIT: III -Linear System Analysis Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability –Companion forms– Controller / Observer form – State feed-back control – State estimator – Full order and reduced order Estimator.Lyapunov function.EI316 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM Credit : 3:1:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Modeling of Dynamic Systems Definition of System. 2000 ISBN 0471366013 4.Taylor Series. Stanislaw Zak..Stability analysis by describing function method Text Books 1.

Operator interface .DisplaysEngineering interface-alarms and alarm management-DCS Case study .Media Access protocol . Data Communication and Networking.BISYNC .Case studies in DCS.Different architectures . UNIT: IV -Data Network Fundamentals Network hierarchy and switching .Bridges .General field bus architecture .HDLC .Fully connected topology. 2 nd Edition. TCP/IP.Gateways Open system with bridge configuration .Interchangeability.Open system interconnection model of OSI . William A Shay. Cole Publishing Company.Data link control protocol . A division of Thomson Learning. Prentice-Hall of India. Understanding Data Communications and networks.HART Communication protocol – Communication modes . Tanenbaum.CSMA/ CDMA.Combined topologiesUNIT: II –Protocol and Architecture Serial data transmission standard – RS232.EI317 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM.Command/response Token passing . A.Basic requirements of field bus standard .Field Bus UNIT: III -HART and Field Bus Introduction .Interoperability .HART networks -Control system interface .Open system with gateway configuration . UNIT: V -Distributed Control Systems Evolution . Tata McGraw Hill.HART and the OSI model – Field bus .Introduction .Internetworking.Ring topology. 2000 ISNB 0070435034 Reference Books 1.Local control unit . Third Edition.Factors to be considered in selecting DCS . 2001 ISBN 053495054-X a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 169 . RS485 – CAN.Star topology.S. Text Books 1.Evolution of signal standard .Study of anyone popular DCS available in market .Field bus topology .HART commands – HART field controller implementation . Computer Networks.Standard ETHERNET and ARCNET configuration – Special requirement for networks used for control. NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT: I -Computer Networks Common bus topology. 2001 ISBN 8130311655 2. RS422.HART. Behrooz A F.Routers .SDLC .

Wellstead P.. Unit: IV -MRAS and STC Approaches .The Gradient approach .Liapunov functions .Control policies . John Wiley and Sons. Isermann R.State Regulator.E.Use of Simulation st nd packages . Narosa Publishing House. Credit : 4:0:0 a K Unit: I –Calculus of Variation Functions and Functional. Reference Books 1.Auto tuning . Vol.B.Pontryagin‘s minimum principle n u r EI319 OPTIMAL CONTROL SYSTEMS Marks: 40+60 a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 170 .Control configuration Unit: III –LQR Design Algebraic Riccati Equation (ARE).Uses .Definitions .RLS algorithm . 1991. I and II.output regulator.Runge-Kutta method -Z-transform method . 2 order systems with and without dead time.Euler Lagrange equation Unit: II –Optimal Control Introduction Statement of optimal control problem -performance indices. Unit: V -Issues in Adaptive control and Applications Stability-Convergence-Robustness-Application of adaptive control.Maxima and minima of function.Modified recursive least squares techniques .Maximum likelihood .On line methods .Signal modeling Discretisation techniques. andZarrop M.Instrumental variable Stochastic approximation techniques. Unit: II -MIMO System Identification Techniques Off line .EI318 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit: I -Modeling and Simulation of Processes Impulse response .Discrete Algebraic Riccati Equation.pole placement control . Self tuning systems.Predictive control.Frequency response .Types of adaptive control.Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR). Unit: II -Classification of Adaptive control Introduction .Passivity theory .Recursive least squares .. Digital Control Systems.Fixed memory .Minimum variance control .Simulation of 1 order.Step response methods .Variation of functionalExtremal of functional. Reprint 1993. 2.Solving ARE using the Eigen vector method.

Unit: III -Manipulators. Wiley Eastern Limited.computational procedure for solving optimal control problem Dynamic programming application to discrete and continuous system. Weiss M. knowledge representation . acoustic. S.Unit: IV -Dynamic Programming Numerical techniques for optimal control Principle of optimality .Technology. 1986.Hill climbing techniques . 1992. McGraw Hill. pneumatic and electric drives .machine vision . actuators and grippers Construction of manipulators -Manipulator dynamics. fibre-optic and tactile sensors.Numerical techniques for optimal control. 2003 ISBN 0195150112 2.Various generations of robots Degrees of freedom Unit: II -Power sources and sensors Hydraulic. Odrey N.End effectors .Various type of grippers -Design considerations.Ranging. Stanislaw Zak. Rao. 1992.Scope of AI. Groover M. Ogata. magnetic. Optimization theory and applications. New Delhi. Reference Books 1. Wiley Eastern. AI & Expert systems Homogeneous Coordinator . laser.Terminal time weighing problem Reference Books 1. 3.N. Modern Control Engineering.G. Systems and Control. ISBN-0-87692-147 EI320 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credit : 4:0:0 Unit: I -Basic concepts Definition and origin of robotics -Different types of robots . Prentice Hall of India.Output weighed linear control. New Delhi. ISBN-0-07-100442-4 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 171 . Oxford University Press. Nagel R. New Delhi. Jacobian's work envelope .Hill climbing .robot programming languages. Modern control System Theory. M..P. Programming and Applications’.S.penalty function methods Unit: V –Matlab Examples for optimal control problems Infinite time Linear Optimal Regulator design. a K Unit: IV -Kinematics. K.Path determination .Optimum control of tracking system.Determination of HP of motor and gearing ratio Variable speed arrangement . force control and stability . 1992. 'Industrial Robotics .gradient . Unit: V -Case Studies Robots in Automotive industries and manufacturing industries. Gopal.Electronic and pneumatic manipulator control circuits .Solution of inverse kinematics problem – Multiple solutions.Simplex method . ISBN-81-224-0503-7 4.

TBH Publishers. ISBN – 81203 23793 9. 3.E.Visual Perception-Image sensing and Acquisition-Image sampling and Quantization-Imaging Geometry. 1985. 1994. 'Robotics for Engineers'.An introduction'. John Wiley & Sons. 5. 6. Fairhust M. TBH Publishers.. Syntactic Recognition of Strings. Statistical Moments-Regional Descriptors: Topological Descriptors-Texture: Statistical. Design and Applications’. 'Robotics Engineering’. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co. I edition ISBN-020-152539-9. New York. ‘Introduction to Robotics’. USA. UNIT: II – Image Enhancement in Spatial and Frequency Domain Basic Gray Level Transformations-Histogram Processing-Arithmetic and Logic OperationsSmoothing Spatial filters.Basic relationships between pixels. Asada H. 'Robot analysis & control’. 1988. Mithal. Fourier Descriptors. London. Nikku. Syntactic Recognition of Trees.Sharpening Spatial filters-Introduction to Frequency and the Frequency Domain-Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters-Sharpening Frequency filters UNIT: III –Image Morphology and Segmentation Dilation and Erosion-Opening and Closing-Hit-or-Miss Transformation-Basic Morphological Algorithms-Detection of Discontinuities-Edge linking and Boundary detection-ThresholdingRegion based Segmentation-Use of Motion in Segmentation. 2000. McGraw Hill Book Co.. Craig..C. Koren Y. 'Robot Technology -Theory. John J. ‘Robotics and Control’. & Slotine JJ. Klafter.. Prentice Hall. Mechanics and Control’. Prentice Hall. 1999. 1986.C. Prentice Hall. 'Computer Vision for Robotic systems . McDonald A. ISBN – 0070482934 EI321 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES Credit : 4:0:0 UNIT: I –Digital Image Fundamentals Fundamental steps in Digital Image processing-Components of an Image Processing Systems-Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum-Examples of fields that use Digital Image Processing. a K UNIT: IV –Image Representation and Description Representation Approaches-Boundary Descriptors: Shape Numbers. 8. Structural and Spectral Approaches-Relational Descriptors UNIT: V –Object Recognition Patterns and Pattern Classes-Matching-Recognition based on Decision-Theoretic Methods: Optimum Statistical Classifiers-Structural Methods: Matching Shape Numbers. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 172 . 4. String Matching.2. New Jersey. 1986. 2003. 'Introduction to Robotics. ISBN-0-07100534-X 7.

. Pearson Education Asia 2002.Woods “Digital Image Processing” Second Edition. ISBN-9-814-12620-9 EI322 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credit : 0:0:2 12 experiments will be notified by HOD from time to time a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks: 50+50 y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 173 . Pratt. ISBN-81-7808-087-7 2. 2002. W. New York. John Wiley & Sons. Richard E.K “Digital Image Processing. 3rd ed.Reference Books 1. Rafael C. Gonzalez.

EI234 EI235 EI236 EI237 EI238 EI239 EI240 EI241 EI242 EI243 EI323 EI324 EI325 EI326 Subject Name Measurement Systems Signal Conditioning Circuits Logic & Distributed control systems Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Electronic Circuits Analytical Instrumentation Networks & Protocols for Instrumentation & Control Data structures & Algorithms Optical Instrumentation Signals & Systems laboratory Distributed Control System and Networks Advanced Digital Process Control Transducer Engineering Artificial Intelligence and AI Programming Credit 3:1:0 3:1:0 40:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 EI234 MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Unit.ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code No.KVA meters . Unit-II : Measurement of RLC Whetstone. Power and Energy Principles of operation of permanent magnet moving coil.Q meter Potential transformer & current transformers . Anderson and Schering bridges .Digital method of measuring displacement & velocity .powermeter .Review of signal sources -signal generator . Kelvin.I : Measurement of Voltage. moving iron.wave analyzer .energy meter . dynamometer calibration of voltmeters and ammeters . Unit -IV : Digital Measurement Digital displacement transducers. Current.Power measurement by three ammeter and three voltmeter method .Megger.Power factor meter .phase difference. increment & absolute .induction type wattmeter .digital methods of measurement of frequency . Hay.calibration of energy meter & wattmeter.harmonic distortion analyzer .Digital alpha numeric display . a K Unit-III : Electronic Analog Meter DC and AC voltmeters .multimeters vector impedance meter . Unit-V : CRO & Recorders Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40 + 60 .differential voltmeters .AC current measurements . Wien. Maxwell.spectrum analyzer correlator.

England.First order second order transformations . multiplier and divider. Text Book 1.. and Widdis.W.IC741 opamp. TMH. integrator. E. differentiator..U-V recorders . 1986.Low pass. 1963. G. UNIT . 1982.II : Operational amplifier applications Scale changer. K. Pitman. A.X-Y plotters . High pass. logarithmic converter. Reference Books 1.. comparators-applications. EI235 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Unit-I : Operational Amplifier: Introduction Ideal OP AMP. UNIT – IV Voltage Regulators and Multipliers: Series OP..Filters . 1998.AMP regulator . F. "Electronic Instrumentation " TMH.time based and sweep trigger circuits synchronisation .clipper and clamper sample and hold circuit. Unit.sampling oscilloscope digital storage oscilloscope . 1969.IC voltage regulators . 1988.state variable filter . op-amp internal circuit.AC characteristics. Cidwell. Golding. " Digital Instrumentation". Differential Amplifier .Isolation amplifiers .. 2. Ernest O.vertical & horizontal amplifiers delay line ..555 Timers.. Instrumentation Amplifier. Sawhney. V to I converter .723 general-purpose regulator Multiplying DC voltage . G.General purpose oscilloscope . Subtractor. "Course in Electrical & Electronics Measurement & Instrumentation".use of operational amplifier with capacitive displacement transducers.A.phase angle detection .precision rectifiers. Bouwens.CRT screen characteristics .digital recording.frequency doubling .switched capacitor filters. McGraw Hill.A.: “ Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments”. inverter and non -inverter. UNIT –V :PLL:e Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40 + 60 .C.typical measurements using CRO ..Passive and Active filters . Dhanpat Rai & Sons.C. : “ Electrical Instruments and Measurements”. W. " Transducers is digital systems".. 2. Adder. 1990.DC characteristics.IIIAmplifiers and Filters: Buffer Amplifier. Doeblin “Measurement Systems – Application & Design” McGraw – Hill Publishing company. 3. 4.AM modulation/demodulation SSB modulation/demodulation . Band pass and Band reject filter .Three amplifiers configuration .frequency shifting. Kalsi.Instrumentation amplifiers .J. I to V converter . Woolvert.moving coil recorders . Peter peregrinvs Ltd.Monostable & Astable operation.charge amplifiers . 3.

EI236 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Unit-I : Review of Computers in Process Control Data loggers: Data acquisition systems (DAS): alarms. 1986.. Coughlin and Driscol. Auxiliary commands and functions . Unit-IV : Introduction to (DCS) Evolution of DCS . " Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuit".operator stations . Prentice Hall of India Pvt. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40 + 60 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Wiley Eastern Ltd. " Operational Amplifiers and Linear Integrated Circuit".register basics . 1991 Reference Books: 1.controlling a robot .creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions.. 2.redundancy concepts.. Text Books: 1. Ltd. McGraw Hill.PHI III Edition. computer control hierarchy levels. Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain.counter functions..programming on-off outputs.Basic principles -phase detector and comparator: analog and digital . 2.Input/ Output modules .PLC installation . Denton J.. William David Cooper and Albert D. Characteristics of digital data. derivative and composite controller modes. " Linear Integrated Circuits".Low pass filter .. error.FM detection -FSK demodulation.sequencer functions PLC Advanced functions: alternate-programming languages .timer functions .AM detection .utilizing digital bits .overview of PLC systems . PLC Advanced intermediate functions.operation. Unit-II : Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Basics Definition.monolithic PLL .voltage controlled oscillator . Supervisory digital control (SCADA).design of inter locks and alarms using PLC. Digital Controller modes. Direct Digital control (DDC). PLC basic functions . Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd. General PLC programming procedures .data move systems.. PLC-PID functions .detailed descriptions and functions of field control units .. proportional.Power supplies –ISO slots. 3. 1992. Controller software. Linearization.data highways . Helfrick.processes with PLC . 1989. a K Unit-III : PLC Intermediate Functions Arithmetic functions .applications of PLL: frequency multiplication division .trouble shooting and maintenance .ISBN-81203-0807-7.frequency translation .: " Electronics Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques".skip and MCR functions .. Dailey. Op amps & Linear Integrated Circuits.Ramkant Gaykwad.building blocks .number comparison functions .

3. Moore. “ Programmable logic controllers”. ISA Press 1994. M. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. ISA Press 1995.supervisory computer tasks and configuration . Communication in DCS.: “ Programmable logic controllers principles and applications”. APPLICATIONS: Multiplexed seven segment LED display systems – Waveform generators – Stepper motor control – Measurement of frequency. Lukcas . 4. Hughes. 2. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40 + 60 Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Deshpande..Unit-V: Implementation of DCS DCS .: “ Elements of process control applications” . 1995. Reference Books: 1. A. : “ Digital control devices” . Krishna Kant.B. D. ISA Press..P. 1997.R. Prentice Hall India. Ronald Reis.H. Prentice hall Inc. Mckloni. ISA Press 1994. New Jersey. John Webb.DCS. a K Unit – IV INTERRUPTS AND DMA: Interrupt feature – Need for Interrupts – Characteristics of Interrupts – Interrupt structure – Methods of servicing Interrupts – Development of Interrupt service subroutines – Multiple Interrupt requests and their handling – Need for direct memory access – Devices for Handling DMA – Typical DMA Controller features. 2. 1986. New York .: “ Distributed control systems”.ALU. Text Books: 1.1986.. Case studies in DCS. and Ash . Unit – III I/O INTERFACING: Memory mapped I/O scheme – I/O mapped I/O scheme – Input and Output cycles _ Simple I/O ports – Programmable peripheral interface(8255). Data transfer schemes – Interfacing simple keyboards and LED displays. T.: “Real time control networks” . phase angle and power factor – Interfacing ADC0801 A/D Converter –DAC 0800 D/As Converters. 1.. 3/e. Unit – II PROGRAMMING OF 8085: Instruction formats – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Need for assembly language programmes.: “ Computer based industrial control”.T.. EI237 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS Credit: 4: 0: 0 Unit – I Architecture of 8085 Microprocessor : Functional Block Diagram – Registers. P.system integration with PLC and computers...Bus systems – Timing and control signals Machine cycles and timing diagrams. W. 5..

Applications.Applications – Nonlinear wave Shaping – Clipping and clamping circuits.Differntiator.New Delhi.Ripple factor and regulation.Conversion efficienciesDivision of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . Microcontroller Hand Book.INTEL. Ramesh S..IIT.fourth edition. features – Interfacing of 8051 – Typical applications – MCS 51 family features 8031/8051/8751 Text Books 1.McGraw Hill Inc. 2. Attenuator – Introduction to pulse transformers Unit – III : Amplifier BJT and FET amplifiers – Cascaded BJT amplifiers – RC coupled amplifier. 1992.1997.Goankar.. Unit – II : Wave Shaping Response of High Pass and Low Pass RC circuit for sinusoidal.pulse. Programming & Applications II Edition Kenneth J Ayala PRI ISBN 81-900828-4-1 References: nd 1.Penram International.I.”Microcontrollers and Their Applications “. V. medium and high frequencies – BIFET amplifiers – DC amplifiers – Problems in DC amplifiers . L Type.1984.Average and RMS Value – Ripple Factor – Regulation –Rectification efficiency – Transformer Utility Factor – Filters _ Inductor. 8051 PERIPHERAL FUNCTIONS : 8051 interrupt structures – Timer and serial functions – Parallel port features : Modes of operations – Power control.square.Need for voltage regulator – Series and Shunt regulators – Comparison – Current limiting and protection circuits Switched mode power supplies. Singh.calmping circuit theories.Analysis at low.step. IMPACT Learning Material Series . EI238 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit – I : Power Supplies Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifiers .ramp and exponential inputs – Linear Wave Shaping – Integrator.Unit – V INTEL 8051 MICROCONTROLLER: Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Boolean processing – Simple programmes. Douglas. “Microprocessor Architecture : programming and Applications with the 8085 “. “Microprocessors and Interfacing Programming and Hardware”.2000.PI Type..2 Edition. 3.Hall. The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture.P.Capacitor. 2. Unit – IV : Power Amplifiers and Feed Back Amplifiers Power Amplifiers – Classification – Class A/B/C – Single ended and Push ended – Configuration – Power Dissipation and output power.Differential and Common mode gain – CMRR – Cascade and Darlington Amplifiers –Chopper Amplifiers.

Complementary symmetry power amplifiers- Class AB operation –Power FET(NMOS)Basic concepts of feedback amplifiers – Effect of negative feedback on input, output resistances, gain, stability, distortion and bandwidth – Voltage and current feedback circuits Unit – V : Oscillators Barkhausen criteria – RC and LC oscillators – Frequency stability of oscillators – Crystal oscillators – Non-sinusoidal oscillators – Review of switching Characteristics of Transistor – Multivibrators- Bistable, Monoslable, Astable and Schmitt trigger. Text Books: 1. .Jacob Millman and Arvind Grabel, ‘Microelectronics’, 2 nd edition, Mc Graw hill international edition , 1997. 2. Jacob Millman and Halkias C.,’Integrated Electronics’, Mc Graw hill, 5 th reprint, 1993.

References: 1. David A Bell, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 1998 2. Thomas Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003 3. Boylestad L. Robert and Nashelsky Louis, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 1997

EI239 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0: 0

Unit I Basic principles of spectroscopy – emission and absorption of radiation – Introduction – UV – Visible Spectrometry – radiation sources – wave length selection – detectors. Unit II Molecular Spectra – electronic, Vibrational, rotational energies IR-absorption. Spectroscopy – single, double beam spectrophotometers – sample handling techniques. Unit – III Microwave spectroscopy – NMR,ESR spectroscopy basic principles – Instrumentation Techniques and applications. Unit – IV Principles of X – ray fluorescence Spectrometry detection of X-rays and nuclear radiation ionization chamber – GM counter, scintillation Counter. Scanning electron microscope – Instrumentation. Unit – V Electrochemical methods: Electrical conductivity of liquids – determination of pH – Principles of gas and liquid chromatography – Instrumentation and analysis.
Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Marks: 40 + 60

Text Books 1. Willard M. Instrumental method of Analysis. 2. Skoog. and. west., “Principles of Instruments analysis.” 3. Arumugam M., “Biomedical Instrumentation”, Anuradha Agencies, 2003 4. Cromwell L., “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”, Prentice Hall of India, 2000

EI240 NETWORKS & PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL Credit: 4: 0: 0

Unit – I: Introduction and Basic principles Protocols, physical standards,modern instrumentation,Bits,Bytes and characters, Communication principles, Communication modes. Synchronous and Asynchronous systems, Transmission Characteristics Data Coding, UART.

Unit – II: Serial Communication Standards : Standards organizations , Serial data communications interface standards, Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard ,Troubleshooting, The 20mA current loop, Serial interface converters ,Interface to printers,IEEE 488,USB.

Unit – III: Introduction to Protocols Flow control Protocols ,BSC Protocols,HDLC,SDLC,Data communication Instrumentation and Control, Individual OSI layers,OSI Analogy-example

Unit – IV: Industrial Protocols Introduction, ASCII based protocols,Modbus Protocols,Allen Bradley Protocol,HART,field bus. Unit – V: Local Area Networks: Circuit and packet switching, Network Topologies,LAN Standards,Ethernet,MAC,Token bus,Internet work connections,NOS,Network Architecture and Protocols.

a K

Text Book. 1. Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control by John Park,Steve Mackay,Edwin Wright. Elseiver Publications. I Edition ISBN 0750657979 Reference Books: 1. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI , 1998. 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan “ Data Communication and Networking” II Edition TMH, 2000.

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

Marks: 40 + 60

y it
for

Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

EI241 DATA STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60

Unit I: Introduction Simple data structures – Data structure operations – Algorithms - Complexity of algorithms

Unit II: Linear Data Structures Stacks – Array implementation of stacks – Conversion of infix expressions to polish notation – Parenthesis checking – Queues – Array implementation – Dequeues – Priority Queues – Linked list – Operation on linear list - Link list implementation of stacks and queues – Circular list – Doubly linked list – List with header node – Applications – Dynamic Memory Management – Garbage collection – String Manipulation. Unit – III Trees – Definition – Binary Trees – Operations on Binary trees – Storage representations – Application of trees – Manipulation of Arithmetic expressions – Huffman’s Algorithm. SORTING : Bubble sort,Quick sort – Binary tree sorts,Heap sort,Insertion sort and Radix sort. Unit – IV : Searching Linear search – Binary search – Search Trees – B-Trees – Tries structure – Hash table methods – Collison resolution techniques. Unit – V : File Structures Definitions and Concepts – File Orgaization – Sequential,Random,linked organization – Inverted files – Virtual memory – VSAN files –Multi Key Access – Multi list organization. Text Books 1. Yedidyah Langsam, Mohse J.Augustin And Aaron M.Tenanbaum,”Data structures using C and C++”, Prentice hall ,1997. 2. Timothy A Bud, “ Classic Data structures in C++” Addition Wesley , 1998. Reference 1. Tremply and Sorenson . , “ Introduction to Data Structures with Applications “ Mc RaHil 1988 2. Mark Allen weiss , “ Data Structures and problem solving using JAVA ‘ Addition Wesley 1988.

a K

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

EI242 OPTICAL INSTRUMENTATION Marks: 40 + 60

Credit: 4: 0: 0

Unit I Introduction to Fiber optics Total internal reflection – refractive index- Numerical Aperture Acceptance angle. – Fiber – Different types of Fiber – Propagation of light through different fibers –Types of losses – absorption losses – Scattering losses – dispersion
Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Unit II Fiber optics Instrumentation and application Fiber optics Instrumentation system – optical sources – LED , LD – Optical detector – PIN, APD, photo diode , photo transistor - Fiber optics sensors – Measurement of pressure , Temperature , Current , Voltage , Liquid Level , Strain Unit III Laser Fundamentals: Basic properties of Lasers- Threshold condition – Laser rate equation –three level systems – types of Lasers – Gas Lasers- Solid Laser – Semiconductor Lasers – Liquid Laser Unit IV Industrial Apllication of Lasers: Laser for measurement of distance, Length , Velocity, acceleration, current and voltage – material processing – Laser Heating , welding , Melting and trimming of materials Unit V Holography and Medical Applications Holography – Basic principles – Methods – Recording and reconstruction – Applications – Non Destructive testing _ Medical Application of Laser – Laser instrumentation For Surgery Text Books : 1. John & Harry ,” Industrial lasers and their applications “, McGraw Hill , 1974 2. Senior J M , “ Optical Fiber Communication principles and practice “, Prentice Hall 1985 Reference Books: 1. John F Read , “ Industrial applications of Lasers, Academic press, 1978 2. Monte Ross, Laser applications, McGraw Hill, 1968 3. Keiser G, Optical Fiber Communication, McGraw Hill, 1991 4. Jasprit Singh , Semiconductor opto electronics , McGraw Hill, 1995 5. Ghatak A.K and Thiagarajar K, Optical electronics foundation book ,TMH, New Delhi,1991

Credit: 0: 0:2

a K

n u r

EI243 SIGNALS & SYSTEMS LABORATORY Marks: 50 + 50

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time

EI323 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEM AND NETWORKS Marks: 40+60

Credit: 4:0:0

UNIT: I –Introduction to Computer Networks Uses of Computer networks – Network hardware – Network software – Example networks – Guided transmission media – Public switched telephone network. UNIT: II – The Data Link Layer
Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Data link layer design issues – Error detection and Correction – Elementary data link protocols- Open system interconnection model of OSI -Sliding window protocols- Example data link protocols UNIT: I11 -Data Network Fundamentals Network hierarchy and switching - - Data link control protocol - BISYNC - SDLC - HDLC Media Access protocol - Command/response - Token passing - CSMA/ CDMA, TCP/IPInternetworking- Bridges - Routers - Gateways - Open system with bridge configuration Open system with gateway configuration - Standard ETHERNET and ARCNET configuration – Special requirement for networks used for control. UNIT: IV – Hart and Field Bus Introduction to HART and smart instrumentation-HART – Physical layer- data link layerapplication layer- Typical specification for a rosemount transmitter- Open industrial Field bus and DeviceNet Systems

UNIT: V -Distributed Control Systems Evolution - Different architectures - Local control unit - Operator interface - DisplaysEngineering interface-alarms and alarm management-DCS Case study- Study of anyone popular DCS available in market - Factors to be considered in selecting DCS - Case studies in DCS. Reference Books 1. A.S. Tanenbaum, Computer Networks, Third Edition, Prentice-Hall of India, 2001 ISBN 8130311655 2. Binder Z and Perret R, Components and Instruments for Distributed Control System, Franklin Book Co., 1983 ISBN 0080299911 3. John Park, Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation Ana Control, Elsevier Publications. 2003. 4. William A Shay, Understanding Data Communications and networks, Cole Publishing Company, A division of Thomson Learning, 2001 ISBN 053495054-X

a K

Credit: 3:1:0

Unit: I -Introduction to Computer Process Control Review of sample theory-Response of sample data system to step and ramp input- steady state error-Z domain equipment- Linear transformation- Pulse transfer function-Modified Ztransform- Sample data model for continuous system bilinear transformation- Jury’s Stability test Unit: II -Design of Digital Controller

n u r

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

EI324 ADVANCED DIGITAL PROCESS CONTROL Marks: 40+60

Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Digital PID –Deadbeat- Dahlin’s algorithms-Kalman’s algorithms-Implementation of control algorithm using microprocessor- Position and Velocity forms-Dead time compensation and smith predictor algorithm Unit: III -Programmable Logic Controller Introduction- Overview of PLC systems- I/O Modules- Power supplies General PLC programming procedures-Programming ON-OFF outputs- Auxiliary commands and functions- Creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions- PLC basic functionsRegister basics-Timer and counter functions Unit: IV -PLC Intermediate Functions

Arithmetic functions- Comparison function-SKIP and MCR function-Data move system-PLC advanced intermediate function- Utilizing digital bits- Sequencer functions- Matrix functions- PLC advanced function- Alternate programming language- Analog PLC operation- Networking of PLC- PLC installation- Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC- Three way traffic light problem- Annunciator problem-Trouble shooting and maintenance Unit: V -Applications Implementation of microprocessor based position and temperature control systemsOperational features of stepping motor- Drive circuits- Interfacing of stepper motor to computer- Interfacing of computer with temperature flow, level process

Reference Books 1 Despande P.B. and Ash R.H., Computer Process Control, ISA Publication, USA, 1988 ISBN 155617005X 2 Houpis C.H, Lamont G.B., Digital Control Systems - Theory, Hardware, Software, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1991, ISBN 0070305005 3. Kuo.B, Digital Control Systems, Oxford University Press, 1991 ISBN 0030128846 4. HughesT.A., Programmable Logic Controllers, ISA Press, 2000 ISBN 1556177291

Credit : 4:0:0

a K

Unit I : Generalized Characteristics Of Transducers Introduction-static characteristics-dynamic characteristics-frequency response of first order transducer- frequency response of second order transducer-higher order transducer-procedure to determine the constants and transfer function of a system Unit II : Resistance and Inductance Transducer Basic principle-potentiometer-resistance strain gauge-measurement of torque-stress measurement on rotating members-semi conductor strain gauges-contact pressure-humidity measurement-light. Basic principle-linear variable differential transformer-LVDT equations-RVDT-application of LVDT-LVDT pressure transducer-synchros- synchros as position transducer-induction potentiometer-variable reluctance accelerometer- microsyn

n u r

EI325 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING Marks:40+60

a y

i n U

s r e v

y it

Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

equibardifferential pressure transducer-feedback type capacitance proximity pickup-condenser microphone-pulse width modulating circuit. Unit III Importance of learning in intelligent systems.1999 3.sensors Reference Books 1.PHI. Introduction-material for piezoelectric transducer-equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystalpiezoelectric coefficients.). Unit V : Smart sensor and recent trends in sensor technologies Introduction. E. Unit II Demonstration of the need for different approaches for different problems. Study of different types of AI systems. fourth edition.filters.nano. etc. Partranabis.O. Study of further specific areas of artificial intelligence.excitation. Building Intelligent Agents. ’Transducer Engineering’. goals and main sub-fields of AI.S.converters-compensationdata communication..Renganathan. McGraw Hill. search. Dr. Doebelin.sensors and the principles-magneto resistive sensors-hall effect and sensorinductance and eddy current sensors-angular movement transducer-electromagnetic flow meter-switching magnetic sensor-SQUID sensor. its techniques. and its implementation.’Sensors and Transducers’. knowledge representation.film sensors-thick film and thin film sensors..MEMS-micro machining. common techniques. Allied publishers limited.ISBN-81-203-2198-7 EI326 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND AI PROGRAMMING Credit : 3:1:0 Unit I Fundamentals of AI techniques in a practical context.Singapore. 2003 . and limitations.modes of deformation-general form of piezoelectric transducersgeneral form of piezoelectric transducers-environmental effects Unit IV : Magnetic sensors Introduction. heuristic functions.D. Overview of key underlying ideas. Biological Intelligence and Neural Networks.standards for smart sensor interface.primary sensor.amplification. Application of simple search algorithms (depth/breadth-first. Interacting Agent Based Systems Unit IV Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks:40+60 .Unit III : Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducers Basic principle-capacitance displacement transducer. the roots.1990 2. and learning. General introduction to artificial intelligence. ’Measurement system’. rule based systems. their differences. processes involved in rule-based Expert Systems and in building such systems. hillclimbing.

built-in procedures List manipulation. variables. Morgan Kaufmann. 1991 3. pattern matching Conditionals. iteration Advanced list manipulation and pattern matching techniques. Eastern. Knowledge Representation. planning and rule-based reasoning. Dan W. N J Nilsson. 2000 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Division of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Economy Edition. “Artificial Intelligence”. McGraw Hill. Machine Learning Reference Books 1. E Rich & K Knight. 2003 2. databases and the implementation of search strategies. Natural Language Processing. Recursion Unit V More advanced programming techniques involving . grammar and parsing. Planning Expert Systems. “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach” (2nd edn). assignments. comments. Prentice Hall. 1998 4. “AI & Expert Systems”. Networks and Frames. procedures. printing. “Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis”. S Russell & P Norvig.Introduction to general procedural and functional programming techniques as well as basic AI programming styles (Poplog. XVed. (2nd edn). Pop-11 Data types. Uncertainty. Patterson. arithmetic operators Stack and stack errors. Online tutorial material. supporting program libraries 5.

field effect. purge flow regulators. constant torque hysteresis clutch. displaced level detectors.: Resistance. flowmeter calibration concepts. float level devices. thermal . electromagnetic flowmeters. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . twin turbine. orifice meters.definitions and units. microwave. Vortex flowmeters. Unit III : Flowmeters And Level Measurements Target flowmeters: V-cone flowmeters. capacitance and RF probes: radiation. Unit II : Anemometers And Flow Meters Mechanical anemometers. positive displacement flowmeters.ultrasonic. variable area flowmeters. flow tubes. Laser Doppler anemometer (LDA).pitot tubes. Doppler. rotating paddle switches. Measurement of mass flow rate: Radiation.classification of flowmeters . turbine and other rotary element flowmeters.ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Subject Code EI244 EI245 EI246 EI247 EI248 EI249 EI327 EI328 EI329 EI330 EI331 EI332 EI333 EI334 EI335 EI336 EI337 EI338 EI339 Subject Name Industrial Instrumentation Instrumentation and Control Systems Process Dynamics and Control Sensors and Transducers Communication Engineering Instrumentation and Process Control Transducer Engineering Robotics and Automation Advanced Micro Controllers Advanced Digital Signal Processor Modeling of Physiological Systems Medical diagnostic and Therapeutic Laboratory Communication Theory and Telemetry Digital Design Lab Bio-Materials Computer aided Instrumentation Medical Instrumentation Anatomy and Physiology Data Communication. angular momentum. coriolis. venturi tubes. flow nozzles. Level measurement: Introduction.Level sensor selection and application. ultrasonic flowmeters. flow switches. conductivity. impeller turbine. cross correlation flowmeters. radar and vibrating type level sensors . diaphragm and differential pressure detectors. hot wire / hot film anemometer. Networks and Protocols Credit 4:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 EI244 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit I : Flow Measurements Introduction .flowmeter selection and application. gyroscopic and heat transfer type mass flow meters.

fourth edition McGraw Hill International. speed. acceleration – vibrometer.G. 3. Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. W.: “Process measurement & analysis” . accelerometer etc. Classification of instruments as indicators. parts of the system. Integration of intelligent transmitters into knowledge based process management systems. National Instruments LabView Manual.. D. E. Unit V : Virtual Instrumentation And EMC Virtual instrumentation: Definition. frequency.. resistance thermometer. New Delhi..Unit IV : Non-Destructive Testing (NDT) Introduction: Various methods for NDT . magnetic flow meter. 3. calibration. ISA publication. Temperature measurement: Bimetallic. Doebelin. personal computers for DAS and instrument control. elastic transducers.: “ Measurement Systems Application and Design” . EI245 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Credit: 3:0:0 Marks: 40+60 a K UNIT I General Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation. Anderew.1996. terminology. UNIT II Measurement of displacement. generalized measurement system. basics of circuit layout and grounding interface. NEMA types: personnel safety. 1991.. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Smart and Intelligent temperature. 2.M. Smart and intelligent flowmeters.. 4. II edition Butterworth Heinemann. Text Books 1.a survey VolI Gulf Publishing company. Explosion hazards and intrinsic safety.O. B. Other smart and intelligent measurement systems.enclosures. ultrasonic flow meter. pressure cells. Pressure measurement: bourdon. 2. Electrical and intrinsic safety. pressure and differential pressure transmitters. strain gauge. D.E. 4.: “Instrumentation reference book”.Transmitters: Introduction. Considine. recorders and integrators – their working principles. windows in data acquisition. Precision and accuracy. 1997 ISBN 0074623346. pyrometer and thermistors. Measurement of error and analysis. Liptak. Reference Books 1. features of smart and intelligent transmitters. B.. EMC: Introduction. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation. “Practical guides for measurement and control” .1978. filtering and shielding.: “Process instruments and control & handbook".advanced NDT techniques . McGraw Hill 1985. Flow measurement. Ltd. : “Applied instrumentation In process industries” . Patranabis. thermocouples. measurement of high and low pressure.G. IV edition Chilton Book company 1995. Noltingk. interface coupling mechanism. Hot-wire anemometer. instrument drivers..

types. 2. I. mixing process . Collet. PD and PID control modes . ‘Engineering Measurements’. humidity: absorption hydrometer.UNIT III Viscosity: capillary tube viscometer. concept of stability. differential and integral control. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . ‘Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation’. ‘Mechanical Measurements’. and hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. gas process. Force measurement: scales and torque measurement: mechanical torsion meter. A. servomechanisms.. simple problems.Ratio control . flow process. RBA Publications. necessary condition for stability. Maragoni. 3.cascade control . Lewis Buck. electrical torsion meter.Nichol's tuning . integral and derivative modes . 1993.J. Text Books: 1. gauge rosettes calibration. 2. Thomas G Beckwith.K.Self regulation. dew point meter.Characteristics of liquid system.. EI246 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL Credit: 4: 0: 0 UNIT I : Process dynamics Elements of process control . flow.Batch process and continuous process . single -speed floating control. Sawhney. damped oscillation method .. Simple problems. ‘Control Systems’.Mathematical model of liquid process.process variables . 1998 (For Units IV & V). Strain: strain gauges.composite control modes . 2nd Ed. and Gopal. Narosa Publishing House. thermal system .averaging control . a K UNIT II : Basic control actions Characteristics of on-off.continuous cycling method.Selection of control mode for different processes Typical control schemes for level. Nagoor Kani. wheat stone bridge circuit. and Hope.multivariable control.. A. C. signal flow graphs.Auto . proportional control. 1991. Dhanpat Rai & Co. UNIT V Time response of first order and second order systems.degrees of freedom . ‘Control Systems Engineering’. Nagrath.V. temperature compensation. transfer functions. block diagram algebra. Wiley Eastern Limited.Integral windup .. routh stability criterion. proportional.1/4 decay ratio .Roy D. A. New Delhi. Twoway control. thermal process. N. pressure and temperature.feed Forward control . Reference Books: 1. M. efflux viscometer.PI.manual transfer .D. ELBS. 1989.Ziegler . UNIT IV Control Systems: Open and closed systems. UNIT III : Optimum controller settings Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method . gas system.

microsyn.1985. Prentice Hall Of India.variation of dielectric constants.steam boiler . Classification of Instruments –Deflection and Null Type.active and passive transducer-Inverse transducer. 3..IV : Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducer Capacitance Transducer – Basic principle. D.: “Process control” . Classification of Transducer – analog and digital transducerprimary and secondary transducer. Chemical Process Control: An Introduction Theory and practice.area of platesdistance between plates. Peter Harriot. 3. Resistance strain gauge – Types.Characteristics of control valve .III : Resistance and Inductance Transducer Resistance Transducer-Basic principle. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Resolution. Wiley Eastern. Patranabis. TMH 1991. Merits. Inductance Transducer:. “ Automatic process control” . a K UNIT . UNIT . EI247 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT . Induction potentiometer.. Prentice Hall. Resistance thermometer.Cavitation. : “ Process control instrumentation technology” . Units and Standards. 2. Generalized Measurement System. Coughanoner.UNIT IV : I/P and P/I converters Pneumatic and electric actuators . Thermistors – characteristics. Text Books: 1. RVDT. : “ Process systems analysis and control” .globe.: “ Principles of process control”. Linear variable differential transformer.II: Classification and Characteristics of Transducer Transducer – Definition. Eckman. Characteristics and choice of transducer. merits and demerits. TMH.. Error analysis. frequency response. UNIT . Methods of Measurements – Direct and Indirect Methods.I: Science of Measurement Measurement systems – Significance of Measurements. butterfly. New Delhi 1999 ISBN 8120306651 Reference Books: 1. George Stephanopoulos. Factors influencing choice of transducer.valve positioner .drum level control and combustion.Basic principle. TMH 1981.P. D.control of heat exchangers . Types of errors.. Potentiometer – Loading effects.control valve sizing . Thermocouple – Compensation circuits – junction and lead compensation. D. variable reluctance accelerometer. Curtis Johnson. Non-linear Potentiometer.control of top and bottom product compositions .control valve .valve body . Linearity.1996. Characteristics of Instruments – Static and Dynamic. flashing in control valves UNIT V : Applications Distillation column . transducers using change in . Synchro. 2. diaphragm ball valves . Noise in potentiometer. and Koppel..reflux ratio control of chemical reactor .

. chemical sensor – PH sensor. 1999. A. 1978.Sources and Types of noise Unit III: Digital Communication Systems PAM.K.Analog to digital converters (Successive approximation type. Prentice Hall of India LTD. Roody and Coolen . 4th Edition. Piezoelectric transducer. PCM – delta modulation – differential PCM – merits and demerits – comparison of pulse modulation schemes.Error detection and correction – Multiplexing introduction – TDM & FDM a K Unit V: Facsimile & Television Facsimile. Mode of operation. Text Books: 1.. sound sensors. 2.PSK Unit IV: Data Transmission Twisted pair and coaxial cables – Fiber optics – Sources and detectors – Fiber optic Complete system ... R. digital speed transducer. UNIT .V : Digital and other Miscellaneous sensors Digital Transducer – shaft encoder. properties of piezoelectric crystals.Modem functions – RS232 operation . 3. EI248 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Credit: 4: 0: 0 Unit I: Radio Communication Systems Need for Modulation . FM and PM – basics of AM . 2004 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . vibration sensors – seismic transducer.TV signals – TV receivers – Color TV -Introduction to Satellite communication (Basic block diagram) – Introduction to cellular communication (Basic Concept) Text Books 1. McGraw Hill International.modulation index – signal power –DSBSC-SSBSC Unit II: Transmitters and Receivers AM and FM transmitters and receivers – Am and FM demodulation – Comparison of AM. (Pvt) Ltd. Sawhney “A course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation” – Dhanpat Rai & Co. Hall effect transducer. Prentice Hall of India LTD.Basic principle. optical encoder. frequency response and impulse response uses. “Electronic Communication”. 1999. 4th Edition. “Electronic Communication Systems”. Renganathan “Transducer Engineering” – Allied publishers Limited.O. PPM. Doebelin. “Measurement Systems Application and Design”. E..2R type). FSK – ASK . FM and PM – Noise – Effects of noise. 2000.Principle of AM. S. William Scheweber. 2. velocity transducer.demerits and uses. fourth edition. loading effects. Introduction to smart sensors. PDM.

McGraw-Hill. bimetallic strips Unit V: Level sensor – Simple float systems. Stability – concept of stability. Unit II: Control systems Open and closed loop systems. differential pressure cell Temperature sensors –Construction and working of RTD. Taub and Schilling “Principles of Communication Systems”. differential control and intergral control. 1995. radioactive methods (nucleonic level sensing) – ultrasonic level sensor . Bruce Carlson.mechanisms. pH meter. hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. Tata McGraw – Hill 1986. ramp function and sine function. servo.. 5.. Inductive pressure sensor. 2. 4th Edition. A “Communication Systems”. S. “Communication Systems”. John Wiley. Thermistors. EI249 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 Unit I: Introduction to Process control System – steady state design – process control – process control block diagram – definition of a process. measurement. Routh test for stability Unit IV: Pressure and Temperature sensors Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor. strain gauge. “Electronic Communication Systems”. and control element. Thermocouples. 3. stability criterion. bourdon tube. characteristic equation. 3rd Edition.Reference Books 1. 4. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer. 1987. 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill . loop – damped and cyclic response. 2001. Anoksingh. First edition. exponential function.Inc. controller. Block diagram algebra. definition of stability in a linear system.feedback control – transient responses – laplace transform – transforms of simple functions – step function. Buoyancy meter Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell. Zirconia oxygen analyser.1987. diaphragm. Control valve – Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm actuator Unit III Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula. dumbbell O2 analyser.Chand and Company Ltd. pressure sensor. Second Edition. Mass spectrometer a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks (40+60) y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . two-way control. non-dispersive photometers. Simon Haykins. “Principles of Communication Engineering”. Gas chromatograph. proportional control. capacitive sensing element. Kennedy G.

Introduction –material for piezoelectric transducer-equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystal –piezoelectric coefficients – modes of deformation – general form of piezoelectric –transducers –general form of piezoelectric transducers-environmental effects. 1991. Unit III: Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducers Basic principle – capacitance displacement transducer-equibar –differential pressure transducer – feedback type capacitance proximity pickup-condenser microphone-pulse width modulating circuit. “Process System analysis and control” Mc.LVDT pressure transducer – synchros as position transducer – induction potentiometer – variable reluctance accelerometer –microsyn. RBA publications.G. an imprint of Elsevier . a K Unit IV: Magnetic Sensors Introduction – sensors and the principles – magneto resistive sensors – hall effect and sensors –inductance and eddy current sensors –angular movement transducerelectromagnetic flow meter – switching magnetic sensors. Unit V: Amplifiers Design of low noise pre amplifiers. 1998.F Richardson A D. Unit II :Resistance and Inductance Transducer Basic principle-potentiometer –resistance strain gauge –measurement of torque –stress measurement on rotating members – semi conductor strain gauges-contact pressurehumidity measurement-light. 2.exlaraction of signab – lock in amplifier – boxcar integrators. J.Isolation amplifier. “Control Systems Engineering”. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . I.Peacock.LVDT equations-RVDTapplication of LVDT.. References: 1. 1991.Graw Hill International Edition . EI327 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING Credit:4:0:0 Unit I : Generalized Characteristics of Transducers Introduction-static characteristics-dynamic characteristics-frequency response of first order transducer-higher order transducer –procedure to determine the constants and transfer function of a system. Wiley Eastern Limited. Nagoor kani.J. Coughanowr.Text Books: 1.SQUID sensor.A “Control Systems”.high gain operational amplifiers-chopper stablised amplifiers – gain control amplifiers – log and antilog amplifiers. Donald R.2006. M and Gopal. 2.(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann. Coulson & Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”. Second Edition. Volume 3. Basic principles –linear variable differential transformer. Nagrath.

I edition. machine vision -Grippers: Types of grippers.2000. Unit III : Manipulator Dynamics Lagrangian mechanics. 2003..Lagrange –Euler formulation.D. “Sensors and Transducers”. “Measurement System”. Nagel R. Allied Publishers Limited. Unit II: Manipulator Kinematics Direct Kinematics: Kinematic modeling of a manipulator-Denavit Hartenberg notation – Kinematic relationship between adjacent links. position sensors.. ISBN-81-203-2198-7. Newton Euler formulation Unit IV : Robot programming Non textual programming. John J. L. Marcel Dekker. 2.P. 2.1987. 3.1985 4. ‘Introduction to Robotics. Klafter. David Ardayfio. 2 ed.textual programming: robot languages.E. force and tactile sensors. McGraw Hill. John Wiley and sons Inc. 2003. McGraw Hill Book Co. PHI. Fundamentals of Robotics “. McGraw Hill. “Transducer Engineering”. Programming and Applications.Introduction to Robotics . Weiss M. Doebelin. Partranabis.N. Dr. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design”.1989.O. 7. 5.Geddes & L. fuzzy logic for robotics a K Reference Books 1. “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”.1990.Baker. 3. ‘Industrial Robotics – Technology. cylindrical arm and articulated arm robots Inverse Kinematics: Manipulator workspace – solvability of inverse kinematic model – Solution Techniques. Inc. IV ed. Unit V Robots in manufacturing industries. Koren Y..Manipulator transformation matrixkinematic model of two link planar. VAL system and language-VAL palletizing program. Nikku. TBH Publishers.G.1994 5.1986.S. Groover M. 1999.’ Robotic Engineering’. 4. ‘Robotics for Engineers’. gripper mechanisms-hydraulic pneumatic and electric drives.closed form solution. Odrey N. Mechanics and Control’. 1999. n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks: 40+60 y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . 1999.Singapore. EI328 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credit:4:0:0 Unit I : Review of basic concepts Definition and origin of robotics-classification of robots-degrees of freedom-basic components of a robot -Sensors: velocity sensors.USA. Mithal. Addison – Wesley Publishing Co. John Wiley and sons Inc. Webster. Prentice Hall.F. VAL pick and place program –Requirements of robot programming languages. TBH Publishers...’ Robotics and control’.Ranganathan.A.Reference Books: 1. 6. Craig . range and proximity sensor.

1996.” Design with PIC Micro Controller “. Kenneth.Ayala “ The 8051 micro controller architecture.” ARM system – on –chip architecture” Addison Wesley. “16-bit Embedded Controllers Handbook”.EI329 ADVANCED MICRO CONTROLLERS Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit I: Intel 8051 Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization. 1997. 1989. Programming and Interfacing” PHI. John. “An Introduction to the Intel family of Microprocessor “ Pearson Education. 3. “Advanced Microprocessors” McGraw Hill. “8-bit Embedded Controllers”. Text Books 1. 3. Intel Corporation. 2. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . 6. 5. Unit IV High Performance RISC Architecture: ARM The ARM architecture – ARM organization and implementation. 1990.B. Intel Corporation.Antonakos. 4. References 1. Pearson Education.serial ports.The ARM instruction set – The thumb instruction set – Basic ARM assembly language program – ARM CPU cores. Unit V: PIC Micro Controller CPU Architecture – Instruction set – Interrupts – Timers –Memory. 2002. Unit II: 8051 Interrupt structure – Timer modules – serial port features – port structure.Peatman. 2003.Breg.A/D converter – UART.power saving modes – MCS51 Family features: 8031/8051/8751. 2. Barry B.B. James L. 4.Antonakos.. 1995.Mc Graw Hill Singapore 1988. Programming and Applications” Penram International Publishing.I/O port expansion – I2C bus for peripheral chip access.Peatman.Register Banks – Bit addressable area – SFR area – Addressing modes – Instruction set – programming examples. 2000. “The Intel Microprocessors Architecture.J. James L.” Design with Micro Controller “. Steave Furber. John. 1999. Daniel Tabak. “The Pentium Microprocessor” Pearson Education. Unit III : 8096 Controller Architecture of 8096 – Modes – Block diagrams of Interrupt structure – Timers – High Speed Input and outputs – PWM output.

biomedical reactions pneumatic transport. Ultra filtration. a K Reference Book: 1.Venkataramani & M. Jeruis . Unit III: Architecture of TMS320C5X Introduction – Bus Structure.Multiple Access Memory.Ifeachor.Load / Store Instructions-Addition/ Subtraction Instructions -Move Instructions -Multiplication Instructions. shift invariance.Convolution and Inverse Filtering-Sampling theorem and discrete time system.Multiported Memory. B.VLIW Architecture –Pipelining –Special Addressing Modes in P-DSPs-On-Chip Peripherals.The NORM Instruction-Program Control Instruction -Peripheral Control-Pipeline Structure-Pipeline operation.MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Credits:4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit I Physiological processes and principles of their control. TMH 2003. Control – Blood flow.Bhaskar.Multirate Signal Processing-Discrete Wavelet transform-Adaptive Filters Unit II: Introduction to Programmable DSPs Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator. 2.digestion energy Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . “Digital Signal Processor”.Central Arithmetic Logic Unit-Auxiliary Register ALU – Index Register-Auxiliary Register Compare Register-Block Move Address RegisterBlock Repeat Registers-Parallel Logic Unit -Memory –Mapped Registers-Program controller-Some Flags in the status Registers-On-Chip Memory-On –Chip Peripherals Unit IV: TMS320C5X Assembly Language Instructions and Instruction Pipelining in C5X Assembly Language Syntax-Addressing Modes. Unit V: Application Programs in C5X ‘C50-based DSP starter Kit-Programs for familiarization of the addressing modesprogram for familiarization of Arithmetic Instructions -Programs in C5X for Processing Real Time Signals Text Books: 1.” Digital Signal Processing – A paractical approach” Addison Wesley 1993. gas exchange.Credit: 3:1:0 EI330 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR Marks: 40+60 Unit I :Overview of Digital Signal Processing and Applications Signals and their Origin. Barrie W. Emmanuel C.Normal pipeline operation.Linearity. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI331. Texas Instruments “ User guide TMS 320C50”.Digital Filters.Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P-DSPs. Causality and stability of discrete time systems-Z Transform -Advantages of Digital Signal Processing -DSP in the sample and transform domain-Fast Fourier Transform.

Unit IV: Ultra Filtration System Transport through cells and tubules. modelling Henle’s loop. Mass balancing by lungs. principles of open loop and feedback systems. “ Non linear Dynamic Modelling of Physiological System”. respiratory rate. diffusion. 2. Co. electrical analogues. counter current model of urine formation in nephron. 2002. John Wiley & Sons. Unit V: Modelling Body Dynamics Principles of mechanical properties of bones. introduction to various process controls like cardiac rate.modelling bones. Hills model of muscle mechanism. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI332 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTIC AND THERAPEUTIC LABORATORY Marks: 50+50 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time Credit:0:0:2 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering .Mararelis. 1976. Text Book: 1. Unit III: Respiratory System Modelling oxygen uptake by RBC and pulmonary capillaries. control system model.Cooney. oxygen and carbon dioxide transport in blood and tissues. “ Biomedical Engineering Principles” Marcel Deeker Pub. Vasilis. Biochemistry of digestion. models of heat transfer between subsystems of human body like skin core. 2002. Academic Pr. techniques for system response of characterization Principles of Modelling Mathematical approach. types of heat loss from body. Current Trends Pharmacokinetic modelling illustrated with example like drug diffusion. Cobelli. tissues . David. systems within body and body-environment. blood pressure. facilitated . Carson. blood glucose regulation electrical model of neural control mechanism Unit II: Modelling of Human Thermal Regulatory system Parameters involved. O . Linear and non-linear control systems.Z.utilization and waste disposal.diffusion and active transport. computer aided modelling . : “Introduction of Modelling in Physiology and Medicine “. References: 1. Gas transport mechanisms of lungs. methods of waste removal. stress propagation in bones.

and signal power.digital filters. receiver functions. Wave propagation – filters. Second Edition. 1999. D. FM demodulation.Transmitters and receivers –transmission lines – RF line. phase modulation. PLL. New Delhi. Unit IV Modems.probability of error. 1999. Bits and symbols.Patranabis.A complete course”.D. SSB and CW demodulation. Time Division multiplex system: TDM-PAM – PCM system. transmitters.1999 a K Reference Books 1. AM features and drawbacks.Quadrature amplitude modulators – Modem protocols.polynomial filters active filters. 2. FM receivers.1990. FM and PM. Unit II Introduction to telemetry principles. modulation index. Measurement Systems-Applications and Design.time function pulse – modulation codes –Interference – error rate. Tata McGraw Hill. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI334 DIGITAL DESIGN LAB Marks: 50+50 Credit : 0:0:2 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . the roll of the receiver.wave guide componentswireless telemetry Unit V Antennas: Dipoles-arrays-current distribution and design considerations-microwave antennas. SSB. “ Principles of Communication”.The basic system – classification – non –electrical and electrical telemetry – local transmitters and converters. basis of AM. comparison of AM . receiver techniques and stages. E. Third Edition Prentice – Hall International.EI333COMMUNICATION THEORY AND TELEMETRY Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit I Noise and its effects. 3.exponential Fourier series – amplitude frequency –phase modulations. Unit III Frequency division multiplex system: IRIG standards-FM and PM circuits. FM spectrum and bandwidth. AM demodulation. Doeblin. signals theorems. Telemetry Principles. “Electronic Communication Systems.Microwave line. Taub and Schilling. sources and types of noise. need for modulation.universal filters – switched capacitor filters. Tata McGraw Hill . concept of frequency modulation. Digital multiplexer – differential PCM. Text Book William Schweber.McGraw hill.

Lanza. 1999. 3. “Biocompatibility Assessment of Medical Devices and Materials”. “Principle of Tissues Engineering”. 2.absorbable tissues and soft tissues replacement as well as discussion of tissue – body and blood response to implants. 1999.single & multi channel DAS – data conversion – A/D & D/A converters – multiplexers – sample and hold circuits.EI335 BIO MATERIALS Credits:4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 Unit I Introduction to the study of the structure and properties of the main classes of materials used in medical devices and surgical implants – metals. Academic press. The use of metal and ceramic based biomaterials for the replacement of hard tissue in orthopedic and dental applications. a K Credits:4:0:0 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI336 COMPUTER AIDED INSTRUMENTATION Marks: 40+60 Unit I Data Acquisition and conversion – introduction – signal conditioning of the inputs. Julian H. Reference: books: 1. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Academic Press . Parry. Robert P. “Biological Performance of Materials Fundamentals of Biocompatibility”. “Biomaterials Sciences – An Introduction to Materials in Medicine”. 1996. Unit III Interplay of physiochemical properties of polymeric materials and the design of biomedical devices. Interaction of materials with the biological environment. B.Chick. Jonathan Black. Wiley series.D.Rater. Robert Lange and William L.ceramics – polymer composites and materials of biological origin Unit II The histology of normal tissues – the pathology of abnormal tissues and tissues reaction to implanted materials .history of artificial heart development. Unit V Medical and bioengineering aspects of artificial hearts and cardiac assist devicesphysiology and pathological aspects of patient with need for such devices. Unit IV Biomaterials used in tissues replacement – absorbable and non. 2000 4.

digital I/O displays – display multiplexing and zero suppression. Unit III Graph theoretical concepts for computer vision – Introduction – Basic definition – graph representation of two dimensional digital images – matching – graph grammars – control basic – optimizing controls – analog versus digital instrumentation –converters – telemetry systems – transmitters – (electronic and intelligent) – fibre optic transmission – digital recorders – recorders – tape recorders – speech synthesis – voice recognition. Tokyo. EMG – Hotler monitor – Foetal monitor – cardiac arrthymias – plethysmography n u r a y i n U s r e v y it EI337 MEDICAL INSRUMENTATION Marks: 40+60 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Boston. Zang-Hee Cho etall. 1999. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Credit : 4:0:0 a K Unit I Introduction to human physiology. 3. “Foundations of Medical Imaging”. 2000. Bernal Jahne. Unit IV Computerized ECG-EEG-EMG-CAT – processing of ultra sound images in medical diagnosis – introduction – ultra sound imaging systems – processing the B-mode imageexamples of image processing B-mode images – perspectives. network.circulatory system – cardio vascular system-central nervous system – respiratory system – muscular skeletal system – digestive system – excretory system – sensory organs – voluntary and involuntary action. Unit V Three dimensional fast full body scanning – evaluation of hardware & software – mechanical design – measuring process – ranges of applications – data acquisition by confocal microscopy – image restoration – detection –segmentation – graph construction – interpretation – results –magnetic resonance imaging in medicine – basic magnetic resonance physics – images acquisition – Reconstruction – fast imaging methods. Unit II Potentials and their measurements: cell and its structure – resting potentials – action potentials – bioelectric potentials – measurement of potentials and their recording – ECG. Prentice Hall of India. EEG. IEEE Press. R.Khandpur. Reference Books: 1. 2001. “Handbook of Computer Vision and Application” Academic press san Diego . Horst Han Backer peter Geibler.Unit II Micro Controllers and PC based DAS – Introduction –8051 microcontroller – Programming in 8051 – application of 8051 – PC based instrumentation – I/P & O/P displays – analog displays and recorders. Toronto.B. 2. London.

References Books: 1. 2ed. John Willey and sons Inc. blood flow measurement.oxymeter – diathermy – nerve stimulator. L. hearing and smelling. 2. pancreas. Mechanism of alimentary canal. Unit IV: Excretory Systems: Structure of Kidney. Venous return. CT.Unit III Electrodes of respiratory and neuro measurement: Electrode theory – bipolar and unipolar electrode-surface electrode – electrode impedance –equivalent circuit for extra cellular electrodes. 1999.Baker. EI338 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I: Basics: Basic Embryology. Webster. General circulation. Unit IV Medical Imaging techniques: X-rays – scanning techniques-ultrasound scanner.A. Capillary circulation. n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Physiology of urine formation. Related digestive glands. Physiology of miaturation. Physiology of emotion.Geddes & L. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design”. sensory end organs. structure of lungs.micro electrodes – artificial respiration. Carrier of oxygen and carbon dioxide. Bladder and Colon. Neural control of cardio vascular system. 1989. “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation”. Ovary and Testis.color Doppler system. Liver. MRI scanning techniques – coronary angiogram Unit V Cardiac pacemakers-defibrillators – heart lung machines.haemodialysis – anesthesis equipment – electro surgery – clinical laboratory instrumentation – therapeutic and prosthetic devices. Cerebro spinal fluid . centralized patient monitoring. Regulation of posture. Regulation of breathing. Thyroid and Parathyroid glands. Physiology of Perspiration. Spiro meter. Tongue. Ostelogy and Mycology. Function of liver. Secretion of digestive fluids. Reflex action. Afferent nervous systems. John Wiley and sons Inc. Unit V: Endocrine System: Pituitary gland. Mechanism of sight. Traches and its branchings. Regulation of temperature.F. Circuitatory and Respiratory Systems: Structure of heart. Dyspnoea Unit II: Nervous And Sensory Systems: Structure and function of nervous tissues. Physiology of defecations. a K Unit III: Digestive System: Structure of alimentary canal.

“Textbook of Anatomy and Physiology in Radiological Technology”.Definition of noise.Types of error detection.24 interface standard).Types of modem.Coaxial cables. 2. Charles A. Samsons Wright.K.References: 1.Modem and Multiplexer Modes of operation.Frequency analysis of noise. Oxford University press. Syril A Kalee and Eric Neil. control and correction.Components of a modem. NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I – Overview & Basic principles Open systems interconnection ( OSI ) model .V. Oxford University Press. Electrical Noise and Error Detection Origin of errors.Troubleshooting serial data communication circuits.Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines.Earthing and grounding requirements.Factors affecting signal propagation.Flow controlDistortion.Terminal multiplexersStatistical multiplexers a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks: 40+60 y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering .Fiber-optic cables.The 20 mA current loop. EI339 DATA COMMUNICATION.Jacob. Sam Louis.Serial interface convertersInterface to serial printers. “Applied Physiology”.Mosby Company.Troubleshooting and testing with RS-485.Communication principlesCommunication modes.Interchange circuits.RS/TIA-530A interface standard (May 1992).Error detection/correction.Multiplexing concepts.Cabling. 1979.Modulation techniques.Data compression techniques.Test equipment.Modem standardsTroubleshooting a system using modems. Hongkong. 1977.RS/TIA-562 interface standard (June 1992). Warrik C.EIA-232 interface standard (CCITT V.Radio modems.Error detectionTransmission characteristicsData codingThe universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART). Henglong.Cable spacing.Smart Instrumentation systems.Bits.Filtering Unit IV.Good shielding performance ratios.Synchronous systems.Data communication standards Standards organizations.Serial data communications interface standards.Copper-based cables -Twisted pair cables.Suppression technique.Sources of electrical noiseElectrical coupling of noise –Shielding. The C. 3. 1968.RS-449 interface standard (November 1977).General purpose interface bus (GPIB) or IEEE-488 or I EC-625.Asynchronous systems.Synchronous or asynchronous.The universal serial bus (USB) Unit III.The high speed UART (16550) Unit II.Parallel data communications interface standards. bytes and characters.Protocols .Physical standard .Cable ducting or raceways.RS-423 interface standardThe RS-485 interface standard.The Centronics interface standard.Comparison of the EIA interface standards. “Anatomy and Physiology for Radiographers”.

Industrial Protocol Flow control protocols. 3.Modbus protocol. 2.File transfer protocols. “HART Application Guide”. John Park and Edwin Wright. New York. “Process / Industrial Instrument and Controls and Hand Book”.ASCII based protocol. G.OSI analogy.5-A4. Cole Publishing Company. Steve Mackay.Industrial control application.Unit V. “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and Control”. Reference Books 1. 1999. William A Shay. Computer Networks.ANSI-X3. Mc-Millan. Tanenbaum.Binary synchronous protocol.HDLC and SDLC protocols. 1996. “Understanding Data Communications and networks”. Third Edition. Romilly Bowden. Prentice-Hall of India.HART and smart instrumentation. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering .XON/OFF.2002. HART Communication Foundation. A. 2. Newnes Elsevier. A division of Thomson Learning.Data link layer.Highway addressable remote transducer (HART) Physical layer.Application layer Text Books 1.S. Mc-Graw Hill. 1999.28-2.K.

mutual inductance. 'Electric Circuit Analysis'. .ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code EI250 EI251 EI252 EI253 EI254 EI255 EI256 EI257 EI258 EI259 EI340 EI341 EI342 Subject Name Electric Circuit Analysis Power Electronics Biomedical Instrumentation Neural Network and Fuzzy Logic Control Aircraft Instrumentation Electron Devices Industrial Instrumentation Ultrasonic Instrumentation Signal Conditioning Circuits Digital Control Systems Advanced Digital Signal Processing Advanced Control System Instrumental Analysis EI250 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT ANALYSIS Credits 3:1:0 Unit I : Basic Circuit Concepts Lumped circuits -Kirchoffs Laws -VI relationships of R.C.coefficient of coupling -ideal transformer. Unit V : Transient Analysis Forced and free response of RL. School of Electrical Sciences AN-63 n u r a y i n U s r e v Credit 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 y it Marks 40+60 . Delhi.R.power and power factor -series resonance and parallel resonance . New Age International Ltd. Paranjothi S. 2000. Unit II : Sinusoidal Steady State Analysis Phasor. L and C -independent sources dependent sources –simple resistive circuits -network reduction -voltage division -current division -source transformation.bandwidth and Q factor. a K Unit IV : Network Theorems And Applications Superposition theorem -reciprocity theorem –compensation theorem -substitution theorem maximum power transfer theorem -Thevenin's theorem. 2nd Edition.sinusoidal steady state response -concepts of impedance and admittance -analysis of simple circuits. Text Book 1.. Solution of three-phase balanced circuits -power measurements by twowattmeter methods. and sinusoidal excitations. RC and RLC circuits with D. Unit III : Mesh-Current And Node-Voltage Methods Formation of matrix equations and analysis of complex circuits using mesh-current and nodal-voltage methods . -Norton's theorem and Millman's theorem with applications.

Rashid. 2nd Edition. Reference 1..ECG Phonocardiography . 'Power Electronics -Circuits Devices and Applications'. A. S. 1993. New Delhi. Unit III : DC To DC Choppers Voltage.A. A. Text Book 1.Central nervous system . current and load-commutated choppers -step up chopper and firing circuits. and Sinha.. 1994 EI251 POWER ELECTRONICS Credits:4:0:0 Unit I: Power Semiconductor Devices Principle of operation -characteristics and modeling of power diodes. R.Respiratory system . 'Engineering Circuit Analysis'. GTO. Prentice Hall International. McGraw Hill International Editions. 1983. Reference 1...H. Wiley Eastern Limited. M.H. Control .EEG . and Kemmerly. 'Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis'.. W. 2. Schaum's outline series McGraw Hill Book Company. J. McGraw Hill and Company. 3 pulse and 6-pulse converters.Electrophysiology of Cardiovascular system. J. Edminister. Jr.. and Shyam Mohan S. 2. Power Electronics'.current source inverters -PWM inverters..Axon . power MOSFET and IGBT.2. Unit IV : Inverters Series inverter. W.E. G.Action potential .Muscular system . Doradla. 'Theory and Problems of Electric Circuits'. Hyatt.voltage source inverters.. Third Edition. Landle. Sudhakar. Joshi. Dubey. 'Thyristorised Power Controllers'. power BJT. 1993 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks 40+60 y it EI252 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Marks: 40 + 60 Credit: 4: 0 :0 UNIT I : Electrophysiology and Biopotential Recorders Neuron . Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.. TRIAC. 1995.K.inverter operation . 1986.EMG – ERG School of Electrical Sciences AN-64 .M.effect of source inductance and firing circuits.step up and step down cyclo-converters -three phase to single phase cyclo-converters – Switched Mode Power Supply. SCR. Unit II : Phase Controlled Converters 2 pulse. Unit V : AC Voltage Controllers Single phase AC voltage controller -multi stage sequence.P. Ltd.R.

UNIT : II Hopfield’s networks. L.Nerve stimulators .Laser surgical unit .angiography .vector cardiograph Biotelemetry. L. Geddes. identification and control of dynamical systems. " Biomedical Instrumentation".Oximeters Audiometer. John Wiley. "Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation".Blood flow . PCO2 and PO2 analysis sterilizers .Electrical safety hazards in hospitals UNIT V : Imaging Systems and Telemetry Computerized tomography (CT) . UNIT IV : Biochemical Equipments and Electrical Safety Flame photometer .short wave & microwave diathermy .Anesthesia machine .measurement of lung volume . Kumbakonam. Text Book: 1. Kohonen’s self organizing maps.respiration rate .A.Measurement of Blood pressure .. TMH. Merrill Publishing Company. Rosenblatt’s perceptrons . back propagation algorithm.E.Echo cardiograph . adaptive resonance theory.Ultrasound scanner . single layer and multilayer neural networks.MRI instrumentation .Cardiac output measurement .Dialyser ..PH. UNIT III : Therapeutic and Surgical Equipments Electro Surgical unit .Ventilators . "Principles of Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurement".Fluroscopic techniques .S. Kandpur R. and Baker.chromatography. Arumugam. 1987. Richard Aston. activation functions and their types.spectrophotometer . Articulation Control) School of Electrical Sciences AN-65 n u r EI 253 NEURAL NETWORK AND FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL Marks: 40 + 60 a y i n U s r e v y it .. 2.X-ray machine .centralized and Bedside patient monitoring system . case studies (Inverted Pendulum.Pacemakers .. 1989. 1990. Credit: 4:0:0 a K UNIT : I Introduction to biological neuron. Anuradha Agencies Publishers. Classification of neural networks. associative memory -bi-directional associative memories.Total artificial heart (TAH) . Reference Books: 1.. Introduction to artificial neural networks.BAM structure UNIT : III Neural networks for control systems: Schemes of neuro-control.heart rate . 1992. 3. "Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation".Nerve stimulators.UNIT II : Measurement of Physiological Parameters Physiological transducers .M.Heart lung machine Defibrillators .

fuzzy relations. B. Kosko. cock.D..B.1997. 1981.gyro magnetic compass. 1995. fuzzification interface. Prentice Hall. design of fuzzy logic controllers. UNIT IV: Aircraft Computer Systems Terrestrial magnetism. Pallett.turns and slip indicator. a K UNIT V : Power Plant Instruments Fuel flow -Fuel quantity measurement. Jacek M. Jaico Publication House. 2. Pitman and sons.UNIT : IV Introduction to fuzzy logic: Fuzzy sets.J. Zurada. Neural Computing Theory & Practice . EI 254 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0 :0 UNIT I: Introduction Classification of aircraft . Text Books 1. aircraft magnetism.Vertical Speed Indicator.Ross. : " Aircraft Instruments -Principles and applications". n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40 + 60 School of Electrical Sciences AN-66 . ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’. Direct reading magnetic compass.Compass errors. panels. decision making logic. New Delhi . case studies(Inverted Pendulum.instrumentation .pit layout. UNIT III: Gyroscopic Instruments Gyroscopic theory -directional gyro indicator artificial horizon . UNIT : V Fuzzy logic for control systems : Fuzzy logic controllers. exhaust gas temperature measurement and pressure measurement. fuzzy learning algorithms. 1997 – ISBN-0-07-144711-X References 1. 1991. fuzzy conditional statements.Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications. knowledge/rule base. Articulation Control) Text Books 1. Wasserman P. Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems : A Dynamical Approach to Machine Intelligence. E. 3.instrument displays. defuzzification interface. J. fuzzy rules. UNIT ll: Flight Instrumentation Static & pitot pressure source -altimeter -airspeed indicator -mach meters -maximum safe speed indicator.Van Nortland Reinhold.

Static Characteristics. 1998. Text Books 1. PHI. McGraw Hill International. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it School of Electrical Sciences AN-67 . Unit IV : Transistor Models Transistor Hybrid Model – T equivalent pi equivalent circuits – Small signal single stage amplifiers – analysis of CE. Reference Books 1. Static characteristics – SCR: Construction. 1998. "Electronic Devices & Circuits"."Integrated Electronics". Saturation Region – Ebers-Moll Model – Photo transistors – The Operating Point – AC. 1998. Sixth Edition.1997. Unit V : Theory Of FET. UJT And SCR Junction FET Transistor – Static characteristics – FET structure – The Pinch-Off voltage – The FET Small Signal Model – Enhancement MOSFET. "Electronic Devices & Circuits ". David. CC Configuration – Input. 2. "Electronic Devices & Circuit Theory". PHI. Malvino A P. CB and CC circuits – Voltage gain – Current gain – Input impedance – Output impedance – dependence on source and load impedance. Millman & Halkias. “Electronic Principles”. Insulators and Semiconductors – Mobility and Conductivity – Electrons and holes in an Intrinsic semiconductor – Donor and Acceptor Impurities – The Hall Effect – Generation and recombination of Charges – Drift and Diffusion in semiconductors – The Continuity equation – Injected Minority-Carrier Charge Unit II : PN Junction Diode Open-Circuited PN Junction – The PN Junction as a Rectifier – The Current Components in a PN Diode – Volt-Ampere Characteristic – Static and Dynamic Resistance – Temperature Dependence of the VI Characteristic – Transition and diffusion capacitance – Varactor Diodes – Breakdown Diodes – Tunnel diodes – Photo diode – LED – The Diode as circuit element – A Half-wave Rectifier – A Full-wave Rectifier. PHI. 2. Cut-Off. Unit III : The Bipolar Junction Transistor Transistor Current Components – CB.A. Allen Mottershead. CE. Output Characteristics – Active. Static Characteristics – TRIAC: Construction. DC load lines – Bias Stability – Self Bias – Bias Compensation – Thermal runaway. 3. Depletion MOSFET – Comparison of JFET and MOSFET – UJT : Operation.EI255 ELECTRON DEVICES Credit: 4:0:0 Marks: 40 + 60 Unit I : Introduction Energy band Theory of Crystals – Conductors.Bell.Tata McGraw Hill. Robert Boylestad. 1998.

Fourth Edition. 1990 ISBN 0-85226206.V.P.. Renganathan.1996.Bimetallic thermometerThermocouple .Cold junction compensation. Intelligent Instrumentation. D.O. New Delhi 4. 3. 1995 ISBN 0-7506-2255.Elastic elementsElectrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges .C.IC temperature sensors .Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge. Newyaork. 4.3 lead and 4 lead connections thermistors .Different types of manometers . Barney G. Noltingk. Springer Verlog.. Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.EI256 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0: 0 Marks: 40 + 60 UNIT: I -Pressure Measurement Pressure standards .Optical Pyrometer UNIT: IV -Level Measurement Visual techniques . Industrial Instrumentation.Radiation pyrometer. 1997.. Principles of Industrial Instrumentation.E..Electromagnetic flowmeter . Ltd. Eckman. Tatamangalam R.Differential pressure transmitters UNIT: II -Flow Measurement Positive displacement flowmeters .Smart transmitter with HART communicator-Virtual Instrumentation: definition. Patranabis.Calibration of flowmeters UNIT: III.Terminology.. Reference Books 1. 2.Resistance thermometer.Electrical methods . pennsylvania. Process Measurement and Analysis.. Transducer Engineering.Pressure gauge method Diaphragm box-Air purge system-Differential pressure method – Hydro-step for boiler drum level measurement . Measurement Systems: Application and Design. II Edition Butterworth Heinemann.Inferential flowmeter-Turbine flowmeter-Variable head flowmeters -Rotameter .Dead weight tester .Introduction of Field Bus Standard .Float operated devices . Wiley Eastern Ltd.PC based DAS for instrumentation and control. 2. 1992 ISBN 0-07-100697-4.Displacer devices . New Delhi.Laws of thermocouple .Doeblin E.Conductive sensors . 3rd Edition Chiton book company Radnor.S.I. 1.Ultrasonic flowmeter-Coriolis mass flowmeter.parts of the system. Text Books 1. Liptak B. -Temperature Measurement Temperature standards .Measuring circuits Speed of response -linearization .Features of smart and intelligent transmitters. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. D. Chennai 1999 3..capacitive sensors -Ultrasonic method -Solid level measurement UNIT: V -Smart and Virtual Instrumentation Smart transmitters: Introduction. Allied publishers. “Instrumentation Reference Book”.. MC RAN Hill.. 2000 ISBN 1-85-233-208-5 School of Electrical Sciences AN-68 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it . Ltd. Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design.fixed points -filled-system thermometers . B.Mcleod gauge .

differential amplifier Unit II : Operation Amplifier And Applications: Scale Changer-Inverter Adder.Sample And Hold Circuit -555 Timers. 2.Astable. V.offset –frequency-slew rate . UNIT – II Generation of ultrasonic waves: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects. transit time. construction and characteristics. P.N.Rajendran. reflection and transmission coefficients. Transducers for Ultrasonic Flaw Detection-V. depth and flow. resonance. direct contact and immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection. search unit types. Bindal Credit: 3: 1: 0 a K Unit I : Operational Amplifier Operational amplifier-ideal op-amp. UNIT – V Ultrasonic applications: Ultrasonic applications in medical diagnosis and therapy.EI257 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 4:0:0 Marks: 40+60 UNIT – I Ultrasonic waves: Principles and propagation of various waves.DC characteristics –bias.Multiplier. Text Book 1. characterization of ultrasonic transmission.Monostable Operation n u r EI258 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS Marks:40 + 60 a y i n U s r e v y it School of Electrical Sciences AN-69 .frequency compensation techniques-Non inverting and inverting amplifier .Palanichamy. UNIT – III Ultrasonic test methods: Pulse echo. Narosa Publishing House.Differentiator. medium parameters. Power level. intensity and attenuation of sound beam.DividerComparator-Applications-Logarithmic Amplifier -Current To Voltage Converter-Voltage To Current Converter –Precision Rectifier-Clipper – Clamper .op amp internal circuit . acoustical holography. Science and Technology of Ultrasonics-Baldev Raj. UNIT – IV Ultrasonic measurement: Ultrasonic method of measuring thickness. variables affecting ultrasonic testing in various applications.Integrator.Subtractor.AC characteristics.

. Denton J. McGraw Hill.Shannon's sampling theorems .Z domain equivalent Unit III : Function Realisation Pulse transformation function by direct.A/D & D/A converters .switched capacitor filter Unit IV : Voltage Regulators and Multipliers Series op amp regulator. Unit IV: Stability of Digital Control Systems Stability studies ..Reconstruction . School of Electrical Sciences AN-70 n u r EI259 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS Marks: 40 + 60 a y i n U s r e v y it .1989. Prentice Hall of India Pvt.K Sawhney. Digital to Analog conversion – Analog to Digital conversion.state variable filter.Jury's stability test. Ltd 1992 3. Successive approximation A/D. 2. ”Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits”. A. Coughlin and Driscol. .phase detector and comparator.Response of sampled data systems to step and ramp inputs .Bilinear transformation .Sampled Data Control system. Unit II : System Response Review of Z and Inverse Z transform .FSK modulation and demodulation Text Books 1.frequency doubling.” Linear integrated circuits” .1982 Credit: 4:0:0 a K Unit I : Sample Theory and Converters Review of Sample theory .” Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation” .Steady state errors .723 general-purpose regulator.Monolithic PLL .Digital quantization.Sampled data model for continuous system .divisionfrequency – translation-AM. Dual slope A/D.1991 2. cascade and parallel realization . Ramp type A/D. Unit : PLL Basic principle.IC voltage regulator.Unit III : Amplifiers and Filters Buffer amplifier.isolation amplifier.ISBN81-203-0807-7 Reference Books: 1.analog and digital . Ramkant Gaykwad. .FM.Controllability and observability..Use of op-amp with capacitive displacement transducer-charge amplifierinstrumentation amplifier. Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain.. “Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits”.filters -Low pass-high pass.Zero Order Hold.Wiley Eastern Ltd. Dailey. Dhanpat Rai & sons.voltage controlled oscillator .Application of PLL – frequency multiplication. ”Op amps & Linear Integrated Circuits” PHI III Edition.band pass – band reject filter-first order and second order transformations.phase angle detection – Precision Reference Regulator.

Wiley & Sons.I.M: “Digital Control Engineering”. Hardware and Software. Sine wave generation. UNIT III : IIR Digital Filter Design Block diagram Representation of digital filter-Basic IIR digital filter structures. S.. 1984. School of Electrical Sciences AN-71 n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 .digitizingaliasing-anti-alias filter. Nagrath. Frequency sampling method. Computational advantages of FFT over DFT-Decimation in time FFT algorithm-Decimation-in Frequency FFT algorithm. McGraw Hill. “ Control System Engineering” . Text Book 1.J. 3. Basic Architecture of TMS 320 F2407 Assembly language Instructions. “Discrete Control systems” .. Alson.Dead-beat algorithm. M.Ringing . equiripple linear phase FIR filter design using MATLAB. Triangular wave generation. 1988 Reference Books 1. J.1985. Convolution using MAC and MACD Instructions. Gopal. Structure realization using MATLAB. Constantine Houpis. : “ Microprocessors with Applications in Process Control” . window based FIR filter design using MATLAB. Noise-Classification of continuous time signals and Discrete time signals classification and properties of systems.Theory.Structure Realization Using MATLAB-Preliminary consideration in digital filter design – Bilinear a K UNIT IV : FIR Digital Filter Design Basic FIR Filter Structure. 1985 2. FIR Filter design based on windowed Fourier series.TMS320F2407 Introduction to programmable DSPs. UNITII : Fundamentals: Z-Transform and its properties –Inverse Z-transform –Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT) and its properties-Radix 2FFT.Wiley Eastern Publications.State sequences for sampled data systems . Least square error FIR filter design using MATLAB UNIT V : DSP Processor. TMH. EI340 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credit: 3:1:0 UNIT I : Introduction to DSP: Signals and their orgin. Convolution theorem-linear convolution and circular convolution Applications of Digital Signal Processing (DSP).Positional and incremental forms . and Gopal. Sampling Theoram-sampling. and Garry Lamont. Ramp signal generation.solutions Unit V : Digital Process Control Design Digital PID algorithm .Implementation of control algorithms using microcontroller – Block diagram study of digital implementation.Dahlin's and Kalman's algorithms ..

Runge Kutta method.ISBN-81-203-1129-9. 2003 ISBN 0195150112 2.Algorithms and Applications .Numerical methods. Addision – Wesley 2002.K.Combined controller estimator compensator UNIT IV : Stability of Linear System Definition of stability – Stability of linear system – Asymptotically Stable System.. B.Stability analysis by describing function method Text Books 1. M Bhasker.Euler’s method.ISBN 0-07-047334-X References 1. Oxford University Press. Stanislaw Zak.Taylor Series.. John .Pearson Education Asia. Mitra “Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach ‘Tata McGraw Hill Edition .Proakis . EI341 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEM Credit : 3:1:0 UNIT I : Modeling of Dynamic Systems Definition of System. 3.Text Books 1.Ifeachor Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach . 2.Hurwitz and Routh stability criteria UNIT V : Stability of Nonlinear System Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems.2002.Venkataramani..G. ‘Digital Control and State Variable Methods’.Phase plane.ISBN 0-07-044705-5 2. 1993.Isoclines. Texas Instruments. Emmanuel C.Mathematical modeling.Lyapunov function for nonlinear system. Tata Mc Graw-Hill Publishing company limited .2002.State space representation of systemCentrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle. ISBN 0070483027 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v y it Marks: 40+60 School of Electrical Sciences AN-72 . Systems and Control.Principle of Linearization of Differential Equation UNIT III : Linear System Analysis Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability –Companion forms– Controller / Observer form – State feed-back control – State estimator – Full order and reduced order Estimator. Digital Signal Processors.ISBN 81-7808-609-3.Digital Signal Processing Principles.Predictor Corrector method. Tata McGraw Hill Pub.Permanent Magnet stepper motor. MS 3205X User's Manual.2001. Sanjit . Gopal M. 2003.Inverted Pendulum UNIT II : Analysis of Mathematical models State space method.

alcohols. study of hydrogen bonding effects. coordination and metal carbonyl compounds. Godwin. 2001 ISBN 0139586539 2.Reference Books 1. Prentice-Hall Publication. Modern Control Engineering .fragmentation associated with functional groups – alkanes. alkenes. overtone and hot bands – Normal modes of vibration of molecules such as carbon dioxide and water – factors influencing the number and energy of absorption bands.. The Control hand book. Graebe. fundamental. Control system design. 1996 ISBN 0849385709 3. A2B2 and ABX systems. Ogata. John Wiley and Sons. factors affecting the group frequencies. Unit IV: Mass Spectrometry & Thermogravimetry Mass spectrometry – basic principles instrumentation – the mass spectrometer – isotope abundances – molecular ion – metastable ions – fragmentation process . Nice. Unit II : IR-Spectroscopy and Raman Spectroscopy Selection rules for IR absorption . and Salgado. C. aromatic hydrocarbons.characteristic group vibrations.Krammers degeneracy-Applications. USA. vibraitonal spectra of ionic. Prentice Hall. 2000 ISBN 0471366013 4. IEEE and CRC Press. New Jersey.inorganic and organometallic compounds. tau and delta values – spin – spin splitting of AB. Norman S. Raman spectroscopy – vibrational mode – group frequencies of organic . William S.spin splitting. position and multiplet structure of the spectra – hyperfine splitting of some simple systems.carboxylic acids and esters – Mclafferty rearrangement and applications – School of Electrical Sciences AN-73 a K n u r a y i n U s r e v Marks : 40+60 y it . Unit III : Nuclear Magnetic Resonance & Electronic Spin Resonance Spectroscopy Basic definitions of magnetic moment and spin quantum numbers – the chemical shift – factors affecting the magnitude of chemical shift – the TMS scale. internal rotation and NMR –Deuterium exchange reaction – NMR of nuclei other than hydrogen –mainly C13 and applications – FT NMR and its advantages over conventional NMR EPR – principles. zero field splitting.aldehydes. 2001 ISBN 0130609072 EI342 INSTRUMENTAL ANALYSIS Credit 4:0:0 Unit I : UV-Visible Spectroscopy The electromagnetic spectrum – fundamental laws of photometry-deviation from Beer’s law –presentation of spectra – correlation of electronic absorption spectra with molecular structure –molar absorptivity – structural effects – effect of temperature and solvents – quantitative methods – photometric titrations – electron spectroscopy for chemical analysis (ESCA). Control Systems Engineering.factors causing shifts in group vibrations – skeletal vibrations – finger printing – double beam IR spectrometer – components and functions –sample handling – Nujolmull and potassium bromide pellet technique – Applications of IR spectroscopy in structural elucidation of molecules.some examples of spin.. Levine.F. factors affecting the intensity.K.

”Instrumental Methods edition.thermogravimetry (TG) – derivative thermogravimetry(DTG) – Differntial thermal analysis (DTA) – Differential Scanning Calorometry(DSC) – instrumentation and applications.Banwell. Unit V: Diffraction methods for structural studies X-ray diffraction – a brief account of the principles of molecular structure determination by X-ray diffraction from single crystal – structure factor. C. “Fundamentals of Molecular spectroscopy”.C.1991. phase problem and heavy atom methods.Macmillam.Dyer. W. Fourier synthesis.C.neutron diffraction – applications of neutron diffraction to studies of molecular structure. Prentice Hall of India.sixyh y it School of Electrical Sciences AN-74 .N. Patterson synthesis. R.Silverstien.NewYork.M. 1983. Reference books: 1.H. 2. Interpretation of Fourier Maps and results. Text Books 1. Electron diffraction – principles of electron diffraction and applications. third edition. “Organic Spectroscopy”. third edition.1991. 2.ELBS.Morril. advantages over X-ray diffraction studies.Williard.Bassler.1881. Willar. a K n u r a y i n U s r e v of Analysis”. J.”Absorption Spectroscopy of organic molecules”. McGrawHill.G.H. New Delhi.T.Kemp. 3.third edition.”Spectrometric Indentification of organic compounds”.1991. John Wiley.Merritt and Dean.

construction and sources of errors and compensation in PMMC & moving iron instruments – dynamometer and rectifier type ammeter and voltmeters – Calibration of ammeters and voltmeters. – Phasor diagrams .C.characteristics – applications. Credit 0:0:1 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 0:0:1 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 159 .ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code EI101 EI260 EI261 EI262 EI263 EI264 EI265 EI266 EI267 EI268 EI269 EI270 EI271 EI272 Subject Name Basic Electronics Workshop Electrical Measurements and Instruments Electronic Instrumentation Digital Signal Processing Electrical Machines Laboratory Electron Devices Laboratory Measurements Laboratory Sensors and Transducers Laboratory Control Systems Laboratory Signal Conditioning Circuits Laboratory Embedded Systems Laboratory Computer Based Process Control Laboratory Digital Control Laboratory Digital Signal Processing Laboratory EI 101 Basic Electronics Workshop Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI260 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND INSTRUMENTS Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I Different Types of Ammeters and Voltmeters Galvanometers – Principle of operation.T. and V. potentiometers – their applications – construction and theory of operation C. Unit III Potentiometers and Instrument Transformers Student type potentiometer û L and N type potentiometer – precision potentiometer – polar and co-ordinate type – A.T. Unit II Wattmeters and Energy Meters Electrodynamics type wattmeter – theory and its errors – methods of correction – LPF wattmeter – phantom loading – induction type Kwh meter – theory and adjustments – calibration of wattmeters and energy meters.

2006. 2001. Velocity. 2. Sawhney A.Measurement of frequency and Phase by Lissajous method Electromagnetic Interference – Grounding and Shielding Techniques Unit III Digital Instruments: ADC and DAC – Types – Digital Voltmeters and Multi-meters – Digital frequency counters – Digital waveform generator – Digital storage Oscilloscope – Three bit Flash converter – Digital Q meter – Digital IC tester – Digital LCR meter Unit IV Digital Measurement: Digital Displacement transducer: Incremental and Absolute – Digital method of measuring Displacement. bridge methods and their compensations – detectors – excited field A.W.C. Ltd.K. Prentice Hall of India. 3. and Widdis F. 4.B. 1992. Basic Electrical measurements. Electrical measurements and measuring instruments. Golding E. New Delhi. Bridges – measurement of inductance. A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation.E.C. David A Bell. Capacitance. Sir Issac Pitman and Sons Pvt.. medium and high resistances – ammeter – voltmeter method – Wheatstone bridge-precision form of Wheatstone bridge – Kelvin double bridge – Ohmmeter – series and shunt type ohmmeters – high resistance measurement – Megger – direct deflection methods –Earth Resistance measurement. References 1. Frequency and Phase difference Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 160 . 1999. Dhanpat Rai and Sons.. galvanometer – Vibration galvanometer. Stout M.C. Electronic Instrumentation and measurements..Unit IV Resistance Measurement Measurement of low. capacitance – Q of coil – Maxwell bridge – Wien bridge – Hay’s bridge – Schering bridge – Anderson bridge – Desaughty’s bridge – errors in A.. New Delhi. New Delhi. Unit V Impedance Measurement A. Prentice Hall of India. EI261 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4:0:0 Unit I Electronic Analog Meter: DC and AC voltmeter – FET input voltmeter – Vector impedance meter – Wave analyzer – Signal generator – Harmonic distortion analyzer – Spectrum analyzer – Correlator – Power meter Unit II Analog Instruments: General purpose oscilloscope – CRT screen characteristics – Vertical and Horizontal amplifiers – Time base generator – Trigger pulse circuit – Delay line – Sampling Oscilloscope .

1999. References 1. and Cage J. and Mani V. DFT – FFT computations using DIT and DIF algorithms . Rangan. Text Books 1.M. Digital Instrumentation.cascade. Unit III: Infinite Impulse Response Digital Filters Review of classical analog filters-Butterworth. Review of Discrete Time LTI Systems – Linear..S.parallel forms Unit IV: Introduction to programmable DSPs Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator Unit – Modified Bus Structure and memory Access in P-DSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multiported memory – VLIW Architecture – Pipelining .FIR filter design using window method – frequency sampling method – realization of structures of FIR filters – transversal and linear phase structures... USA 1987. Tata McGraw Hill. McGraw Hill. 3.J. Sarma G.. Oliver B. DTFT.Time response and frequency response analysis of discrete time systems to standard input signals.H. Prentice Hall of India. Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques.Chebyshev and Elliptic filters– Transformation of analog filters into equivalent digital filters using impulse invariant method and Bilinear Z transform method-Realization of stuctures of IIR filtersDirect. 2. Instrumentation Devices and Systems.. McGraw Hill Ltd. 2002. Byers T. Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation.V.S. McGraw Hill. New Delhi. 1998. New Delhi. Bouwens A..typical applications -advantages of digital signal processing compared with analog processing.R. 1998 2.D.J. USA.Special addressing modes – P-DSPs with RISC and CISC processors Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 161 .. Unit II: Finite Impulse Response Digital Filters Symmetric and Antisymmetric FIR filters .. Electronic Test Equipment: Principle and Applications. Cooper W. EI 262 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credit: 3:1:0 Unit I : Introduction Concepts of signal processing . C.Unit V Digital Displays: Digital Alpha Numeric Displays – 7 Segment displays – Dot matrix displays – XY Plotter – UV recorder – Magnetic tape recorder – Digital recording and Data Loggers. circular and sectioned convolutions DFS.

2. Programming and Applications’. Ifeacher and Barrie W. 2001 3. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. PHI of India Ltd. Emmanuel C. ‘Digital Signal Processing. ‘Digital Signal Processing ..A Computer Based Approach’. John G. Addition – Wesley Longman Ltd. ‘Digital Time Signal Processing’.Mitra.Manolakis. Venkatramani. Proakis and Dimitris G. New Delhi. 2000. B. Jervis. M. New Delhi. EI 263 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 264 ELECTRON DEVICES LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 265 MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 266 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 267 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 162 . ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Practical Approach’. UK.. ‘Digital Signal Processors Architecture. 2002 References 1. Openheim and Schafer. 2nd Edition. Sanjit K. Tata McGraw-Hill. Algorithms and Applications’. Prentice Hall of India. 3rd Edition. Bhaskar. Texas Instruments Manuel for TMS320C5XProcessor. New Delhi. Reprint. 2002 2.Unit V: Architecture of TMS 320C5X Introduction – Architecture of TMS320C5X – On-chip peripherals – Instruction set of TMS320C5X – Simple Programs Text Books 1. 2nd 2004 Low Price Edition 3.

EI 268 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 269 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 270 COMPUTER BASED PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 271 DIGITAL CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time EI 272 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 163 .

School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS Code 09EI101 09EI201 09EI202 09EI203 09EI204 09EI205 09EI206 09EI207 09EI208 09EI209 09EI210 09EI211 09EI212 09EI213 09EI214 09EI215 09EI216 09EI217 09EI218 09EI219 09EI220 09EI221 Subject Name Basic Electronics And Instrumentation (Common to All Branches) Analytical Instrumentation Biomedical Instrumentation Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation Ultrasonic Instrumentation Aircraft Instrumentation Telemetry and Telecontrol Automotive Instrumentation Robotics and Automation Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries Instrumentation for Pollution Control Instrumentation and Control Systems Instrumentation and Control Laboratory Instrumentation and Process Control Robotics and Automation Telemetry and Telecontrol Signals and Systems Control Systems Electrical Machines Electronic Circuits Credit 4: 0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 0:0:1 3:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 09EI222 09EI223 09EI224 09EI225 09EI226 09EI301 09EI302 09EI303 Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory Logic and Distributed Control Systems Embedded Instrumentation Networks & Protocols for Instrumentation & Control Industrial Instrumentation Process Control Real Time and Embedded Systems 4:0:0 0:0:1 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 09EI304 09EI305 09EI306 09EI307 09EI308 09EI309 09EI310 09EI311 09EI312 09EI313 09EI314 Digital Instrumentation Advanced Digital Process Control Computer Architecture Embedded Networking Mobile Communication Mobile Computing Embedded System Software Design Intelligent Controllers Digital Image Processing Techniques Optimal Control System Identification And Adaptive Control 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 Page 331  Karunya University  .

Tata McGraw-Hill. SCR. temperature etc. Pressure. UNIT I: ANALOG ELECTRONICS PN junction . Transducers and Measurement techniques. Moisture and pH UNIT V : MEASURING INSTRUMENTS Galvanometer – Ammeter – Voltmeter .CB. • An exposure is given to Analog and Digital Electronics and Devices • To provide the details of various transducers which are used to measure flow.Multimeter Calibration of meters . Salivahanan S.Ohmmeter .CRT Displays .Voltage Regulators . Principles of measuring instruments for Temperature.Bipolar junction transistor. Diac. Fourth Reprint. Flow.A/D and D/A conversion .(series and shunt) . 2008 Karunya University  Page 332  . Course Outcome: • To review the theory of semiconductors. Displacement. Velocity and Acceleration. Suresh Kumar N. • A clear idea has been given about electronic instruments with emphasis on display devices. CC configuration and characteristics . Vallavaraj A. “Electronic Devices and Circuits” First Edition.FET.Rectifiers .Seven Segment Displays TEXT BOOKS 1.Digital methods of measurement Measurement of Frequency and time interval .Zener diode . Viscosity. Triac.Flip flops .Half and full addersRegisters-Counters UNIT III: INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENT Instrument classification – Standards .Boolean algebra.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI315 09EI316 09EI317 09EI318 09EI319 Advanced Instrumentation & Process Control For Food Processing Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory Embedded Systems Laboratory Artificial Intelligence and AI Programming 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 3:1:0 09EI101 BASIC ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION (Common to All Branches) Credit: 4: 0 :0 Course objective: To equip the student with relevant knowledge about Basic Analog and Digital Electronics. CE. Level.Static and dynamic characteristics – Calibration Measurement errors UNIT IV: SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Classification of transducers. UJT – Characteristics UNIT II : DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Binary number system – Logic gates .

Chand and Company Ltd. Fifth Edition. 8th Edition. ‘Transducer Engineering’. ammonia electrodes. selective ion electrodes. reference electrodes. Alan.K. Malvino and Leach. IR analyzers.Dust and smoke measurements UNIT IV: pH METERS AND DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYZERS Principle of pH measurement. Air pollution due to carbon monoxide. drugs and pharmaceutical laboratories and above all for environmental pollution monitoring and control. 4. 1999 09EI201 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3: 0: 0 Course Objective: The course is designed to equip the students with an adequate knowledge of a number of analytical tools which are useful for clinical analysis in hospitals. S. Renganathan. Morris. ‘Principles of Electronics’. Allied Publishers Limited. NO2 and H2S types. hydrogen electrodes. S.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 2.S Kalsi. biosensors. Tata McGraw – Hill. ‘Principles of Measurements and Instrumentation’. thermal conductivity analyzers. 2nd edition. Mehta V. 3. Tata McGraw-Hill. Course Outcome: • To understand basic principles of various analytical instruments • To understand instrumentation required for different types of analytical instruments • To know the typical clinical and industrial applications of analytical instruments UNIT I: COLORIMETRY AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRY Special methods of analysis – Beer-Lambert law – Colorimeters – UV-Vis spectrophotometers – Single and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR spectrophotometers – Types – Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – Atomic absorption spectrophotometers – Sources and detectors – FTIR spectrophotometers – Flame emission photometers UNIT II: CHROMATOGRAPHY Different techniques – Gas chromatography – Detectors – Liquid chromatographs – Applications – High-pressure liquid chromatographs – Applications UNIT III: INDUSTRIAL GAS ANALYZERS AND POLLUTION MONITORING INSTRUMENTS Types of gas analyzers – Oxygen. S. Prentice Hall of India. II Edition REFERENCES 1. 2003. dissolved oxygen analyzer – Sodium analyzer – Silicon analyzer Karunya University  Page 333  . sulphur dioxide estimation . H. 2003. hydrocarbons. nitrogen oxides. ‘Digital Principles and Applications’. 2. glass electrodes. analysis based on ionization of gases. ‘Electronic Instrumentation’.

Amplifiers. ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’. • To discuss the measurement of physiological parameters. ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’. Tata McGraw Hill publishing Co. 2. UNIT II: BASIC COMPONENTS OF BIOMEDICAL SYSTEM Electrodes-Micro. 1995. 2. needle and surface electrodes. Singapore. Saunders Publishing. ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Course Outcome: • To introduce the concepts of physiology and the Electrical Components of a Biomedical System. 1992. UNIT I: PHSYIOLOGY Cell and its structure-Action and Resting Potential . 09EI202 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3: 0: 0 Course Objective: To learn the physiology of the human body and the Instrumentation related to Biomedical Systems. 1992. Mass spectrometers – Different types – Applications TEXT BOOKS 1. CBS publishing & distribution.Dean.. 1987. Robert D. 3. DA Skoog and D.S.W.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT V: RADIO CHEMICAL AND MAGNETIC RESONANCE TECHNIQUES Nuclear radiations – Detectors – GM counter – Proportional counter – Solid state detectors – Gamma cameras – X-ray spectroscopy – Detectors – Diffractometers – Absorption meters – Detectors.Ewing.M.Applications. NMR – Basic principles – NMR spectrometer . Khandpur. UNIT III: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS Karunya University  Page 334  . ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’.Settle.Willard. H. Ltd. differential amplifiers. chopper amplifiers-isolation amplifier. McGraw Hill. G. Holt.propagation of action potential-Sodium pump-Nervous system-CNS-PNS –Nerve cell-Synapse-Cardio pulmonary system-Physiology of heart and lungs Circulation and respiration. Braun. F.West. ‘Instrumental methods of analysis’. L.A.A.Merritt. McGraw Hill. 2006.H.L. J.Preamplifiers. R. • To understand the concepts of Imaging System and Telemetry ad the various Therapeutic Equipments used in Medicine.

Erich A.fiber optic gyroscope Karunya University  Page 335  .Lead systems and recording methods-Typical waveforms. 09EI203 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3: 0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers and their applications in the field of Instrumentation. liquid level and strain .Pfeiffer.2002/PHI 2. “Bio-Medical Instrumentation and Measurements” II edition. Anuradha Agencies.2—3. M.LED -LD .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) ECG-EEG-EMG-ERG. O2 in exhaust air-pH of blood. voltage.”Principles of Applied Bio-Medical Instrumentation John Wiley & Sons 1989.Ltd. Measurement of blood pressure-Cardiac output-Cardiac rate-Heart sound-Respiratory rate. L. UNIT V: ASSISTING AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS Pace makers-Defibrillators-Ventilators-Nerve and muscle stimulators-Diathermy-Heart Lung Machine-Audiometers-Dializers. UNIT IV: IMAGING SYSTEM AND TELEMETRY X-ray machine-Radio graphic and fluoroscopic techniques-Computer tomography-MRI Ultrasonography-Endoscopy-Thermography-Different types of biotelemetry systems and patient Monitoring-Electrical safety.Optical detectors . TEXT BOOKS 1.PIN and APD UNIT II : INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBERS Fiber optic sensors .A.DetectorsApplication in Instrumentation .E.Baker.Interferometric method of measurement of length. 2.Weibell. Fred J. GSR measurements. Lesilie Cromwell.Geddes and L. Course Outcome: • To give an insight into the principle of operation and applications of Optical fibers • To understand the LASER operation and its applications in Instrumentation and Biomedical Fields UNIT I: OPTICAL FIBERS AND THEIR PROPERTIES Principles of light propagation through a fiber-Different types of fibers and their properties Transmission characteristics of optical fiber-absorption losses-Scattering losses-Dispersion Optical sources . Pearson Education.Moire fringes measurement of pressure. R.S. temperature.Arumugam.Gas volume-Flow rate of CO2.Khandpur. REFERENCE BOOKS 1.2003.Bio-Medical Instrumentation. “Handbook of Bio-Medical Instrumentation” Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co.Fiber optic Instrumentation system .Plethysmography. current.Different types of modulators.

John F Ready. solid lasers. Holography for non-destructive testing -Holographic components .Q. Cambridge University Press. 1968 ISBN 0124319025 09EI204 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective: To discuss the transducer technology and electronics instrumentation Course Outcome: • To study the fundamental aspects of wave propagation • To discuss the principles and generation of ultrasound by different methods • To discuss different ultrasonic test methods • To discuss the ultrasonic measurement • To discuss different applications of ultrasonics UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO ULTRASONIC WAVES Ultrasonic Waves: Principles And Propagation Of Various Waves. laser and tissue interaction . TMH. liquid lasers . and Thiagarajar K. Medium Parameters.laser modes resonator configuration . McGraw Hill. Power Level.K.semi conductor lasers UNIT IV: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS Laser for measurement of distance.cavity dumping . Optical Electronics Foundation book . velocity.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT III: LASER FUNDAMENTALS Fundamental characteristics of Lasers . Holographic Interferometry and applications. Monte Ross.Basic principle.. Ghatak A. Industrial Lasers and their Applications. 1989 ISBN 052134089 Reference Books 1. 1997 ISBN 0125839618 3.Medical applications of lasers. methods.material processing . Karunya University  Page 336  . Academic Press. melting and trimming of materials . welding.removal and vaporization UNIT V: HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION Holography . John and Harry.properties of laser. McGraw Hill.switching and mode locking . Reflection And Transmission Coefficients. Industrial Applications of Lasers.three level and four level lasers . plastic surgery.1995 ISBN 0070576378 2. length.laser heating. gynecology and oncology. Intensity And Attenuation of Sound Beam.Types of lasers Gas lasers. Laser Applications. Jasprit Singh. brain surgery. Characterization Of Ultrasonic Transmission. current. McGraw Hill 1974 ISBN 0070844437 2. acceleration. removal of tumors of vocal cords. Text Books 1. voltage and atmospheric effect .Laser instruments for surgery. Semi Conductor Optoelectronics.

Josef Krautkramer Ultrasonic Testing Of Materials’. UNIT IV: ULTRASONIC MEASUREMENT Ultrasonic Measurement: Ultrasonic Method Of Measuring Thickness. UNIT II: FLIGHT INSTRUMENTATION Static & pitot pressure source -altimeter -airspeed indicator -machmeter -maximum safe speed indicator. UNIT V: ULTRASONIC APPLICATIONS Ultrasonic Applications: Ultrasonic Applications In Medical Diagnosis And Therapy. Transit Time.Alan E Crawford. P.instrumentation -instrument displays. Fourth Edition. Second Edition. Karunya University  Page 337  . Search Unit Types. Construction And Characteristics. UNIT III: ULTRASONIC TESTING Ultrasonic Test Methods: Pulse Echo.pit layout. panels. Direct Contact And Immersion Type And Ultrasonic Methods Of Flaw Detection.Palanichamy. John Wiley & Sons Inc. Narosa Publishing House. First Edition 2004. Acoustical Holography. First edition 09EI205 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the basics of Aircraft and the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems Course Outcome: • To give an introduction about the Aircraft and the Display Equipments • To learn the working of various sensors used in the Flight • To analyze in detail about the Gyroscopic Instruments and Power Plant Instruments UNIT I: INTRODUCTION Classification of aircraft .Julian R Frederick. Variables Affecting Ultrasonic Testing In Various Applications. REFERENCE BOOK 1. ‘Ultrasonic Engineering’.accelerometer. Depth And Flow. Resonance. 3.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT II: ULTRASONIC WAVE GENERATION Generation Of Ultrasonic Waves: Magnetostrictive And Piezoelectric Effects. cock. Science And Technology Of Ultrasonics-Baldev Raj. ‘Ultrasonic Engineering’. V. Narosa Publishing House. TEXT BOOK 1. Academic Press Inc.Rajendran. 2.

methods of telemetry. aircraft magnetism..example of a landline telemetry system. • To know the different techniques used in radio telemetry.FSK-Delta modulation coding and decoding equipment example of a radio telemetry system. UNIT III : RADIO TELEMETRY Block diagram of a radio telemetry system transmitting and receiving techniquesAM. UNIT I : TELEMETRY FUNDAMENTALS CLASSIFICATION: Fundamental concepts: significance. Course Outcome: • To know the basic concepts of telemetry system. • To understand the concept of optical telemetry system.FM.Compass errors gyro magnetic compass. UNIT IV: AIRCRAFT COMPUTER SYSTEMS Terrestrial magnetism. 09EI206 TELEMETRY AND TELECONTROL Credit: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To expose Fundamental concepts in Telemetry and to give idea where it can be used in control applications.electrical.J . Direct reading magnetic components. E.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT III: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS Gyroscopic theory -directional gyro indicator artificial horizon -turn and slip indicator.current systems-voltage systems synchro systems . Pitman and sons. Karunya University  Page 338  . Pallett.B. UNIT V : POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTS Fuel flow -Fuel quantity measurement. pneumatic. • To analyze the methods used for tele control. : " Aircraft Instruments -Principles and applications". 1981.optical detectors trends in fibre optic device development-example of an optical telemetry system.digital coding methods advantages of PCM. Text Book 1. functional blocks of telemetry and tele control system .PM multiplexing -transmitting and receiving techniques. hydraulic and optical telemetrystate of the art-telemetry standards. Electrical telemetry. exhaust gas temperature measurement and pressure measurement. principle.PPM. UNIT IV : OPTICAL TELEMETRY Optical fibres for signal transmission -sources for fiber optic transmission .PWM.

K. Prentice Hall Inc. TEXT BOOKS 1. 2008 3.. “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”.A.Odometer and Taximeter Design . 2.Design of Alphanumeric Display for Board Instruments UNIT III -WARNING AND ALARM INSTRUMENTS Brake Actuation Warning System.Chand Co.. UNIT: I -AUTOMOBILE PANEL METERS AND SENSOR DESIGN Ergonomics. telecontrol apparatus-remote adjustment.Speed Sensor . Tomasi W. 2. 2003 4.Pritchard & Joseph A. “Satellite Communication Systems Engineering”. REFERENCES 1. Phi. “Principles Of Communication Engineering” S.. Senior. “ Optical Fiber Communications Principles And Practice” Second Edition This Indian Reprint 2004 09EI207 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the various meters and Instrumentation used in Automobiles. Wilbur L.Panel Meters. 2nd Edition. Course Outcome: • To learn the design and construction of panel meters • To understand the design and working of Indicating Instruments. Fifth Edition Second Indian Reprint 2003. Handbook Of Telemetry And Remote Control 1)Elliot L. John M.Air Pressure Warning System .Vehicle Speed Sensor Design .Oil Pressure Warning System Engine Overheat Warning System .Engine Cooling Water Temperature Sensors Design . Trafficators .Speed Warning System Karunya University  Page 339  . Gerd Keiser.Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Design .Sensor for Fuel Level in Tank .8 .First L8 Na L 2 3. Switching and Control Devices.Air Pressure Sensors .Engine Oil Temperature Sensor.. Mcgraw Hill.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT V : TELECONTROL METHODS Analog and digital techniques in telecontrol.Controllers. Anokh Singh. Dhanpat Rai & Sons.Sciulli.Balancing Coil Indicator Design Ammeter and voltmeter .example of a telecontrol system. Gruenberg 34075 629. Sawhney. Warning Instruments • To learn the various Dashboard Amenities. 2003.Flash System .Moving Iron Instruments . 2005. “Optical Fiber Communications”. 1st Indian Print. Guidance and regulation Tele control using information theory. UNIT II -INDICATING INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN Moving Coil Instrument Design . “Course in Electrical & Electronics Measurement & Instrumentation”.

Toggle Switches Limit Switches .F. Judge. Chapman and Hall.Horn Design . Macmillan Press Ltd. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Goings.Ignition Key . 1977. London.Flush Switches . Sonde.Air Horn . ‘Automotive Electric Systems’. ‘Transducers and Display System’. 2.Permanent Magnet Horn . American Technical Society.Dushin.Relay and Solenoid . 1971.W. MIR Publishers.-Classification—Characteristics-Drives & Control systems –Actuators-Control loop UNIT II: TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS Karunya University  Page 340  .Car Fan .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Door Lock Indicators . W.A. ‘Electronic Measurements’. Billiet and Leslie . Walter.. Robot Dynamics and Kinematics and Applications Course Outcome: • To introduce the basic concept of Robots • To learn the principle of operation of sensors used in Robotics • To understand the working of End Effectors • To study the Robot motion Analysis • To discuss the applications of robots • UNITI I : INTRODUCTION Robots introduction -Basic components. 2. 3..S. ‘Modern Electric Equipments for Automobiles’. ‘Basic Metrology and Electrical Measurements’. E.Ignition Lock .Dash Board Illumination UNIT V -SWITCHES AND CONTROLS Horn Switches . REFERENCE BOOKS 1.Courtesy Lamp – Timepiece . New Delhi.Cigar Lamp .Dipper Switches .Pull and Push Switches .Non-contact Switches TEXT BOOKS 1.F.Instrument Wiring System and Electromagnetic Interference Suppression Wiring Circuits for Instruments . London.Gear Neutral Indicator . Ltd..Music Horns UNIT IV-DASH BOARD AMENITIES Car Radio Stereo .Windshield Wiper Window Washer . Walter E. 1975. the instrumentation involved.B. Moscow 1989 09EI208 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the Basic concepts of robots. Chicago.

Yoram Koren. UNIT IV : ROBOT MOTION ANALYSIS Robot motion analysis–Kinematics-Homogenous Transformations-Robot Dynamics Configuration of Robot controller UNIT V : APPLICATIONS Industrial Robots –welding painting-Assembly-Remote Controlled Robots for Nuclear.. ISBN-0-07-100442-4 09EI209 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES Credit : 3:0:0 Objective To expose the students to the Instrumentation field and control applied in petrochemical industries. Mikell P.. Course outcome • To expose the students to the control applied in distillation column. Thermal. • To provide adequate knowledge about the measurement of various parameters in petrochemical industry. 1980. “Robotics for Engineers”. TEXT BOOKS 1. vapour distillate and inserts. McGraw Hill.Robot programming Languages. Groover etal. 1986. UNIT I : DISTILLATION COLOUMNS Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: Distillation equipment. • To provide adequate knowledge about the chemical reactors and dryers. measurement and control of column pressure. Chemical plants-Industrial Automation. ISBN-0-07-100534-X 2. “Industrial Robots – Technology Programming & Applications” McGraw Hill Ltd. control of feed in reboiler and reflux. variables and degrees of freedom. • To expose the students to the various control loops in Petrochemical Industry. liquid distillate. UNIT II: CHEMICAL REACTORS Instrumentation and control in chemical reactors: Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Transducers & Sensors-Tactile sensors-Proximity & Range sensors-Image Processing & Analysis-Image Data reduction-Feature extraction-Object Recognition UNIT III : END EFFECTORS End effectors – Types-Mechanical Grippers-Vacuum Cups-Magnetic Grippers-Robot/End effector Interface. UNIT III: HEAT EXCHANGERS Karunya University  Page 341  . cascade and feed forward controls. Instrumentation and control in dryers: Batch dryers and continuous dryers.

Glass. UNIT V: EFFLUENT AND WATER TREAMENT Instrumentation and control in effluent and water treatment: Chemical oxidation. UNIT I: PAPER MAKING PROCESS Raw materials-pulping process – chemical recovery process – paper making process – Converting. 1993. 1995. Fourth edition. • To expose the students to the various control loops application in Paper Industry. Process Measurement and Analysis. Chilton Book Company. use of cascade and feed forward control UNIT IV: EVAPORATORS Instrumentation and control in evaporators: Types of evaporators. Petrochemical. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing. Paper. ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’. Liptak B. G. • To provide adequate knowledge about the measurement of various parameters in paper industry • To provide adequate knowledge about the Unit operations. steam heaters. ISBN-07506-2255-5 3. Nuclear Power. • To expose the students to the various control loops in Paper Industry. condensers.. reboilers and vaporisers. Liptak B. Chilton Book Company. G. ISBN–0–7506–2254-7 2. Lipták. UNIT II: INSTRUMENTATION Karunya University  Page 342  . Fossil Power. Pennsylvania. density. Iron and Steel. 1995. Chilton Book Co. Course Outcome • To expose the students to the basic processing in paper industry. Third edition . Reference Books 1. Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California. conductivity. Food. chemical reduction. Mining and Minerals. Considine D.. liquid to liquid heat exchangers. TEXT BOOK Béla G.M.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: Variables and degrees of freedom . precipitation and biological control. Process Control . Pennsylvania. measurement and control of absolute pressure. Third edition . neutralization. ISBN-0-07-012445-0 09EI210 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective To expose the students to the Instrumentation applied in Paper industries. McGraw Hill. Pharmaceutical’. Singapore. ISBN 0801956595. differential pressure and flow.

graphic displays and alarms. UNIT II: CASTING OF STEEL Primary rolling . raw steel making . electric furnace. ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’. iron making. UNIT III: INSTRUMENTATION Measurement of level. • To analyze the method which can be used in computer applications. UNIT I: DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS Flow diagram and description of the processes: Raw materials preparation. • To know the basic requirements of the steel making process. thickness and shape. 1994. pressure. density. B. Course Outcome: • To know the basic requirements of the iron making process. • To understand the concept of different measurement techniques. Karunya University  Page 343  . basic oxygen furnace. flow weight.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Measurements of basic weight – density – specific gravity – flow – level of liquids and solids– pressure – temperature – consistency – moisture – pH – oxidation – reduction potential –graphic displays and alarms UNIT III: CONTROL SYSTEMS Blow tank controls – digester liquor feed pump controls – brown stock watcher level control – stock chest level control – basic weight control – dry temperature control UNIT IV: DENSITY AND FLOW CONTROL Dissolving tank density control – white liquor classifier density control – white liquor flow control – condensate conductivity control UNIT V: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS Computer applications in pulping process control. stoves.G Liptak. temperature. • To know the different control systems used in the industries. 09EI211 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective: To expose Fundamental concepts in Instrumentation and to study how it can be used in Iron And Steel Industries. cold rolling and finishing. Chilton Book Company. liquid level control and input stock control TEXT BOOK 1. blast furnaces .

1988 2. coulemetry – pizeo eletric oscillations methods-paper tape method. Introduction to Modern Steel Making. Liptak B.A. Karunya University  Page 344  .atomic absorption spectra photometry. New Delhi. “Course in Electrical & Electronics Measurement & Instrumentation”. Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook.optical method-air pollution monitoring instruments. 1988. Considine D. rolling mill control. Fourth edition. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) Arun Syam Gorenc Seventh Edition First Indian Reprint 2006 09EI212 INSTRUMENTATION FOR POLLUTION CONTROL Credit : 3:0:0 UNIT I : ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING Classification. 1995 2. 2005. Tupkary R. volume 2. Khanna Publishers. ambient environmental monitoring –source monitoring –implant environment monitoring-personal monitoring.emission spectrograph. New Delhi. 4. Tupkary R. annealing process control Computer (center utilities dispatch computer). Sand casting old control. Khanna Publishers. UNIT IV : NOISE POLLUTION MONITORING Noise pollution and its measurement UNIT V : INDUSTRIAL POLLUTANTS AND ITS MONITORING Monitoring Instruments of industrial pollution. Swahney. Third edition..H. London.basics of monitoring technologies like conductimetry.H. G. Process Control. Singapore. Dhanpat Rai & Sons. CRC press. UNIT III : WATER POLLUTION MONITORING Water pollutants –basic techniques –spectrometric methods. 1993 – ISBN-0-07-012445-0 3.water pollution monitoring instruments. TEXT BOOKS 1. Instrument Engineers Handbook. Introduction to Modern Iron Making . REFERENCE BOOKS 1.M. UNIT II : AIR POLLUTION MONITORING Air Pollutants. UNIT V: COMPUTER APPLICATIONS Model calculation and logging. K. McGraw Hill.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT IV: CONTROL SYSTEMS Blast furnace stove combustion control system. gas and water controls in BOF furnace ..

acceleration – vibrometer. types. electrical torsion meter. Measurement of error and analysis. Classification of instruments as indicators. elastic transducers. ISBN-81-7556186-6. ultrasonic flow meter.Rao. Temperature measurement: Bimetallic. Tata McGraw Hill. measurement of high and low pressure. strain gauge. 2nd edition Wiley Interscience Inc. efflux viscometer.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) TEXT BOOKS 1.. Punmia. 2000. Precision and accuracy. Course Outcome: • To understand the concepts of Mechanical Instruments. V.N. 2000. pressure cells. Force measurement: scales and torque measurement: mechanical torsion meter. Ashok Jain. pyrometer and thermistors. frequency. thermocouples. ISBN-0-07-463002-4 2. “Air Pollution”. ISBN – 81-7008-091-6 4. HVN Rao.A. dew point meter. Hot-wire anemometer.L. Pressure measurement: bourdon. New York. Arceilala. the sensors for various physical variables and the basic concepts of Control Systems and Stability. 1998. B. wheat stone bridge circuit. 09EI213 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To give an idea about the general Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation. • To learn the basics of Control Systems and the concept of Stability UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO MEASUREMENT General Concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation. magnetic flow meter. humidity: absorption hydrometer.P.ISBN-0-07-457871-2 3. generalized measurement system. Tata McGraw Hill.. Kuderia. : “Air pollution”.C. Pragari Prakasan. Laxmi Publication. “Waste Water Treatment for Pollution Control”. gauge rosettes calibration. recorders and integrators – their working principles. Faith W. Strain: strain gauges. calibration. temperature compensation. UNIT IV: CONTROL SYSTEMS Karunya University  Page 345  . UNIT II: MEASUREMENT OF PHYSICAL VARIABLES Measurement of displacement. and Atkinson A. 1998. M. resistance thermometer. 1972.. REFERENCE BOOK 1. “Noise Pollution & Its Control”. “Waste Water Engineering”. UNIT III: INSTRUMENTS FOR VISCOSITY AND STRAIN MEASUREMENT Viscosity: capillary tube viscometer. • To study the principle of operation of different types of sensors used in the measurement of various physical variables. Soli J. speed. accelerometer etc.

and hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. Study of Tachogenerator characteristics 10.Roy D. Lewis Buck. A. ‘Mechanical Measurements’. TEXT BOOKS: 1.J. Study of characteristics of RTD 4. C. ELBS. and Hope. Wiley Eastern Limited. signal flow graphs.. Study of characteristics of Thermocouple 5. concept of stability.. ‘Control Systems Engineering’. Thomas G Beckwith. Simple problems.. 2002 09EI214 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0: 0: 1 1. servomechanisms. Study of characteristics of Loudspeaker 7. Study of characteristics of Pressure transducer 9.. RBA Publications. 1989. Process Control. 2nd Ed. ‘Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation’. 3. necessary condition for stability. transfer functions. Study of characteristics of strain gauge and Load Cell 2. I. Stability analysis. Sawhney. Dhanpat Rai & Co. Collet. 2005 2. simple problems.K. REFERENCE BOOKS: 1.Study of ON-OFF Temperature Controller 09EI215 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL Credit : 3:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the basics of Control Systems. proportional control. M.D. ‘Engineering Measurements’. N. routh stability criterion. Narosa Publishing House. ‘Control Systems’. Maragoni. Nagoor Kani. 2006. Study of characteristics of LVDT 3.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Open and closed systems. block diagram algebra.V. A. and about the various sensors Course Outcome: • To introduce the concepts o Process control and Laplace transforms • To understand the basic concepts of Controllers • To learn the concept of stability and stability analysis Karunya University  Page 346  . Study of characteristics of Microphone 8. A. differential and integral control. 2. New Delhi. Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer 6. UNIT V: TIME RESPONSE AND STABILITY ANALYSIS Time response of first order and second order systems. and Gopal.. Nagrath. Two way control.

A “Control Systems”. Mass spectrometer TEXT BOOKS: 1. Volume 3. Coughanowr. bimetallic strips UNIT V:MEASUREMENT OF LEVEL. DENSITY AND COMPOSITION Level sensor . pH meter.mechanisms. RBA publications. UNIT III: STABILITY ANALYSIS Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula. Second Edition. diaphragm. Gas chromatograph. differential pressure cell Temperature sensors –Construction and working of RTD. M and Gopal. 2006. characteristic equation. pressure sensor. Thermocouples.J.F Richardson A D. proportional control. Measurement of density – U-type densitometer. I. Donald R. 1991. “Control Systems Engineering”. Inductive pressure sensor. UNIT II: CONTROL SYSTEMS Open and closed loop systems. Karunya University  Page 347  . Thermistors. two-way control.feedback control – transient responses – lap lace transform – transforms of simple functions – step function. servo. REFERENCES: 1. and control element. dumbbell O2 analyser. Buoyancy meter Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell. Stability – concept of stability. Wiley Eastern Limited. loop – damped and cyclic response.2006. Block diagram algebra. Coulson & Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”. 2. capacitive sensing element. “Process System analysis and control” Mc. 2. an imprint of Elsevier . Routh test for stability UNIT IV: PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor. Nagrath. Zirconia oxygen analyser.Peacock. 1998. bourdon tube.Graw Hill International Edition .G.(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann. exponential function. differential control and integral control.Nagoor kani. controller. non-dispersive photometers. strain gauge. stability criterion. measurement.. ramp function and sine function. hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. J.Simple float systems. radioactive methods (nucleonic level sensing) – ultrasonic level sensor.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) • To discuss the various sensors for various physical variables UNIT I: INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL System – steady state design – process control – process control block diagram – definition of a process. definition of stability in a linear system.

ISBN-0-07-100534-X 2. • To study the various sensors used in robots. Mikell P. 1986. Groover etal. “Robotics for Engineers”. • To discuss some applications of robots in industry.. Yoram Koren. Chemical plants-Industrial Automation-Typical EGS of automated industries. “Industrial Robots – Technology Programming & Applications” McGraw Hill Ltd. • To study the End efectors • To study the Kinematics and dynamics of robots. 1980. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION Robots introduction -Basic components. ISBN-0-07-100442-4 09EI217 TELEMETRY AND TELECONTROL Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: Karunya University  Page 348  . McGraw Hill. CP UNIT IV: ROBOT MOTION ANALYSIS Robot motion analysis–Kinematics-Homogenous Transformations-Robot Dynamics Configuration of Robot controller UNIT V: APPLICATIONS Industrial Robots –welding painting-Assembly-Remote Controlled Robots for Nuclear. Course outcome • To study the various parts of robots and fields of robotics. PTP. analysis and control point of view. Thermal. Text Books 1.-Classification—Characteristics-Drives & Control systems –Actuators-Control loop UNIT II: SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Transducers & Sensors-Tactile sensors-Proximity & Range sensors-Image Processing & Analysis-Image Data reduction-Feature extraction-Object Recognition UNIT III: END EFFECTORS End effectors – Types-Mechanical Grippers-Vacuum Cups-Magnetic Grippers-Robot/End effector Interface-Software for industrial robots positive stop PGM.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI216 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: To provide comprehensive knowledge of robotics in the design.

Mcgraw Hill. Handbook Of Telemetry And Remote Control 1)Elliot L.. Wilbur L.current systems-voltage systems synchro systems-frequency systems position and pulse systems-example of a landline telemetry system. functional blocks of telemetry and tele control system methods of telemetry. Electrical telemetry'. Dhanpat Rai & Sons. 2. 2. “Course in Electrical & Electronics Measurement & Instrumentation”. “Advanced Electronic Communication Systems”. principle.FM. UNIT V : TELECONTROL METHODS Analog and digital techniques in telecontrol. UNIT III : RADIO TELEMETRY Block diagram of a radio telemetry system transmitting and receiving techniquesAM.First L8 Na L 2 3.. Tomasi W. Course Outcome: • To know the basic concepts of telemetry system. 2003 4.optical detectorstrends in fibre optic device development-example of an optical telemetry system. “Principles Of Communication Engineering” S. Prentice Hall Inc.digital coding methods advantages of PCM.Sciulli. UNIT I : TELEMETRY FUNDAMENTALS CLASSIFICATION: Fundamental concepts: significance. pneumatic.Chand Co. Sawhney. telecontrol apparatus-remote adjustment.FSK-Delta modulation coding and decoding equipment example of a radio telemetry system. Anokh Singh. Fifth Edition Second Indian Reprint 2003.PWM.8 .A.PPM. “Optical Fiber Communications”.example of a telecontrol system. REFERENCES 1. “Satellite Communication Systems Engineering”.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) To expose Fundamental concepts in Telemetry and to give idea where it can be used in control applications.Pritchard & Joseph A. hydraulic and optical telemetry-state of the art-telemetry standards. Senior. 2003.. UNIT IV : OPTICAL TELEMETRY Optical fibres for signal transmission -sources for fiber optic transmission . Gruenberg 34075 629. K. TEXT BOOKS 1. • To know the different techniques used in radio telemetry. “ Optical Fiber Communications Principles And Practice” Second Edition This Indian Reprint 2004 Karunya University  Page 349  . Phi. 1st Indian Print. 2005. • To analyze the methods used for tele control. John M. • To understand the concept of optical telemetry system.. Guidance and regulation Tele control using information theory.PM multiplexing -transmitting and receiving techniques. 2nd Edition. 2008 3. Gerd Keiser.electrical.

Reprint 2008. II Edition. REFERENCES: Karunya University  Page 350  . UNIT III: DISCRETISATION OF CT SIGNALS Representation of CT signals by samples – Sampling Theorem – Sampling Methods – Impulse. Alan V Oppenheim. John Wiley and Sons Inc. Natural and Flat Top Sampling – Reconstruction of CT signal from its samples – Effect of under sampling – Aliasing Error – Discrete Time processing of CT signals. New Delhi.II Edition. Alan S Wilsky and Hamid Nawab S. 2005.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI218 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Credit: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To study the signals and systems and analyze this using Fourier series and transforms Course Outcome: • To study the different types of signals and systems • To study the difference and differential equations • To study the Fourier analysis of Continuous Time and Discrete Time signals and systems • To study the representation of signal by samples-Sampling theorem • To study the Z transform and properties UNIT I : INTRODUCTION Continuous Time (CT) signals – CT signal operations – Discrete Time(DT) signals – Representation of DT signals by impulses – DT signal operations – CT and DT systems – Properties of the systems – Linear Time Invariant(LTI) and Linear Shift Invariant(LSI)systems – Continuous and Discrete Convolutions – CT system representations by differential equations – DT System representations by difference equations. TEXT BOOKS 1. UNIT V : TRANSFORM OPERATIONS OF DT SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Z transform and its properties – Inverse Z transform – Solution of Difference equations – Analysis of LSI systems using Z transform. UNIT II: FOURIER ANALYSIS OF CT SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Fourier series representation of periodic signals – Properties – Harmonic analysis of LTI systems – Convergence of Fourier series – Representation of a periodic signals by Continuous Time Fourier Transform (CTFT) – Properties – Frequency response of systems characterized by Differential Equations – Power and Energy Spectral Density – Parseval’s Relation. 2. “Signals & Systems”.Reprint PHI. UNIT IV : FOURIER ANALYSIS OF DT SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Discrete Time Fourier series representation of DT periodic signals – Properties –Representation of DT aperiodic signals by Discrete Time Fourier Transform(DTFT) –Properties – Frequency response of systems characterized by Difference Equations –Power and Energy Spectral Density concepts related to DT signals – Parseval’s Relation. “Signals & Systems”.. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen.

Course Outcome: • To understand the methods of representation of systems and to derive their transfer function models. McMillan Publishing Company. PWS Publishing Company. PI. stability analysis and applications. UNIT III: FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS Frequency response analysis ..Bode plot .D. 09EI219 CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1 :0 Course Objective: To introduce the fundamental concepts of control systems. • To study the three ways of designing compensation for a control system. • To give basic knowledge in obtaining the open loop and closed–loop frequency responses of systems.location of roots in s plane for stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 1. Lag and Lead-Lag compensator design . UNIT II: TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS Time response . Samir S Solimon and Srinath M. 1998. Newyork. 3. • To provide adequate knowledge in the time response of systems and steady state error analysis.Basic components of control systems Mathematical representation. Ashok Ambardar.type and order of a system . Lead.step response of first order and second order systems . II Edition.steady state error .characteristic equation . PD and PID controllers Design and applications UNIT V: APPLICATIONS Karunya University  Page 351  . PHI.Indian Reprint 2005. Second Edition Second Reprint 2002. UNIT IV: STABILITY ANALYSIS Stability . • To provide adequate knowledge in the Fuzzy controller and its application in control. 2. “Introduction to Analog and Digital Signal Processing”. • To understand the concept of stability of control system and methods of stability analysis. block diagram. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION System concept -Open loop and closed loop systems . P.Nyquist stability criterion. “Continuous and Discrete Signals and Systems”.frequency domain specifications.Nichol's chart .static error and generalized error coefficients -estimation of the specifications for a second order system. Fourth Edition . signal flow graph and transfer function of electrical systems. Rodger E Zaimer and William H Tranter.time domain Specifications .Root Locus Techniques. “Signals & Systems – Continuous and Discrete”.Polar plot . time and frequency response analysis. Translational and rotational mechanical systems.

Gopal.C. 3.C. overshoot and oscillations – Temperature controller – Pressure controller – flow and level controller using fuzzy network controllers.S. Ogata. TMH.. Kuo.c and d. Synchronous Motor: Karunya University  Page 352  . “Control System”. Benjamin C. K. Course Outcome: To impart knowledge on • Constructional details. 2003. principle of operation of AC Machines • Constructional details. Tech Max publications. 2006. Barapate. Hanna Pub. 4th Edition. M. TEXT BOOKS 1. “Modern Control Systems Engineering”. “Control System”.tachogenerator . Motors – Motor starters – Speed control of D. 2006. International Edition. 2002.C. Wiley & Sons. principle of operation of Special Machines. “Automatic Control Systems”. 2004.. 09EI220 ELECTRICAL MACHINES Credit: 3:1:0 Course Objective: To expose the students to the concepts of various types of electrical machines and applications of electrical machines. • Utilization of electrical Energy.M. Machines– Characteristics of shunt. constructional details of shell and core type transformer – EMF equation – No + load and on load operation – Test on Transformer – Equivalent circuit – Regulation –Testing-Load test. 4th Edition. Performance.C.“Control System Engineering”3rd Edition. UNIT III: INDUCTION & SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES Induction Motor: Construction and principle of operation – classification of induction motor– Torque equation – Torque slip characteristics – starting and speed control. Delhi. Open Circuit and Short Circuit test. Principles & Design”. starters and of DC Machines • Constructional details. generator – Constructional features of D.Manke. principle of operation of Transformers. • Constructional details.2003.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Synchros .C. B... 2. Nagrath and Gopal. motor – Back E.F – Torque equation – Characteristics of shunt. “Linear Control Systems”. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. motors. Fuzzy controller introduction –Fuzzy controllers to reduce settling time.. PHI.c servo motor. 2. UNIT II: TRANSFORMERS Principle. 3. PHI. principle of operation. series and compound motors – Losses and efficiency calculations – Applications of D. series and compound generators – Principle of operation of D.a. speed control UNIT I: DC MACHINES Principle and theory of operation of D.

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

Construction and principle of operation – EMF equation–V curves – Synchronization. UNIT IV: SPECIAL MACHINES Tachogenerator - AC and DC servomotor – Linear induction motor -Single phase motor – Double field revolving theory – Capacitor start capacitor run motors – Shaded pole motor – Repulsion type motor – Universal motor – Stepper motor. UNIT V: UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY Electric heating-Methods of heating, Welding Generator, Electric traction-traction motors and control, Recent trends in Electric traction Text Books 1. Albert.E.Clayton, N.N. Hancock, “The Performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”, Oxford ad IDh Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2. Say. M. G., “ Alternating Current Machines”, ELBS & Piman, London, 5th 3. Rajput, R.K., “Utilisation of Electrical Power” Laxmi publications, New Delhi.,2006 Reference Books 1. Theraja, B.L. and Theraja, A.K., “Electrical Technology”, Nirja Construction & Development Company Pvt. LTD, New Delhi, Vol. II, 22nd Edition, 2005. 2. Nagrath, I.J., “Electric Machines”, Tata McGraw hill Edition, 2002.
09EI221 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS Credit: 4: 0: 0

Course Objective:
To introduce the concepts of Power Supplies, amplifiers, oscillators and their design.

Course Outcome: • To learn the basics of power supplies • To study and analyse wave shaping circuits • To study the design of various amplifiers, power amplifiers and oscillators. UNIT – I : POWER SUPPLIES
Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifiers - Average and RMS Value – Ripple Factor – Regulation –Rectification efficiency – Transformer Utility Factor – Filters _ Inductor, Capacitor, L Type,PI Type, Ripple factor and regulation- Need for voltage regulator – Series and Shunt regulators – Comparison – Current limiting and protection circuits - Switched mode power supplies.

UNIT – II : WAVE SHAPING
Response of High Pass and Low Pass RC circuit for sinusoidal, step,pulse, square, ramp and exponential inputs – Linear Wave Shaping – Integrator, Differntiator, Applications – Non-linear wave Shaping – Clipping and clamping circuits, calmping circuit theories, Applications, Attenuator – Introduction to pulse transformers

Karunya University 

Page 353 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

UNIT – III : AMPLIFIER
BJT and FET amplifiers – Cascaded BJT amplifiers – RC coupled amplifier- Analysis at low, medium and high frequencies – BIFET amplifiers – DC amplifiers – Problems in DC amplifiers - Differential and Common mode gain – CMRR – Cascade and Darlington Amplifiers –Chopper Amplifiers.

UNIT – IV : POWER AMPLIFIERS AND FEED BACK AMPLIFIERS
Power Amplifiers – Classification – Class A/B/C – Single ended and Push ended – Configuration – Power Dissipation and output power- Conversion efficiencies- Complementary symmetry power amplifiers- Class AB operation –Power FET(NMOS)- Basic concepts of feedback amplifiers – Effect of negative feedback on input, output resistances, gain, stability, distortion and bandwidth – Voltage and current feedback circuits

UNIT – V : OSCILLATORS
Barkhausen criteria – RC and LC oscillators – Frequency stability of oscillators – Crystal oscillators – Non-sinusoidal oscillators – Review of switching Characteristics of Transistor – Multivibrators- Bistable, Monoslable, Astable and Schmitt trigger.

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Jacob Millman and Arvind Grabel, ‘Microelectronics’, 2nd edition, Mc Graw hill international edition , 1997. 2. Jacob Millman and Halkias C.,’Integrated Electronics’, Mc Graw hill, 5th reprint, 2008 REFERENCES: 1. David A Bell, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 2004 2. Thomas Floyd, “Electronic Devices”, Prentice Hall of India, 2003 3. Boylestad L. Robert and Nashelsky Louis, ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’, Prentice hall of India, New Delhi, 2003 09EI222 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS Credit: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: To equip the students with relevant knowledge about the functions of a central processing unit on a single integrated circuit (IC) Course Outcome: • Adequate knowledge about functions of a microprocessor and microcontroller. • Details of instructions used in microprocessor and microcontroller for the execution of program. • Exposure in the applications of the processor in interfacing of LED, Keyboard, stepper motor. • To write the assembly language program by using different instructions. UNIT I: ARCHITECTURE OF 8085 Architecture of 8085 Microprocessor : Functional Block Diagram – Registers, ALU, Bus systems – Timing and control signals Machine cycles and timing diagrams. Karunya University  Page 354 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

UNIT II: PROGRAMMING OF 8085 Instruction formats – Addressing modes – Instruction set –Need for assembly language programmes. UNIT III: I/O INTERFACING Memory mapped I/O scheme – I/O mapped I/O scheme – Input and Output cycles _ Simple I/O ports – Programmable peripheral interface(8255). Data transfer schemes – Interfacing simple keyboards and LED displays. UNIT IV: INTERRUPTS AND DMA Interrupt feature – Need for Interrupts – Characteristics of Interrupts – Interrupt structure – Methods of servicing Interrupts – Development of Interrupt service subroutines – Multiple Interrupt requests and their handling – Need for direct memory access – Devices for Handling DMA – Typical DMA Controller features. APPLICATIONS: Multiplexed seven segment LED display systems – Waveform generators – Stepper motor control – Measurement of frequency, phase angle and power factor – Interfacing ADC0801 A/D Converter –DAC 0800 D/As Converters. UNIT V: INTEL 8051 MICROCONTROLLER Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization –Addressing modes – Instruction set – Boolean processing – Simple programmes. 8051 PERIPHERAL FUNCTIONS : 8051 interrupt structures – Timer and serial functions – Parallel port features : Modes of operations – Power control, features – Interfacing of 8051 – Typical applications – MCS 51 family features 8031/8051/8751 TEXT BOOKS 1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming, and Applications with the 8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall, 2002. 2.Barry B. Brey, “Intel Microprocessors-Architecture, Programming, and Interfacing”, Seventh Edition, Prentice Hall, 2006 4. The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture, Programming & Applications II Edition Kenneth J Ayala PRI ISBN 81-900828-4-1, 2005 REFERENCES: 1. Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Janice Mazidi, Janice Gillispie Mazidi “The8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems, SBN 81-203.2751-9, Prentice Hall, 2005. 2.Microcontroller Hand Book, INTEL, 2008. 3.Douglas V. Hall, “Microprocessors And Interfacing: Programming And Hardware”, Third Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2003.

09EI223 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:1 10 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time

Karunya University 

Page 355 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

09EI224 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: To introduce the fundamental concepts of ladder logic programming and Distributed control Systems. Course Outcome: • To introduce the use of computers in control applications • To learn Programmable Logic Controllers and PLC programming • To study the concepts of DCS. UNIT-I : REVIEW OF COMPUTERS IN PROCESS CONTROL Data loggers: Data acquisition systems (DAS): alarms, computer control hierarchy levels. Direct Digital control (DDC). Supervisory digital control (SCADA). Characteristics of digital data. Controller software. Linearization. Digital Controller modes, error, proportional, derivative and composite controller modes. UNIT-II : PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER(PLC) BASICS Definition- overview of PLC systems - Input/ Output modules - Power supplies –ISO slots. General PLC programming procedures - programming on-off outputs. Auxiliary commands and functions - creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions. PLC basic functions register basics - timer functions - counter functions. UNIT-III : PLC INTERMEDIATE FUNCTIONS Arithmetic functions - number comparison functions - skip and MCR functions - data move systems. PLC Advanced intermediate functions- utilizing digital bits - sequencer functions - PLC Advanced functions: alternate-programming languages - operation. PLC-PID functions - PLC installation - trouble shooting and maintenance - controlling a robot - processes with PLC design of inter locks and alarms using PLC. UNIT-IV : INTRODUCTION TO DCS Evolution of DCS - building blocks - detailed descriptions and functions of field control units operator stations - data highways - redundancy concepts. UNIT-V: IMPLEMENTATION OF DCS DCS - supervisory computer tasks and configuration - DCS- system integration with PLC and computers. Communication in DCS. DCS in Steel and Cement Industries. Text Books: 1. John Webb, W, Ronald Reis, A.,: “ Programmable logic controllers principles and applications”, 3/e, Prentice hall Inc., New Jersey, 1995. 2. Krishna Kant.,: “ Computer based industrial control”, Prentice Hall India. 1997. Reference Books: 1. 1. Lukcas , M.P.,: “ Distributed control systems”, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., New York ,1986. 2. Moore., : “ Digital control devices” , ISA Press, 1986. Karunya University  Page 356 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

3. Hughes, T, “ Programmable logic controllers”, ISA Press 1994. 4. Mckloni, D.T.,: “Real time control networks” , ISA Press 1994. 5. Deshpande, P.B, and Ash ,R.H.,: “ Elements of process control applications” , ISA Press 1995. 09EI225 EMBEDDED INSTRUMENTATION
Credit: 4: 0: 0

Course Objective: To equip the students with relevant knowledge about Real-Time Operating System (RTOS) concepts which is a multitasking operating system intended for real-time applications. Course Outcome: • Adequate knowledge about Real time systems. • Details of Architecture, interrupt handling mechanism in 68HC11 microcontroller. • Exposure in RTOS concepts. • Applications of Real time systems in the navigation, communication purposes.
UNIT I : INTRODUCTION system evolution trends – basic real time concepts – real time design Microcontrollers – architecture – instruction set – interrupt handling – integrating system – examples – the shared data problem – software architecture. UNIT II : REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (RTOS) Real time specifications – real time kernels – inter-task communications and synchronizations – real time memory management. UNIT III : SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, ANALYSIS AND OPTIMIZATION Response – time calculation – interrupt latency – time loading and its measurement – scheduling – reducing response times and time loading – analysis of memory requirements – reducing memory loading – input – output performance. UNIT IV : DEBUGGING TECHNIQUES AND DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Faults, failures, bugs and effects – reliability – testing – fault tolerance – host and target machines – linker / locators for embedded software – getting embedded software into target system. UNIT V : REAL TIME APPLICATIONS Real time system as complex systems – real time databases – real time image processing – real time Unix – building real time applications with real time programming languages. An example : The tank monitoring system TEXT BOOKS 1. Philip A. Laplante, “Real Time Systems Design and Analysis: An Engineer’s Handbook”, edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, Second Edition 2005. 2. David E. Simon, “An Embedded Software Primer”, Addision Wesley, New Delhi, 2005 REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Raj Kamal, “Embedded Systems” McGraw Hill, 2nd Edition, 2008.

Karunya University 

Page 357 

School of Electrical Sciences

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE)

2. John B.Peatman, “Design with Microcontrollers”, McGraw Hill Book Co., Newyork,1988. 3.W. Valvano ,Thomson Brroks, “Embedded Microcomputer Systems”, Jonathan, 1st Edtion, 2002 2. Jane W.S. Liu, “Real Time Systems”, Pearson International Edition, 1st Indian Reprint, 2001. 09EI226 NETWORKS & PROTOCOLS FOR INSTRUMENTATION & CONTROL Credit: 4: 0: 0

Course Objective: To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network that allows computers to communicate with each other and share resources and information. Course Outcome: • Adequate knowledge about protocols and standards of OSI model. • Details of different interface standards. • Exposure in the industrial protocol. • Clear idea about the network topologies, internetworking connections. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION AND BASIC PRINCIPLES Protocols, physical standards, modern instrumentation, Bits, Bytes and characters, Communication principles, Communication modes. Synchronous and Asynchronous systems, Transmission Characteristics Data Coding, UART. UNIT II: SERIAL COMMUNICATION STANDARDS : Standards organizations , Serial data communications interface standards, Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines, RS232,422,,423,449,485 interface standard ,Troubleshooting, The 20mA current loop, Serial interface converters ,Interface to printers, IEEE 488,USB. UNIT III: INTRODUCTION TO PROTOCOLS Flow control Protocols ,BSC Protocols, HDLC,SDLC,Data communication for Instrumentation and Control, Individual OSI layers, OSI Analogy-example UNIT IV: INDUSTRIAL PROTOCOLS Introduction, ASCII based protocols, Modbus Protocols,Allen Bradley Protocol, HART, field bus. UNIT V: LOCAL AREA NETWORKS: Circuit and packet switching, Network Topologies, LAN Standards, Ethernet,MAC,Token bus,Internet work connections, NOS, Network Architecture and Protocols. TEXT BOOK. 1. Practical Data Communications for Instrumentation and Control by John Park, Steve Mackay, Edwin Wright. Elseiver Publications. I Edition ISBN 0750657979,2003. REFERENCE BOOKS: 1. Stallings W. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI , Second edition,2002. 2. Behrouz A. Forouzan “ Data Communication and Networking” IV Edition TMH, 2006 Karunya University  Page 358 

Course Outcome: • To have an adequate knowledge about pressure transducers.capacitive sensors –Ultrasonic method . mass flow meters and calibration.Cold junction compensation.Resistance thermometer.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI301 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: To provide sound knowledge about various techniques used for the measurement of industrial parameters.MTTR .3 lead and 4 lead connections thermistors .Pressure gauge method Diaphragm box-Air purge system-Differential pressure method – Hydro-step for boiler drum level measurement .Elastic elementsElectrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges – Mcleod gauge .O. ISBN 0074623346 Karunya University  Page 359  .Optical Pyrometer-Installation.Dead weight tester .. Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. • To know about various types of level measurements adopted in industry environment.I. UNIT I: PRESSURE MEASUREMENT Pressure standards . ‘Principles of Industrial Instrumentation’.Bimetallic thermometerThermocouple . Ltd.Ultrasonic flowmeter-Coriolis mass flowmeter. Patranabis. McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.Different types of manometers .Maintainability ..Electrical methods .Displacer devices .Calibration of flowmeters . D. thermocouples and pyrometry techniques. • To have an idea about the temperature standards.Measuring circuits Speed of response -linearization . • To study about area flow meters.Comparison with conventional transducers.Self diagnosis and remote calibration features.Conductive sensors .Inferential flowmeter-Turbine flowmeter-Variable head flowmeters -Rotameter . maintenance and calibration of thermometers and thermocouples. New Delhi. • To know about the features of smart instruments and reliability.Reliability Engineering.fixed points -filled-system thermometers . 1997.Radiation pyrometer. Doeblin E.Electromagnetic flowmeter . Measurement Systems: Application and Design.Availability – Series and parallel systems TEXT BOOKS 1. Fifth Edition.Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge.Smart transmitter with HART communicator.Float operated devices ..IC temperature sensors .Laws of thermocouple . UNIT IV: LEVEL MEASUREMENT Visual techniques .Installation and maintenance UNIT III: TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT Temperature standards . 5th edition (2003) 2.Point level sensors-Solid level measurement UNIT V: SMART INSTRUMENTATION AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING Smart intelligent transducer.Definition of reliability -Reliability and the failure rate – Relation between reliability and MTBF.Differential pressure transmitters Installation and maintenance of pressure gauges UNIT II: FLOW MEASUREMENT Positive displacement flowmeters .

characteristics and application of control valves. Course Outcome: • To study the basic characteristics of various processes. Liptak B. pennsylvania. ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’. • To study about the construction.model equations for a binary distillation column.Centralized controller UNIT: V -COMPLEX CONTROL TECHNIQUES Feed forward control. Noltingk. thermal process.Elements of process control.Internal model control. damped oscillation method. ‘Mechanical and Industrial Measurements’.Dynamic matrix controlmodel -Generalized predictive control Karunya University  Page 360  . gas process.E.Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method.Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs-selection of control mode for different process with control scheme-Optimum controller settings.Design of non-linear controller with input multiplicities UNIT: IV -DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR MULTIVARIABLE SYSTEMS Introduction to multivariable system-evolution of loop interaction –evolution of relative gains. 1999 5.Averaging control. • To study some industrial applications. dead time. ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’. • To study about various complex control schemes. mixing process.. Singh. Tata McGraw Hill 09EI302 PROCESS CONTROL Credit : 3:1:0 Course Objective: To provide basic knowledge of controllers. flow process. proportional floating control. K.Degrees of freedom. S. PID controller for integrator.Transfer function matrixMethod of inequalities.Inferential control-Model predictive control.Characteristic of ON-OFF.Cascade control. • To get adequate knowledge about the characteristics of various controller modes and methods of tuning of controller.K.Ziegler Nichol’s tuning-Cohen Coon method -Pole placement method UNIT: III -DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR NONLINEAR SYSTEMS Design of PI. 3rd Edition Chilton book company Radnor. UNIT: I -INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL Process dynamics. II Edition Butterworth Heinemann. integral and derivative models. -CONTROL ACTION AND CONTROLLER TUNING Basic control action. time delay systems. Springer Verlag.single loop and overall stability. 1996 4..Modeling of liquid process. “Instrumentation Reference Book”.Process variables.Ratio control.Split range control. Khanna Publishers.Chemical reaction-Modeling UNIT: II. 2000 ISBN 1852332085 3. New Delhi. Tatamangalam R. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’.Adaptive control.Continuous cycling method. R. 1995 ISBN 0-7506-2255.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) REFERENCE BOOKS 1.Decoupling control. Jain. find control elements and the processes. 2. B.

New Delhi. UNIT IV: REAL TIME MODELS. Process Control Instrumentation Technology.Java based embedded system design.High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system .. clocking communication and synchronization. task scheduling.Interfacing to External Devices – Switches – LED/LCD Displays – Relays – Dc Motor – Stepper Motor. 1996 ISBN 0876645295 5. D. New Delhi. ‘Process control’. Seventh Edition. Karunya University  Page 361  . New Delhi 1999 ISBN 8120306651 09EI303 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the basic concepts of Embedded Systems and the various techniques used for Embedded Systems with real time examples. kernel services. • To learn the different techniques on embedded systems • To discuss the real time models. D/A converters .Real time kernel. Wiley Eastern Limited. Process Control. Eckman. 1998 ISBN 8170237963 Reference Books 1.. Singapore. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. McGraw Hill. CRC Press LLC. control blocks. Prentice Hall.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) Text Books 1. Forth Edition. M. Prentice Hall. Harriot P. Course Outcome: • To discuss the basics o embedded systems and the interface issues related to it. task states. Marlin.Typical application scenario of embedded systems UNIT II: INTERFACE ISSUES RELATED TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS A/D.P. ‘Non-Linear Process Control’. Process Control System. Florida.Classifications and brief overview of micro-controllers microprocessors and DSPs Embedded processor architectural definitions . Process based and Graph based models – Petrinet Models . 1998 ISBN 0849398711 2. T. OS tasks. Allied Publishers.Chidambaram. 1995 ISBN 8170237963 2. Instrumentation for process measurement and control. Norman A Anderson. New Delhi ISBN 0852262051 4. 2000 ISBN 8120309871 6. ‘Chemical Process Control: An Introduction Theory and Practice’. Johnson. Automatic Process Control. 2000 ISBN 0070404917 3. Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork. languages and operating systems • To analyze real time examples UNIT I: SYSTEM DESIGN Definitions . interrupt processing. Stepanopoulos. Sinskey. Curtis D.Simulation and Emulation of embedded systems . memory requirements and control. UNIT III: TECHNIQUES FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS State Machine and state Tables in embedded design – Event based.E. LANGUAGE AND OPERATING SYSTEMS Real time languages .

UNIT III : DIGITAL DISPLAY & RECORDING DEVICES Digital storage oscilloscopes -digital printers and plotters -CDROMS -digital magnetic tapes.RMS detector in digital multimeters. 2008 2. Hidden errors in conventional ac measurements. “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems.sampling theorem . 2005. Digital Signal Analyser. period and time measurements-Low frequency measurements -automatic time and frequency scaling . Tammy Noergaard. Course Outcome: • To review the basics of digital electronics • To learn the various digital methods of measurement • To discuss the digital display and recording devices • To understand the concept of digital signal analysis • To discuss the current trends in digital instrumentation UNIT I : INTRODUCTION Digital codes .basic building blocks . Frank Vahid. Second Edition. 2. Colour Monitor. Elsevier. Tata McGrawHill . Palgrave. “Embedded Systems Design”.gates. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. UNIT II : DIGITAL METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS Review of A/D. 2004. Karunya University  Page 362  .sampling . 2006 09EI304 DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the basic concepts of digital techniques and digital instrumentation.extrapolation synchronous and asynchronous sampling. “Embedded Systems Architecture”. “Embedded Systems Architecture.digital phase meters -digital tachometers -digital frequency. Wiley India.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT V: CASE STUDIES Case Studies of Embedded System Design – Automatic Chocolate Vending machine – Digital Camera – Adaptive Cruise Control System in a Car – Smart Card. D/A techniques –F/V and V/F conversion techniques -digital voltmeters and multimeters-automation and accuracy of digital voltmeters and multimeters . RajKamal. Programming and Design”. FF and counters – discrete data handling . TEXT BOOKS 1. dot matrix and LCD display CROs. Tony Givargis. Tim Wilhurst.sources of error -noise -inherent errors in digital meters.aliasing errors -reconstruction . and Digital Data Acquisition.memory devices .mathematical aspects of RMS.

UNIT V : CURRENT TRENDS IN DIGITAL INSTRUMENTATION Introduction to special function add on cards -resistance card -input and output cards -counter.Patranabis.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT IV : SIGNAL ANALYSIS Amplifiers.Position and Velocity forms-Dead time compensation and smith predictor algorithm Karunya University  Page 363  . Electronic measurements & Instrumentation. Application & Design. UNIT: I INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER PROCESS CONTROL Review of sample theory-Response of sample data system to step and ramp input.Jury’s Stability Test UNIT: II DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROLLER Digital PID –Deadbeat. interfacing to microprocessor. filters. T. REFERENCES 1. 2.steady state error-Z domain equipment. Bouwens. micro-controllers and computers. Course Outcome: • To review the concept of sampling and pulse transfer function • To learn the design techniques for digital controllers • To introduce the Programmable Logic controller and its functions.S. noise figure meters. test. TEXT BOOKS 1.Helfrick.1987 4. and time of card and Digital Equipment construction with modular designing. McGraw Hill. RF network analyser. Principles of Electronic Instrumentation . Digital Measurement Techniques. Albert.Cooper. receiver.J. A. Narosa Publishing House 09EI305 ADVANCED DIGITAL PROCESS CONTROL Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the basic concepts of computer based process control.Linear transformation. 1984. D. "Digital instrumentation” McGraw Hill 1984 3.Pulse transfer function-Modified Ztransform-Sample data model for continuous system bilinear transformation.PH.2008 2.Dahlin’s algorithms-Kalman’s algorithms-Implementation of control algorithm using microprocessor. "Handbook of Microcomputer Based Instrumentation and Control”. John Lenk. IV Ed.D. and high frequency signal sources. Doebelin. wireless base and mobile station test sets. 1990. D. Measurement System. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques 3 Oliver&Cage . William D. transmitter. PH.Rathore. McGraw Hill. Computer aided software engineering tools (CASE) -use of CASE tools in design and development of automated measuring systems interfacing IEEE cards -intelligent and programmable instruments using computers.

2003. • To study the storage devices. Computer Process Control.Analog PLC operation. level process TEXT BOOKS: 1. and Ash R. 1991. • To understand the Hardware versus software speculation mechanisms. A. McGraw Hill Book Co. Software.Sequencer functions. 1995.Networking of PLC.Auxiliary commands and functions.Overview of PLC systems.Annunciator problem-Trouble shooting and Maintenance UNIT: V -APPLICATIONS Implementation of microprocessor based position and temperature control systemsOperational features of stepping motor. Ronald Reis. Hardware.B... 1988 ISBN 155617005X 2 Houpis C.B. Digital Control Systems.Utilizing digital bits.PLC installation.. • To analyze the different memory architectures.Power supplies General PLC programming procedures-Programming ON-OFF outputs. • To study the pipelining and scheduling. Digital Control Systems . Oxford University Press.Creating ladder diagrams from process control descriptions.Matrix functions. Lamont G. 1991 ISBN 0030128846 4.Theory. ISA Publication. 2000 ISBN 1556177291 REFERENCE BOOKS 1 Despande P.Three way traffic light problem..School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT: III PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER Introduction. 3/e.Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC.Comparison function-SKIP and MCR function-Data move system-PLC advanced intermediate function. Karunya University  Page 364  .. John Webb.. Prentice hall Inc.Alternate programming language. 09EI306 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE Credits: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To expose the fundamental concepts of computer architecture.I/O Modules.Interfacing of stepper motor to computer. HughesT. ‘Digital Control and State Variable Methods’. Tata McGraw Hill Pub.: “ Programmable logic controllers principles and applications”.A. Gopal M. ISBN 0070305005 3.H. Programmable Logic Controllers.PLC advanced function. W. Kuo.Drive circuits..B.PLC basic functionsRegister basics-Timer and counter functions UNIT: IV PLC INTERMEDIATE FUNCTIONS Arithmetic functions. ISBN 0070483027 2. Course Outcome: • To know the basics of computer designing. New Jersey..Interfacing of computer with temperature flow.H. USA. ISA Press.

TMH Edition 2001 Thirteenth Reprint 2006. UNIT II: INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM Pipelining and handling hazards – Dynamic Scheduling – Dynamic hardware prediction – Multiple issue – Hardware based speculation – Limitations of ILP – Case studies. 4.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT I: FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN Review of fundamentals of CPU. • To analyze the different implementation methods. Course Outcome: • To know the Communication requirements of CAN. Third Edition.Dezso Sima. First Reprint 2007. 3. UNIT IV: MEMORY AND I/O Cache performance – Reducing cache miss penalty and miss rate – Reducing hit time – Main memory and performance – Memory technology. availability and dependability – I/O performance measures – Designing an I/O system. Terence Fountain. John L. • To study the Data types & Data objects. “ Computer Organization and Architecture”.Hardware versus software speculation mechanisms – IA 64 and ltanium processor. Karunya University  Page 365  . Prentice Hall of India. UNIT V: MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM Symmetric and distributed shared memory architectures – Performance issues – Synchronization – Models of memory consistency – Multithreading.Kai Hwang " Advanced Computer Architecture ".Nicholas Carter. 2006. 6 Edition Fourth Indian Reprint 2005 2. • To study the CAN Controller. 09EI307 EMBEDDED NETWORKING Credits: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To expose Fundamental concepts of CAN and the use of it in embedded networking.Hennessey and David A. ”Computer Architecture” Indian Special Edition 2006. • To study the network configuration. Advanced Computer Architectures Eighth Indian Reprint 2005. Types of storage devices – Buses – RAID – Reliability. TEXT BOOK: 1. Morgan Kaufmann. UNIT III: INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACHES Compiler techniques for exposing ILP – Static branch prediction – VLIW & EPIC – Advanced compiler support – Hardware support for exposing parallelism . REFERENCE : 1. “Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach”. Memory and IO – Performance evaluation – Instruction set principles – Design issues – Example Architectures. Peter Kacsuk. Raj Kamal.Patterson. William Stallings.

Localization – Handover. TEXT BOOK: 1 Glaf P. • To study the Broadcast Systems. SDMA. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION Introduction .2000 Satellite Systems: Basics . • To study the Telecommunication Systems. Modulation. • To analyze the different mobile communication layers. CDMA – Comparison UNIT II: TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Telecommunication Systems: GSM. FDMA. UNIT IV : IMPLEMENTATION OF CAN Implementing CAN open Communication layout and requirements – Comparison of implementation methods – Micro CAN open – CAN open source code – Conformance test – Entire design life cycle. Antennas. Karunya University  Page 366  .School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT I: EMBEDDED NETWORKING Embedded networking – code requirements – Communication requirements –Introduction to CAN open – CAN open standard – Object directory – Electronic Data Sheets & Device – Configuration files – Service Data Objectives – Network management CAN open messages – Device profile encoder. Andrew Ayre and Christian Keyold “Embedded Networking with CAN and CAN open”. • To study the applications of Mobile communication. Course Outcome: • To study the basics of transmission. UNIT V :IMPLEMENTATION ISSUES Implementation issues – Physical layer – Data types – Object dictionary – Communication object identifiers – Emerging objects – Node states. Signals. UNIT II : CAN OPEN CONFIGURATION CAN open configuration – Evaluating system requirements choosing devices and tools – Configuring single devices – Overall network configuration – Network simulation – Network Commissioning – Advanced features and testing. Signal Propagation. Embedded System Academy 2005. Multiplexing. 09EI308 MOBILE COMMUNICATION Credits: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To study the Mobile communication. TDMA. UMTS and IMT. DECT. Cellular Systems Medium Access Control: Motivation.Wireless Transmission: Frequencies for radio transmission. TETRA. Spread Spectrum.Routing . UNIT III : CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK Controller Area Network – Underlying Technology CAN Overview – Selecting a CAN Controller – CAN development tools.Feiffer.

Digital video Broadcasting Wireless LAN: Infrared Vs radio transmission. Ad-hoc networks UNIT V: MOBILE TRANSPORT LAYER Mobile transport layer: Traditional TCP. Pearson Education. • To study different security techniques. Snooping TCP. 2001. Karunya University  Page 367  .Smart Tokens-Embedded Controls-Smart Sensors and Actuators –Smart Appliances. Functions.Principles-Pervasive Information Technology-Information Access Devices-Handheld Computers-Palm OS-Based Devices-Windows CE-Based Handheld Computers-EPOC Based Handheld Computers-Phones-Cellular Phones-Data Transmission Capabilities-Smart PhonesScreen Phones. UNIT IV: WIRELESS ATM Wireless ATM: Motivation. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION Introduction-Pervasive Computing. Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture. 2004. Selective retransmission. Addressing. Access point control protocol Mobile network layer: Mobile IP. IEEE 802. ISBN 81-297-0350-5. Location management. Transaction oriented TCP Support for mobility: File systems.Digital audio broadcasting. REFERENCE BOOK: Yi-Bing Lin and Imrich Chlamtac. Course Outcome: • To study the Pervasive Computing techniques.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT III: BROADCAST SYSTEMS Broadcast Systems: Cyclic repetition of data . • To study the Smart Sensor applications. Wireless application protocol. Quality of service. Reference model. Dynamic host configuration protocol. • To study different protocols. 09EI309 MOBILE COMPUTING Credits: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To study the computing techniques of Mobile communication. Mobile Communications. Entertainment Systems-Television Systems –Game Consoles. World Wide Web. Fast retransmission/ fast recovery. Indirect TCP.Appliances and Home Networking-Automotive Computing. WATM services. Radio access layer. Mobile TCP. TEXTBOOK: Jochen Schiller. Second Edition. UNIT II: SMART IDENTIFICATION Smart Identification-Smart Cards-Smart Labels. • To study application of JAVA in Mobile Computing. Infrastructure and ad hoc networks. Second Edition. John Wiley and Sons. Handover.11. HYPERLAN. Working group. Bluetooth.

• To study the Object Behaviour of UML. 2003. • To study the programming in assembly.Smart Card Programming – Messaging Components. 09EI310 EMBEDDED SYSTEM SOFTWARE DESIGN Credits: 4 : 0 : 0 Course Objective: To study the software designing used in embedded systems. Yi-Bing Lin and Imrich Chlamtac.Database Components UNIT IV: COMPUTER NETWORKING Connecting The World. Pearson Education.Java Card – Client Middleware – Programming APIS. Mobile Computing. Uwe Hansmann.0 Architecture – I-Mode .Nicklous and Thomas Stober. Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture. TEXT BOOKS: 1.Structures – Unions – Dynamic memory allocations – File handling – Linked lists Karunya University  Page 368  . ISBN 0-07-058807-4. UNIT V : DATA SECURITY Security.Security Models. ISBN 81-7808-170-9.WAP 2. Course Outcome: • To study the basics of C programming.Consumer Services.Characteristics.WSRP – Connectivity – Wireless Wan – Short Range Wireless Communication – Home Networks – Universal Plug And Play .Security Protocols. Springer International Edition.Services.Travel services. ISBN 0-471-39492-0. 2.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT III: JAVA Java. Jochen Schiller.Security frameworks for Mobile Environment. REFERENCE BOOK: 1. • To analyse the object oriented concepts.Security techniques and algorithms. 2000. Asoke K Talukder. 2.Personal Java & Embedded JavaDevelopment Tool For Java – Operating Systems.Home services. JohnWiley and Sons Inc. Tata McGraw. ISBN 81-8120-073-3.Trust.Voice – Voice Technology Trends – Voice On The Web –Web Services – Architecture – WSDL – UDDI – Soap. Principles of Mobile Computing.Business Services. • To study embedded applications. Roopa R Yavagal.Windows CE –Palm OS -Symbian OS. Lothar Merk.Public Key Infrastructure. Second Edition. UNIT I: LOW LEVEL PROGRAMMING IN C Primitive data types – Functions – recursive functions – Pointers .. Mobile Communication.Internet Protocols And Formats-Http-Html-Xml –Mobile Internet The WAP 1.1.Information Security. Martin S.1 Architecture – Wireless Application Environment 1. 2001.Libraries –Java Editions – Micro Editions.Hill Publishing Company Limited 2005.

Sequence Diagrams . Edward Yourdon. Fuzzy Logic and Genetic algorithms.Architectural Design in UML Concurrency Design . Second Edition 3. UNIT IV: UNIFIED MODELLING LANGUAGE Object State Behaviour . 2 edition (2000).Identify Persistent Information .System Task Diagram . “Object Oriented Systems Analysis And Design Using Uml.Application Scenarios.Types and Strategies of Operations . Ray Farmer.Role of Scenarios in the Definition of Behaviour Timing Diagrams . 2. First Indian Reprint 2001 2. “Real Time Systems Design And Analysis.system timer – scheduling – client server computing.Underline the Noun Strategy. Simon Bennett . “Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly meet” PHI 2002. Phillip A. Peter Coad.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT II: C AND ASSEMBLY Programming in Assembly – Register usage conventions – typical use of addressing options – instruction sequencing – procedure call and return – parameter passing – retrieving parameters – everything in pass by value – temporary variables. Lewis. Karunya University  Page 369  .Event Hierarchies . Identify the Casual Objects . Bruce Powel Douglas. REFERENCE BOOK: 1. Identify Control Elements . UNIT III: OBJECT-ORIENTED ANALYSIS AND DESIGN Connecting the Object Model with the Use Case Model. Second Edition: Developing Efficient Objects for Embedded Systems (The Addison-Wesley Object Technology Series)”. “Real-Time UML. Laplante . “ Object Oriented Analysis.Identify Visual Elements.Simple Patterns. Daniel W.Identify Key Concepts Identify Transactions . Mechanistic Design . Key Strategies for Object-Identification .Representing Tasks .Identify Physical Devices .Identify Services (Passive Contributors) . UNIT V: APPLICATION Multi threaded applications – assembling embedded applications – polled waiting loop and interrupt driven I/O – preemptive kernels and shared resources . Steve Mcrobb.UML State charts .Threads. Course Outcome: • To give a solid understanding of Basic Neural Network. Third Edition Second Reprint 20 09EI311 INTELLIGENT CONTROLLERS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the basic concepts of intelligent controllers and its applications in Control.Concurrent State Diagrams . Addison-Wesley.Identify Real-World Items . TEXT BOOK: 1.

multilevel optimization – case studies. Klir G.search space –encoding reproduction-elements of genetic algorithm-genetic modeling-comparison of GA and traditional search methods.case studies. ‘Fuzzy set theory -and its Applications’ -Kluwer Academic Publishers. Farin Wah S. Jacek M Zurada. Prentice Hall of India.single layer.J. S.New Delhi. John 5.A. & Folger T. Jaico Publishing House. Hellendroon. Prentice-Hall of India Pvt.constraint optimization . ‘Introduction to Fuzzy Control’.feed forward.Non-linear fuzzy control-PID like FLC. UNIT IV : FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL Structure of fuzzy logic controller -fuzzification models. Kosko.1993. B. Filev. UNIT V : GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ITS APPLICATIONS Fundamentals of genetic algorithm: Evolutionary computation .1994 Karunya University  Page 370  .if-then rules. Genetic Algorithm in scientific models and theoretical foundations Applications of Genetic based machine learning-Genetic Algorithm and parallel processors composite laminates . D. TEXT BOOK: 1. Langari. ‘Fuzzy sets. Ltd. Ltd. ‘Neural Networks. Zimmerman H. 2. Edition: 2004 6. REFERENCES: 1.data base -rule base –inference engine defuzzification module .sliding mode FLC -Sugeno FLC -adaptive fuzzy control -fuzzy control applications.learning. 2.1994. Driankov. ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’.J. 1999..types of neural networks. UNIT III : INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC Fuzzy sets. 4.fuzzy relational equations -fuzzy measure -fuzzy functions -approximate reasoning -fuzzy propositions . ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’.A Vijayalakshmi Pai. uncertainty and Information’. back propagation -learning and training -Hopfield network.Melanie Mitchell. UNIT II : NEURAL NETWORKS FOR CONTROL APPLICATIONS Neural network for non-linear systems -schemes of neuro control.S.indirect learning neural network control applications – case studies. R. Prentice-Hall of India.fuzzy operation -fuzzy arithmetic -fuzzy relations. feedback networks. New Delhi-2003. Prentice –Hall of India Pvt. adaptation and neural network's learning rules .system identification forward model and inverse model. ‘Fuzzy control synthesis and analysis’. Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms.fuzzy quantifiers . Narosa publishers. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’. 3..School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) • To know how to use Soft Computing to solve real-world problems mainly pertaining to Control system applications UNIT I : INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS Introduction . Synthesis and Applications’.biological neurons and their artificial models .Rajasekaran and G. multiple layer.

Course Outcome: • To understand the basic concept of image processing • To learn the Image enhancement techniques • To understand the theory of Image Morphology. Statistical Moments-Regional Descriptors: Topological Descriptors-Texture: Statistical. 9780131687288 2. 2002. UNIT: I –DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS Fundamental steps in Digital Image processing-Components of an Image Processing Systems-Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum-Examples of fields that use Digital Image Processing. Description and Recognition. W. John Wiley & Sons. Pratt. 2007. revised Published by Prentice Hall. Segmentation • To analyze the methods of image Representation. REFERENCE BOOKS 1. Fourier Descriptors.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI312 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the fundamentals of digital image processing techniques. String Matching. ISBN 013168728X.Visual Perception-Image sensing and Acquisition-Image sampling and Quantization-Imaging Geometry. Karunya University  Page 371  . New York. Structural and Spectral Approaches-Relational Descriptors UNIT: V –OBJECT RECOGNITION Patterns and Pattern Classes-Matching-Recognition based on Decision-Theoretic Methods: Optimum Statistical Classifiers-Structural Methods: Matching Shape Numbers. Syntactic Recognition of Trees. UNIT: II – IMAGE ENHANCEMENT IN SPATIAL AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN Basic Gray Level Transformations-Histogram Processing-Arithmetic and Logic OperationsSmoothing Spatial filters..K “Digital Image Processing. Richard E. 3rd ed. illustrated. Rafael C.Basic relationships between pixels. UNIT: IV –IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND DESCRIPTION Representation Approaches-Boundary Descriptors: Shape Numbers. Woods “Digital Image Processing” Third Edition. Gonzalez. Syntactic Recognition of Strings.Sharpening Spatial filters-Introduction to Frequency and the Frequency Domain-Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters-Sharpening Frequency filters UNIT: III –IMAGE MORPHOLOGY AND SEGMENTATION Dilation and Erosion-Opening and Closing-Hit-or-Miss Transformation-Basic Morphological Algorithms-Detection of Discontinuities-Edge linking and Boundary detection-ThresholdingRegion based Segmentation-Use of Motion in Segmentation.

Wiley Eastern. UNIT: I –CALCULUS OF VARIATION Functions and Functional.Simplex method . Chen. Course Outcome: • To learn the basics of Calculus of Variation • To introduce the concept of LQR Design and Dynamic programming techniques.Output weighed linear control. Linear System Theory and Design: C. 1992.computational procedure for solving optimal control problem Dynamic programming application to discrete and continuous system.Pontryagin‘s minimum principle UNIT: IV -DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING NUMERICAL TECHNIQUES FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL Principle of optimality .Hill climbing .Euler Lagrange equation UNIT: II –OPTIMAL CONTROL INTRODUCTION Statement of optimal control problem -performance indices. Oxford 1999 REFERENCE BOOKS 1.State Regulator. S.Solving ARE using the Eigen vector method. Stanislaw Zak.Discrete Algebraic Riccati Equation.Maxima and minima of function. 3rd Edition.Numerical techniques for optimal control.Variation of functionalExtremal of functional. 2003 ISBN 0195150112 2. Apte. Oxford University Press.Terminal time weighing problem TEXT BOOKS: 1. Rao. Linear Multivariable Control System: Y.S. New Age International Publication 1996 2. Systems and Control. New Delhi.Linear Quadratic Regulator (LQR).Control configuration UNIT: III –LQR DESIGN Algebraic Riccati Equation (ARE). Karunya University  Page 372  .Optimum control of tracking system.penalty function methods UNIT: V –MATLAB EXAMPLES FOR OPTIMAL CONTROL PROBLEMS Infinite time Linear Optimal Regulator design. T.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) ISBN-9-814-12620-9 09EI313 OPTIMAL CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the concepts of Optimal Control Systems and design with MATLAB examples.gradient . • To discuss certain examples in MATLAB.output regulator. S. Optimization theory and applications..

2nd order systems with and without dead time. • To introduce the concepts of adaptive control and its applications.pole placement control .B.” Adaptive Control”.Signal modeling Discretisation techniques. 2.Maximum likelihood .J.Control policies . Self tuning systems.Instrumental variable Stochastic approximation techniques. Ljung.1999. “Adaptive Control”. ISBN-0-87692-147 09EI314 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: To learn the basic concepts of system identification and adaptive control Course Outcome: • To learn the basics of modeling ad simulation of processes. Narosa Publishing House.Passivity theory .Runge-Kutta method -Z-transform method . Wittenmark B.Use of Simulation packages . Addison Wesley. Ogata. Landau L. Lozano. New Delhi.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 3.Frequency response . UNIT: IV -MRAS AND STC Approaches ..Minimum variance control . New Delhi. Gopal. Modern control System Theory. Modern Control Engineering. Reprint 1993. Wiley Eastern Limited. Wellstead P.. Springer.The Gradient approach .RLS algorithm . 1992.Liapunov functions . Digital Control Systems. UNIT: II –MIMO SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION TECHNIQUES Off line . 1992. UNIT: I -MODELING AND SIMULATION OF PROCESSES Impulse response . M’Saad M. M.Fixed memory .Recursive least squares . UNIT: II -CLASSIFICATION OF ADAPTIVE CONTROL Introduction . TEXT BOOKS: 1.Auto tuning .1995. I and II. Isermann R.Predictive control.. 2.Simulation of 1st order. Vol.Uses .Definitions .Modified recursive least squares techniques . Prentice Hall.On line methods ..R. K.. System Identification Theory for the user. Astrom K. • To understand the techniques to identify a MIMO system.Types of adaptive control. and Zarrop M.Step response methods .1997. John Wiley and Sons Karunya University  Page 373  . ISBN-81-224-0503-7 4. UNIT: V -ISSUES IN ADAPTIVE CONTROL AND APPLICATIONS Stability-Convergence-Robustness-Application of adaptive control..E. Prentice Hall of India. 3. REFERENCE BOOKS 1.D.

UNIT III: REVIEW OF SYSTEMS Review of first and higher order systems.Millichamp.L.H. closed and open loop response. . sensors. electrical and thermal conductivity. viscosity and consistency. single and multivariable constrained optimisation.Response to step. T. Roffel. dynamic simulation of distillation columns and reactors. fluid density. Jean Pierre Corriou. pressure fluid flow. 2004.Edger. temperature. Tuning process controllers. concentration. To review the concepts of systems and learn the basic concepts of process automation To highlight the concepts of optimal control. UNIT V: OPTIMAL CONTROL Optimisation and simulation. composition by physical and chemical properties and spectroscopy. Control valve types-linear. and D. equal percentage and quick opening valve. impulse and sinusoidal disturbances. pH. B. REFERENCES: 1. velocity. instrument scaling.F. UNIT II MEASUREMENTS Principles of measurements of weight flow rate. control modes. etc. D.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 09EI315 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION & PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD PROCESSING Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the concepts of process instruments for measurement of various physical variables. . Betlem. 2.E. UNIT I: INTRODUCTION Principles of measurement and classification of process control instruments. John Wiley and Sons. Design of valves. transmitters and control valves. Karunya University  Page 374  . UNIT IV: PROCESS AUTOMATION Basic concepts. systems.-Transient response-Block diagrams. “Advanced Practical Process Control” Springer. terminology and techniques for process control. instrumentation symbols and labels. TEXT BOOKS : 1. ‘Process Dynamics and Control’. 2004.A. B. II Edition. liquid level. Course Outcome: To introduce the fundamentals of measurement and the techniques for measurement of various physical variables. 2004. optimisation techniques. automation and optimal control.Seborg. “Process Control: Theory and applications” Springer. humidity of gases.

Pop-11 Data types. procedures. " Computer Controlled Systems ". common techniques.Astrom. 3. Karl J. Prentice Hall of India Pvt. assignments. the roots. UNIT III: IMPORTANCE OF LEARNING Importance of learning in intelligent systems. hillclimbing. XVed. knowledge representation. etc. New Delhi. Biological Intelligence and Neural Networks. its techniques. their differences. arithmetic operators Stack and stack errors. UNIT II: APPLICATIONS Demonstration of the need for different approaches for different problems. Application of simple search algorithms (depth/breadth-first. Study of different types of AI systems. and limitations.). 1993. " Chemical Process Control ". Building Intelligent Agents. Bjorn Willermans. printing. iteration Advanced list manipulation and pattern matching techniques.. search. goals and main sub-fields of AI. processes involved in rule-based Expert Systems and in building such systems. Study of further specific areas of artificial intelligence.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) 2. heuristic functions. and its implementation. rule based systems. pattern matching Conditionals. Tata McGraw Hill. Interacting Agent Based Systems UNIT IV:AI PROGRAMMING STYLES Introduction to general procedural and functional programming techniques as well as basic AI programming styles (Poplog. General introduction to artificial intelligence. 09EI316 – VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:2 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time 09EI317 – INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:2 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time 09EI318 – EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credit: 0:0:2 12 experiments will be notified by the HOD from time to time 09EI319 ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE AND AI PROGRAMMING Credit : 3:1:0 UNIT I: FUNDAMENTALS OF AI Fundamentals of AI techniques in a practical context. Stephanopoulos. built-in procedures List manipulation. comments.. Recursion Karunya University  Page 375  . variables. G. Ltd. 1994. Overview of key underlying ideas. and learning.

McGraw Hill. grammar and parsing. planning and rule-based reasoning. Patterson. 2000 Karunya University  Page 376  . “AI & Expert Systems”. Natural Language Processing. Dan W. Online tutorial material. (2nd edn). “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach” (2nd edn). 1998 4. “Artificial Intelligence”. “Artificial Intelligence: A New Synthesis”. Machine Learning Reference Books 1. Networks and Frames. Eastern. 1991 3. databases and the implementation of search strategies.School of Electrical Sciences Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering (EIE) UNIT V: ADVANCED PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES More advanced programming techniques involving . Knowledge Representation. N J Nilsson. supporting program libraries 5. E Rich & K Knight. Uncertainty. Economy Edition. Prentice Hall. Morgan Kaufmann. 2003 2. Planning Expert Systems. S Russell & P Norvig.

ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING 0 Karunya University .

circuit laws and reduction. circuits. Find Thevenin and Norton equivalents of circuits. lumped circuits. To study the transient response of series and parallel A. Course Outcome: • • • • Analyze simple DC circuits. To study the concept of coupled circuits and two port networks. Analyze AC steady-state responses and transient response of resistance.ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 10EI201 10EI202 10EI203 10EI204 10EI205 10EI206 10EI207 10EI208 10EI209 10EI210 10EI211 10EI212 10EI213 10EI214 10EI215 10EI216 10EI217 10EI218 Circuit Analysis & Networks Electronic Circuits Sensors and Transducers Signals and Systems Control Systems Signal Conditioning Circuits Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Process Dynamics and Control Industrial Instrumentation Logic and Distributed Control Systems Biomedical Instrumentation Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Control Digital Control Systems Communication Engineering Ultrasonic Instrumentation Biomedical Instrumentation Ultrasonic Instrumentation Modern Control Systems 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4 :0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:1:0 10EI201 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & NETWORKS Credits 3:1:0 Course Objective: • • • To introduce the concept of circuit elements.C. inductance and capacitance in terms of impedance. Analyze two port networks. Unit I: Basic Circuit Concepts Classification of Circuit Elements – Lumped Circuits – VI Relationships of R. L and C Energy Sources – Independent Sources – Dependent Sources – Kirchoff’s Voltage Law – Voltage Division – Kirchoff’s Current Law – Current Division – Network Reduction – Matrix Representation And Solution Of DC Networks – Node And Loop Basics 1 Karunya University .

McGraw Hill International Editions. W.A. 2002. Reference Books: 1. Joseph Edminister. Jr. “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”. and Shyam Mohan S.Mathew N. Ltd. Damping Factor and Logarithmic Decrement – Response of Circuits for Non-Sinusoidal Periodic Inputs Unit IV: Coupled Circuits Self and Mutual Inductances – Co-Efficient of Coupling – Analysis of Coupled Circuits – Natural Current – Dot Rule for Coupled Circuits – Equivalent Circuit of Coupled Circuits – Coupled Circuits in Series And Parallel – Tuned Coupled Circuits – Double Tuned Circuits Unit V: Two Port Networks and Filters Driving Point and Transfer Impedances / Admittances – Voltage and Current Ratios of Two Port Networks – Admittance.. 2008. RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits – Free Response – Step and Sinusoidal Responses – Natural Frequency – Damped Frequency.H..McGrawHill. “Electric circuits”. “Electric circuit Theory” .Arumugam and N. and Kemmerly.P. Mahmood Nahvi.. Charles K.Premkumar. Thevenin – Norton – Millman’s and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems – Statement and Applications Unit III: Response of Electric Circuits Concept of Complex Frequency – Pole – Zero Plots – Frequency Response of RL– RC and RLC Circuits – Transient Response of RL. New York 2004.2003 10EI202 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • To familiarize the student with the analysis and design of basic transistor amplifier circuits. Impedance – Hybrid – Transmission and Image Parameters for Two – Port Networks – Impedance Matching Equivalent Pi and T Networks – Passive Filter as a Two Port Network – Characteristics of Ideal Filter – Low pass and High Pass Filter. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. “Engineering Circuit Analysis”.Unit II: Network Theorems and transformations Voltage and current source transformations – Star and delta Transformations – Superposition. 2006. 3. New Delhi.Sadiku.O.Alexander. New York. Khanna Publishers . 2 Sudhakar. “Fundamentals of Electric Circuit”.New York. 2. New Delhi. operation and its characteristics Design and analyze the DC bias circuitry of BJT and FET Design circuits using the transistors. diodes and oscillators 2 Karunya University . J. Mcgraw Hill. Text Books: 1 M. Hyatt.E. wave shaping and multi vibrator circuits Course Outcome: • • • Analyze the different types of diodes. feedback amplifiers.

Jacob Millman and Halkias C.Classification of Instruments .Average and RMS Value – Ripple FactorRegulation –Rectification efficiency – Transformer Utility Factor –Capacitor Filters . gain..Unit I: Diode Circuits Diode as a Circuit Element .Methods of Measurements .” Mc Graw hill.”Integrated Electronics. Robert and Nashelsky Louis.Deflection and Null TypeCharacteristics of Instruments .Jacob Millman and Arvind Grabel. New Delhi 2003 3. output resistances.Direct and Indirect MethodsGeneralized Measurement System. distortion and bandwidth – Voltage and current feedback circuits . Prentice hall of India. stability. New Delhi. “Electronic Devices”. Prentice hall of India.Barkhausen criteria – RC and LC oscillators . Reference Books: 1. “Microelectronics.Measurement systems . 2004. 2008 2.Class AB amplifier Unit IV: FET Circuits FET small signal model – Low frequency common source and common drain amplifiers – Biasing FET amplifiers – Low FET (NMOS) – BIFET Amplifiers Unit V: Feedback Amplifiers and Oscillators Basic concepts of feedback amplifiers – Effect of negative feedback on input.Bistable – Monostable and Astable Text Books: 1.RC coupled amplifier . Prentice Hall of India.Load line – Piecewise Linear Diode model . 2008 10EI203 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • To gain knowledge about the measuring instruments and the methods of measurement and the use of different transducers Course Outcome: • To get the basic idea of measurements and the errors associated with measurement.DC amplifiers – Class A/B/C – Single ended and Push Pull . New York.Clipping circuitsRectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifiers . ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’.Ripple factor and regulation Unit II: Analysis of Transistor Circuits Load line analysis –Transistor hybrid model – Analysis of transistor amplifier using h parameters – Emitter follower – Millers Theorem – Cascading Transistor amplifier Unit III: Transistor Circuits as Amplifier Analysis of transistors at low – medium frequencies . Boylestad L.Multivibrators.Static and Dynamic-Calibration of instruments – Errors in measurement Unit II: Classification and Characteristics of Transducer 3 Karunya University . • To differentiate between the types of transducers available • To gain information about the function of various measuring instruments and using them Unit I: Science of Measurement Measurements . 2008. 2. David A Bell.” Mc Graw hill. Thomas Floyd. ‘Electronic Devices and Circuits’. New Delhi. New York.

Resistance strain gauge –Types – Resistance thermometer – Thermistors – characteristics. Renganathan “Transducer Engineering”. Sawhney “A course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”. Reference Book: 1 Doebelin. which will be taught in other courses. Inductance Transducer:. etc. • Knowledge of frequency-domain representation and analysis concepts using Fourier Analysis tools.Primary sensing elements . Magnetostrictive Transducer. 2 S. Classification of Transducer –Characteristics and choice of transducer – Factors influencing choice of transducer – Mathematical model of transducer. optical encoder – digital speed transducer.K. 10EI204 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • Coverage of continuous and discrete-time signals and systems. Course Outcome: • Characterize and analyze the properties of CT and DT signals and systems 4 Karunya University . Allied publishers Limited.variation of dielectric constants-frequency response .Mechanical Devices and Primary detectors – Transducer – Definition. Dhanpat Rai & Co. Linearity. 2000. impulse response and convolution.transducers using change in area of plates . 2003. Mode of operation .Hall effect transducer Unit V: Digital and other Miscellaneous sensors Digital Transducer – shaft encoder. sound sensors.. Z-transform • Concepts of the sampling process • Mathematical and computational skills needed in application areas like communication.properties of piezoelectric crystals-loading effect.RVDTSynchro – Induction potentiometer-variable reluctance accelerometer-microsyn.Piezoelectric transducerBasic principle. • Knowledge of time-domain representation and analysis concepts as they relate to difference equations. Delhi .Response to step – impulse – ramp and sinusoidal inputs Unit III: Resistive and Inductive Transducers Resistance Transducer-Basic principle – Potentiometer – Loading effects.O. Chennai.I and II order.distance between plates. “Measurement Systems Application and Design”.. Thermocouple –Compensation circuits – junction and lead compensation. signal processing and control.Basic principle – Linear variable differential transformer . their properties and representations and methods that are necessary for the analysis of continuous and discretetime signals and systems. Torque measurement on rotating shafts – shaft power measurement (dynamometers) Unit IV: Transducers based on Capacitance and other Transducers Capacitance Transducer – Basic principle. vibration sensors.chemical sensor – PH sensor-Ultra sonic sensors – Smart sensors – Fibre optic sensors – Semiconductor IC sensors Text Books: 1 A. Resolution. McGraw Hill International. New York. merits and demerits. E. 2004.

New Delhi. “Signals & Systems”. CTFT. Bangalore . McMillan Publishing Company. Conceptualize the effects of sampling a CT signal Analyze CT and DT systems using Laplace transforms and Z Transforms. England. “Digital Signal Processing Principles.K. 3.2005. Ashok Ambardar. Rodger E Zaimer and William H Tranter. “Introduction to Analog and Digital Signal Processing”. Alan V Oppenheim. 5. 2. 10EI205 CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 3: 1:0 5 Karunya University .• • • • Analyze CT and DT systems in Time domain using convolution Represent CT and DT systems in the Frequency domain using Fourier Analysis tools like CTFS. John Wiley and Sons Inc. John .G. “Signals & Systems”. Pearson Education Limited. Mitra “Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach” ‘Tata McGraw Hill Edition . 2. Alan S Wilsky and Hamid Nawab S.Ifeachor “Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach”. New Delhi. Unit I: Introduction. 2005. New Delhi.Proakis . New Delhi 2006.2001.. PWS Publishing Company. Newyork. Sanjit . 2002.. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen. “Signals & Systems – Continuous and Discrete”. 2008. 2002. Prentice Hall.Continuous and Discrete Time Signals and Systems Continuous Time (CT) signals – CT signal operations – Discrete Time(DT) signals – Representation of DT signals by impulses – DT signal operations – CT and DT systems – Properties of the systems – Linear Time Invariant(LTI) and Linear Shift Invariant(LSI) systems Unit II: Time Domain Representation of Continuous and Discrete Time Systems Continuous and Discrete Convolutions – CT system representations by differential equations – DT System representations by difference equations Unit III: Frequency Domain representation of CT systems Fourier series representation of periodic signals – Properties – Harmonic analysis of LTI systems – Convergence of Fourier series – Representation of a periodic signals by Continuous Time Fourier Transform (CTFT) – Properties – Frequency response of systems characterized by Differential Equations – Power and Energy Spectral Density – Parseval’s Relation Unit IV: Frequency Domain representation of DT systems Discrete Time Fourier series representation of DT periodic signals – Properties – Representation of DT aperiodic signals by Discrete Time Fourier Transform(DTFT) – Properties – Frequency response of systems characterized by Difference Equations – Power and Energy Spectral Density concepts related to DT signals – Parseval’s Relation – Sampling Theorem Unit V: Transform Operations of CT and DT Signals and Systems Review of Laplace Transforms-Z transform and its properties – Inverse Z transform – Solution of Difference equations – Analysis of LSI systems using Z transform Text Books: 1. Algorithms and Applications . Emmanuel C. 4. DTFS and DTFT. Reference Books: 1. Prentice Hall.

6 Karunya University .Gyroscope Unit III : Time Domain Analysis Types of test inputs-Response of first and second order system-Time domain specifications. Pune.Gopal. Barapate. B. Prentice Hall. 2002. Digital Control and State variable Methods.Frequency domain specifications –correlation between time and frequency response. Richard Dorf & Robert Bishop.J.” Hanna Publications. “Modern control system”. New Delhi. “Control System” Tech Max publications. B. I.Synchros .” RBA publications.Course Objective : • • • To teach the fundamental concepts of Control systems and mathematical modeling of the system To study the concept of time response and frequency response of the system To teach the basics of stability analysis of the system Course Outcome: • • • Represent the mathematical model of a system Determine the response of different order systems for various step inputs Analyse the stability of the system Unit I: Introduction Systems and their representation: Basic structure of control system. Nagoorkani A “ Control System. PD. New Delhi.asymptotic stability and relative stability.Nichol’s chart and M and N circles Unit V: Stability Analysis Concepts of stability: Characteristic equation. 2. 5. Chennai. Pearson Education.AC and DC servo motor.Block diagram representationBlock diagram reduction technique-Signal Flow graph and Mason’s formula Unit II: Components of Control System Components of Automatic Control systems . “Automatic control systems”.location of roots in s-plane for stability. “Modern Control Engineering”.Stepper motors .ControllersTachogenerator . lag and lead-lag compensators-Frequency response plots. and PID controllers-steady state error-static error and generalized Error coefficients. New Delhi. Delhi 2002 4.” New Age international (P) Ltd."Control System Engineering. Prentice Hall. PI. New Delhi. ”Linear Control Systems. Reference Books: 1.correlation between static and dynamic error coefficients Unit IV: Frequency Domain Analysis Frequency response.Lead.Nagrath and M. 2006.2006 2.Potentiometer . 2003 3. New Jersey 2005.Bode and Nyquist plotsPolar plot.Routh-Hurwitz stability criterion-Root locus techniques Text Books: 1. 2006 3. Open loop and Closed loop systems.Electrical analogy of physical systems-transfer function. Ogata K. Tata McGrawHill.C Kuo. Gopal M.type and order of a system-response with P. 2002.S Manke.

2008 Reference Books 1 Denton J.Sample And Hold Circuit .differential amplifier with active loads-current sources Unit II: Operation Amplifier and Applications: Inverter – Adder – Subtractor – Integrator – Differentiator – Multiplier – Divider – Comparator – Applications .Application of PLL as .frequency multiplication & division-frequency translation – AM – FM – FSK modulation and demodulation Text Books 1 Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain.Voltage To Current Converter .Monostable Operation Unit III: Amplifiers and Filters Buffer amplifier . Dailey.555 Timers – Astable .Use of op-amp with capacitive displacement transducer .phase angle detection Unit V: PLL Basic principle .Current To Voltage Converter .Precision Rectifier .analog and digital .Logarithmic Amplifier .frequency compensation techniques-Non inverting and inverting amplifier .Wiley Eastern Ltd.Clamper .offset – frequency-slew rate . New York.2002 2 Ramkant Gaykwad. “Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits”. Course Outcome: • Explain the general properties of an operational amplifier and design different feedback circuit • Design different amplifier circuits • Discuss the operation of multiplier and voltage regulator circuits • Discuss the operation and applications of PLL Unit I: Operational Amplifier Operational amplifier-ideal op-amp .voltage controlled oscillator Monolithic PLL . McGraw Hill.High pass .Band Pass .IC voltage regulator . 7 Karunya University .filters .Low pass .First order and second order transformations .isolation amplifier .DC characteristics –bias.Clipper .phase detector and comparator . “Linear integrated circuits” .Four quadrant multiplier & its applications .AC characteristics. 2000.frequency doubling .10EI206 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS Credits: 3: 1: 0 Course Objective: • To understand the basic concepts in the design of electronic circuits using linear integrated circuits and their applications in the processing of analog signals.charge amplifier instrumentation amplifier .switched capacitor filter Unit IV: Voltage Regulators and Multipliers Series op amp regulator.op-amp internal circuit . “Op amps & Linear Integrated Circuits” .Precision Reference Regulator .Band reject filter .state variable filter .723 general-purpose regulators .

Course Outcome: • • • The student will learn the internal organization of some popular microprocessors/microcontrollers. Unit I: Introduction to 8085 Functional Block Diagram – Registers – ALU.2 3 Coughlin and Driscoll.instruction timing diagrams . The student will learn hardware and software interaction and integration. “Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation” .K Sawhney.Bus systems -Timing and control signals . Ramesh S. machine language programming & interfacing techniques. 2002. Interrupts and DMA Addressing modes. Programming & Applications II Edition Kenneth J Ayala . D/A and A/D conversions. The students will learn the design of microprocessors/microcontrollers-based systems. pulse measurement. Delhi.instruction cycle and timing states .MCS 51 family features 8031/8051/8751. Ltd 2003 A.Typical applications – MCS 51 family features 8031/8051/8751 Text Books: 1. 2005. New Jersey. Programming and Applications with the 8085”.Machine cycles. Penram International publishing private limited.simple programs in 8085.Gaonkar.Multiple Interrupt requests and their handling – Typical programmable interrupt controller-Need for direct memory access – Devices for Handling DMA – Typical DMA Controller features Unit III: Interfacing peripherals with 8085 Programmable peripheral interface (8255)––Interfacing ADC0801 A/D Converter –DAC 0800 D/As Converters . “Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits.Addressing modes – Instruction set -Simple programmes in 8051 Unit V: Application of 8051 Typical applications – Keyboard and Display interfaction.interrupt structures – Timer and counters –Serial Data I/O. The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture.Architecture. “Microprocessor .Multiplexed seven segments LED display systems – Waveform generators– Stepper motor control Unit IV: Introduction to 8051 Microcontroller Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization. Dhanpat Rai & sons.” Prentice Hall of India Pvt.2005.Interrupt feature – Need for Interrupts Interrupt structure .Instruction set . 2.Memory interfacing Unit II: Programming.. 8 Karunya University . 10EI207 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To develop an in-depth understanding of the operation of microprocessors and microcontrollers.

modeling of simple systems – thermal – gas – liquid systems.Hall. characteristics and application of control valves.Closed loop response of I & II order systems with and without valve -measuring element dynamics Unit IV: Final control elements Pneumatic control valves.Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control 9 Karunya University . 2003.feed forward control. and methods of controller tuning.piping and Instrumentation diagram .P. Microcontroller Hand Book.multi position.Selection of control modes for processes like level-pressure-temperature and flow Unit III: Optimum controller settings Controller tuning Methods: Evaluation criteria .Selection of control valves. Students will be exposed to various complex control schemes. 2004.Godse”Microprocessor & applications”.Reference Books : 1.Process characteristics: Process equation.instrument terms and symbols. A.Inherent and installed valve characteristics.interacting and noninteracting processes Unit II: Basic control actions Controller modes: Basic control action.Valve sizing.interaction of control loops . Tata Mcgraw Hill.Technical Publication. Unit I: Process dynamics Process Control System: Terms and objectives .damped oscillation method.Ziegler –Nichol’s tuning. 2.ratio control.Auto/Manual transfer. ITAE.plug characteristics.floating control modesContinuous controller modes: proportional. 2008. PI – PD – PID – Integral wind-up and prevention.Case Studies: Distillation columnboiler drum level control. 10EI208 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • • • To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process To design Various control schemes To apply the control system in various processes Course Outcome: • • • Students will be able to model a physical process.Cavitation and flashing in control valves.degrees of freedom. 3.Response of controllers for different test inputs.Valve actuators and positioners Unit V: Advanced control system Cascade control. Douglas V. “Microprocessors and Interfacing: Programming and Hardware”.types.Split range and selective controlMultivariable process control.G.P. Process reaction curve method. New Delhi. Pune. INTEL.Self. ISE. integral.two position.construction details. derivative.IAE.Godse.regulating processes. Students will have the knowledge of various controller designs.

Edgar.Bimetallic thermometerResistance temperature detector (RTD) .IC temperature sensors .Target flow meters-Flow meter selection. 2. and simulation” Prentice Hall .definitions and units. “Process control: modeling. 2. level. Seborg.ultrasonic flow meters . Coughanowr D.fixed points -filled-system thermometers . 3.Electrical methods using strain gauge-High pressure measurement-Vacuum gauges . Tata McGraw Hill.turbine and other rotary element flow meters. Course Outcome: • The student will be equip with the basic knowledge of Pressure.Calibration of Pressure gauge using Dead Weight Tester Unit II: Flow Measurement Flow measurement: Introduction .positive displacement liquid metersAnemometers: Hot wire/hot film anemometer.angular momentum. 2003. Wayne Bequette.Measurement of mass flow rate: radiation. Reference Books: 1.Text Books: 1. Singapore. Stephanopoulos.Radiation pyrometer.B.pitot tubesorifice meters.” John Willey and Sons. standards. 2006. New Jersey-2003 4. Thomas F. New Jersey 2006. New York.Piezoelectric . Temperature.application.measuring circuits. Peter Harriott.laser doppler anemometer (LDA)-electromagnetic flow meter.Mcleod gauge .classification of flow meters. Curtis D . • To understand the construction and working of measuring instruments. flow. B. “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”.calibration and application 10 Karunya University . 2008. level.venturi tubes.Thermistors .flow tubes. Unit I: Pressure Measurement Pressure measurement basics. Duncan A. Mellichamp. “Process Control”.Manometers – Elastic elements. Dale E.R. density and viscosity measurements. 2008. 2006. Temperature. Smith C. McGraw Hill. flow. design. A. • The student knows to calibrate the various instruments also he knows to apply the instrument in various fields. 3.Thermocouple .”Process control instrumentation technology.principle and types . “Chemical Process Control”.impeller. New Delhi. density and viscosity measurements. Singapore.. Prentice Hall.calibration Unit III: Temperature Measurement Temperature standards .Cold junction compensation. New Delhi. John Wiley and Sons. “Process Dynamics and Control.” Prentice Hall .Thermal conductivity gauges -Ionization gauge selection and application – Capacitance Pressure measurement.L and Corripio.Johnson.turbine . “Process Systems Analysis and Control”. 10EI209 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Pressure.flow nozzles..construction requirements for industry .Optical Pyrometer -Sensor selection.

rotating paddle switchesdiaphragm .power supplies and isolatorsGeneral PLC programming procedures-programming on-off inputs/ outputs-Auxiliary commands and functions.thermal – ultrasonic .Measurement of density: Definitions – units .” Chilton Book Company.O. “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”. 2003.Walt Boyes.input/output modules.Air purge system and differential pressure detectors .industrial viscometers . “Instrumentation Reference Book. Reference Books: 1. 2003. “Process Measurement and Analysis. Doebelin E.gas densitometers .radiation .field effect .Sensor selection .float level devices.counter functions Unit III: PLC Intermediate Functions 11 Karunya University .microwave . Liptak B.application and selection Text Books: 1.capacitance and RF probes .PLC Basic Functions. 10EI210 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To study the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system • To teach the concept of PLC and the Programming using Ladder Diagram • To understand the basics of DCS and communication standards Course Outcome • • • Students will have the knowledge of data acquisition System Students will be able to write Programs using ladder diagrams Students will have the knowledge of DCS and communication standards Unit I : Review of Computers in Process Control Data loggers – Data Acquisition Systems (DAS) – Direct Digital Control (DDC) – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) – sampling considerations – Functional block diagram of computer control systems Unit II : Programmable Logic Controller(PLC) Basics Definition – overview of PLC systems. McGraw Hill.online measurements .calibration and application Unit V: Viscosity and Density Measurement Measurement of viscosity: definitions – units .register basics. Pennsylvania.radar and vibrating type level sensors – Solid level measurement .conductivity .Unit IV: Level Measurement Visual techniques .liquid density measurement .timer functions. United States.” Butterworth Heinemann.G.Newtonian and Non-Newtonian behavior measurement of viscosity using laboratory viscometers . 2.Viscometer selection and application.displacer level detectors. New York.resistance . 2003. Radnor.

Process interfacing issues . Prentice Hall Inc. 2. 2003. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology. “Computer-Based Industrial Control. “Computer Control of Process. 2004.PID functions-PLC installationtroubleshooting and maintenance. Ronald A Reis.analog PLC operation.networking of PLC. Liptak.redundancy concept Unit V: Communication standards Introduction – Evolution of signal standards – HART communication protocol – communication modes – HART networks – Introduction – General Field bus architecture – basic requirements of field bus standard. John. New Delhi.Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC Unit IV : Introduction to (DCS) Distributed Control Systems (DCS): Definition .” CRC press.Foundation Field bus Text Books: 1. New York.Chidambaram.G. It gives the introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration Course Outcome: • • Students will have a clear knowledge about human physiology system.W. Process control and Optimization”. 3. “Process software and digital networks. 2004 4. New Delhi. Frank D.communication facilities .LCU . Industrial Field bus: PROFIBUS . 2. 3. “Programmable Logic Controllers”.“ PHI.” Prentice Hall . M. 10EI211 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4: 0:0 Course Objective: • • • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments. “Programmable Logic Controllers . this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments.comparison functions . 2003 Reference Books: 1. B.” Narosa Publishing. PLC Advanced intermediate functions: Utilizing digital bitssequencer functions. Webb.Local Control Unit (LCU) architecture . Liptak. New Jersey. They will have knowledge of the principle operation and design and the background knowledge of biomedical instruments and specific applications of biomedical engineering Unit I: Anatomy & Physiology of human body 12 Karunya University . B. McGraw Hill.G.PLC intermediate functions: Arithmetic functions .Florida-2003. Pennsylvania.Skip and MCR functions . CRC pressRadnor..data move systems. Krishna Kant. Curtis D. New Jersey 2006.matrix functions. It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. 2006. Petruzella.PLC Advanced functions: Alternate programming languages.LCU languages .Principles and Applications”. “Instrument Engineers Hand.

3. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. 2003.Automated Biochemical analysis system .Anesthesia machine – Ventilators .heart-lung machine – Dialysis . 2003. Cromwell.Implantable Telemetry systems Text Books: 1. Patient safety Electro Surgical unit: short wave & microwave diathermy . 13 Karunya University . “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”.measurement of lung volume .Origin of bioelectric signal . 2. Reference Books: 1. Netherlands.EOG and their characteristics Unit II: Measurement of Physiological Parameters Physiological transducers .Ultrasound scanner . Patient Safety: Electric Shock Hazards . scan . • To provide adequate knowledge about feedback neural networks. “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design.Multi patient Telemetry.Telemetry: Wireless telemetry. Kumbakonam.vector cardiograph .Blood flow . pacemaker .Measurement of Blood pCO2. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design. 2009. Delhi. Webster.spectrophotometer – Colorimeter. Brown.MRI instrumentation . 10EI212 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL Credits: 4: 0:0 Course Objective: • To cater the knowledge of Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Control and use these for controlling real time systems.Measurement of Blood pressure .Nervous system . Joseph J.single channel and multichannel telemetry system.Bioelectric signals: ECGEMG – ECG . Anuradha Agencies Publishers. 2007.respiration rate . Arumugam.The cell & its electrical activity. Carr and John M.Muscular system .B.chromatography. 3.Blood pO2 Measurement. 2. Prentice Hall of India. Prentice Hall of India. 2006. Pearson Education India. New Delhi.Laser surgical unit-Defibrillators.Leakage Current Unit IV: Clinical Laboratory Instruments Clinical Flame photometer .” McGrawHill Publisher.Oximeters Audiometer Unit III: Therapeutic and Surgical Equipments.heart rate .” John Wiley and sons Inc.Khandpur.Cardiac output measurement . “Biomedical Instrumentation". New York.T.Blood Gas Analyzer: Blood pH Measurement.Respiratory system.M. “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”.Echo cardiograph – angiography .Blood Cell Counters: Types and Methods of cell counting Unit V: Imaging technique & Telemetry X-ray – C. R.Nerve stimulators . Myer Kutz.Total artificial heart (TAH).principle physiological system: Cardiovascular . Course Outcome: • To expose the students to the concepts of feed forward neural networks. 2004. New Delhi.

. ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’. Articulation Control) Unit III: Fuzzy Systems Classical sets – Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzification – Defuzzification – Fuzzy rules Unit IV: Fuzzy Logic Control Membership function – Knowledge base – Decision-making logic – Optimisation of membership function using neural networks – Adaptive fuzzy system – Introduction to genetic algorithm Unit V: Application of FLC Fuzzy logic control – Inverted pendulum – Image processing – Home heating system – Blood pressure during anesthesia – Introduction to neuro fuzzy controller Text Books: 1.Boston. “Introduction to Fuzzy Control.. 3. Ltd. N.” PWS Publishing Co. 2008. B. 2 Zimmerman H. 10EI213 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion • To understand the basics of Z. identification and control of dynamical systems-case studies (Inverted Pendulum. 4 Laurance Fausett.A.”Fuzzy sets. Reference Books: 1 Klir G. To provide adequate knowledge about fuzzy set theory. Unit I: Architectures Introduction – Biological neuron – Artificial neuron – Neuron modeling – Learning rules – Single layer – Multi layer feed forward network – Back propagation – Learning factors Unit II: Neural Networks For Control Feedback networks – Discrete time hop field networks – Schemes of neuro-control..”Fuzzy set theory and its Applications.• • • To teach about the concept of fuzziness involved in various systems. 2001. 2002. 2005.. England. Dordrecht. 2004. & Folger T. West Sussex. Hellendroon.. “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems. Pune. Pearson Education. 2008.“Fuzzy Logic With Engineering Applications.” Kluwer Academic Publishers.” John Willey and Sons. uncertainty and Information. New Delhi. Zurada. 3 Driankov. Kosko.J.” Prentice –Hall of India Pvt.” Narosa publishers. Englewood cliffs. Timothy J Ross . 2. “Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems: A Dynamical Approach to Machine Intelligence. New Delhi. Jacek M.Transform • To study the stability analysis of digital control system 14 Karunya University .J. 2001.J. To provide adequate knowledge of application of fuzzy logic control to real time systems. To provide comprehensive knowledge of fuzzy logic control and adaptive fuzzy logic and to design the fuzzy control using genetic algorithm. New Delhi.” Prentice Hall.

2008 10EI214 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • To equip students with various issues related to analog and digital communication such as modulation. 2. 2. Digital to Analog conversion – Analog to Digital conversion. Gene F.Controllability and observability. “Digital Control and State variable Methods”.Implementation of control algorithms using microcontroller – Block diagram study of digital implementation. Franklin.Design of state feedback and output feedback control Unit IV: Stability of Digital Control Systems Stability studies . J.• To equip the basic knowledge of digital process control design Course Outcome: • Students will have the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion • Students will have the knowledge of Z. Richard C. Demodulation.A/D & D/A converters .Positional and incremental forms .Bilinear transformation .Response of sampled data systems to step and ramp inputs .2002.Sampled Data Control system. Gopal M.Zero Order Hold Unit II: System Response Review of Z and Inverse Z transform . cascade and parallel realization . David Powell.Dead-beat algorithm.Shannon's sampling theorems . Tata McGrawHill.Sampled data model for continuous system .Z domain equivalent. New Delhi.Jury's stability test . Robert H. State sequences for sampled data systems . Pearson Education Limited. Bishop. Dorf. “Digital control of dynamic systems”. Text Books: 1. “Modern control systems. 2003 Reference Books: 1. Ogata.Modified Z transform Unit III: Function Realisation Pulse transformation function by direct.Ramp type A/D-Dual slope A/D-Successive approximation A/D . Prentice-hall Of India. New Delhi 2008.” Pearson Education inc. “Discrete Time Control Systems”.Reconstruction . New Delhi.Ringing . Noise handling.Steady state errors . New Delhi.solutions Unit V: Digital Process Control Design Digital PID algorithm .Digital quantization. Data conversion and Multiplexing Course Outcome: • Students will be familiar with the techniques involved in the transfer of information in the field of Radio communication 15 Karunya University .Transform • Students will have knowledge of digital process control design Unit I: Sample Theory and Converters Review of Sample theory .Dahlin's and Kalman's algorithms .

2 William Scheweber. Delhi. 2. 2001. Bruce Carlson. 2004 3 Wayne Tomasi. 2006. Simon Haykins. Tata McGraw – Hill. “Communication Systems”. 3. how it can be produced and where it is used. New York. Prentice Hall of India LTD. Prentice Hall of India LTD. 5.. PDM. McGraw-Hill. Anokh Singh. New Delhi. 2004 Reference Books: 1.2008. Television. A “Communication Systems”. Prentice Hall of India LTD. New York.Basic concepts of Satellite communication and cellular communication Text Books: 1 Roody and Coolen . PCM – delta modulation – differential PCM – merits and demerits – comparison of pulse modulation schemes-Digital modulation and demodulation systems: FSK – ASK . “Electronic Communication Systems”. FM and PM – Noise –Sources and Types of noise -Effects of noise in AM and FM systems Unit III: Digital Communication Systems PAM.Chand and Company Ltd. 2001. PPM. “Electronic Communication”. New Delhi. Cellular and Satellite Communication Unit I: Radio Communication Systems Need for Modulation . John Wiley. Kennedy G. USA. “Principles of Communication Engineering”. McGraw-Hill.Principle of AM – FM and PM – modulation index– signal power – DSBSC-SSBSC-Independent sideband-vestigial sideband Unit II: Transmitters and Receivers AM and FM transmitters and receivers – AM and FM modulators and demodulators – Comparison of AM.TV signals – TV receivers – Color TV-Radar concepts. 10EI215 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To know the basics of Ultrasonic’s. S. New Delhi. 4. New Delhi.• • Students will be able to detect and correct the errors that occur due to noise during transmission Students will be able to understand the concepts of Facsimile.Error detection and correction – Multiplexing introduction – TDM & FDM Unit V: Facsimile & Television Facsimile.. “Electronic Communication Systems”. 2008. “Electronic communication systems”.. 2007.PSK Unit IV: Data Transmission Twisted pair and coaxial cables – Fiber optics – Sources and detectors – Fiber optic Complete system –A/D and D/A converters.Modem functions – RS232 operation . Taub and Schilling “Principles of Communication Systems”. Course Outcome: 16 Karunya University .Inc.

YU. Sanders.Cheeke. reflection and transmission coefficients – intensity and attenuation of sound beam.Palanichamy. Alan B. Austin R. Bulavin.transit time-resonance.Precise Measurement: Pulse-echo Overlap.Viscosity measurement. ter Harr.Optical Method-Electrical Method.USA. “Fundamentals of Acoustics.” CRC Press. Hill. Lawrence E.acoustical holography Text Books: 1.F.2000.David N.Cross correlation-Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse-echo OverlapCross correlation-search unit types Unit III: Classification of Ultrasonic Test Methods Pulse echo. 2004. Foster B. 3.diagnosis and therapy.J.A.” John Wiley and Sons Inc. 4. J. “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”.R. • It gives the introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration 17 Karunya University . Reference Books: 1. 10EI216 BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments.Coppens. Koninklijke Brill.” CRC Press. 2004. Alpha Science International. Baldev Raj. Power level – medium parameters Unit II :Generation/ Detection of Ultrasonic Waves Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects – construction and characteristics – Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method.direct contact and immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection – Flow meters – Density measurement.Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials Unit V :Ultrasonic Applications in Medical Field Medical Imaging. UK.2007. L.”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves.• The students after completion of course they come to know the basics of Sonics with application. Unit I: Ultrasonic Waves Principles and propagation of various waves – characterization of ultrasonic transmission. England.Frey.” VSP. 2.SONAR.2009. James V. Florida. G. • It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. “Physical Principles of Medical Ultrasonics.R. this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments.Equations and Their Practical Uses. 2. V. ”Ultrasonics Data. “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine.Zabashta.” John Wiley & sons.Stulen.Boston.C. 2002. Dale Ensminger. Bamber.Kinsler. C. Level measurement – Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements Unit IV :Ultrasonic Application Measuring thickness-depth-Rail Inspection using Ultrasonic. P.Rajendran.

vision.Blood pCO2. New Delhi. New Delhi. “Biomedical Instrumentation". 2004. “Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design. Anuradha Agencies Publishers.Nerve stimulators. EMG. 2009.principle physiological system: Cardiovascular. Myer Kutz. • They will have knowledge of the principle operation and design and the background knowledge of biomedical instruments and specific applications of biomedical engineering Unit I: Physiology of Human Body Cell & its electrical activity.pacemaker-heart-lung machine-Dialysis-Anesthesia machine-Ventilators.B. Cromwell.cardiac output Unit IV: Bio-Chemical Measurement Blood pH.types of electrodes – Electrodes for ECG.M.Clinical flame photometer.Classification of Transducer: Displacement. Carr and John M. EOG and their characteristics and recording Unit III: Measurement of Physiological Parameters Physiological transducers. Course Outcome: • The students after completion of course they come to know the basics of Sonics with application. 2003.T. Prentice Hall of India. 2007. 18 Karunya University .automated Biochemical analyzer– Medical Diagnosis with chemical tests Unit V: Therapeutic Equipments & Imaging Technique Defibrillators . Arumugam. ECG and EOG – Bioelectric signals: ECG .Blood pO2.X-ray.position and Motionpressure-Photoelectric Transducer – Oximeters.Nervous systemRespiratory system. Kumbakonam. Reference Books: 1.” John Wiley and sons Inc. Prentice Hall of India. Webster. Netherlands. “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”.Khandpur. New York. 2003. Brown. R. 3.Electromagnetic and ultrasonic blood flowmeterblood pressure. how it can be produced and where it is used. scan. “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”.Course Outcome: • Students will have a clear knowledge about human physiology system. 10EI217 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credits 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To know the basics of Ultrasonics. 2.colorimeter-spectro photometer. 2.Electrophoresis. 2006. Pearson Education India. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design.MRI instrumentation Text Books: 1. Delhi.Muscular system Unit II: Electrodes and Bioelectric Signals Bioelectrodes.C. EMG . “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”.” McGraw-Hill Publisher. Joseph J. 4.

forgings Castings . Generation of ultrasonic waves: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects.” John Wiley & sons.Stulen. England.” John Wiley and Sons Inc. “Fundamentals of Acoustics. V.Evaluation of Mechanical Properties: Tensile and yield Strength.Hardness.Level measurement-Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements. Koninklijke Brill.USA.A. G.Rail Inspection.search unit types-phase array-construction and characteristics Unit II: Ultrasonic Measurement Technique Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method. Foster B. P. Narosa Publishing House. “Physical Principles of Medical Ultrasonics. 2004. ter Harr.J. 2004. C. Alan B. New Delhi.Optical Method.Cross correlation.Fracture toughness-SONAR Unit V: Ultrasonic Medical Application Medical Imaging-diagnosis and therapy-acoustical holography Text Books: 1.F.C. Bamber.Palanichamy.Thickness measurement Unit IV: Ultrasonic Application Non-destructive Testing: Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials. ”Ultrasonics Data.Coppens.Kinsler.R. Florida. Hill. Reference Book: 1. James V. 10EI218 MODERN CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective • • • To teach the fundamental concepts of Control systems and mathematical modelling of the system To study the concept of time response and frequency response of the system To teach the basics of stability analysis of the system Course Outcome • • • Students will have the knowledge of mathematical modelling of the system Students will be able to find the response of different order systems for a step input Students will be able to identify the stability of the system 19 Karunya University .Rajendran.Zabashta.Equations and Their Practical Uses.R. Sanders.Concrete Testing.Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse-echo Overlap-Cross correlation. 2.Boston. Science and Technology of Ultrasonics-Baldev Raj. Bulavin.” CRC Press. Lawrence E. Austin R.” VSP.Frey.Precise Measurement: Pulse-echo Overlap.resonance-direct contact and immersion type and ultrasonic methods of flaw detection Unit III: Ultrasonic Sensor Flow meters-Density measurement-Viscosity measurement. 2009. L. “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine. YU.2007. 4.2000.Unit I: Ultrasonic Waves Principles and propagation of various waves-characterization of ultrasonic Transmission.transit time.Testing Methods: Pulse echo. 3.Electrical Method. Dale Ensminger.

a.2002.transnational and rotational mechanical systems and analogous electrical systems .location of roots in s plane for stability .c servo motor – Mathematical representation – block diagram – signal flow graph and transfer function of electrical systems Unit II :Time Response Time response . Eaglewood. Prentice Hall.tachogenerator . Ogata.time domain specifications . 20 Karunya University . Wiley & Sons.step response of first order and second order systems . K. Bode plot ... Reference Books: 1. John Wiley & Sons. 2002.characteristic equation . 2.Nichol's chart . Kuo.estimation of the specifications for a second order system.steady state error . Benjamin C.potentiometer synchros .c and d. 2007.applications of Bode plots and Nyquist stability criterion – polar plot Unit IV: Stability Analysis Stability ..static error and generalized error coefficients Unit III :Frequency Response Frequency domain specifications .type and order of a system .Unit I: Introduction Open loop and closed loop systems . "Automatic Control Systems". New Jersey. Nagrath and Gopal. "Modern Control Systems Engineering".Nyquist stability criterion .:"Control System Engineering". New Delhi.Routh Hurwitz criterion -Root Locus Techniques Unit V: State Space Analysis of Control Systems State space representation – The concept of state – State space representation of systems – Solution of state equations – Eigen values and Eigen vectors of n x n nonsingular matrix – Diagonalization of n x n matrix – Transfer matrix – Controllability – Observability Text Books: 1.Basic components of control systems . New York.

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS  & INSTRUMENTATION  ENGINEERING           .

The student will be able to select a suitable transducer for a given application. To familiarize the sensors used for each application. To study the design aspects of the sensor. Networks and Protocols Modeling of Physiological Systems Advanced Medical Instrumentation Biomaterials Hospital Management Communication Theory and Telemetry Anatomy and Physiology Discrete Time Control Systems Medical Sensors Advanced Instrumentation & Process Control For Food Processing Embedded Linux Advanced Embedded Systems Lab Medical Diagnostics And Therapeutic Lab Optimal Control Theory Networks And Protocols For Medical System Real Time and Embedded Systems Credit 4:0:0 3: 1 : 0 3:1:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0: 0 : 2 0: 0 : 2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 10EI301 TRANSDUCER ENGINEERING Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • To understand the basic characteristics of Transducers. Unit I : Generalized Characteristics of Transducers Introduction-static characteristics-dynamic characteristics-frequency response of first ordertransducer. The student will be able to design a transducer as per the requirement. To understand the operation and construction of various transducers. Course Outcome: • • • The student will be able to find the dynamics of the transducer.REVISED AND NEW SUBJECTS Sub. Code 10EI301 10EI302 10EI303 10EI304 10EI305 10EI306 10EI307 10EI308 10EI309 10EI310 10EI311 10EI312 10EI313 10EI314 10EI315 10EI316 10EI317 10EI318 10EI319 10EI320 10EI321 10EI322 10EI323 Subject Transducer Engineering Process Control Advanced Control Systems Advanced Programmable Signal Processor Advanced Digital Signal Processing Advanced Microcontrollers Digital System Design Data Communication.frequency response of second order transducer-higher order transducerprocedure to determine the constants and transfer function of a system Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  1  .

Unit II : Resistance and Inductance Transducer Basic principle-potentiometer-resistance strain gauge-measurement of torque-stress measurement on rotating members-semi conductor strain gauges-contact pressurehumidity measurement. 2000. H K P Neubert.sensors and the principles-magneto resistive sensors-hall effect and sensor – inductance and eddy current sensors .D. New Delhi. 2003. • To understand various controllers and control algorithms. New York. 2003.differential pressure transducerfeedback type capacitance proximity pickup-condenser microphone-pulse width modulating circuit. Stress. Piezoelectric Crystals. Cambridge. “Instrument Transducers”. “Transducer Engineering”. Dr. Pressure.angular movement transducer-electromagnetic flow meter-switching magnetic sensor Unit V : Design of Electromechanical Transducers Design of Electromechanical Transducers for: Force.piezoelectric coefficients. 2. LVDT.O. • Students will have the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling • Students will be able to demonstrate various control algorithms in the real time complex process Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  2  . typical application in each design case Reference Books: 1. Basic principle-linear variable differential transformer-LVDT equations-RVDT-application of LVDT-LVDT pressure transducer-synchros. “Measurement Systems-Applications and Design”. Allied publishers. • Students will be able to design various controllers.modes of deformation-general form of piezoelectric transducers -environmental effects Unit IV : Magnetic sensors Introduction.Prentice Hall of India. McGraw Hill. New Delhi 2003 10EI302 PROCESS CONTROL Credit: 3: 1: 0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modeling. 3.Renganathan.. E. Introduction-material for piezoelectric transducer-equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystal . Doeblin. Partranabis.Strain-gauge. • To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling • To analyze complex control schemes Course Outcome: • Students will be able to develop mathematical model of a physical process. Oxford University Press. Capacitive Elements.microsyn Unit III : Capacitance and Piezoelectric Transducers Basic principle-capacitance displacement transducer. 4.S.synchros as position transducer-induction potentiometer-variable reluctance accelerometer. Vibration using . ”Sensors and Transducers” .

floating control modes. degrees of freedom.2008 3. modeling of simple systems – thermal. 2006. gas. Composite controller modes: PI. derivative. Integral wind-up and prevention.Adaptive control. multi-position.. “Process Systems Analysis and Control”.Dynamic matrix control-model-Generalized predictive control Reference Books: 1. equal percentage and quick opening valve. Coughanowr D. New York. John Wiley and Sons. Continuous controller modes: proportional.Cascade control.. Duncan A. Marlin. “Process Dynamics and Control” . B. integral. McGraw-Hill Higher Education... piping and Instrumentation diagram. Dale E. instrument terms and symbols.Ratio control.’ Process control: modeling. New Delhi.Model predictive control . 2000 10EI303 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Course Objective: • • To Understand the basics of mathematical modeling To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems 3  Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  . Singapore.Control Valve sizing. 2006. Unit IV: Design of Controllers for Multivariable Systems Introduction to multivariable system-evolution of loop interaction –evolution of relative gains. Auto/Manual transfer. Smith C. liquid systems.Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve methoddamped oscillation method. Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork.single loop and overall stability. Stephanopoulos G.model equations for a binary distillation columnTransfer function matrix-Method of inequalities. “Chemical Process Control. PD. Edgar. 5.A. 2003. Seborg. Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs-selection of control mode for different process with control scheme.interacting processes. Thomas F.L and Corripio. New Jersey-2003 4.Control valve types: linear. Mellichamp. 6. Wayne Bequette. and simulation’ Prentice Hall . load disturbance and their effect on processes-Self-regulating processes-interacting and non.Centralized controller Unit V: Complex Control Techniques Internal model control . PID. design. T.Averaging controlInferential control. 2. Unit II: Control Action and Final Control Element Controller modes: Basic control action.E.B.Regulator and servo control. Process lag. Unit III: Controller Tuning and Advanced Control Strategies Optimum controller settings. Process Control.Unit I: Introduction to Process Control Process Control System: Terms and objectives.Ziegler Nichol’s tuning-Pole placement method-Feed forward control. two position. Prentice Hall.Split range control.classification of variablesProcess characteristics: Process equation. “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”.Willey India.Decoupling control.R.

Singiresu S. 2001. Tata McGrawHill. 3. New Jersey. constructing phase portraits. New Jersey. 2004.Runge Kutta method. Reference Books: 1. Prentice Hall Inc.describing function analysis. New Jersey 2002 4. Unit V: Robust PID Control Introduction to robust control: PID Tuning.Observability and constructability .Companion forms Controller / Observer form . “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall.Inverted Pendulum Unit II: Analysis of Mathematical Models State space method.Taylor Series. Course outcomes: Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  4  . 10EI304 ADVANCED PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL PROCESSOR Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The course is aimed at providing the advanced programmable processors to meet a range of practical applications. New Delhi. Jean-Jacques E.limit cycle .Principle of Linearization of Differential Equation Unit III: State Space Analysis Reachability and controllability .Full order and reduced order Estimator.Euler’s method. “Nonlinear system analysis”. Upper Saddle River. singular points. New Jersey 2009 2. 5.Lyapunov stability theorems . Prentice Hall Inc.Permanent Magnet stepper motor.M. Rao..Combined controller estimator compensator Unit IV: Stability of Nonlinear System Stability of Nonlinear system . Gopal M.Course Outcome: • • At the end of the course students will be able apply the modeling concepts Students will be equipped with stability analysis of linear and non linear systems Unit I: Modeling of Dynamic Systems Definition of System. Weiping Li. Slotine. Pearson Education.. Vidyasagar .Phase plane.State feed-back control .variable gradient method.Two Degrees of Freedom Control-Design consideration of Robust Control.State space representation of systemCentrifugal Governor-Ground vehicle.Predictor Corrector method. Ogata K. “Modern Control Engineering”.Mathematical modeling.Isoclines. 2003.Modifications of PID control scheme.State estimator . Digital Control and State variable Methods. “Applied nonlinear control”.Lyapunov function for nonlinear system.Phase plane analysis.Numerical methods.Krasovskii’s method.

Stephen Brown.Load / Store Instructions-Addition/ Subtraction Instructions -Move Instructions -Multiplication Instructions. IIR filter in FPGA Reference Books 1. New York.FIR filter implementation. 2003.Bhaskar. Unit V: DSP with FPGA FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors. Unit III: Architecture of TMS320C5X Introduction – Bus Structure.Digital Filters. Implementation of basic MAC unit. FIR filter. “Digital Signal Processor”.Central Arithmetic Logic Unit-Auxiliary Register ALU – Index Register-Auxiliary Register Compare Register-Block Move Address RegisterBlock Repeat Registers-Parallel Logic Unit -Memory –Mapped Registers-Program controller-Some Flags in the status Registers-On-Chip Memory-On –Chip Peripherals Unit IV: TMS320C5X Assembly Language Instructions and Instruction Pipelining in C5X Assembly Language Syntax-Addressing Modes.The NORM Instruction-Program Control Instruction -Peripheral Control-Pipeline Structure-Pipeline operation. Pearson Education. Michael John Sabastian Smith. Spinger. The students can apply object-oriented techniques and FPGA codings to the problem of extending a larger software system to implement digital signal processing techniques Unit I: Overview of Digital Signal Processing and Applications Signals and their Origin.Multi-rate Signal Processing.USA.Normal pipeline operation. Causality and stability of discrete time systems-Z Transform -Advantages of Digital Signal Processing -DSP in the sample and transform domain-Fast Fourier Transform. TMH. B. MACD instructions. 2.Venkataramani & M. McGraw-Hill Higher Education. Meyer-Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable Gate Arrays”.2005 4. “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”.Convolution and Inverse Filtering-Sampling theorem and discrete time system. New Delhi. “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Design”. New Delhi-2005 10EI305 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credit: 3:1:0 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  5  . U. FPGA structure. 2003.Linearity.VLIW Architecture –Pipelining –Special Addressing Modes in P-DSPs-On-Chip Peripherals. shift invariance. 3. Zvonko Vranesic.• • The students will know the in-depth knowledge in programmable processors and its applications.Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P-DSPs. Unit II: Introduction to Programmable DSPs Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator.Multiported Memory. Convolution using MAC.Multiple Access Memory.

Tata McGraw.Characterization and Classification of continuous time signals and Discrete time signals. 2001. Addision Wesley. Structure realization of FIR filter using MATLAB. Emmanuel C. equiripple linear phase FIR filter design using MATLAB. classification and properties of systems. Algorithms and Applications”. • Students will have the ability to solve various types of practical problems in DSPUnit I : Introduction Signals and their origin. Addison-Wesley. California.Course objective • This course covers the techniques of modern signal processing that are fundamental to a wide variety of application areas. filter implementation for sampling rate conversion.application-Phase shifters – audio sub bandcoding References Books: 1. multistage implementation of multirate system. Z-Transform and its properties – Inverse Z-transform Unit III : Design of IIR Filters Block diagram Representation of digital filter-Basic IIR digital filter structures.Decimation by an integer factor -Interpolation by an integer factor –sampling rate conversion by a rational factor.Structure Realization Using MATLAB-Preliminary consideration in digital filter design – Bilinear transformation Unit IV : Design of FIR Filters Basic FIR Filter Structure.Proakis. Computational advantages of FFT over DFT-Decimation in time FFT algorithm-Decimation-in Frequency FFT algorithm. Unit II : DT Signals in Transform Domain Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT) and its properties. power and energy spectral density Radix 2FFT. discuss the theory and implementation of FFT algorithms. New Delhi. Mitra “Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach”. direct form FIR structures. “Digital Signal Processing Principles. John . window based FIR filter design using MATLAB.G. 2. Time domain characterization of DT system – convolution. Least square error FIR filter design using MATLAB Unit V Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing Mathematical description of change of sampling rate-Interpolation and Decimation Direct digital domain approach . polyphase filter structures. digital filters. USA.K. We will review the mathematical basis of discrete time signal analysis.difference equation. 2002 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  6  . Course outcome • Students will learn the essential advanced topics in DSP that are necessary for successful Postgraduate level research. 3. Sanjit . Frequency sampling method. 2006. FIR Filter design based on windowed Fourier series.Ifeachor “Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach”.

Janice Gillispic Mazidi. USA. “ The 8051 micro controller and embedded systems using assembly and C”. Mohammad Ali Mazide.I/O port expansion – I2C bus for peripheral chip access. Unit II: Intel 8051 Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization – counters and timers – USART – interrupts – peripherals and interfacing – digital and analog interfacing methods Addressing modes – Instruction set . 3. Hyderabad. New Jersey.”The 8051 Microcontroller”. New Delhi. Unit III: 8096/80196 Family Architecture of 8096 – addressing Modes – instruction set – memory map in Intel 80196 family MCU system – I/O ports – programmable timers – Interrupts.Operating Mode Selection. 2000. Unit I: Microcontroller Introduction – architecture of microcontrollers – types .parallel ports– On chip ADC &DAC – reset – watchdog timer – real-time clock.– programming examples. 2003. John. Unit IV: High Performance RISC Architecture Introduction to 16/32 bit processor – ARM architecture – The ARM instruction set – The thumb instruction set – programmers model . Thomson Delmar Learning .B. Unit V: PIC Micro Controller CPU Architecture – Instruction set – Interrupts – Timers –Memory.microcontroller resources – bus width. Kenneth Ayala . 2005. Rolin D.Mckinlay. USA. “Design with PIC Micro Controller”. Reference Books: 1. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers .examples – selectionapplications.program and data memory. 4. prentice Hall of India. 2. Registers. Steave Furber. 2006 5. Programming. Interfacing and System Design”.A/D converter – UART. Pearson Education. 2004 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  7  .10EI306 ADVANCED MICRO CONTROLLERS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications Course Outcome • • • Students will have an ability to program microcontrollers for embedded applications Students will have the knowledge of several different processors are employed in order to illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics. Pearson Education.Architecture.Peatman.” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley. Students can be able to design the microcontroller for their projects.

Unit II: FPGA and CPLD Types of ASICs . • Students will be able to design the combinational & sequential logic circuits in FPGA. Unit I: Programmable Logic Devices Basic concepts .programmable read only memory (PROMs) . Charles H.ASM chart. 2. • Students will have the knowledge of FPGA architecture.10EI307 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To provide an in-depth knowledge of the design of digital circuits and the use of Hardware Description Language in digital system design.Design Flow . Reference Books: 1.Static and Dynamic Hazards – Detecting hazards – Eliminating hazards – Essential hazards Unit IV: Introduction to VHDL Basic concepts – identifiers – data operators – data types – data objects –Behavioral modeling – Data flow modeling – structural modeling – subprograms and over loading – packages and libraries.ASM realization.Semi custom and full custom IC design. Unit III: Synchronous Sequential Networks Structure and operation of clocked synchronous sequential networks (CSSN) .data operators.modules and ports – gate level modeling – data flow modeling – behavioral modeling – timing and delaysexamples. Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  8  .Type of FPGA – Xilinx XC3000 Series – Xilinx XC4000 Series -Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) Input/output Blocks (I/OB) – Programmable Interconnects . • Students can be able to write the program in VHDL & Verilog code.analysis of CSSN – modeling CSSN – state assignment – realization using PLD. Givone “Digital principles and Design” Tata McGraw Hill. Donald G. 2004.Design of combination and sequential circuits using PLD’sProgramming techniques . Course Outcome • Students will be able to design different programmable logic devices.Design of state machines using ASM.Programmable Logic Array (PLA) . New Delhi. Roth Jr. “Fundamentals of Logic design” Jaico Publishing House Mumbai. Unit V: Introduction to Verilog Typical design flow – basic concepts –data types .CPLD-Altera Max 7000 Series.Programmable Array Logic (PAL) . 2007.

J.Physical standard – Smart Instrumentation systems.Fiber-optic cables..Troubleshooting serial data communication circuits. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn” Tata McGraw Hill.S .Protocols . Addison –Wesley Longman Inc. To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries.Frequency analysis of noise. M.Test equipment. The student will have the ability to chose the require protocol and the communication modes for the given system. control and correction.Cable Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  9  . 7.3.Ethernet . The RS-485 interface standard. To discuss the types of cables used for transmission. 2006.Bits.Serial interface converters.Coaxial cables. “Verilog HDL”. Hyderabad.Smith.Parallel data communications interface standards.Types of error detection.The universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART). BS Publications.Communication principlesCommunication modes. “A VHDL Synthesis Primer”.Definition of noise. 2006.Error detectionTransmission characteristics. 4. Course Outcome • • • The student will be able to identify the protocol.Synchronous systems. Unit II: Data Communication Standards Standards organizations. 6.Data coding. New Delhi.General purpose interface bus (GPIB) or IEEE-488 or I EC-625.Asynchronous systems. Pearson Publication. The student will be able to select a suitable cable for the transmission.The universal serial bus (USB) Unit III: Cabling.The high speed UART (16550).EIA-232 interface standard .Factors affecting signal propagation. 2004. Parag K Lala. 2003 5.Good shielding performance ratios.Ethernet Protocol operation Ethernet hardware requirements. USA. Bhaskar.Copper-based cables -Twisted pair cables. “Digital System design using PLD” BS Publications.Troubleshooting and testing with RS-485. New Delhi 2002.Serial data communications interface standards.Sources of electrical noiseElectrical coupling of noise –Shielding. NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • • • • To understand the System Interconnection and protocols. J. To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data Communication Standards.Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines.The 20 mA current loop. 10EI308 DATA COMMUNICATION. Unit I : Overview & Basic Principles Open systems interconnection ( OSI ) model .Interface to serial printers. bytes and characters. Hyderabad. Electrical Noise and Error Detection Origin of errors. Samir Palnitkar. "Application Specific Integrated Circuits”.

Ultra filtration.Interchange circuits.Terminal multiplexersStatistical multiplexers Unit V: Industrial Protocol PROFIBUS: Basics. Prentice-Hall of India.Data link layer. Course Outcome • • • Able to model any physiological system Gain thorough knowledge of modelling of thermal regulation system. techniques for system response of characterization Mathematical approach. 10EI309 MODELLING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To understand basic ideas related to modelling and different modelling techniques of certain physiological systems like respiratory system.Radio modems. Newnes Elsevier.Application layer . gas exchange. A. Respiratory system Pharmacokinetic modeling Unit I: Principles of Modeling Physiological processes and principles of their control. Linear and non-linear control systems.introduction to various process controls like cardiac rate. “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and Control”. profile. 2.Foundation fieldbus .Use of fieldbuses in industrial plants. 2003. blood pressure. 2002.Components of a modem. John Park and Edwin Wright.Filtering Unit IV: Modem and Multiplexer Modes of operation.S. Steve Mackay.Multiplexing concepts.Synchronous or asynchronous. Tanenbaum. “Computer Networks”. Reference Books: 1. Fourth Edition.Error detection/correction.Suppression technique.Types of modem.Data compression techniques. thermal regulation system and lung model.Cable spacing. respiratory rate. communication model. architecture.Modulation techniques. biomedical reactions pneumatic transport.Modem standardsTroubleshooting a system using modems.Earthing and grounding requirements. USA. USA. “Understanding Data Communications and networks”.Flow controlDistortion. 2002. blood glucose regulation electrical model of neural control mechanism Unit II: Cardiovascular Mechanics Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  10  .ducting or raceways. electrical analogues. Modbus protocolHART Protocol : Physical layer. principles of open loop and feedback systems. 3. William A Shay. Pacific Grove.digestion energy utilization and waste disposal. Control – Blood flow. Hyderabad.

Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  11  . Cobelli. Academic Press. 2. The Windkessel Simplification. Daniel Weiner. Inotropic State. Pressure-Volume relationships in the ventricle.2004.2008. Unit V: Modeling Body Dynamics Principles of mechanical properties of bones. Katz.modelling bones. A Lumped Parameter Model of the Peripheral Circulation. Mass balancing by lungs. Carson. John Wiley & Sons. 2000. Normal Functioning of the Cardiovascular System. Hills model of muscle mechanism. computer aided modeling. • It gives the introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration Course Outcome • Students will have a clear knowledge about human physiology system.Operating Point Analysis.Models of the peripheral circulation . Sympathetic Stimulation. Reference Books 1. tissues . Cardiac Output Under Abnormal Conditions. : “Introduction of Modelling in Physiology and Medicine “. 3.methods of waste removal.M. Current Trends:Pharmacokinetic modelling illustrated with example like drug diffusion. Sweden. Johan Gabrielsson. Tissue oxygen need. diffusion. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.2006.Mararelis. • It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments.Z. Graphical solution . 4. Vasilis. HeartLung Pumping Unit – Open Chest Model. New Jersey. USA. Modelling the intact Cardio vascular system. stress propagation in bones. Netherland. Vascular Capacitance. Model of the Heart . 10EI310 ADVANCED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments. “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data Analysis: Concepts and Applications. oxygen and carbon dioxide transport in blood and tissues.diffusion and active transport. A.Vascular Resistance. Muscular Exercise Unit III: Respiratory System Modelling oxygen uptake by RBC and pulmonary capillaries. The Heart as a Pump .Length Tension relationship. this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments. facilitated . counter current model of urine formation in nephron. “ Non linear Dynamic Modelling of Physiological System”. modelling Henle’s loop. “Physiology of the Heart”. Effect of Intrathoracic Pressure. Unit IV: Ultra Filtration System Transport through cells and tubules.The Variable Capacitor Model. Gas transport mechanisms of lungs.

UK. 2007. McGrawHill Publisher. operating microscopes. cardiac arrthymias and its monitoring through Hotler monitor. infusion pumps and syringe pumps. nerve stimulator. pulse oximetry. New Delhi.• They will have knowledge of the principle operation and design and the background knowledge of biomedical instruments and specific applications of biomedical engineering Unit I: Introduction to Human Physiology Circulatory system – cardio vascular system-central nervous system – respiratory system – muscular skeletal system – digestive system – excretory system – sensory organs – voluntary and involuntary action. clinical laboratory Reference Books: 1. Audiometer. anesthesia equipment.S. electro surgery. Unit II: Biopotentials and their Measurements cell and its structure – resting potentials – action potentials – bioelectric potentials – measurement of potentials and their recording – basic principles of ECG.2003. CT. Event monitors. 2.color Doppler system. defibrillators. Unit V: Medical Imaging Techniques X-rays – scanning techniques-ultrasound scanner. nuclear imaging Unit VI: Specialized Therapeutic and diagnostic equipment Cardiac pacemakers. Webster. John G. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Electrical Safety and other safety aspects of medical equipment. “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”. ICU ventilators.micro electrodes. 2003. Unit III: Computer based medical instrumentation Computerised versions of ECG. EMG– Electrode theory – bipolar and Unipolar electrode-surface electrode – electrode impedance –equivalent circuit for extra cellular electrodes. 3. 4. John Wiley and sons. Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design – Myer Kutz. heart lung machines. EEG. New York. Prentice hall of India. Bispectral Index EEG for depth of anesthesia monitoring Unit IV: Operation theatre equipment and Critical Care instrumentation Patient monitors. instrumentation. motorized operation table. MRI scanning techniques – coronary angiogram. 10EI311 BIOMATERIALS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To study the characteristics and classification of Biomaterials Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  12  . Phonocardiogram. “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”. suction apparatus. Tread Mill Test ECG– Foetal monitor. EEG. 2009. haemodialysis. Khandpur R. EMG. New Delhi. Tata McGraw-Hill. Leslie Cromwell.

sutures. Biological evaluation of materials based on ISO 10993. Jonathan Black. USA. 2004. aluminum oxides. stainless steels. 2. Narosa Publishing House. Teoh Swee Hin.China 2004. ‘Biomaterials: principles and applications’. Ti-based alloys. hydroxyapatite glass ceramics carbons.-polyolefin-polyamicles-Acryrilicthermoplastics-medical applications. adhesive. “Biomaterials: an introduction”. TEM.D. mechanical properties. blood compatibility. hard tissue replacement implants. Joseph D. internal fracture fixation devices. Bhat. Sujata V. ‘Engineering materials for biomedical applications’ World Scientific Publishing Co. 5. USA. Unit III: Polymeric Implant Materials Polymerisation. USA. 2002. New York. B. body response to implants. Physical characterization. New Delhi. medical applications. blood interfacing implants. Thermal characterization. co-based alloys. joint replacements. Unit II: Implant Materials Metallic implant materials. Limb prosthesis. Dental Implants Reference Books 1. Prosthetic Cardiac Valves. 2003. Surface characterization. Roderic S. surgical tapes. “Biological Performance of Materials Fundamentals of Biocompatibility”. 4. CRC press. Swee Hin Teoh. Lakes. Bronzino. Unit V: Artificial Organs Artificial Heart. polymers- rubbers-high strength Unit IV: Tissue Replacement Implants Soft-tissue replacements. Externally Powered limb Prosthesis. visco elasticity. 10EI312 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT Credit: 4:0:0 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  13  .• • • To study about the different metals and ceramics used as biomaterials To learn about polymeric materials and combinations that could be used as a tissue replacement implants To study the artificial organ developed using these materials Course Outcome: • To understand the properties of the Bio-compatible materials • To know the different types of Biomaterials • To design artificial organs using tissue materials Unit I: Structure of Bio-Materials and Bio-Compatibility Definition and classification of bio-materials. 2004. Joon Bu Park. Joon Bu Park. SEM. percutaneous and skin implants. ceramic implant materials. 6. ‘Biomaterials’. X-ray difractometry. maxillofacial augmentation. “Biomaterials Sciences – An Introduction to Materials in Medicine” Academic Press . 3. 2007.Rater. wound-healing process.

Picture Archival System (PACS) for Radiological images department. wages and salary. “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”. 1996 10EI313 COMMUNICATION THEORY AND TELEMETRY Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • The aim of this course is to understand the principles of telemetry. steps of training. role to be performed by them in hospital. Necessity for standardization and quality management.Course Objective: • To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies • To familiarize the training strategies.C. modem protocols. Overview of Medical Device regulation and regulatory agencies. Unit V Computers and Information Technology in Medicine and healthcare Computer application in ICU. communication. Englewood Cliffs. quality management policies and information technology used in medicine and health care. methods to monitor the standards. FDA. ICRP and other standard organization. 2. Unit IV Standards. 1979 . Unit I Need And Scopes Of Clinical Engineering Clinical engineering program. staff structure in hospital Unit II National Health Policies Need for evolving health policy. Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  14  . Course outcome: • The student will appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals. health education. Reference Books 1. New Jersey. health legislation Unit III Training And Management Of Technical Staff In Hospital Difference between hospital and industrial organization. employee appraisal method. health insurance. levels of training. Prentice Hall of India. Codes and quality management in Health Care Quality management in hospitals and clinical laboratories. Webster J. and antenna theory for practical applications. educational responsibilities. “Handbook of hospital personal management”. Prentice Hall Inc. developing training program. • The student will apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.Cook. Joint Commission of Accreditation of hospitals.. Clinical laboratory administration. health organization in state. and Albert M.C. evaluation of training. patient data and medical records.. multiplexing. health financing system. NABH and NABL standards. Goyal R. simulation.

2007.modulation codes . Tata McGraw Hill. Taub and Schilling.amplitude and frequency modulations phase modulation.Patranabis.Modem protocol . Digital multiplexer PCM Reception .PCM system.its transmission principles with discussion on modulations and associated circuits. New Delhi. • Understand the key characteristics of frequency and time division multiplexing together with their relative benefits and drawbacks Unit I . 2003. 2.wave guide components .power line carrier communication. Measurement Systems-Applications and Design. New York.PAM . Third Edition. “Telemetry Principles”. • Understand the use of fibre optics in communication.frequency telemetering. New Delhi 2008.electrical and electrical telemetry . Unit II . E. signals -theorems .exponential Fourier series . Bits and symbols.TDM .differential PCM.classification .Micro strip lines – Digital transmission system in Satellite Telemetry.non .Course Outcome • Analyse signals. Unit V – Internet Based Telemetering Data Acquisition System-Microprocessor-based DAS-Remote Control-NetworkingBLANs-Internet based Telemetering-Wireless LANs-Random Access System-Principles of Telephony. Unit III . 10EI314 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To define the different anatomical terms • To explain the overall structure-function relationship of all systems Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  15  .Telemetry Principles The basic system . 3. Doeblin.Microwave lines .time function pulse .Transmitters and Receivers technicques -RF transmission lines. Tata McGraw Hill.local transmitters and converters . McGraw Hill. “Principles of Communication”.Modems and Transmission Lines Modems. Reference Books 1. Unit IV – Fibre Optical Telemetry Optical Fibre Cable-Dispersion-Losses-Connectors and Splices-Sources and DetectorsTransmitter and Receiver Circuits-Coherent Optical Fibre Communication SystemsWavelength Division Multiplexing.Frequency and Time Division Multiplexed System Frequency division multiplexed system: IRIG standards-FM and PM circuits. PLL.Inter symbol Interference .Quadrature amplitude modulation . D.error rate and probability of error. Time Division multiplexed system: TDM .D.

tissues.• To apply this basic knowledge to changes in bodily functions as a result of disease and determine the reason for functional changes Course Outcome • Be able to identify the major body systems and understand what each body system does • Be able to relate how each body system works • Be able to identify and explain major cells. venous return. Capillary circulation. ovary and testis. pancreas. 10EI315 DISCRETE TIME CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 3: 1: 0 Course Objective • • To Understand the application of Z Transforms in process control To study various control algorithms Course Outcome Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  16  .Guyton.C. bladder and colon.WBC. hearing and smelling Unit IV: Digestive and Excretory System Structure of alimentary canal. USA. secretion of digestive fluids. liver. physiology of defaecation. Reference Books 1. mechanism of alimentary canal. blood cells-composition-origin of RBC-estimation of RBC. Regulation of breathing. afferent nervous system. tongue. New Delhi. and organs • Be able to identify the explain functions of central muscles and bones Unit I: Introduction to cell structure Cell structure and organelles. 2008. Arthur. "Textbook of Medical Physiology" Prism Book (P) Ltd. trachea and its branches. hypoxia Unit III: Nervous And Sensory Systems Structure and function of nervous tissues.Chand&Co. 2. neural control of cardio vascular system. Unit V: Endocrine System Pituitary gland. structure and functioning of lungs. T. regulation of temperature.and platelet Unit II: Circulatory and Respiratory Systems Structure and functioning of heart. Pulmonary Ventilation.. sensory end organs. general circulation.S. "Text Book of Human Anatomy". related digestive glands. physiology of micturation. regulation of posture-physiology of emotion. thyroid and parathyroid glands. Structure of kidney. reflex action. function of liver. cerebrospinal fluid. mechanism of sight. physiology of urine formation. function of each component of the cell-membrane potentialBlood. S. Ltd. 2007. Ranganathan. physiology of perspiration.

• •

At the end of the course students will be able apply Z transform concepts process control Students will be equipped with different control algorithm

Unit I: Introduction Computer control – Introduction – Review of Z Transform, Modified Z Transform and Delta Transform. Relation between Discrete and Continuous Transfer function-Poles and Zeros of Sampled Data System (SDS) – Stability Analysis in Z domain Unit II: Pulse Transfer Function Introduction - Open loop and closed loop response of SDS Design and implementation of different digital control algorithm: Dead beat, Dahlin, Smith predictor and Internal Model Control algorithm with examples. Unit III: Different Models of Discrete System LTI System:- Family of Discrete Transfer function Models- State Space modelsDistributed Parameter Model. Models for Time varying and Non-linear System: Linear Time varying models- Non-linear State space models- Non-linear Black Box ModelsFuzzy Models Unit IV: Parameter Estimation Methods General Principles- Minimizing Prediction errors- Linear Regression and the Least Square method- Statistical Frame work for Parameter Estimation and the Maximum Likely hood method- Instrument Variable method – Recursive and Weighted Least square method Unit V: Adaptive Control Introduction -Deterministic Self Tuning Regulator: Indirect and Direct self tuning regulator-Model reference Adaptive system: Design of MRAS using Lyapnov and MIT Rule- Auto tuning and Gain scheduling adaptive control design with examples Reference Books 1. Lennart Ljung, “System Identification Theory for the user”, PTR Prentice Hall Information and system sciences Series, New Jersey, 2005. 2. Gopal M, Digital Control and State variable Methods, Second Edition, Tata McGrawHill, New Delhi, 2003. 3. Gene F. Franklin,J. David Powell, “Digital control of dynamic systems”, Pearson Education Limited-2002. 4. Dale E. Seborg, Thomas F. Edgar, Duncan A. Mellichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”, Willey India, 2006. 5. Astrom .K. J, Bjorn Wittenmark, “Adaptive Control”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2008. 6. Ogata, “Discrete- Time Control Systems”, Pearson Education, Sigapore,2002 10EI316 MEDICAL SENSORS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective

Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 

17 

An introduction to the field of medical sensors and an in-depth and quantitative view of device design and performance analysis. An overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor work and design.

Course Outcome • • • • • • Define the fundamental components of any biosensor, Define the major performance characteristics of any biosensor and design an experiment to measure that characteristic , Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an application, Given a specific biosensor application, identify the key design criteria and suggest and an appropriate biosensor approach which is most likely to meet those design criteria, Compare the relative advantages and disadvantages of the major approaches to biosensor design, Communicate the most relevant challenges facing the biosensor research field and given a particular challenge suggest a reasonable approach to finding a solution to the challenge,

Unit I: Introduction Methods for biosensors fabrication: self-assembled monolayers, screen printing, photolithography, microcontact printing, MEMS. Physiological Pressure Measurement:Units of pressure, Physiological pressure ranges and measurement sitesDirect measurement-Dynamic response of catheter transducer systems-Catheter tip pressure transducers-Implantable pressure transducers, Telemetering capsules, Pressure measurements in small vessels, collapsible vessels, Interstitial spaces-Differential pressure measurement. Indirect pressure measurement-Cuff design-Detection of korotkoff sounds-Oscillometric method-Doppler Ultrasound-Instantaneous arterial pressure-Internal pressure measurement by reaction forces. Unit II: Motion And Force Measurement Units of quantities-Displacement and Rotation measurements by contact and noncontact methods-Linear and angular velocity measurements-Translational and angular acceleration-force measurement, Muscle contraction measurements-Design of elastic beam-Force in isolated muscle-Invivo-Measurements-Stresses in the bone-Force plateStabilometer Unit III: Flow Measurement Units-Blood flow measurement in single vessels-Electromagnetic, Ultrasonic Flowmeters-Indicator dilution method-Impedence cardiography-Laser Doppler flowmetry-RBC velocity measurement-Miscallaneous mechanical flowmeters. Tissue blood flow measurement-Venous occlusion plethysmography-Clearance techniqueMeasurement by heat transport-Laser Doppler flowmeter-NMR flowmete. Respiratory gas flow measurement-Rotometer,Pnemotachograph, Hot-Wire anemometer-Time of flight, Ultrasonic vortex flowmeter, Spirometer, Lung plethysmography. Unit IV: Temperature, Heat Flow and Evaporation Measurement Units, Thermistors, Thermocouples, Termosensitive elements, Diodes, Transistors, Crystal resonators, Non contact temperature measurement techniques-Infrared
Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  18 

measurements, Thermography, Microwave imaging clinical thermometers-Rectal, Esophageal, Bladder temperature measurement, Tympanic thermometers, Zero heat flow thermometers. Heat flow measurements-Transducers-Direct calorimetry. Evaporation measurement, Humidity transducers-Electrolytic water vapor analyzer, DewpointHygrometer-Impedence, Capacitive sensors, Thermoelectric Psycrometer, Evaporative water loss from skin and mucosa. Unit V: Chemical Measurement Electrode theory-surface potential electrodes-ECG,EMG,EEG electrodes-micro & suction electrodes. Chemical transducer-Electrochemical transducers-Transducer with optical, Acoustic and thermal principles-Mass spectrometer-Chromatography-ElectrophoresisMagnetic resonance-Other optical methods-Other analytical methods-Continous measurement-Intravascular, tissue-Ex vivo measurements. Transcutaneous measurements-Respiratory gas analysis. Reference Books 1. Tatsuo Togawa, Toshiyo Tamura, p. Ake Oberg, “Bio-Medical Transducers and Instruments”-CRC Press, USA, 2010. 2. Gábor Harsányi, ”Sensors in biomedical applications: fundamentals, technology & applications”, CRC Press, USA, 2000. 3. Joseph D. Bronzino,” The biomedical engineering handbook”, Volume 2, CRC Press, USA, 2000.

10EI317 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL Credit: 4:0:0 Course objective • To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables, system, automation and optimal control.

Course outcome • • To introduce the fundamental of measurement and the techniques for measurement of various physical variables. To review the concept of system and learn the basic concept of process automation.

Unit I: Introduction Principle of measurement and classification of process control instruments; temperature, pressure fluid flow- liquid level- velocity- fluid density etc., instrument scaling- sensorstransmitters and control valves- instrumentation symbols and labels. Unit II: Measurements Principle of measurements of weight flow rate-viscosity-consistency- pH concentrationelectrical and thermal conductivity-humidity of gases-composition by physical and chemical properties and spectroscopy.
Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  19 

Unit III: Review of Systems Review of first and higher order system, closed and open loop response-response to step, impulse and sinusoidal disturbance-control valve type-linear-equal percentage and quick opening valve. Design of valves.-transient response-block diagram. Unit IV: Process Automation Basic concept: terminology and techniques for process control; control modes; tuning process controllers Unit V: Advanced Control System Cascade control- ratio control-feed forward control- multi variable process control. Case studies: Distillation column, chemical reactor, heat exchanger, condenser, evaporator Reference books D.E.Seborg, T.F.Edger, and D.A.Millichamp, “Process Dynamics and Control”, John Wiley and Sons, Newyork,2004. 2. B.Roffle, B.H.L.Betlem, “Advanced Practical Control”, Springer, Newyork,2004. 3. Jean Pierre Corriou, “Process Conrol: Theory and Application”,Springer,London,2004. nd 4. Stephanopoulos, “Chemical Process Control”, 2 Edition, Prentice Hall, New Delhi, 2003.
1.

10EI318 EMBEDDED LINUX Credit: 4:0:0 Course objective • To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Linux programming. Course outcome • Students will be able to work on basic Linux Programming. • Students will be capable to develop embedded Linux program. • Students will be able to program in real-time systems with memory management. Unit I: - Fundamentals of Operating Systems Overview of operating systems – Process and threads – Processes and Programs – Programmer view of processes – OS View of processes – Threads - Scheduling – Non preemptive and preemptive scheduling – Real Time Scheduling – Process Synchronization – Semaphores – Message Passing – Mailboxes – Deadlocks – Synchronization and scheduling in multiprocessor Operating Systems Unit II: Linux Fundamentals Introduction to Linux – Basic Linux commands and concepts – Logging in - Shells Basic text editing - Advanced shells and shell scripting – Linux File System –Linux programming - Processes and threads in Linux - Inter process communication – Devices – Linux System calls Unit III: Introduction to Embedded Linux
Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  20 

Embedded Linux – Introduction – Advantages- Embedded Linux Distributions Architecture - Linux kernel architecture - User space – linux startup sequence - GNU cross platform Tool chain Unit IV: Board Support Package and Embedded Storage Inclusion of BSP in kernel build procedure - The bootloader Interface – Memory Map – Interrupt Management – PCI Subsystem – Timers – UART – Power Management – Embedded Storage – Flash Map – Memory Technology Device (MTD) –MTD Architecture - MTD Driver for NOR Flash – The Flash Mapping drivers – MTD Block and character devices – mtdutils package – Embedded File Systems – Optimizing storage space – Turning kernel memory Unit V: Embedded Drivers and Application Porting Linux serial driver – Ethernet driver – I2C subsystem – USB gadgets – Watchdog timer – Kernel Modules – Application porting roadmap - Programming with pthreads – Operting System Porting Layer – Kernel API Driver - Case studies - RT Linux – uClinux Reference Books 1. Dhananjay M. Dhamdhere, “Operating Systems A concept based Approach”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2002. 2. Matthias Kalle Dalheimer, Matt Welsh, “Running Linux”, O’Reilly, U.K, 2005. 3. Mark Mitchell, Jeffrey Oldham and Alex Samuel “Advanced Linux Programming” New Riders, USA, 2001. 4. P. Raghavan ,Amol Lad , Sriram Neelakandan, “Embedded Linux System Design and Development”, Auerbach Publications. London, 2006. 5. Karim Yaghmour, “Building Embedded Linux Systems”, O'Reilly, UK, 2003. 10EI319 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To illustrate concepts discussed in the syllabus and to give the students the opportunity to build and test the digital systems. The lab exercises will make use of the Xilinx 9.2 ISE tool for designing and implementing digital systems on FGPA. The system consists of an integrated set of tools that allows one to capture designs (with schematic entry or a Hardware Description Language), simulate, implement and test them.

Course Outcome • • • Students will have knowledge about the concepts and methods of digital system design techniques. Students able to design combinational and sequential digital systems. Students able to analyze the results of logic and timing simulations and to use these simulation results to debug digital systems.

Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 

21 

Students will have the knowledge through hands-on experimentation the Xilinx tools for FPGA design as well as the basics of VHDL to design, simulate and implement the digital systems.

List of Experiments 1. Implementation of logic gates & i/o module. 2. Realization of half/full adder, half/full subtractor 3. Realization of encoder/decoder 4. Realization of flipflops/ counter 5. Implementation of multiplexer/ demultiplexer 6. Realization of SRAM 7. Implementation of ALU ARM7 processor 8. Graphic LCD interface 9. TFT display interface 10. GPS interface RTOS 11. Multi-tasking.

10EI320 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC LAB Credit: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To provide basic knowledge of physiological signals • To make the students to know about various physiological measuring instruments and to diagnose the various disease • To make the students to know about various measurement techniques Course Outcome • Students are equipped with knowledge of physiological signals • Students can apply the various measurement techniques. LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Blood pressure measurement Determination of auditory capacity using audio meter Determination of blood flow velocity using ultrasonic Doppler blood flow meter Surgical diathermy Recording of EOG signals Recording of ECG waveforms using bio-kit physio-graph Recording of EMG waveforms using bio-kit physio-graph Recording of PCG waveforms using bio-kit physio-graph Recording of peripheral pulse waveforms using bio-kit physio-graph Recording of EEG waveforms using bio-kit physio-graph Determination of percentage of oxygen saturation in blood using pulse oximeter TENS-physiotherapy

Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering 

22 

Tata McGraw-Hill Companies New Delhi.Variation of functionalExtremal of functional.Variational Approach to Optimal Control Problems Necessary conditions for optimal control – Linear regulator problems.Quasilinearization. Bell mount MA. Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality constraints Unit: V Minimum Time Problems Minimum control – effort problems. and Bellman's Dynamic Programming. Methods of steepest decent. M. Donald E. New Jersey. Numerical determination of optimal trajectories – Two point boundary – value problems. A recurrence relation of dynamic programming – computational procedure. 2.Euler Lagrange equation Unit: IV . variation of extremals. Dimitri P. 3. An optimal control system. Prentice-Hall networks series. Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  23  . Continuous linear regulator problems Unit:III Calculus of Variations Functions and Functional. 2000. Linear tracking problems. Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction. Bertsekas. Form of optimal control. Gradient projection algorithm Reference Books 1. Gopal. Course Outcome • Students will have the basic knowledge of optimal control and its applications • Students will be equipped with dynamic optimization: the Calculus of Variations.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol -1 Athena Scientific. Performance measures for optimal control problem. 4. Singiresu S.Maxima and minima of function. Selection a performance measure Unit: II Dynamic Programming Optimal control law – Principle of optimality. “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”. Characteristics of dynamic programming solution. Pontryagin's Minimum Principle. and Bellman's Dynamic Programming. Kirk. Publishers New Delhi-2004.10EI321 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective • To provide an introductory account of the theory of optimal control and its applications • The purpose of this course is to give students background in dynamic optimization: the Calculus of Variations. Pontryagin's Minimum Principle.. 2004. Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation. 2009. Unit: I Introduction Problem formulation – Mathematical model – Physical constraints – Performance measure Optimal control problem. Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P) Ltd. Singular intervals in optimal control problems.

Flow controlDistortion.Frequency analysis of noise.Sources of electrical noiseElectrical coupling of noise –Shielding.Coaxial cables.Data compression techniques.Cable ducting or raceways.The 20 mA current loop.Parallel data communications interface standards.Protocols .Error detectionTransmission characteristics.General purpose interface bus (GPIB) or IEEE-488 or I EC-625.Types of error detection.Radio modems.Synchronous or asynchronous.The high speed UART (16550) Unit II: Data Communication Standards Standards organizations.Interchange circuits.Serial interface converters.Earthing and grounding requirements.Troubleshooting serial data communication circuits.Good shielding performance ratios.Terminal multiplexersStatistical multiplexers Unit V:Wireless Protocol Bluethooth: Definition . The RS-485 interface standard.Filtering Unit IV: Modem and Multiplexer Modes of operation.Interface to serial printers. • To discuss the types of cables used for transmission.10EI322 NETWORKS AND PROTOCOLS FOR MEDICAL SYSTEM Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To understand the System Interconnection and protocols. Unit I : Overview & Basic Principles Open systems interconnection (OSI) model .EIA-232 interface standard .Suppression technique. • To discuss the operation and applications of the Wireless Protocols. • The student will be able to select a suitable cable for the transmission. Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  24  . Course Outcome • The student will be able to identify the protocol.Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines.Ethernet .Ethernet Protocol operation Ethernet hardware requirements.Asynchronous systems.Data coding. Electrical Noise and Error Detection Origin of errors. control and correction.Copper-based cables -Twisted pair cables.Bits. bytes and characters.The universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART).Troubleshooting and testing with RS-485.Communication principlesCommunication modes.Multiplexing concepts.Serial data communications interface standards.Physical standard – Smart Instrumentation systems.Synchronous systems.Cable spacing.The universal serial bus (USB) Unit III: Cabling.Error detection/correction. • The student will have the ability to chose the require protocol and the communication modes for the given system.Fiber-optic cables.Components of a modem.Modulation techniques. • To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data Communication Standards.Bluetooth protocol stack – Network Establishment in Bluetooth – Wireless Local Area Network – WLAN Standard – Home RF – Network topologies – Physical Layer – Zigbee Networks.Definition of noise.Factors affecting signal propagation.Types of modem.Test equipment.Modem standardsTroubleshooting a system using modems.

kernel services Unit V: Micro C/OS-II Real Time Operating System Study of Micro C/OS-II RTOS – RTOS System Level Functions – Task Service Functions – Time Delay Functions – Memory Allocation Related Functions – Semaphore Related Functions – Mailbox Related Functions – Queue Related Functions Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  25  . Course Outcome: • To discuss the basics o embedded systems and the interface issues related to it. 3. “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and Control”. Hyderabad. 2002. USA. task states. memory requirements and control. Tanenbaum. John Park and Edwin Wright. Fourth Edition.Embedded processor architectural definitions . Newnes Elsevier. Prentice-Hall of India. 2. P Nicopolitidis. interrupt processing. Pacific Grove. A S Pomportsis “Wireless Networks”.Classifications and brief overview of micro-controllers microprocessors and DSPs . 10EI323 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credit : 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of Embedded Systems and the various techniques used for Embedded Systems with real time examples. A.Typical application scenario of embedded systems Unit II: Interface Issues Related To Embedded Systems A/D.Reference Books 1. “Wireless Network Evolution” Pearson Education. 5. “Understanding Data Communications and networks”. M S Odaidat. • To learn the different techniques on embedded systems • To discuss the real time models.S. Language And Operating Systems Real time languages . clocking communication and synchronization. G I Papadimitriou.Real time kernel.Java based embedded system design.Simulation and Emulation of embedded systems . USA. Delhi. task scheduling. D/A converters . Steve Mackay. Wiley India Edition – New Delhi. 2002. languages and operating systems • To analyze real time examples Unit I: System Design Definitions .High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system . Vijay K Garg . 2003. William A Shay. Process based and Graph based models – Petrinet Models . control blocks. “Computer Networks”. 4. OS tasks.Interfacing to External Devices – Switches – LED/LCD Displays – Relays – Dc Motor – Stepper Motor Unit III: Techniques For Embedded Systems State Machine and state Tables in embedded design – Event based. Unit IV: Real Time Models.

Programming and Design”. “Embedded Systems Architecture”. RajKamal.Reference Books 1. Tammy Noergaard. 2008 2. Palgrave. Tim Wilhurst. “Embedded Systems Design”. 3. 2004. “Embedded Systems Architecture. 2005. Tata McGrawHill . 2006 Department of Electronics & Instrumentation Engineering  26  . Tony Givargis. 4. Elsevier. Frank Vahid. “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems. Wiley India. Second Edition.

N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Code 11EI201 11EI202 11EI203 11EI204 11EI205 11EI206 11EI207 11EI208 11EI209 11EI210 11EI211 11EI212 11EI213 11EI214 11EI215 11EI216 11EI217 11EI218 11EI301 11EI302 11EI303 11EI304 11EI305 11EI306 11EI307 11EI308 11EI309 11EI310 11EI311 11EI312 Name of the Subject Electrical And Electronic Instrumentation Digital Signal Processing Power Plant Instrumentation Automotive Instrumentation Electron Devices Laboratory Electrical Machines Laboratory Sensors and Transducers Laboratory Measurements Laboratory Control Systems Laboratory Signal Conditioning Circuits Laboratory Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory Computer Based Process Control Laboratory Digital Signal Processing Laboratory Digital Control Laboratory Instrumentation and Process Control for Food Engineers Instrumentation and Process Control Lab for Food Engineers C++ and Data Structures Power Electronics Discrete Control System Robust Control System Identification Process Modelling And Simulation Adaptive Control Advanced Medical Instrumentation Medical Image Processing Rehabilitation Engineering BioMEMS Biomedical Signal Processing VLSI Signal Processing Radiological Equipments Credits 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 Academic Information 1 .Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering ADDITIONAL SUBJECTS S.

sources of errors and compensation– dynamometer and rectifier typeammeter and voltmeter – Wattmeter – Energy meter . Rajput. Unit IV Cathode Ray Oscilloscope General purpose oscilloscope – Cathode Ray Tube – CRT screen characteristics – Vertical Deflection system – Delay Line – Horizontal Deflection system – Sampling Oscilloscope – Measurement of frequency and Phase by Lissajous method Unit V Digital Measurement and Displays Digital Displacement transducer: Incremental and Absolute – Digital method of measuring Displacement. “Electrical Measurements and Instrumentation”. NewDelhi. 2. 2006. Prentice Hall of India. Frequency and Phase difference. “ Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements.. R. medium and high resistance – Wheatstone bridge – Kelvin double bridge – Meggar – Direct deflection methods – A. Statically and Dynamically induced emf-Galvanometers – Moving Coil and Moving Iron Instruments Principle of operation.C Bridges – Measurements of inductance. Text Books 1.Calibration of meters. Course Outcome The students will • Apply the knowledge about the instruments to use them more effectively • Suggest the kind of instrument suitable for typical measurements Unit I Introduction – Measurement of Current. Reference Books 1. DhanpathRai& Co.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 11EI201 ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To introduce the basic concepts related to the operation of Electrical and Electronic Measuring Instruments.C bridges and their compensations – detectors. Digital Alpha Numeric Displays – 7 Segment displays – Dot matrix displays – XY Plotter – UV recorder – Magnetic tape recorder – Digital recording and Data Loggers. Sawhney. 2008. NewDelhi. Academic Information 2 . Voltage. S. Inductance and Capacitance Measurement of low. Unit II Measurement of Resistance. capacitance – Maxwell bridge – Wien bridge – Hay bridge – Schering bridge – Anderson bridge – Desauty’s bridge – Errors in A.. David A Bell. (P) Ltd. Power and Energy Review of AC circuit analysis. NewDelhi.k. “Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation”. Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.K. construction. A. Lenz’s law. 2005.Chand Publisher. Unit III Analog Meters Amplified DC Meter – AC Voltmeter Using Rectifiers – True RMS-Responding Voltmeter– Electronic Multimeter – Vector impedance meter – Wave analyzer– Harmonic distortion analyzer – Spectrum analyzer.

Karunya University

3. Kalsi H S, “ Electronic Instrumentation”, 2nd Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Company, 2004, NewDelhi. 11EI202 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objectives • To introduce the basic concepts involved in discrete time signal processing • To give an in depth knowledge of the concepts of digital filter design • To learn the intricacies involved in designing a DSP chip in hardware Course Outcome The student will be able to • Use DFT and FFT to analyse the spectrum of signals • Design Digital FIR and IIR filters for DSP applications • Write simple programs in DSP chip. Unit I Introduction Concepts of signal processing - typical applications -advantages of digital signal processing compared with analog processing. Review of Discrete Time LTI Systems – Linear, circular and sectioned convolutions DFS, DTFT, DFT – FFT computations using DIT and DIF algorithms - Time response and frequency response analysis of discrete time systems to standard input signals. Unit II Finite Impulse Response Digital Filters Symmetric and Antisymmetric FIR filters - FIR filter design using window method – frequency sampling method – realization of structures of FIR filters – transversal and linear phase structures. Unit III Infinite Impulse Response Digital Filters Review of classical analog filters-Butterworth, Chebyshev and Elliptic filters–Transformation of analog filters into equivalent digital filters using impulse invariant method and Bilinear transform method-Realization of stuctures of IIR filters-Direct, cascade, parallel forms Unit IV Introduction to programmable DSPs Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator Unit – Modified Bus Structure and memory Access in P-DSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multiported memory – VLIW Architecture – Pipelining - Special addressing modes – P-DSPs with RISC and CISC processors Unit V Architecture of TMS 320C5X Introduction – Architecture of TMS320C5X – On-chip peripherals – Instruction set of TMS320C5X – Simple Programs Text Books 1. John G. Proakis and DimitrisG.Manolakis, ‘Digital Signal Processing, Algorithms and Applications’, PHI of India Ltd., New Delhi, 3rd Edition, 2000. Reference Books 1. B. Venkatramani, M. Bhaskar, ‘Digital Signal Processors Architecture, Programming and Applications’, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 2002 2. Emmanuel C. Ifeacher and Barrie W. Jervis, ‘Digital Signal Processing – A
Academic Information 3

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Practical Approach’, Addition – Wesley Longman Ltd., UK, 2nd 2004 Low Price Edition 3. Texas Instruments Manuel for TMS320C5XProcessor.

11EI203 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective • To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular stress on thermal power generation. • To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants. • To provide knowledge about the different types of devices used for analysis • To impart knowledge about the different types of controls and control loops. • To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like speed, vibration of turbines and their control. Course Outcome • The students will apply the knowledge of power plant instrumentation to control the boiler parameters Unit I Overview of Power Generation Brief survey of methods of power generation – hydro, thermal, nuclear, solar and wind power– importance of instrumentation in power generation – thermal power plants – building blocks – details of boiler process - P&I diagram of boiler – cogeneration. Unit II Measurements in Power Plants Electrical measurements – current, voltage, power, frequency, power factor etc. – nonelectrical parameters – flow of feed water, fuel, air and steam with correction factor for temperature – steam pressure and steam temperature – drum level measurement – radiation detector – smoke density measurement – dust monitor. Unit III Analyzers in Power Plants Flue gas oxygen analyser – analysis of impurities in feed water and steam – dissolved oxygen analyser – chromatography – PH meter – fuel analyser – pollution monitoring instruments. Unit IV Control Loops in Boiler Steam pressure control -Combustion control – air/fuel ratio control – furnace draft control – drum level control –main steam and reheat steam temperature control – superheater control – attemperator –deaerator control – distributed control system in power plants – interlocks in boiler operation. Unit V Turbine Monitoring and Control Speed, vibration, shell temperature monitoring and control -lubricant oil temperature control Text Books 1.P.K Nag, Power plant Engineering, Tata McGraw Hill, 2001. Reference Books 1. Elonka,S. M. and Kohal. A.L. Standard Boiler Operations, McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 1994. 2. R.K.Jain, Mechanical and industrial Measurements, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 1995.
Academic Information 4

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

11EI204 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the modern automobile • To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobiles industries. • To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic accessories used in automobile. Course Outcome The student will • Design instruments for automotive applications • Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control Unit I Automotive Electricals and Electronics Basic Electronics components and their operation in an automobile – Starting Systems – Charging Systems – Ignition Systems – Electronic Fuel Control . Unit II Advanced Vehicle Control Systems Environmental legislation for pollution – Overview of vehicle electronics systems – Power train system – Chassis subsystem – Comfort and Safety subsystems. Unit III Embedded System Communication Protocols Introduction to control networking – Communication protocols in embedded systems – SPI, I2C, USB – Vehicle Communication Protocols – Introduction to CAN, LIN, FLEXRAY, MOST, KWP2000 – Details of CAN. Unit IV Embedded System in Control of Automotive Systems Engine management systems – Gasoline/Diesel Systems – Various Sensors used in System – Vehicle Safety System – Electronic Control of braking and traction – Introduction to control elements and control methodology – Electronic transmission control. Unit V Embedded System in Automotive Applications Body Electronics – Infotainment systems – Navigation Systems –System level tests – Software Calibration using engine and vehicle dynamometers – Environmental tests for electronic control units. Text Books 1 Robert BoschGmbh ,“BOSCH- Automotive Handbook”, 7th Edition,John Wiley & Sons, ISBN: 0470519363, 2008. Reference Books 1 Knowles.D, “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”, Prentice Hall,1988 2 William.T.M, “Automotive Electronic System”,Elsevier Science,6th Edition,2003. 3 Denton.T, “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”,Elsevier ButterworthHeinemann Publications,3rd Edition,2004.

11EI205 ELECTRON DEVICES LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2
Academic Information 5

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Course Objective • To impart practical knowledge on the working of electron devices and their applications Course Outcome The student will • Analyze the characteristics of basic electronic devices • Design small projects using the devices List of Experiments 1. a.Characteristics of PN diode b. Characteristics of Zener diode 2. a.Characteristics of Photo diode b. Characteristics of Light Dependant resistor (LDR) 3.Study of Half-wave and Full Wave rectifier with and without filter 4. Characteristics of BJT (common base configuration) 5. Characteristics of BJT (common emitter configuration) 6. Transistor as a switch 7. Characteristics of Junction Field Effect Transistor (JFET) 8. Characteristics with MOSFET characteristics. 9. Characteristics of Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) 10.Comparison of Characteristics of Thyristors. 11. Characteristics ofUni-Junction Transistor (UJT) 12. PSPICE simulation 11EI206 ELECTRICAL MACHINES LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To expose the students to the operation of DC machines, Transformers, synchronous machines and induction motors and give them experimental skills. Course Outcome The student will • Analyse the characteristics of DC and AC machines List of Experiments 1. Open circuit characteristics of self excited dc shunt generator 2. Open circuit characteristics of separately excited dc shunt generator 3. Load characteristics of self excited dc shunt generator 4. Load characteristics of separately excited dc shunt generator 5. Load test on dc shunt motor 6. Load test on dc series motor 7. Speed control of dc shunt motor 8. Open circuit and short circuit tests on 1-φ (single phase) transformer 9. Load test on single phase Transformer 10. Load test on 3-φ (three phase) squirrel cage induction motor 11. Load test on alternator 12. V-curve and inverted-V-curve for synchronous motor

11EI207 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2
Academic Information 6

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

Course Objective • The student is introduced to the practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics. Course Outcome The student will • Analyse the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the behavior. • Critically anlayse any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods. List of Experiments Resistive Transducers 1. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer 2. Characteristics of Strain Gauge and Load Cell 3. Characteristics of RTD 4. Measurement of Force Using Pressure Cell 5. Study of Torque Transducer Inductive and Capacitive Transducers 6. Characteristics of LVDT 7.Characteristics of Capacitive Transducer 8. Characteristics of Humidity Sensor 9.Characteristics of Loud Speaker and Microphone Thermo Electric and Optical Transducers 10. Study of Thermocouple Characteristics 11. Speed Measurement Using an Optical Sensor 12.Typical applications of Transducers 11EI208 MEASUREMENTS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance, Inductance and Capacitance using bridges. • To learn the usage of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope. • To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters. Course Outcome The student will • Calibrate basic instruments • Apply the knowledge of bridges for measurement of resistance, inductance and capacitance. List of Experiments 1. Measurement of Inductance using Maxwell’s Bridge. 2. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter. 3. Measurement of Inductance using Hay’s Bridge. 4. Measurement of Resistance using Wheatstone’s Bridge 5. Measurement of Resistance using Kelvin’s Double Bridge. 6. Measurement of Capacitance using Schering’s Bridge. 7. Measurement of Capacitance using Desauty’s Bridge. 8. Calibration of Wattmeter 9. Calibration of Energy meter. 10. Measurement of voltage, frequency and phase difference using CRO. 11. Measurement of B-H Curve using CRO.
Academic Information 7

Karunya University

Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering

12.Typical applications of measurement using bridges.

11EI209 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control • To inculcate the controller design concepts • To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling Course Outcome • Students will have knowledge of Feedback control • Students will have the knowledge of controller Design • Students will be able to model simple first order systems List of Experiments 1. Study of On-Off Temperature Control System 2. Study of Digital PID Controllers in Temperature Process 3. Mathematical Modeling of Mercury Thermometer 4. Study of D.C Position Control System 5. Response of P and PI Controller for the given error signal using MATLAB 6. Controller Tuning using Ziegler-Nichols (Z-N) method 7. Controller Tuning using Cohen Coon(C-C) method 8. Design of Lead Compensator 9. Design of Lag Compensator 10. Design of Lead-lag Compensator 11. Study of Non-Linear Characteristics of Relay 12. Speed Torque Characteristics of AC Servomotor 11EI210 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To gain experience in the use of op-amps and Logic gates Course Outcome • The outcome of the course is the ability to design,analyze and implement thesignal conditioning circuits. This laboratory imparts the knowledge about characteristics of opamplifier, filter, logic gates and Flip flops List of Experiments 1. Measurement of Op-Amp Parameter. 2. Design and testing of precision rectifier 3. Operational amplifier application: Integrator and Differentiator. 4. Design and testing of Instrumentation Amplifier. 5. Design of second order Active filter. 6. Study of 555 Timer 7. Design of Oscillators 8. Testing of Half Adder, Full Adder, Half Subtractor and Full Subtractor. 9. Verification of Truth Tables of RS, clocked RS, D and JK Flip Flops. 10. Multiplexers andDemultiplexers.
Academic Information 8

Generation of square wave using 8085. Design of Digital to Analog converters using PSPICEsoftware. Interfacing stepper motor 11. DC motor control 10. hexadecimal to BCD. Sorting (ascending & descending order) 3.Activating a buzzer b. • Students know how to interface 8085 with ADC.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 11. Basic arithmetic operations (addition.DAC. multiplication and division) 6. Design of Digital to Analog Converters 12.a. Code conversion (BCD to hexadecimal. • To impart knowledge about embedded C programming in89C51RD2. ASCII to decimal) 4.Switch&LED indication 11EI212 COMPUTER BASED PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To strengthen the knowledge of Mathematical Modeling • To strengthen the practical knowledge of process control • To inculcate the operation of Process Components • To introduce Ladder programming for Various PLCs Course Outcome • Students will be able to Model simple Physical Processes • Students will have the practical knowledge of Process control • Students will have the knowledge of Process Components • Students will be able to program PLCs List of Experiments Academic Information 9 . Square wave generation 8. Programs using 8051 Microcontrollers 5. List of Programs Programs using 8085 Microprocessors 1.Serial communication 7. subtraction. • Will have knowledge about embedded C implementation in 89C51RD2. Interfacing ADC Implementation of Embedded C program in 89C51RD2 12 . stepper motor etc. subtraction. Digital to analog conversion 9. multiplication and division) 2. 11EI211 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective • To impart Programming knowledge based on the 8085 microprocessors and its interfacing. Basic arithmetic operations (addition. Course outcome • Students will have knowledge to program using 8085.

Ladder Programming and implementation using Omron PLC 12. Academic Information 10 . • Compute the DFT and IDFT of sequences • Determine the response of DT system • Design and implement Digital filters for real time applications List of experiments 1. Study of Temperature Control 6.Sampling and Reconstruction 11.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 1. Measurement of Viscosity. simulation and implementation using MATLAB and LabVIEW.Generation of discrete time signals 2. Study of Flow control System 5.Convolution 5. Calibration of Pressure Process Station using LabVIEW 3. Fast Fourier Transform 7. Conductivity and pH 8. Modeling of RC Circuit 2. Computation of DFT and IDFT 6. Study of Pneumatic Actuator.Verification of properties of DT systems 4. Ladder Programming and implementation using SIMATIC S7-200 PLC 11EI213 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course objective • To verify the concepts in Digital Signal Processing practically using software tools like Matlab and LabVIEW Course Outcome The student will • Visualize the operations done on signals • Appreciate the concept of convolution and verify the convolution theorem.Real time implementation of Signal Processing using LabVIEW 12.Design of IIR filter 9.Design of FIRfilter 8. Study of Level Control System 4. Simulation of Noise cancellation 10. PLC Simulation of Keyence/Picosoft 10.Operations on discrete time signals 3.Simple programs in TMS320c5X kit 11EI 214 DIGITAL CONTROL LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course objective • To inculcate the basic concepts of digital controllers • To introduce Digital Controller Design • To introduce Data Acquisition LabVIEW • To inculcate the controller design. PLC Simulation of Typical Industrial applications 11. P/I and I/P Converter 7. Calibration of Pressure Gauges 9.

characteristic equation. bourdon tube. Data Acquisition Using LabVIEW 3. Design of Dahlin’s Algorithm 10. Design of Smith Predictor Algorithm 11EI215 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective • To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory and Instrumentation. Unit II Control systems Open and closed loop systems. exponential function. Design of Kalman Algorithm 11. Stability – concept of stability. loop – damped and cyclic responsefeedback control – transient responses – laplace transform – transforms of simple functions – step function. stability criterion. Design of Dead Beat Algorithm 9. Discrete –Time Simulations 2. two-way control. Design of discrete PID Controller 7. proportional control. Course Outcome The student will • Analyse the transient and frequency response of systems • Test the stability of a given system • Apply controller principles to typical applications Unit I Introduction to Process control System – steady state design – process control – process control block diagram –definition of a process. Routh test for stability Unit IV Pressure and Temperature sensors Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor. ramp function and sine function. strain gauge. pressure sensor. servo.mechanisms. Simulation of First and Second order systems using Runge-Kutta method 6. Response of Second order system with and without dead time in Z Domain 5. measurement. and control element. simulation and implementation sing MATLAB andLabVIEW List of Experiments 1. controller. Block diagram algebra. Academic Information 11 . Inductive pressure sensor. definition of stability in a linear system. Control valve – Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring – diaphragm actuator Unit III Stability Analysis Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula. hydraulic and pneumatic control systems. differential control and integral control. diaphragm. Response of First order system with and without dead time in Z Domain 4. Design of Internal Model Controller 12.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Course outcome • Students will have the basic concepts of digital controllers • Students will be able to design Digital Controller • Students will be able to acquire data through DAC cards using LabVIEW • Students will have the knowledge of controller design. Design of Pole Placement Controller 8.

Nagoorkani. Coulson &Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”.sound. Text Books 1.(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann.. weight.A “Control Systems”.”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”Anuradha Agencies Publishers. J. Study of characteristics of Strain Gauge 2. Study of characteristics of Humidity sensor 12. 2. Gas chromatograph.Peacock. Study of characteristics of RTD 5. Third Edition Reprint 2003 11EI216 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS Credits: 0: 0:2 Course Objective • This lab imparts the practical methods for the measurement of temperature. torque speed. Study of characteristics of Viscometer 11EI217C++ AND DATA STRUCTURES Credits: 3: 0:0 Course Objective • To provide basic knowledge of C++ • To generate skills in basic OOPs concept Academic Information 12 . bimetallic strips Unit V Level sensor Simple float systems. Study of characteristics of Loudspeaker 8. Study of Tachogenerator characteristics 11. Buoyancy meter Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell. Nagrath.Baskar. Study of characteristics ofThermocouple 6.Graw Hill International Edition . Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer 7. Volume 3. Thermistors. pH meter. Donald R. Course Outcome The student will • Analyse the characteristics of sensors and transducers. Wiley Eastern Limited. “Control Systems Engineering”. RBA publications. capacitive sensing element. displacement. Study of characteristics of LVDT 4.. Second Edition. Study of characteristics of Microphone 9. pressure. an imprint of Elsevier .Measurement of density – U-type densitometer. S. I. Reference Books 1.2004 4.F Richardson A D.G.2006. Coughanowr.J. Study of characteristics of Load cell 3. Massspectrometer. • Apply the transducers for various applications List of Experiments 1. first edition ninth reprint 2002 3. M and Gopal. non-dispersive photometers. radioactive methods(nucleonic level sensing) – ultrasonic level sensor. Thermocouples.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering differential pressure cell Temperature sensors –Construction and working of RTD. “Process System analysis and control” Mc. Study of characteristics of Pressure transducer 10.

Linear Search. 3rd Ed. California. Error Handling in file I/O. Reference Books 1. 2. Postfix.QueueTrees. New York.C++ Objects as Physical Objects. 11EI218 POWER ELECTRONICS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective To introduce the basic concepts of power semiconductor devices and their applications. Heap Sort. Unit V Searching.Loop: While. “C++. SartajSahni. Double. 3.” Jones and Bartlett Publishers.” McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering • • To introduce Data Structure concept.Decisions: If-else. Unit IV Data Structure Introduction to Data Structure-Linked List: Single. Structures-Enumeration. The Complete Reference.Friend Function-this PointerTemplates: Class and Function-Exception Handling.Stack: Infix. 4th Ed. “Data Structures. Course Outcome • Students can develop programs in C++. File Handling: Stream Class. Selection Sort. For. To improve the programming skills. New Delhi. Quick Sort.Switch-Case. Course Outcome The student will • Design power semiconductor circuits for switching applications. “An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications. 4. 2002.” Sams Publishing. overloaded functions. reference arguments. Circular. 2003. Binary Search. ”Object Oriented Programming in C++. File Pointers.” McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Algorithms and Applications in C++. “Applied Data Structure with C++.Conditional operator-Logical Operator. 2004.Objects as Function Argument-ConstructorsDestructors-Inheritance-Types of Inheritance-Virtual Function. Unit II Function and Structures Functions: passing arguments to functions.Arrays-Strings-Pointers: Address and Pointers Pointers and Arrays-Pointer and C-type Strings-New and Delete Operator-Pointers to Pointer Unit III Classes and Object A Simple Class. 2004. Peter Smith. Jean-Paul Tremblay and Paul G Sorenson. 2nd Ed. Robert Lafore. nested If-Else. Academic Information 13 . Sorting and File Handling Sorting: Bubble SortInsertion Sort. returning values from functions. New Delhi. Unit I Basics of C++ Building Blocks of C++ Progamming: Basic Program Construction-Functions-Declaration and Definition-Character Variables-Input with Cin and Output with Cout-Using Data Types-Header Files and Library.” McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. Text Books 1. Herbert Schmidt. Merge Sort Searching: Binary Tree Search. 1994. Disk File I/O with Streams. do-While.

single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers. Joseph Vithyathil. New Delhi. load commutation. Devices and Applications”. New Age International Publishers. turn off characteristics. H. inverters using devices other than thyristors. Reference Books 1. John Wiley and Sons. driver circuits. modified Z transform Academic Information 14 .Pulse Transfer function-Mapping between the S plane and Z plane-Poles and Zeros of Sampled Data System (SDS) – Stability Analysis in Z domain. SMPS and Drives. 11EI301 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective • To inculcate the concepts of discrete time Control systems. vector control of induction motors. Text Books 1. “Power Electronics”. New York. Unit I Power semiconductor switches SCRs . VedamSubramanyam K. Unit IV DC to AC converters Thyristor inverters. Mohan. current source inverter. 2003. single phase cycloconverters . New Delhi. Undeland and Robbins. 2003.Reconstructing original signal from sampled signal. Unit V AC to AC converters Single phase and three phase AC voltage controllers. 2nd Edition. design of commutation elements. MOSFET/IGBT choppers. • To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design.Circuits. Course Outcome • • • Students will have the knowledge of discrete time Control systems. McMurray-Mc Murray Bedford inverter. integral cycle control. • To inculcate the different types of digital control algorithm. 2. 1995. McGraw Hill. turn-on characteristics. voltage control. Rashid M. dual converters. Current. Applications in power electronics: UPS.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering • Apply the knowledge of thyristors in practical applications.effect of harmonics and Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI). “Power Electronics . 2003. 3.Z-Transform by Convolution Integral Method. Prentice Hall. “Power Electronics”. thyristor choppers. “Power Electronics”. 2nd Edition. inverter operation. Unit III DC to DC converters Voltage.series and parallel connections. New York. Students will be able to design control system using polynomial equations approach. Impulse Sampling and data Hold. semi controlled and fully controlled rectifiers. AC choppers. Unit II AC to DC converters Natural commutation. Students will have an exposure in different types of digital control algorithm Unit I Introduction Review of Z Transform.

Second Edition. 2. design Via Pole placement-State observer-Servo Systems. Franklin. New Delhi.H-infinity suboptimal solutions. Unit V Digital Control Algorithm Implementation of different digital control algorithm: Digital PID. Tata McGrawHill. Gopal M. 2.Dale E.Polynomial Equations Approach to Control system Design. • Students can able to model Unstructured Systems • Students will have exposure in H-infinity design and H.Time Control Systems”. Mellichamp. “Process Dynamics and Control”.Gene F. David Powell. “Discrete. Pearson Education Limited-2002. Dahlin. Sigapore.Parametric Uncertainty. Edgar. Pearson Education.infinity Loop shaping procedure Course Outcome • Students will have an exposure about Robust Control. 2003. Text Books 1.Signals and system norms: Vector norms and signal norms. • To introduce Modeling of Unstructured Systems • To train the students in H-infinity design and H. 2006. Digital Control and State variable Methods. Thomas F. Duncan A.J.Discrete time cases Academic Information 15 . Smith predictor and Internal Model Control algorithm with examples.Linear fractional transformations-Structured Uncertainties.2002 11EI302 ROBUST CONTROL Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective • To inculcate the concepts of Robust Control. Willey India. “Digital control of dynamic systems”.2 degree of freedom H.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Unit II State Space Analysis State Space representation of discrete time Signals-Solving discrete time State Space EquationsPulse Transfer Function Matrix-Discretization of continuous time State Space Equations Unit III Pole Placement and Observer Design Controllability-Observability-Useful Transformations in State Space Analysis and Design. Seborg.Co prime Factorization and stabilizing controllers.System Stabilities.system norms Unit II Modeling of Unstructured Systems Unstructured Uncertainties.Robust Design Specifications: Small gain theorem and Robust Stabilization.Design of Model Matching Control Systems.infinity Loop shaping procedure Unit I Introduction Uncertainty and control an overview-uncertain and approximate model-categories of uncertaintyControl System Representation. Reference Books 1. Unit III H – Infinity Design Mixed Sensitivity H-infinity Optimization. Performance Consideration. Unit IV Polynomial Equations Approach to Control System Design Diophantine Equations-Polynomial Equations Approach to Regulator system. Deadbeat. Structured Singular Values.infinity design.Ogata.

Springer. Gu D W. • Students will be able to do estimation problems in Instrumentation and control Unit I Probability Theory . “Robust control design using H-infinity methodUncertain Models and Robust Control”.Joint Density. Academic Information 16 .D-K Iteration method.. Feng lin. Valery A Ugrinovskii. Petkov. Skogestad and Postlethwaite.Kalman Filter-Case Study. • Students will have the knowledge of system identification concepts.Random Variables -Function of Random Variable . Springer Verlag-London Ltd2000.Kalman Filter-Model and Derivation Unit IV Kalman Filter-Derivation . 2005.The time-Invariant Kalman Filter .Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Unit IV H-Infinity Loop Shaping Design Procedure Robust Stabilization against normalised Co-prime Factor Perturbations. “Robust control design an Optimal approach”.µ.Auto Correlation and Power Spectrum Estimation. 2.Mixed Optimization Design Method with LSDP.Least Squares Estimation Optimal IIR Filters. µ-K Iteration method.Z-Transform Revisited Eigen Vectors/Values Unit III The Concept of Innovation. To introduce estimation problems in Instrumentation and control Course Outcome • Students will have an exposure Probability Theory and Random Process.Introduction to Adaptive Filters-State Estimation. John-Wiley & Sons Inc.Reduction via Fractional Approximation Methods-Frequency Weighted Approximation Methods Factors-Relative-error Text Books 1. Unit V Lower Order Controllers Absolute-error-Approximation Methods.Linear Regression-Recursive Least Squares. “Robust Control with MATLAB”. Reference Books 1.Analysis and Synthesis: Consideration of Robust performance.System identification Introductory Concepts. 2005. 2007. “Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and Design”.Mean and Variance-Random Vectors Random Processes -Random Processes and Linear Systems Unit II Linear Signal Models.Estimator Properties. To inculcate system identification concepts.Linear Mean Square . and Andrey V Savkin.Loop Shaping Design Procedure. Konstantinov M M. µ-synthesis. John Wiley & sons England. 11EI303 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective • • • To inculcate the concepts of Probability Theory and Random Process. Ian R Petersen. 2.Error Estimation.Discrete time case.

Second Edition. “Subspace Methods for System Identification” .finite difference methods-Solving the problems using MATLAB. elliptic and hyperbolic partial differential equations-Finite element and finite volume methods. Tohru Katayama. Empirical model building.distributed parameter systems Unit III Development of grey box models. • To inculcate lumped and distributed parameter models • To introduce grey box models. Karl J. Gu D W. Course Outcome • • • Unit I Introduction to Modelling . Konstantinov M.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Unit V Variants of LSE-Least Square Estimation.Stiff differential equations. Rik Pintelon.Euler’s method.2001.R-K method. 4. IEEE press New York. 11EI304 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective • To inculcate the concepts of Process Modelling..Solving parabolic. David Stirzaker “Probability and random processes” Oxfor University Press.Statistical model calibration and validation.Empirical model building. Text Books 1. Petkov. Springer. “Adaptive Control” Pearson Education Asia.Solution methods for initial value and boundary value problems. 3.Dynamic models: lumped parameter systems.thermodynamic principles of process systems. Monson H Hayes. “System Identification A Frequency Domain Approach”.Estimation Problems in Instrumentation and Control. Unit II Development of steady state models: lumped parameter systems. Identification and implementation”. “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”. Springer. 2002 Reference Books 1. Third Edition. Geoffrey Grimmett. 2006. Verlag London Ltd.. Petkov.a systematic approach to model building. Gainluca Zito.Model Order Selection Residual Tests-Practical Issues in Identification. 2001. 2. Academic Information 17 Students will have the exposure of Process Modelling. 2. Petkov. 2001. Konstantinov M M. 2005. Gu D W. Unit IV Solution strategies for lumped parameter models. Loan D Landau. Gainluca Zito. Konstantinov M M. Wiley India Private Ltd. Students will have the exposure of lumped and distributed parameter models Students will be able to use grey box models and Empirical Model building .. “Digital Control Systems Design. Unit V Solution strategies for distributed parameter models. Biorn Wittenmark.Population balance models. Astrom. Verlag London Ltd.classification of modelsConservation principles.

Cameron. Students can able to do Gain Scheduling. design. Unit I Introduction Linear Feedback. Wayne Bequette.Design of gain scheduling Controllers. Reference Book 1. 2003. Hangos and I. Upper Saddle River. To train the students in Model Reference Adaptive System Design.relay oscillations Unit IV Gain Scheduling Introduction-The principle.PID Control Auto tuning techniques-Transient Response methods: Ziegler-Nichols Step response method-Characterization of step response. B. Rao. bounded output Stability. 2. 2001. M.Operational issues Text Books Academic Information 18 .Applications to Adaptive control-Output feedback-Relations between MRAC and STR.Determination of the Adaptation Gain-Lyapunov Theory-design of MRAC using Lyapunov Theory-Bounded input.The Adaptive control Problemapplications Unit II Model Reference Adaptive Systems Introduction-MIT Rule. Students will be able to design Model Reference Adaptive System. “Process control: modeling.nonlinear TransformationsApplications of Gain scheduling: Ship steering-pH Control-Combustion control-Fuel Air control in car Engine-Flight control systems Unit V Practical Issues and Implementation Introduction-Controller Implementation-Controller Design-Solving the Diophantine equationEstimator Implementation-Square Root Algorithms-Interaction of Estimation and controlprototype algorithms.Nonlinear Systems Unit III Auto Tuning Introduction. “Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists” Prentice Hall. Academic Press. To inculcate the practical issues in Adaptive control Implementation. NJ.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Text Books 1. Pearson Education Inc. Singiresu S. Students will have an exposure about the practical issues in Adaptive control Implementation. and simulation”. To introduce Auto tuning and Gain Scheduling.Adaptive schemes. K. Course Outcome • • • • Students will understand the need of Adaptive Control. “Process Modelling and Model Analysis”..Effect of Process variations: Non-linear Actuators-Flow and speed variation – Variations in Disturbance Characteristics . T.Method based on relay feedback: ZieglerNichols closed loop method-Method of Describing function. 2001 11EI305 ADAPTIVE CONTROL Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective • • • • To inculcate the need of Adaptive Control.

Electrical Safety and other safety aspects of medical equipment. Text Books Leslie Cromwell. New Delhi. Tata McGraw-Hill. Unit IV Medical Imaging Techniques X-rays – scanning techniques-ultrasound scanner. suction apparatus. EMG– Electrode theory – bipolar and Unipolar electrode-surface electrode – electrode impedance – equivalent circuit for extra cellular electrodes. 2007. “Adaptive Control design and Analysis”. pulse oximetry. heart lung machines. Biorn Wittenmark. 1. Haemodialysis. Second Edition. • It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. Event monitors. Astrom. 2001.micro electrodes. EEG. operating microscopes. 2. John Wiley & Sons.color Doppler system. Course Outcome • They will have knowledge of the principle operation and design and the background knowledge of biomedical instruments and specific applications of biomedical engineering Unit I Biopotentials and their Measurements Cell and its structure – resting potentials – action potentials – bioelectric potentials – measurement of potentials and their recording – basic principles of ECG. Reference Books Academic Information 19 . Phonocardiogram.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 1. Bispectral Index EEG for depth of anesthesia monitoring Unit III Operation theatre equipment and Critical Care instrumentation Patient monitors. New Delhi. Khandpur R. John Wiley & Sons. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. nuclear imaging Unit V Specialized Therapeutic and diagnostic equipment Cardiac pacemakers. Gang Tao.S.2003 Reference Book 1. Karl J. Tread Mill Test ECG– Foetal monitor. EMG. defibrillators. infusion pumps and syringe pumps. this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments. CT. Audiometer. EEG. “Adaptive Control” Pearson Education Asia. anesthesia equipment. New Jersey. Gang Tao. Unit II Computer based medical instrumentation Computerised versions of ECG. motorized operation table. ICU ventilators. “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”. MRI scanning techniques – coronary angiogram. Adaptive Control Design And Analysis. 2. Prentice hall of India. clinical laboratory instrumentation. cardiac arrthymias and its monitoring through Holter monitor.2003 11EI306 ADVANCED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments. 2003. electro surgery. nerve stimulator.

2006 Reference Books 1 Atam P. USA 2003.PET.Gonzalez and R. Transform operations. Optimum mean square quantizer. MRI. Kavyan Najarian and Robert Splerstor. hav Unit I Image Fundamentals Image perception. Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design – Myer Kutz. Image fidelity criteria. Feature extraction and representation. 2002. Image sampling and quantization – two dimensional sampling theory. edge based.C.Woods. Wiley Interscience Publication.New York. Interactive principal axis registration. Image reconstruction in CT scanners. fMRI. • Will be able to analyze Morphology. 3 Jerry L. New York. Inverse and Weiner filtering. K. Texture. Image model. 3D Ultra sound imaging Nuclear Medicine Imaging Modalities-SPECT. MTF of the visual system. NJ. Unit II Image Preprocessing Image enhancement – point operation.Karunya University 1 2 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering John G. Shape. Image transforms – 2D-DFT and other transforms. Rule based. McGraw-Hill Publisher. Statistical. 2009. Image quantization. Image visualization – 2D display methods. 3D display methods. “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”. UK.pixel based. Segmentation and enhancement and reconstruction techniques and implement these in images. Elastic deformation based registration.Dhawan. Text Books 1. Pearson Education. Image representation and analysis. region based segmentation. feature and image classification – Statistical. 2006 Academic Information 20 . Webster. R.CRC – Taylor and Francis. Ultra sound imaging. ‘Medical Image Analysis’. Principal axis registration. Jain. Pearson education.2003. 2 Anil. Second Edition. ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing’. Histogram modeling. John Wiley and sons.” Biomedical signals and Image processing”. Indian Reprint 2003.E. Neural Network approaches Unit V Image Registrations And Visualization Rigid body visualization.” Medical Imaging Signals and Systems”. Molecular Imaging Unit IV Image Analysis And Classification Image segmentation. spatial operations. ‘Digital Image Processing’. 11EI307 MEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To learn the fundamentals of medical image processing techniques..Prince and Jnathan M. Image Compression – Spatial and Transform methods Unit III Medical Image Reconstruction Mathematical preliminaries and basic reconstruction methods. 2. Course Outcome • Students will be able to apply image processing concepts for medical images. virtual reality based interactive visualization.Links. Feature based registration.Pearson Education Inc. Image restoration – Image degradation model.

CRC Press . Academic Information 21 . Unit II Auditory And Speech Assist Devices Types of deafness. ISBN: 9780849372223 . job and in day-to-day life. John H. mobility aids. Medical Devices and Systems. Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy. Rehabilitation Engineering by Raymond V. Bronzino. feedback in orthotic system. Location for Stimulation. Course outcome • Students will have basic knowledge about MEMS and Microsystems. An Introduction to Rehabilitation Engineering. Leslie Jr. material for prosthetic and orthotic devices. Legal aspect available in choosing the device and provision available in education.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering 11EI308 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective • To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications. different types of models for externally powered limb prosthetics.2006 Reference Books 1. vestibular implants. Voice synthesizer. Braille Reader. Crc Press . hearing aids. Hisaichi Ohnabe. Functional Electrical Stimulation. application of DSP in hearing aids. speech trainer. Hartford. Unit I Prosthetic And Orthotic Devices Hand and arm replacement. Unit IV Medical Stimulator Muscle and nerve stimulator. Trinity College. Tactile devices for visually challenged. ISBN 13: 9780849369513 Crc Press (Jul 1990). screen readers. 2. Hobson. Publisher: InTech. Publishing date: December 2009. Connecticut. 2. Text Books 1. Rehabilitation Engineering by Tan Yen Kheng. ISBN: 978-953-307-023-0. Douglas A. 11EI309 BIO-MEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective • To understand a wide knowledge about MEMS and its role in medical Instrumentation area. Smith. Course outcome • Students will have knowledge about various types of assist devices • Students will have the ability to choose which type of assist device is suitable for various disorders and legal aspects related to rehabilitation. Rory A Cooper. 2006. Joseph D. Unit III Visual Aids Ultra sonic and laser canes. Sensory Assist Devices Unit V Rehabilitation Medicine And Advocacy Physiological aspects of Function recovery. Text voice converter. Intra ocular lens.

Springer 2006. materials for MEMS and Microsystems. Steven A. Reference Books 1.Sum Academic Information 22 . microsystem approaches to polymerase chain reaction (PCR). micro lens. Lee. thermal flow sensors. Wanjun Wang. micro total analysis systems (MicroTAS) detection and measurement methods. 2007 11EI 310 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective • To learn the techniques of signal processing that are fundamental to medical signal processing applications.2007 Abraham P. BioMEMS and Biomedical Nano Technology. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company. Boca Raton.Technologies and applications”. Unit I Introduction To Random Signal Processing Discrete Random Processes– Variance . Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company. System modeling and properties of materials Unit II Microsensors And Acuators Mechanical sensors and actuators – beam and cantilever.Wiener Khintchine Relation. “ MEMS”. DNA hybridization. Magnetic sensors and actuators. 2002 2.Parseval’s Theorem . Peltier effect heat pumps. light modulators. Course outcome • Students will know various techniques in processing medical signals. expression for liquid flow in a channel. 2. micro needle. optical switch Unit IV Microfluidic Systems Microscale fluid.. micromachining.Soper “ BioMEMS. piezoelectric materials. dielectrophoresis.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering • Will have the exposure to micro opto electro mechanical systems. digital micro mirror devices. Electronic nose.EMG and other bio signals.Co-Variance .Scalar Product -Energy of Discrete Signals . New Delhi. Volume I. light detectors. beam splitter. micro pumps-continuous flow system Unit V Drug Delivery Systems Drug delivery. thermal sensors and actuators. Lee and James L. micro fluid dispenser. Bio chip Text Books 1.Magnetic Materials for MEMS Devices Unit III Micro Opto Electro Mechanical Systems Fundamental principle of MOEMS technology. • Students will have the ability to apply signal processing techniques in practical • cardiac EEG. CRC Press. “ MEMS and Microsystems design and manufacture”.Sample Autocorrelation . Unit I Mems And Microsystems Working principle of Microsystems. New Delhi. Nitaigour Premchand Mahalik.micro machined thermocouple probe. Tai Ran Hsu . fluid actuation methods.

application in EEG. PCG signals. K. New Delhi.2005 11EI311 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective • To introduce the basic approaches and methodologies implementation of signal processing systems in FPGA. CRC – Taylor and Francis.2006. PHI.C. Back propagation neural network based classification.Wavelet packets. Reference Books 1. 2002 2. process order estimation. Course outcome • The students will design various algorithms for DSP applications in FPGA Unit I Introduction To DSP Systems Introduction To DSP Systems -Typical DSP algorithms.P. Biomedical Digital Signal Processing. non stationary process. Unit V Time Frequency And Multivariate Analysis Time frequency representation. WileyInterscience/IEEE Press.New York. ECG characterization. Time-scale representation. Noises. ECG data compression. ‘Biomedical Signal Analysis-A case study approach’.Soman. 2003. data flow graph representations.New Delhi.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Decomposition Theorem Spectral Factorization Theorem-Characteristics of some dynamic biomedical signals. Unit II Time Series Analysis And Spectral Estimation Time series analysis – linear prediction models.TMH. Multivariate component analysis-PCA.Longest path Matrix algorithm. Time varying analysis of Heart-rate variability. adaptive wavelet detection. linear discriminate function. model based ECG simulator. improved adaptive filtering in FECG. Pipelining and parallel processing– Academic Information 23 .”Biomedical Signal Processing – Principles and Techniques”. Unit III Adaptive Filtering And Wavelet Detection Filtering – LMS adaptive filter. scalogram. Kavyan Najarian and Robert Splerstor. ICA Text Books 1. New Delhi.K. adaptive segmentation. direct feature selection and ordering. spectrogram. Prentice Hall of India. fixed segmentation. Spectral estimation – Blackman Tukey method.” Biomedical signals and Image processing”. wavelet analysis – Data reduction techniques. Application in Heart rate variability. 2. Application in Normal versus Ectopic ECG beats.2004 3. matched filtering.random. Rangayyan. Wavelet detection in ECG – structural features.I Ramachandran. lattice representation. Willis J.”Insight into wavelet from theory to practice”. Rangaraj M. detection of overlapping wavelets. PCG signals. periodogram. Tompkins. Unit IV Biosignal Classification And Recognition Signal classification and recognition – Statistical signal classification. Wigner distribution.Reddy. adaptive noise cancelling in ECG. loop bound and iteration bound. Feature extraction. and model based estimation. D. structured and physiological noises.

Unit IV Filters Parallel FIR filters. pipelined adaptive digital filters. Gary Yeap. Reference Books 1. 2004 11EI312 RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective • This course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Radiological equipments. Folding And Unfolding Retiming . Unit V Bit-Level Arithmetic Architectures Bit-Level Arithmetic Architectures. pipelining and parallel processing for low power.parallel multipliers with sign extension. Unit II Radio Diagnosis Academic Information 24 . properties of unfolding. relaxed look-ahead. pipelined LMS adaptive filter. Scattered radiation. Cooling system. ―Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design.order IIR filters.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Pipelining of FIR digital filters. 2. Folding– Folding transformation– Register minimizing techniques– Register minimization in folded architectures Unit III Convolution Fast convolution– Cook-Toom algorithm. 4x 4 bit Baugh. Text Book 1. ―VLSI Digital Signal Processing systems. parallel carry-ripple array multipliers. selection of anodes. Look. parallel carry-save multiplier. combined pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters. Pearson education Pvt Ltd. Pipelined and parallel recursive filters– inefficient/efficient single channel interleaving. reprint 2009. modified Cook-Took algorithm– Winograd Algorithm. Keshab K. CSD multiplication using Horner‘s rule for precision Improvement. design of Lyon‘s bit-serial multipliers using Horner‘s rule. reprint 2008. Unit II Retiming. Design and implementation. Inter Science. Wayne Wolf. Unit I X-Rays Principles and production of soft and hard X-rays. “Modern VLSI Design – system on chip”. Porter Bucky system. sample period reduction and parallel processing application. parallel processing.Parhi. Unfolding– an algorithm for Unfolding. Course Outcome • Students will have indepth knowledge about Radiological equipments and its imaging techniques. Heel Pattern. New Delhi. CSD representation. Kluwer Academic Publishers. Wiley. Iterated Convolution– Cyclic Convolution. Look-Ahead pipelining with powerof-two decomposition parallel processing of IIR filters.Ahead pipelining in first. Retiming techniques.Wooley carry-save multiplication tabular form and implementation.definitions and properties. bitserial FIR filter.

Multi section radiography. dot scanners. 2003. Image Intensifier. Safety Limits. Volume 2. Unit III Special Radiological Equipments Principle. Sonka (Editor).Academic Press. Principle of NMR. Principle of radiation detectors. CAT. Text Books 1. Radiation protection Techniques. N. Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and Analysis (Biomedical Engineering). Radiation Monitoring. M. Medical Image Processing and Analysis . Bankman . Fluoroscopy.     Academic Information 25 . Angiography. I. Jacob Beutel (Editor). Principles of Radiation therapy.Karunya University Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Radiography. Plane of Movement. SPIE Press 2000 Reference Book 1. Handbook of Medical Imaging. Tata McGraw-Hill. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. nuclear angiogram. New Delhi. Multi section Radiography. Unit V Radiation Safety Hazardous effect of Radiation. Beta and Gamma emission.2000 2.S. MRI Unit IV Application Of Radioisotopes Alpha. Isaac Bankman. Khandpur R.

LIST OF SUBJECTS Sub.8-0 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . Code 12EI201 12EI202 12EI203 12EI204 12EI205 12EI206 12EI207 12EI208 12EI209 12EI210 12EI211 12EI212 12EI213 12EI214 12EI215 12EI216 12EI217 12EI218 12EI219 12EI220 12EI221 12EI222 12EI223 12EI224 12EI225 12EI226 12EI227 12EI228 12EI229 12EI230 12EI231 12EI232 12EI233 12EI234 12EI235 12EI236 12EI237 12EI238 12EI239 12EI240 12EI241 12EI242 12EI243 12EI244 Name of the Subject Circuit Analysis and Networks Electrical Machines Electronic Circuits Thermodynamics and Fluid Machinery Sensors and Transducers Electron Devices and Circuits Laboratory Sensors and Transducers Laboratory Electrical Measurements Signals and Systems Control System Digital Electronics C++ and Data Structures Electrical Measurements and Machines Laboratory Control Systems Laboratory Communication Engineering Signal Conditioning Circuits Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Industrial Instrumentation Process Dynamics and Control Industrial Instrumentation Laboratory Signal Conditioning Circuits Laboratory Microprocessors and Microcontrollers Laboratory Electronic Instrumentation Digital Signal Processing Logic and Distributed Control Systems Industrial Data Communication and Networks Process Control Laboratory Digital Signal Processing Laboratory Advanced Processors Embedded Systems Laboratory Logic and Distributed Control Systems Laboratory Biomedical Instrumentation Embedded Systems Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Control Digital Control Systems Instrumentation and Control in Petrochemical Industries Instrumentation and Control in Paper Industries Instrumentation and Control in Iron and Steel Industries Ultrasonic Instrumentation Instrumentation and Control for Aircraft Opto Electronics and Laser Based Instrumentation Power Plant Instrumentation Automotive Control Systems Power Electronics Credits: 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 Page No.

8-1 .12EI245 12EI246 12EI247 12EI248 12EI249 12EI250 12EI251 12EI252 12EI253 12EI254 12EI255 12EI301 12EI302 12EI303 12EI304 12EI305 12EI306 12EI307 12EI308 12EI309 12EI310 12EI311 12EI312 12EI313 12EI314 12EI315 12EI316 12EI317 12EI318 12EI319 12EI320 12EI321 12EI322 12EI323 12EI324 12EI325 12EI326 12EI327 12EI328 12EI329 12EI330 12EI331 12EI332 12EI333 12EI334 12EI335 12EI336 Analytical Instrumentation Medical Instrumentation Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation Ultrasonic Instrumentation Aircraft Instrumentation Automotive Instrumentation Robotics and Automation Instrumentation and Process Control for Food Engineers Instrumentation and Control Laboratory for Food Engineers Instrumentation and Control Systems Instrumentation and Control Systems Laboratory Advanced Digital Signal Processing Industrial Instrumentation Instrumentation Advanced Process Control Discrete Control System Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory Advanced Control Systems Soft Computing Real Time and Embedded Systems Optimal Control Theory Industrial Communication Systems Industrial Instrumentation and Process Control Laboratory Embedded Systems Laboratory Robust Control System Identification Process Modelling And Simulation Adaptive Control Embedded System Software Design Advanced Microcontrollers Digital Image Processing Techniques Advanced Programmable Signal Processor Digital System Design Advanced Embedded system Laboratory Computer Architecture Mobile Communication Mobile Computing Telemetry VLSI Signal Processing Embedded LINUX Medical Instrumentation Medical Sensors Medical Image Processing Anatomy and Physiology Soft Computing Techniques Modeling of Physiological systems Special Purpose Instrumentation 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 3:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 3:0:0 0:0:1 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 3:1:0 3:1:0 0:0:2 3:1:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

8-2 .12EI337 12EI338 12EI339 12EI340 12EI341 12EI342 12EI343 12EI344 12EI345 12EI346 12EI347 12EI348 Medical Diagnostics and Therapeutic Laboratory Medical Imaging Techniques Rehabilitation Engineering Hospital Management Systems Biomedical Signal Processing Bio MEMS Medical Informatics Biomaterials Medical Devices Safety Bio Virtual Instrumentation laboratory Embedded Virtual Instrumentation Laboratory Advanced Instrumentation and Process Control for Food Engineers 0:0:2 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 4:0:0 0:0:2 0:0:2 4:0:0 12EI201 CIRCUIT ANALYSIS AND NETWORKS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the concept of circuit elements. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. the student will • Design simple DC circuits. • Analyze two port networks Unit I BASIC CIRCUIT CONCEPTS: Classification of Circuit Elements – Lumped Circuits – V– I Relationships of R. • Determine AC steady– state response and transient response.Energy Sources – Independent Sources – Dependent Sources – Kirchhoff’s Voltage Law – Voltage Division – Kirchhoff’s Current Law – Current Division – Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. L and C . • To understand the transient response of series and parallel A. circuits. lumped circuits. • To analyze the concept of coupled circuits and two port networks. circuit laws and reduction.C.

RC and RLC Series and Parallel Circuits – Free Response – Step and Sinusoidal Responses – Natural Frequency – Damped Frequency – Damping Factor – Logarithmic Decrement – Response of Circuits for Non–sinusoidal Periodic Inputs Unit IV COUPLED CIRCUITS : Self and Mutual Inductances – Coefficient of Coupling – Analysis of Coupled Circuits – Natural Current – Dot Rule for Coupled Circuits – Equivalent Circuit of Coupled Circuits – Coupled Circuits in Series And Parallel – Tuned Coupled Circuits – Double Tuned Circuits Unit V TWO PORT NETWORKS AND FILTERS: Driving Point and Transfer Impedances– Admittances – Voltage and Current Ratios of Two Port Networks – Parameters of Two Port Networks: Admittance.H. “Electric circuit Theory”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2.Premkumar. Mcgraw Hill.Network Reduction – Matrix Representation and Solution of DC Networks – Node and Loop basics Unit II NETWORK THEOREMS AND TRANSFORMATIONS: Voltage and Current source transformations – Star and Delta Transformations – Network Theorems: Superposition. 2008. speed control of DC Machines. Norton. and Shyam Mohan S. Jr. New Delhi. 2002. “Fundamentals of Electric Circuit”. W. performance. KhannaPublishers . 12EI202 ELECTRICAL MACHINES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To impart knowledge on Constructional details. Ltd. “Electric circuits”. and N. RC and RLC Circuits – Transient Response of RL..P. New York. Arumugam. 3.O. Hybrid. M. Hytt. K.Alexander. Charles. New York 2004. “Engineering Circuit Analysis”.. N. Joseph Edminister. and Kemmerly. McGraw Hill International Editions. 2003. TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Co. MahmoodNahvi.8-3 .. principle of operation.Sadiku.2006. Impedance. New York. 2. Millman’s and Maximum Power Transfer Theorems – Statement and Applications Unit III RESPONSE OF ELECTRIC CIRCUITS: Concept of Complex Frequency – Pole– Zero Plots – Frequency Response of RL. Sudhakar. J. New Delhi. Transmission and Image Parameters – ImpedanceMatching – Equivalent Pi and T Networks – Passive Filter as a Two Port Network – Characteristics of Ideal Filter – Low pass and High Pass Filter Text Books 1. Thevenin. Reference Books 1. “Circuits and Network Analysis and Synthesis”.A. McGraw– Hill.E.Mathew.

N. Hancock. series and compound motors – Losses and Efficiency Calculations – Applications of D. 2001. Starting and Speed control – Synchronous Motor:Construction and Principle of operation. EMF equation. the student will • Analyze the performance of various DC and AC machines. 2. motor – Back E. 22nd Edition. Pvt. R. and Theraja.Clayton.C. A. Nirja Construction and Development Company Pvt..E. Torque Slip characteristics. Laxmi publications. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. I.• • To understand the principle of operation of AC machines. motors Unit II TRANSFORMERS: Principle and Constructional details of Shell and Core type transformer – EMF equation – No load and on load operation – Equivalent circuit – Voltage Regulation – Test on Transformers: Load test. II. Torque Equation. 2. B. New Delhi.F – Torque equation – Characteristics of shunt.C. generator – Constructional features of D. 2002.C.8-4 . “Electrical Technology”.K. Oxford Publishing Co. Vol. LTD. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Unit I DC MACHINES : Principle and theory of operation of D.. Synchronization Unit IV SPECIAL MACHINES : Tachogenerator – AC and DC servomotor – Linear induction motor – Single phase motor – Double field revolving theory – Capacitor start Capacitor run motors – Shaded pole motor – Repulsion type motor – Universal motor – Stepper motor Unit V UTILIZATION OF ELECTRICAL ENERGY: Electric heating– Methods of heating – Welding Generator – Electric traction– Traction motors and control – Recent trends in Electric traction Text Books 1. V curves. “The Performance and Design of Direct Current Machines”.C. Tata McGraw Hill. N.. Reference Books 1. • Suggest suitable machines for various applications.M. New Delhi. Theraja. series and compound generators – Principle of operation of D. New Delhi.L. Rajput. Albert.J. “Utilisation of Electrical Power”. Machines– Characteristics of shunt. Motors – Motor starters – Speed control of D. Ltd. Open Circuit and Short Circuit Test Unit III INDUCTION AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES: Induction Motor: Construction and Principle of operation. To introduce the concept of Special Machines and Utilization of Electrical Energy.2006. “Electric Machines”.K. 2005.C. Classification. Nagrath.

C. David A Bell. Regulated Power Supply – Rectifiers – Half Wave and Full Wave Rectifiers – Filters: L. LC filters–Zener diode as Voltage Regulator Unit II ANALYSIS OF TRANSISTOR CIRCUITS: Load line analysis –Biasing Methods – Transistor hybrid model – Analysis of transistor amplifier using h parameters – Analysis of transistors at Low. Astable Unit V FET CIRCUITS: FET small signal model – Low frequency Common source and Common drain amplifiers – Biasing FET amplifiers Text Books 1. Class B. • Design DC bias circuitry of BJT and FET. “Electronic Devices and Circuits”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.C. Class C Amplifiers – Single ended and Push PullOperation – Class AB Amplifier – Feedback amplifiers. New Delhi. • To cover the basics of Oscillator circuits and Multivibrators. “Microelectronics”. “Integrated Electronics”. Medium Frequencies – High Frequency Model – RC coupled Amplifier – DC Amplifiers Unit III POWER AMPLIFIERS AND FEEDBACK AMPLIFIERS: Power Amplifiers: Class A. • Build simple circuits using semiconductor devices. Monostable. New York. McGraw hill. McGraw hill. Crystal Oscillators – Multivibrators: Bistable. Prentice hall of India. Jacob Millman and ArvindGrabel. Reference Books 1.12EI203 ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To familiarize the student with the design of basic transistor amplifier circuits. Jacob Millman and Halkias. Colpitts. 2.8-5 . New York. RC Phase Shift. Unit I DIODE CIRCUITS: Diode as a Circuit Element – Load line – Piecewise Linear Diode model – Clipping circuits– Introduction to D. 2004. C. 2008. 2008. Voltage and Current Feedback Circuits Unit IV OSCILLATORS AND MULTIVIBRATORS: Oscillators: Barkhausen criteria. • To introduce the principles ofpower and feedback amplifiers. Effects of Negative Feedback. Basic Concepts. Wien Bridge.. Hartley. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. the student will • Analyze the characteristics of diodes and transistor circuits.

Uniform and non uniform. U– tube manometer. • To give exposure to students about various types of engines and fluid machinery. Specific gravity – Viscosity: Units. “Electronic Devices and Circuits”. 3. 2008. Thomas Floyd. Only theoretical concepts and simple problems to be taught. Laminar and turbulent. Hollow bubble – Manometers:Piezometer. 12EI204 THERMODYNAMICS AND FLUID MACHINERY (Use of Steam tables. the student will • Apply the concepts of the fluid properties to systems. Specific volume. Centrifugal pumps – operating principles Unit V TYPES OF FLOW AND TURBINES: Types of flow:Steady and unsteady. Compressible and incompressible. Heat and Mass Transfer Data Book is permitted) Credits 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To enable the students to understand the fundamentals and basics of Heat Engines and Machinery. Prentice Hall of India. New Delhi 2003. • Derive models of systems using the Thermodynamic laws. Robert and Nashelsky Louis. Specific weight. Kinematic Viscosity. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. New Delhi. Prentice Hall of India. Effectiveness UnitIV FLUID PROPERTIES: Properties of fluids: Density.8-6 . Variation of viscosity with temperature. Unit I THERMODYNAMICS: Basic concepts – Thermodynamic system – Properties – Processes – Cycle – Equilibrium – First law of thermodynamics – Application of first law to non flow and flow process – Second law of thermodynamics – Kelvin Planck's statement – Clausius statement – Reversibility – Carnot theorem – Heat engine Unit II HEAT TRANSFER: Modes of heat transfer – One dimensional steady state heat conduction equation – Plain wall – Convection – Empirical relations – Radiation – Laws of radiation Unit III STEAM GENERATORS AND HEAT EXCHANGERS: Classification of boilers – Boiler terms – Performance of steam generator – Boiler efficiency – Heat losses in a boiler plant and heat balance calculations – Types of heat exchangers – Overall heat transfer coefficients – LMTD and NTU method – Fouling factor – Problems in heat exchangers.2. Newtons law of viscosity. Boylestad L. Single column manometer tube differential manometer – PUMPS: Reciprocating pumps. “Electronic Devices”. Types of fluids – Surface tension and capillarity: Surface tension on liquid droplet. Rotational and irrotational. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

Resolution. 3. 2009. Electrical. 2. Loading effects.S. Kaplan turbines. Tata McGraw Hill. • To introduce the application of sensors and transducers in the measuring system.C. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply the source of information about the transducers for their project applications.“A course in Heat Engines and Thermodynamics”. Francis. Holman. Conversion and other system of units – Standards of Measurement:Classification. Standards for Mass. Rotary Variable Differential Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Frequency. Linear Variable Differential Transformer (LVDT). Force. 1998. and Biswas. Som. Significant figures. Kothandaraman. Dr. 1993. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Main Terms and Definitions of measurements: Accuracy and Precision. “Heat Transfer”. 7thEdition. 12EI205 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide knowledge on the principle and operation of different transducers. 1992. DhanpatRaiand Sons..P. Volume. 3rd Edition.K. Electric. “Introduction to Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines”. two and three dimensional flows – Turbines: Classification. Ninth Edition. A.8-7 .etal. Linearity. Merits and demerits – Hot– wire Anemometer – Humidity sensor Unit II INDUCTIVE AND CAPACITANCE TRANSDUCERS: Inductance Transducer: Basic principle.Bansal R. New Delhi. Application: Motion measurement – Resistance Strain Gauge. Cengel. Systems of units. Types of Error – Units of Measurement: Fundamental and Derived units. Simple problems Text Books 1. Time. Tata McGraw Hill.R. Temperature and Luminous intensity – IEEE standards – Transducers: Definition. • Analyze the characteristics of transducers. Selecting a transducer Unit II RESISTIVE TRANSDUCERS: Resistive Potentiometer: Basic principle.One. Magnetic and International system of units. Working Principle – Pelton wheel. Application: Load cell. “Introduction to Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer”. “A Text Book of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”. Reference Books 1. 2. McGraw Hill International. Classification of transducer. Torque and Shaft Power Measurement – Resistance Thermometer – Thermistors: Characteristics. Compensation circuits – Junction and Lead compensation. Length. 1997.

3. Optical encoder – Digital speed transducer: Stroboscope – Chemical sensor: pH sensor – Ultra sonic sensors – Fiber optic sensors – MEMS: Introduction to Microscale sensors Text Books 1. Reference Books 1. 2. • Design small projects using the Semiconductor devices.O. List of Experiments 1.8-8 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering . “A Course in Electrical and Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”. Application: Capacitance pickups.Characteristics of Photo diode b. Eighteenth Edition. New Delhi. Ian R Sinclair. “Measurement Systems Application and Design”. Sawhney A. DhanpatRai and Sons.Characteristics of Zener diode 2. Renganathan. 2003. Capacitor Microphone Unit IV PIEZOELECTRIC AND MAGNETIC TRANSDUCERS: Piezoelectric transducer: Basic principle. Transistor as a Switch Page No. S. 2. Third Edition. the student will • Analyze the characteristics of basic Electronic devices.. Doebelin. Cooper W.K. “Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques”.Characteristics of Light Dependant Resistor (LDR) 3. New Delhi. 2007.. Characteristics of BJT (Common Emitter Configuration) 6. Newnes. Loading effect – Magnetostrictive Transducer – Hall effect transducer Unit V MISCELLANEOUS SENSORS: Elastic transducers – Digital Transducer: Shaft encoder. 2003. “Sensors and Transducers”. Prentice Hall of India. a. 2001. Mode of operation. Study of Half– wave and Full Wave Rectifier with and without filter 4. 2007..D. New York.Characteristics of PN diode b. Synchro. Capacitance Displacement Transducers. “Transducer Engineering”. Characteristics of BJT (Common Base Configuration) 5. McGraw Hill International. Circuitry for Capacitance Transducer. Application:Acceleration measurement using Variable Reluctance Accelerometer. Microsyn– Capacitance Transducer: Basic principle.. Chennai. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Desirable features of Capacitive Transducers. a. Allied publishers Limited.Transformer (RVDT). New Delhi. Properties of piezoelectric crystals. E. Induction Potentiometer. 12EI206 ELECTRON DEVICES AND CIRCUITS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To impart practical knowledge on the working of Electron devices and their applications.

8-9 . List of Experiments 1. Characteristics of RTD 5. Design of Oscillator 13. Characteristics of Thermocouple 6. • To impart knowledge in measurement of Resistance. Measurement of Displacement using LVDT 4.C. Characteristics of Microphone and Loud Speaker 10. Characteristics of Uni– Junction Transistor (UJT) 11. Characteristics of Resistive Potentiometer 7. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Analyze the performance characteristics of various transducers and infer the reasons for the behavior. PSPICE Simulations 12EI207 SENSORS AND TRANSDUCERS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To introduce the practical aspects of various transducers and their characteristics. Inductance and Capacitance using bridges. and A. Characteristics with Metal Oxide Semiconductor FET (MOSFET ) 9.C. Measurement of Strain using Strain Gauge 2. Characteristics of Torque Measurement System 8. voltages. Characteristics of Pressure Measurement System 11. Measurement using Capacitive Sensors 9. • Critically analyze any measurement application and suggest suitable measurement methods. Characteristics of Junction Field Effect Transistor (JFET) 8. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Characteristics of Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) 10. • To improve the skills in calibrating analog meters. • Calibrate basic instruments. Design of Transistor Amplifier 12. Characteristics of Speed Measurement System 12EI208 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the principle of measurement of D. Measurement of Humidity 12.7. Characteristics of Load cell 3.

M. A. the student will • Solve problems through instrument illustrations.E.S.. 2006. 2.D. Ltd. “Electronics Instrumentation”. and Warne. 2. Desaughty’s bridge.H. Wien bridge. S. Laughton. • Apply the knowledge of electrical measurement techniques to design circuits. 2009. J. 2003. 2001.8-10 . and Widdis F. 3. New Delhi. Guarded Wheatstone bridge – A. Text Books 1. Reference Books 1. D. Kelvin bridge. “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”. “Electrical measurements and measuring instruments”. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Tumanski. Ny.C.. Cooper W. Schering bridge. Kalsi. New Delhi.W.• To understand the use of instruments and techniques for practical measurements required in electrical measurements. “Electrical Engineer's Reference Book” Sixteenth Edition.. Bridges: Wheatstone bridge. Newnes. Hay’s bridge.. Anderson bridge. Wein bridge – Wagner ground connection Unit V RECORDING INSTRUMENTS: Introduction – Strip chart recorder – Galvanometer Type recorder – Potentiometric Recorder: Basic Potentiometer circuit – XY recorder – Magnetic tape recorder. Golding E. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2003. Prentice Hall of India. “Principles Of Electrical Measurement”.C. Tata McGraw Hill. Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS: Need for measurement systems – Types of Measurement Applications – Functional Elements of an Instrument – Null and Deflection methods – Input– Output Configuration of Measurement Systems – Performance Characteristics of Instruments: Static and Dynamic characteristics Unit II ELECTROMECHANICAL DC INSTRUMENTS: Galvanometers – PMMC Instrument – DC Ammeter and Voltmeter – Voltmeter Sensitivity – Ohmmeter : Series and Shunt type – Multimeter – Calibration of DC instruments Unit III ELECTROMECHANICAL AC INSTRUMENTS: Moving Iron Instrument – Thermoinstruments – Electrodynamometers in Power Measurements – Watt– hour meter – Power– factor meters – Instrument Transformers: Current Transformer and Voltage Transformer Unit IV BRIDGE CIRCUITS: D. Taylor and Francis Group. Sir Issac Pitman and Sons Pvt.. Bridges : Maxwell bridge..

Unit I INTRODUCTION: Signals and their origin – Characterization and classification of Signals – Signal Operations – Classification of Systems Unit II TIME DOMAIN REPRESENTATION OF CONTINUOUS AND DISCRETE TIME SYSTEMS: CT system representations by differential equations – DT System representations by difference equations – Continuous and Discrete Convolutions Unit III FREQUENCY DOMAIN REPRESENTATION OF PERIODIC SIGNALS: Continuous Time Fourier Series – Properties – Convergence of Fourier series – Discrete Time Fourier series (DTFS) – Properties –Power Spectral Density – Parseval’s Relation Unit IV FREQUENCY DOMAIN REPRESENTATION OF APERIODIC SIGNALS: Continuous Time Fourier Transform (CTFT) – Properties – Discrete Time Fourier Transform(DTFT) – Properties – Frequency response of systems characterized by Differential and Difference Equations – Energy Spectral Density – Parseval’s Relation – Sampling Theorem Unit V TRANSFORM OPERATIONS ON CT AND DT SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS: Laplace Transforms and its properties – Inverse Laplace Transform – Z transform and its properties – Inverse Z transform – Solution of Difference equations – Analysis of LTI systems using Z transform Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. the student will • Characterize and analyze the properties of CT and DT signals and systems. impulse response and convolution. • Analyze CT and DT systems using Laplace transforms and Z Transforms. DTFS and DTFT. CTFT. • Knowledge of time– domain representation and analysis concepts as they relate to difference equations.8-11 . • Concepts of the sampling process. Course Outcome: At the end of the course.12EI209 SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • Coverage of continuous and discrete– time signals and systems. • Conceptualize the effects of sampling a CT signal. their properties and representations. • Knowledge of frequency– domain representation and analysis concepts using Fourier Analysis tools. Z– transform. • Represent CT and DT systems in the Frequency domain using Fourier analysis tools like CTFS. etc.

Prentice Hall. Rotational systems. Reference Books 1. Translational systems. • Analyze the stability of the system. “Signals and Systems”. 2.Text Books 1. “Signals and Systems”. 12EI210 CONTROL SYSTEM Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the fundamentals of Feedback Control systems and mathematical modeling of the system. Steady State Errors and Error constants – Introduction to PID Controllers Unit III STABILITY ANALYSIS: Concepts of Stability – Necessary conditions for Stability– Routh stability criterion – Relative stability analysis – More on the Routh stability criterion – Root Locus Techniques: Introduction. • To cover the concepts of time response and frequency response of the system. Construction of Root Loci Unit IV FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS: Correlation between time and frequency response – Bode plots – Experimental determination of transfer functions – Assessment of relative stability using Bode Plots – Introduction to lead. John Wiley and Sons Inc. PWS Publishing Company. the student will • Represent the mathematical model of a system. Alan V Oppenheim. Gear trains – Electrical systems – Analogous Systems – Transfer functions. Unit I MODELING OF SYSTEMS: Introduction to Control Systems – Types of Control Systems – Effect of Feedback Systems – Differential equation of Physical Systems – Mechanical systems: Friction. Simon Haykin and Barry Van Veen.. The root locus concepts. Nyquist Stability criterion. • To understand the basics of stability analysis of the system. 2002. New Delhi. Newyork. New Delhi.8-12 . • Determine the response of different order systems for various test inputs. lag and lead–lag compensating networks – Stability in the Frequency Domain: Introduction to Polar Plots. Mathematical preliminaries. Signal Flow graphs Unit II TIME RESPONSE OF FEED BACK CONTROL SYSTEMS: Standard Test signals – Unit Step response of First and Second order systems – Time response specifications of Second Order Systems. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Block diagram algebra. 2005. Alan S Wilsky and Hamid Nawab S. Assessment of relative stability using Nyquist criterion Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Ashok Ambardar. 2008. “Introduction to Analog and Digital Signal Processing”.

. Unit I DIGITAL LOGIC AND LOGIC FAMILIES: Introductory Digital Concepts – Digital and Analog Quantities – Electronic Concepts of Digital Design – Logic Families: RTL. 12EI211 DIGITAL ELECTRONICS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the concepts of Digital Electronics. Fourth edition – 2005 Reference books 1. Benjamin C. Nagarath . • To make the students familiar with the implementation of combinational logic functions. Publishers. CMOS inverters – Comparison of performance of various logic families Unit II NUMBER SYSTEMS AND BOOLEAN ALGEBRA: Binary Digits – Logic Levels – Buffer – Tri– state buffer – Review of Binary. • Design combinational and Sequential circuits. Pearson Education Asia/ PHI. 2nd Edition 2007. .INTRODUCTION TO STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS: Concepts of State. • Select suitable Digital Devices from the various logic families.8-13 . “Control Systems Engineering”. 3. 2.. III et al. DTL. State variable and State models for electrical systems – Solution of State Equations Text Book 1. Kuo and Farid Golnaagi. 2009. 2002. Joseph J Distefano “Feedback and Control System”. Octal and Hexa-decimal Number Systems – Signed Numbers and Floating Point Numbers Representation – BCD –ASCII – EBCDIC – Excess 3 codes – Gray Code – Error detecting and correcting codes – Logic gates –Boolean algebra: Postulates and theorems of Boolean algebra –canonical forms – Simplification of Logic Functions using Karnaugh map Unit III COMBINATIONAL LOGIC DESIGN : Implementation of Combinational Logic Functions – Encoders and Decoders – Multiplexers and Demultiplexers – Code converters – Comparator – Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. TTL families. Ogata . Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply Boolean algebra and K –map to digital circuits. New Age International (P) Limited. TMH. Schaum’s Outlines. Wiley “Automatic Control Systems”. • To learn the working of counters and flip flops. 4th Edition.J and Gopal M. MOS inverters.K “Modern Control Engineering “. 8th Edition. Emitter Coupled Logic(ECL).

2.J. “Digital Logic and Computer Design”. Donald. • To give the basics of object oriented approach. Leach.R.10th Edition . Doubly linked list. Binary Search Unit III Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Full adder – Parallel adder – Binary adder – Parity Generator/Checker – Implementation of logical functions using multiplexers. Floyd. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DATA STRUCTURES: Stack – Queue – Linked list: Single linked list. Circular Linked list – Trees: Binary Search Tree Unit II SORTING AND SEARCHING TECHNIQUES: Sorting: Bubble sort. 2007. Tata McGrawHill. Prentice Hall Higher Education Series. T Flip Flops – Level triggering and Edge triggering – Shift Register – Concept of State table – State diagram – Asynchronous and Synchronous counters – Modulus counters––Johnson counter – Ring counter – Timing waveforms – Basic models of Sequential Machines Unit V PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES: Introduction to PLD’s – PAL – PLA – FPGA – Implementation of digital functions – Basics 0f Semiconductor Memory – RAM and ROM Text Books 1. Merge Sort – Searching: Linear Search. 2008. Quick Sort. Heap Sort. Gated D. P. “Digital Systems – Principles and Applications”. New Delhi. Edge Triggering. New Delhi. the student will • Use the data structures concepts for various applications. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Albert. Gated RS. “ Digital Principles and Applications”. • To demonstrate different applications using object oriented programming.Half adder. NewDelhi. Unit IV SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS AND DESIGN: RS. Prentice Hall India. Thomas L. Insertion Sort. “Digital Fundamentals”. Selection Sort. Prentice Hall India. Master – Slave. Reference Books 1. • Develop different applications using object oriented approach. 2008 12EI212 C++ AND DATA STRUCTURES Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To expose the different data structures and the various operations performed. JK. Paul Malvino. Gowtham Saha. 2008. Morris Mano. Tocci. 2.8-14 .

McGraw– Hill Publishing Company Limited. New and Delete operator. Nell Dale. 12EI213 ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS AND MACHINES LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To expose the students to the operation of DC machines. Adam Drozed. Pointers to pointer Unit V VIRTUAL FUNCTIONS. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. • Determine the efficiency of a given DC or AC Machine.OBJECTS AND CLASSES: A Simple class – C++ objects as physical objects – C++ Objects as Data types – Constructors – Object as function argument – Overloaded Constructors – Copy Constructors – Returning objects from functions – Structures and classes – Static class data – Const and classes – Arrays and Strings Unit IV OPERATOR OVERLOADING. Synchronous machines and Induction motors and give them experimental skills. Fourth Edition. Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning. Calibration of Energy meter and Wattmeter Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 4thEdition. FILES. File pointers. An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications”. Pointers and Arrays. 2ndEdition. Jones and Bartlett Publishers. Class hierarchies. 3rdEdition. Pointer and C– type strings. Multiple inheritance – Pointers: Address and Pointers. List of Experiments: 1. 2003. USA. “C++ plus Data Structure. STREAMS. Sams Publishing. Disk file I/O with streams. Class templates.K. 2. “ C++. Transformers. Levels of inheritance. “Data Structures and Algorithms in C++”. Stream errors. Robert Lafore. Derived class constructors. Calibration of Ammeter and Voltmeter 2. Public and Private inheritance. Herbert Schildt. INHERITANCE AND POINTERS: Overloading Unary and Binary Operator – Data conversion – Pitfalls of Operator Overloading and Conversion – Inheritance: Derived class and Base class. Error handling in file I/O – Templates and Exception: Function Templates. the student will • Analyze the characteristics of DC and AC Machines. Overriding member functions. The Complete Reference” . 2002. London. 2001.8-15 . Exceptions Text Books 1. TEMPLATES AND EXCEPTIONS: Virtual functions – Friend functions – Static functions – This pointer – Streams and files: Stream classes. New York. Reference Books 1. “Object Oriented Programming in C++”. 2. U. 2003.

Load test on DC shunt motor and DC Series Motor 10.8-16 . Study of Synchro 10.3. Time response of second order system 5. Frequency Response of second order system 4. Speed control of DC shunt motor 11. DC servo motor position controller using VI 11. Open circuit characteristics of DC shunt generator 8. Load test on 3–φ (three phase) squirrel cage induction motor 12EI214 CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of Feedback control • To inculcate the controller design concepts • To introduce the concept of Mathematical Modeling Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design a controller for a practical system • Derive the mathematical model of a system • Analyze the characteristics of systems List of Experiments: 1. Load characteristics of DC shunt generator 9. Measurement using Capacitive Bridges 6. ON/OFF controller in temperature process 7. Open loop and closed loop response of DC motor using VI 3. Stepper Motor control 9. Lead– Lag compensator 6. RC network modelling 2. Measurements using CRO 7. Load test on Single Phase Transformer 12. PID controller in temperature process 8. Measurements using Resistive Bridges 4. Measurements using Inductive Bridges 5. Study of Analog PID Controllers 12EI215 COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Non– linear characteristics of relay 12.

2004 Reference Books 1. “Electronic Communication”. • Appreciate the significance of communication systems in various applications. “Electronic Communication Systems”. McGraw– Hill. Roody and Coolen . New York. 2006. USA.Chand and Company Ltd. PCM – Delta modulation – Differential PCM – Merits and demerits – Comparison of pulse modulation schemes– Digital modulation and demodulation systems: FSK – ASK – PSK – Modem functions Unit IV DATA TRANSMISSION: Twisted pair and coaxial cables – Fiber optics – Sources and detectors – Fiber optic complete system – Error detection and correction –Multiplexing – TDM and FDM Unit V APPLICATIONS: Television Signals – TV receivers – Color TV– Radar concepts– Basic concepts of Satellite communication and Cellular communication Text Books 1. 2..Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce basic concepts of Analog and Digital communication.. “Electronic communication systems”.2008. Unit I ANALOG MODULATION :Need for Modulation – Principle of Amplitude Modulation (AM) – Frequency Modulation (FM) and Phase Modulation (PM) – Modulation index– Signal power – DSBSC – SSBSC– Independent sideband– Vestigial sideband Unit II TRANSMITTERS AND RECEIVERS: AM and FM transmitters and receivers – AM and FM modulators and demodulators – Comparison of AM. PPM. S. John Wiley. New York. 2. “Communication Systems”. 2007. Simon Haykins.. “Principles of Communication Engineering”.8-17 . 2001. FM and PM – Noise –Sources and Types of noise – Effects of noise in AM and FM systems Unit III DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS:PAM. 4. McGraw– Hill. 3. Delhi. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Taub and Schilling “Principles of Communication Systems”.Inc. New Delhi. Wayne Tomasi. PDM. 2008. Kennedy G. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Detect and correct the errors that occur due to noise during transmission. Prentice Hall of India LTD. Anokh Singh. New Delhi. Prentice Hall of India LTD. • To understand the modulation and demodulation circuits.

Wiley Eastern Ltd. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • To understand the working of PLL and 555 timer. 2008.8-18 . 2. Differentiator and other circuits • Build simple applications using 555 timer Unit I OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER: Operational amplifier– Ideal Opamp– Op amp internal circuit – DC characteristics –Bias– Offset –Frequency– Slew rate – AC characteristics– frequency compensation techniques– Non inverting and inverting amplifier – Differential amplifier with active loads– Current sources Unit II OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER AND APPLICATIONS : Inverter – Adder – Subtractor – Integrator – Differentiator – Multiplier – Divider – Comparator –Applications – Logarithmic Amplifier – Current To Voltage Converter – Voltage To Current Converter – Precision Rectifier – Clipper – Clamper – Sample And Hold Circuit Unit III AMPLIFIERS AND FILTERS : Instrumentation amplifier – Isolation amplifier – Buffer amplifier – Use of opamp with capacitive displacement transducer – Charge amplifier – Filters – Low pass – High pass – Band Pass – Band reject filter – First order and second order transformations – State variable filter –Switched capacitor filter – Design of Signal Conditioning Circuits for Strain Gage and Thermistor – Interface with ADC – Design Aspects Unit IV IC VOLTAGE REGULATORS AND MULTIPLIERS: Series op amp regulator– IC voltage regulator – 723 general– purpose regulators – Precision Reference Regulator – Multipliers – Frequency doubling – Phase angle detection Unit V 555 TIMER AND PHASE LOCKED LOOP (PLL): 555 Timers – Astable – Monostable Operation – Phase Locked Loop (PLL):Basic principle – Phase Detector and Comparator – Analog and digital – Voltage Controlled Oscillator – Monolithic PLL – Application of PLL for Frequency Multiplication and Division – Frequency Translation – AM – FM – FSK modulation and demodulation Text Books 1. linear integrated circuits and their Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design Amplifier circuits of various gains • Design Integrator. “Op amps & Linear Integrated Circuits” .2002. RamkantGaykwad.12EI216 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To impart knowledge on the basic concepts of applications in the processing of analog signals. Roy Choudhury and Shail Jain. “Linear integrated circuits” .

2000. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO 8085 :Functional Block Diagram – Registers – ALU– Bus systems – Timing and control signals – Machine cycles– Instruction cycle and timing states – Instruction timing diagrams – Memory interfacing Unit II PROGRAMMING. 3. Coughlin and Driscoll. • To introduce the basics of Assembly Language Programming and Interfacing. Delhi. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Write simple programs in 8085 Microprocessor and 8051 Microcontroller. Denton J. “Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits”. “Course in Electrical and Electronic Measurement & Instrumentation” . • Interface different peripheral devices with the processor. Dailey.pulse measurement. INTERRUPTS AND DMA :Addressing modes– Instruction set – Simple programs in 8085– Interrupt feature – Need for Interrupts Interrupt structure– Multiple Interrupt requests and their handling – Typical programmable interrupt controller– Need for direct memory access – Devices for Handling DMA – Typical DMA Controller features Unit III INTERFACING PERIPHERALS WITH 8085 :Programmable peripheral interface (8255)–– Interfacing ADC0801 A/D Converter –DAC 0800 D/As Converters – Multiplexed seven segments LED display systems – Waveform generators– Stepper motor control Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO 8051 MICROCONTROLLER: Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization– interrupt structures – Timer and counters –Serial Data I/O–Addressing modes – Instruction set. Unit V APPLICATION OF 8051:Simple programs in 8051–Typical applications – Keyboard and Display interfacing. New York. “Operational Amplifier and Liner integrated Circuits. 2005. D/A and A/D conversions Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.Reference Books 1. 12EI217 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICRO CONTROLLERS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To impart an in depth understanding of the Basics of Microprocessors and microcontrollers.DhanpatRai& sons.8-19 . Sawhney A. New Jersey. McGraw Hill.” Prentice Hall of India Pvt.Ltd 2003.K.. 2.

P. Pivoted vane. Turbine meters. “Microprocessors and Interfacing: Programming and Hardware”. Reference Books 1. Electromagnetic flow meter.Godse. 3. Unit I PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Standards – Deadweight Gauges and Manometers – Elastic elements – Dynamic testing of pressure measuring system – High pressure measurement – Low Pressure measurement: Diaphragm gauge. Douglas V. 2. Thermal conductivity gauges. Rotameters. Kenneth J Ayala. 2. Drag force flow meter . 2004.G. Temperature. 2002. Knudsen gauge. density and viscosity measurements.Technical Publication. standards. Microcontroller Hand Book. Ultrasonic flow meters. Installation. • Calibrate the various instruments and use them in various fields.2005. “Microprocessor and Applications”. 12EI218 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Pressure. “Microprocessor – Architecture. Positive Displacement meters. Penram International publishing private limited. Programming and Applications”. A. Obstruction meters. Calibration and Protection Unit II FLOW MEASUREMENT: Introduction – Definitions and units – Flow visualization – Velocity magnitude from Pitot static tube –Velocity direction from Yaw tube. Ionization gauge – Capacitance type Pressure measurement – Piezoelectric Pressure measurement – Application Considerations: Selection. level. Installation.Gaonkar.Godse.P. Servoed sphere – Hot wire/hot film anemometer –Laser Doppler anemometer (LDA) – Gross volume flow rate: Calibration. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply the knowledge of various Measuring Instruments to design a simple Instrumentation system. Range. Tata Mcgraw Hill.Text Books 1.Hall. Mcleod gauge. Ramesh S. Calibration and Protection Unit III TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: Standards – Thermal Expansion Methods– Thermoelectric sensors – Electrical Resistance Sensors – Junction Semiconductor Sensors– Radiation methods: Radiation fundamentals – Automatic Null Balance Radiation Thermometers Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2003. “The 8051 Microcontroller Architecture. flow. New Delhi. 2008. Pune. Programming and Applications with the 8085”. Range.8-20 . INTEL. Vortex – Shedding flow meters – Application Considerations: Selection.

New Delhi. New Delhi. 2. “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”. • Tune controllers for Optimum gain using various techniques. “Fundamentals of Industrial Instrumentationand Process Control”. • To understand the design of various control schemes. “Measurement Systems: Application and Design”.” Butterworth Heinemann. Walt Boyes. Air purge system. • Analyze and decide suitable control schemes for a particular system. Installation. Range. 2003.O. Air bellows. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Derive the Mathematical Model of a physical system. Unit I Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2004.8-21 . Singh S K. Reference Books 1. Range. Float type and displacer lever detectors– Indirect methods: Pressure gauge method. 12EI219 PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the knowledge of modelling a physical process. 2. William C. Tata McGraw– Hill. Pennsylvania. Installation. 2005. Calibration and Protection Unit IV LEVEL MEASUREMENT: Introduction– Direct methods: Hook type level indicator. Installation. Sight glass.– Optical Pyrometers– Two Color Radiation Thermometers– Fiber Optic Radiation Thermometers– Application Considerations: Selection. 3. Radnor. 2003. United States. New York. Doebelin E. Dunn. Calibration and Protection Unit V DENSITY AND VISCOSITY MEASUREMENT: Introduction to density measurement – Magnetic type density measurements – Weight methods of density measurement– Radiation densitometers – Introduction to viscosity measurement– Capillary viscometers– Efflux cup viscometers– Rotational viscometers– Industrial viscometers – Application Considerations: Selection. Liptak B. “Process Measurement and Analysis. McGraw Hill. McGraw– Hill. 2003. “Instrumentation Reference Book.G. Range. Capacitance level indicator and radiation level detector– Laser level sensors– Microwave level switches– Optical level detectors– Ultrasonic level detectors– Eddy current level measurement sensors– Application Considerations: Selection. Calibration and Protection Text Books 1.” Chilton Book Company. • To apply the control system in various processes.

design. Coughanowr D. Reference Books 1. 2008. Damped Oscillation Method – Closed loop response of First and Second order systems with and without valve and measuring element dynamics Unit IV FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS: Pneumatic control valves – Construction details –Types – Plug characteristics – Valve sizing – Selection of control valves – Inherent and installed valve characteristics – Cavitation and flashing in control valves – Valve actuators and positioners Unit V ADVANCED CONTROL SCHEMES: Cascade control – Ratio control – Feed forward control – Split range and selective control – Multivariable process control – Interaction of control loops – Case Studies: Distillation column. Mellichamp.. Temperature and Flow Unit III OPTIMUM CONTROLLER SETTINGS: Controller tuning Methods: Evaluation criteria. 2003. “Process Control Instrumentation Technology. Integral Absolute Error (IAE). Tata McGraw Hill.PROCESS DYNAMICS: Process Control System: Terms and objectives – Piping and Instrumentation diagram – Instrument terms and symbols – Process characteristics: Process equation – Degrees of freedom– Modeling of simple systems – Thermal – Gas – Liquid systems – Self– regulating processes – Interacting and non– interacting processes Unit II BASIC CONTROL ACTIONS: Two position – Multi position – Floating control modes – Continuous Controller Modes: Proportional. 12EI220 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Prentice Hall.8-22 . Integral. Stephanopoulos. PI. Duncan A. Curtis D . 2008. Edgar. McGraw Hill. “Process Dynamics and Control. New Jersey– 2003 3. “Process Control”.” John Willey and Sons. Peter Harriott. New Delhi. Seborg.. Derivative. Singapore. 3. 2006. Process reaction curve method. Wayne Bequette B. Pressure. Integral Squared Error (ISE). New Delhi.R. Dale E. Heat Exchanger and chemical reactor control Text Books 1. “Chemical Process Control”. “Process Systems Analysis and Control”. PID – Integral wind– up and Prevention – Auto/Manual transfer – Response of controllers for different test inputs – Selection of control modes for processes like Level. Thomas F. ”Prentice Hall .Johnson. New Jersey2006. and simulation” Prentice Hall . “Process control: modeling. Singapore. 2. Boiler drum level control. 2. Integral Time Absolute Error (ITAE). Ziegler Nichol’s tuning. PD .

4. Linearization of Thermistor 6. Measurement of Level using Capacitive Transducer 8. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design. Construction and Verification of Counters 5. Parity Bit Generator and Checker. List of Experiments: 1. Calculation of Percentage Error in Pressure Gauge using Dead Weight Tester 5. Design and Implementation of Code Convertor 3. Filter. Design of Cold Junction Compensation circuit. Characteristics of I/P and P/I Converters 12EI221 SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To gain experience in the use of op– amps.8-23 . • Analyze the characteristics of Op– amplifier. List of Experiments: 1. • To inculcate the operation of Instrumentation Circuits. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Handle simple Industrial Instruments. analyze and implement Amplifiers. • Perform Calibration of Instruments. Design of Temperature Transmitter 4. 12.Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of Industrial Instruments. • To learn the usage of digital devices for various applications. Measurement of Viscosity of a solution 10. • Design Instrumentation Circuits. Instrument control 7. Design and Implementation of Encoder and Decoder Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Design of Alarm circuit 3. Design and Implementation of Adder and Subtractor 2. Study of Pressure Transmitter. Filters and Digital circuits. Logic Gates and Flip flops. 11. Measurement of Conductivity and pH of a solution 9. • To strengthen the knowledge of Calibration for Instruments. Calculation of discharge coefficient of orifice plate. 2.

Implementation of Precision Rectifiers 13. DC motor control 11. 7. Serial communication 8. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Write simple Assembly Language programs using 8085 and 8051. Code conversion (BCD to Hexadecimal.DAC. KeyBoard Display Interface Programs using 8051 Microcontrollers 6. Subtraction. • To impart knowledge about embedded C programming in 89C51RD2.8-24 . • To include specialized information needed for Digital Instrumentation. • Interface 8085 and 8051 with ADC. Interfacing ADC 12EI223 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide descriptive information Electronics Measurements. Basic arithmetic operations (addition. Linear Op– Amp Circuits 8. subtraction. Hexadecimal to BCD. multiplication and division) 7. Interfacing stepper motor 12. Design and Testing of Instrumentation Amplifier 10. Square wave generation 9. Multivibrator Using IC555 11. 5. List of Programs: Programs using 8085 Microprocessors 1. 12. Comparator Circuits 9. Simulation using PSPICE and NI – ELVIS 12EI222 MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To impart Programming knowledge based on the 8085 microprocessors and its interfacing. Digital to Analog conversion 10. Generation of square wave using 8085. to be aware of its limitations. stepper motor etc. Frequency Response of 2nd Order Filters. Multiplication and Division) 2. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. ASCIIto Decimal) 4. • To exploit an instrument’s potential. Sorting (Ascending and Descending order) 3.6. Design and Implementation of Multiplexer and Demultiplexer. Basic arithmetic operations (Addition.

New Delhi. Sampling. Frequency divider generator. Kalsi.S.. Digital Instrumentation. period.H. Spectrum analyzer Unit IV DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS : Digital Voltmeters and Multimeters – Simple frequency counter – Digital methods of measuring frequency. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Bar graph displays. time interval. USA..8-25 . McGraw Hill.M. 2007.. Digital Storage Oscilloscopes – Display Devices: LED.H. Tata McGraw Hill. “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer. “Electronics Measurements and Instrumentation”. 1999. Dot matrix displays. Vertical deflection system. total count – Measurement error – Digital Displacement transducer: Incremental and Absolute – Digital tachometer – Digital Capacitance meter Unit V VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION: Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation – Architecture – Presentation and Control – Functional Integration – Programming Requirements – Conventional and Distributed Virtual Instrumentation – Virtual Instruments and Traditional Instruments – Advantages – Evolution of LabVIEW – Creating Virtual Instruments using LabVIEW – Virtual Instrumentation in the Engineering Process Text Books 1. 1995.J. CRT circuits. LCD. and Cage J. Oliver B. Surekha . Block diagram. Cooper W.. Pulse and Square Wave Generator. “Electronics Instrumentation”. Cathode Ray Tube (CRT). Function Generator – Signal Analyzers: Wave Analyzer. Bouwens A. pulse width. Prentice Hall of India. Sweep frequency generator. Reference Books 1.Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Discover applications and solve problems that arise in Various Felds • Correctly interpret the measurement results Unit I ELECTRONIC ANALOG METERS: Introduction – Amplified DC meter – AC voltmeters using rectifiers – True RMS voltmeter – Electronic Multimeter – Component measuring instruments – Q meter – Vector impedance meter– Vector voltmeter – Power meter Unit II OSCILLOSCOPE AND DISPLAY DEVICES: Oscilloscope: Introduction. 2. Harmonic Distortion Analyzer. FM recorder. phase difference.. Sumathi S and P. 3. 1998. 2002. “Electronic Instrumentation and measurement techniques”. Horizontal Deflection system – Special Oscilloscopes: Storage. 2.D. Digital recording Unit III SIGNAL GENERATORS AND ANALYSERS: Signal generator: Sine wave generator. 7 Segment displays. Frequency synthesized signal generator. McGraw Hill Ltd.

. Prentice Hall of India. Bhaskar. 2006. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Concepts of signal processing – Typical applications – Advantages of Digital Signal Processing compared with Analog Processing – Review of Discrete Time LTI Systems – Linear. David A Bell. Venkatramani B. 2. M. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Use DFT and FFT to analyze the spectrum of signals. New Delhi. • To give an in depth knowledge of the concepts of digital filter design. Tata McGraw– Hill. K. 2002. New Delhi. ‘Digital Signal Processors Architecture.3. • Use DSP Processor for practical applications. ‘Digital Signal Processing. • To learn the intricacies involved in designing a DSP chip in hardware. 12EI224 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts involved in discrete time signal processing. Tata McGraw– Hill Publishing CompanyLimited.8-26 .Manolakis. 2000. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Proakis and Dimitris. John G. Algorithms and Applications’. PHI of India Ltd. Chebyshev and Elliptic filters – Design of IIR filters – Impulse invariant method – Bilinear Transform method – Realization of structures of IIR filters Unit IV FINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS: Symmetric and Antisymmetric FIR filters – FIR filter design using window method – frequency sampling method – Realization of structures of FIR filters – Transversal and linear phase structures Unit V INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE DSPs: Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator Unit – Modified Bus Structure and Memory Access in PDSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multiported memory – VLIW Architecture – Pipelining – Special addressing modes – PDSPs with RISC and CISC Processors – Architecture of TMS320C5X – On–chip peripherals Text Books 1.Mitra. New Delhi. • Design Digital FIR and IIR filters for DSP applications. 3. Circular and Sectioned convolutions Unit II DISCRETE FOURIER TRANSFORM:DFT – FFT computations using DIT and DIF Algorithms – Time and frequency response analysis of discrete time systems Unit III INFINITE IMPULSE RESPONSE DIGITAL FILTERS: Review of Classical Analog Filters – Butterworth.Programming and Applications’. New Delhi. “Electronic Instrumentation and measurements”. G. 2001. Sanjit. ‘Digital Signal Processing – A Computer Based Approach’.

General PLC programming procedures .Input/output modules .Reference Books 1.Timer functions .PID functions . 12EI225 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide the fundamentals of Data Acquisition system.PLC Basic Functions . ‘Digital Time Signal Processing’.PLC installation . Oppenheim and Schafer. Jervis.PLC Advanced functions: Alternate programming languages.2004. UK. Reprint. Addition – Wesley Longman Ltd. Analog PLC operation. Skip and MCR functions.Power supplies and isolators . DCS Architecture.Programming on-off inputs/ outputs . Sequencer functions.PLC Advanced intermediate functions: Utilizing digital bits. • To cover the basics of Distributed Control Systems Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Acquire knowledge of data acquisition System • Write simple Programs using ladder diagrams • Use the knowledge of DCS and communication standards in their Projects Unit I REVIEW OF COMPUTERS IN PROCESS CONTROL :Data loggers – Data Acquisition Systems (DAS) – Direct Digital Control (DDC) – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition Systems (SCADA) – sampling considerations – Functional block diagram of computer control systems Unit II PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER(PLC) BASICS: Definition – Overview of PLC systems . • To introduce the concept of PLC and its Programming using Ladder Diagram. Comparison – Local Control unit – Process Interfacing Issues – Redundancy concept .8-27 . Matrix functions .Design of interlocks and alarms using PLC. Data move systems . 2002. ‘Digital Signal Processing – APractical Approach’. Texas Instruments Manual for TMS320C5XProcessor.Counter functions. Networking of PLC .Register basics . Unit IV DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS (DCS): Introduction : DCS Evolution.Communication facilities. Prentice Hall of India. Unit III PLC INTERMEDIATE FUNCTIONS : PLC intermediate functions: Arithmetic functions. Emmanuel C. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Comparison functions.. 2.Troubleshooting and maintenance . Ifeacher and Barrie W. 3.Auxiliary commands and functions .

M. Liptak. Michael P Lukas. 2. 2006. Ronald A Reis. • Compare the different protocols used as Universal standards.W. 2003. Pennsylvania. Canada. New Delhi. Frank D.8-28 . Krishna Kant. “Process software and digital networks.. New Delhi.Principles and Applications”. “Instrument Engineers Hand. Petruzella. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Appreciate the need for network protocols during data transmission and reception.. high level – General purpose computers in DCS Text Books 1. B. 4. New Jersey 2006.Radnor. John. “Computer Control of Process. “Programmable Logic Controllers . Process control and Optimization”. “Computer-Based Industrial Control.449. Unit I INTRODUCTION AND BASIC PRINCIPLES: Protocols – Physical standards – Modern instrumentation – Bits. Curtis D..422. “Programmable Logic Controllers”. 2004 4.” Prentice Hall . high level – Operator Displays – Engineering Interfaces : Low level. B. New Jersey. 2. 2003 Reference Books 1. 3.“ PHI. Webb. 2004. “Distributed Control System”. 12EI226 INDUSTRIAL DATA COMMUNICATION AND NETWORKS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with relevant knowledge about network that allows computers to communicate with each other and share resources and information. 3. Prentice Hall Inc. New York. Bytes and characters – Communication principles – Communication modes – Synchronous and Asynchronous systems – Transmission Characteristics – Data Coding – UART Unit II SERIAL COMMUNICATION STANDARDS: Standards organizations – Serial data communications interface standards – Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – RS232. 1986. CRC press.Unit V INTERFACES IN DCS: Operator interfaces: low level.” CRC press.485 interface standard – Troubleshooting – The 20mA current loop – Serial interface converters – Interface to printers – IEEE 488 – USB Unit III INTRODUCTION TO PROTOCOLS: Flow control Protocols – BSC Protocols – HDLC – SDLC – Data communication for Instrumentation and Control – Individual OSI layers – OSI Analogy –Example Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.423.Florida-2003. “Johnson Process control instrumentation technology. McGraw Hill.G.Chidambaram.G.” Narosa Publishing. Liptak.

Edwin Wright. Study of Level Process Station 3. Obtain mathematical model of a Process Plant 8. Study of field bus protocol Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Tuning of PID controller 9. 12EI227 PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To introduce the practical concepts of digital controllers . 2003. • Analyze the performance of a Process List of Experiments: 1. 2.2006. TMH. Study of interacting system 11. Stallings W.Unit IV INDUSTRIAL PROTOCOLS: Introduction – ASCII based protocols – Modbus Protocols – Allen Bradley Protocol – HART – Field bus Unit V LOCAL AREA NETWORKS: Circuit and packet switching – Network Topologies – LAN Standards – Ethernet – MAC – Token bus – Internetwork connections – NOS Network Architecture and Protocols Text Book 1. • To demonstrate Data Acquisition in VI • To provide knowledge about controller design. Response of P and PI Controller for the given error signal 10. Forouzan“ Data Communication and Networking” . Transfer function of DC servo motor 6. John Park. Study of Pressure Process Station 2. Study of Flow Process Station 4. Behrouz A.SteveMackay. simulation and implementation using Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design and compare Digital Control Algorithms. Cascade control of process 12. “High speed Networks TCP/IP and ATM Design Principles “ PHI .8-29 . Characteristics of Pneumatic control valve 7. Elsevier Publications.“Practical Data Instrumentation and Control”. 2002. Study of Temperature Process Station 5. Communications for Reference Books 1.

Course Outcome: At the end of the course. • To understand the concepts of various processors programming.12EI228 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To verify the concepts in Digital Signal Processing practically using software tools Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Visualize the operations done on signals. • Design and implement Digital filters for real time applications. Simple programs in TMS320c5X kit 12EI229 ADVANCED PROCESSORS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To impart the basic knowledge about the Processors. • To inculcate the understanding about the RISC and CISC Architectures. Signal Spectrum Analysis using Fast Fourier Transform 7. Audio Signal Processing in VI 12. Acquisition and Processing of Bio signals using VI 11.8-30 . • Appreciate the concept of convolution and verify the convolution theorem. Computation of Discrete Fourier Transform(DFT) and Inverse DFT 6. Sampling and Reconstruction 10. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESSOR:Instruction set – Data formats – Instruction formats – Addressing modes – Memory hierarchy – Register file – Cache – Virtual memory – Segmentation – Pipelining – The instruction pipeline – Pipeline hazards – Instruction level parallelism – Reduced instruction set – Computer principles – RISC versus CISC Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. . Computation of Correlation 5. Determination of Response of a system using convolution 4. Design and testing of FIR filter 8. • Compute the DFT and IDFT of sequences. the student will • Use the knowledge of processors in practical applications. Design and testing of IIR filter 9. List of Experiments: 1. Generation and Operation of Discrete Time signals 2. Verification of properties of Discrete Time systems 3.

2000.Pearson Education. “ARM system on chip architecture”. Activation of Buzzer 2. 12EI230 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits:0:0:2 Course Objective: • To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications: Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Processor. Programming and interfacing”. McGraw Hill. James L. Activation of LED Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Daniel Tabak “Advanced Microprocessors”.1995 2. Reference Books 1. • Design and program Embedded circuits. “The Pentium microprocessors”. Generating delay using timer for buzzer 3.8-31 . Steve Furber. List of Experiments: The Following Experiments are conducted on 89C51 Processor 1. Addison Wesley. Barry B. “The Intel Microprocessors Architecture. PHI.Breg..2002 2.Inc .Antonakos.HIGH PERFORMANCE CISC ARCHITECTUREPENTIUM:The software model – functional description – CPU pin description – RISC operation – Bus operation – Superscalar architecture – Pipelining – The instruction and caches – Floating point unit – Protected mode operation – Segmentation – Exception and interrupts – Virtual 8086 model – Interrupts processing instruction types – Addressing modes Unit III HIGH PERFORMANCE RISC ARCHITECTURE:ARM: Introduction to processor design – Abstraction in hardware design – Instruction set design – Processor design trade offs – Reduced instruction set computer – Design for low power consumption – The ARM architecture – The Acorn RISC machine – Architectural inheritance – ARM programmer model – ARM development tools Unit IV ARM ORGANISATION AND IMPLEMENTATION:ARM organization – 3stage pipeline ARM organization – 5stage pipeline ARM organization – ARM instruction execution – ARM implementation – ARM coprocessor interface – Instruction set – The thump instruction set – ARM Processor cores Unit V EMBEDDED ARM APPLICATIONS:The VLSI Ruby II Advanced Communication Processor– The VLSI ISDN Subscriber Processor – The OneC™ VWS22100 GSM chip – The Ericsson – VLSI Bluetooth Baseband Controller Text Books 1..1997.

Activation of LED using Switch 5. Seven segment Display 6. Digital to Analog Converter 8. Process Station Control Using DCS 12. Keypad Scanning 12. Study of Omron PLC 3. Cascade Control Using DCS 12EI232BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4: 0:0 Course Objective: • To give knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Biomedical Instruments. Study of Siemens PLC 2. Stepper motor interfacing 12EI231 LOGIC AND DISTRIBUTED CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits : 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of PLC • To introduce the concepts of SCADA • To gain hands on experience on DCS Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Write simple programs in PLC • Integrate SCADA and PLC and implement projects • Work on a DCS List of Experiments: 1. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Study of Keyence PLC 4. Trends and Alarms 10. PLC SCADA Integration 8.4. SCADA For Mixing Plant 7. Digital Voltmeter 11. Generation of Sawtooth and Triangular waveforms 9. Open Loop and Closed Loop Configuration for DCS 9.8-32 . Fault Diagnosis 11. Real Time Clock 7. SCADA for Bottle filling Plant 6. Simulation of Ladder Diagram Using PICSOFT 5. Sine waveform generation 10.

Anuradha Agencies Publishers.• • To render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. Khandpur. “Biomedical Kumbakonam. Prentice Hall of India.M. Arumugam. 2007. Leakage Current Unit IV CLINICAL LABORATORY INSTRUMENTS: Clinical Flame photometer – Spectrophotometer – Colorimeter – Chromatography– Automated Biochemical analysis system – Blood Gas Analyzer – Blood pH Measurement– Measurement of Blood pCO2– Blood pO2 Measurement– Blood Cell Counters: Types and Methods of cell counting Unit V IMAGING TECHNIQUE ANDTELEMETRY: X– ray – C. Muscular system – Origin of bioelectric signal – Bioelectric signals: ECG. 2. New Delhi. 2003. Single channel and multichannel telemetry system– Multi patient Telemetry – Implantable Telemetry systems Text Books 1. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design Instrumentation circuits for BiomedicalApplications. Cromwell. scan – MRI instrumentation – Ultrasound scanner – Vector cardiograph – Echo cardiograph – Angiography – Telemetry: Wireless telemetry.T. Unit I ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY OF HUMAN BODY: The cell and its electrical activity– Principle physiological system: Cardiovascular System.. New Delhi. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. S. Prentice Hall of India. 2006. To give an introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration. Reference Books 1. EEG. Nervous system. EOG and their characteristics Unit II MEASUREMENT OF PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS: Physiological transducers – Measurement of Blood pressure – Blood flow – Cardiac output measurement – Heart rate – Respiration rate – Measurement of lung volume – Oximeters – Audiometer Unit III THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS AND PATIENT SAFETY: Electro Surgical unit: Short wave and microwave diathermy – Laser surgical unit – Defibrillators – Pacemaker – Heart Lung machine – Dialyser – Anesthesia machine – Ventilators – Nerve stimulators – Total artificial heart (TAH) – Patient Safety: Electric Shock Hazards. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Instrumentation". EMG. R. • Use the knowledge of Biomedical Instruments to Practical Problems. “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”. Respiratory system.8-33 .

2004. 12EI233 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of Embedded Systems and the various techniques used for Embedded Systems with examples. Pearson Education India. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design. Embedded hardware units – Embedded software in a system – Conversion of assembly language into machine codes – Software tools for designing an embedded systems – Examples of an embedded systems – Complex systems design and processors – Design process in Embedded system – Classification of an embedded systems UNIT II PROGRAM MODELING CONCEPTS: Program modeling concepts – Program model – DFG model – State machine programming model – Modelling for multiprocessor systems – UML modeling – High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system – Software programming – Object oriented programming – Embedded programming advantages and disadvantages UNIT III INTERPROCESS COMMUNICATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION: Multiple processes and threads in an application – Tasks – Task states – Task and data – Distinction between function.8-34 . Brown.” John Wiley and sons Inc. Delhi. Netherlands. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply the concepts of Embedded Systems to build Real Time Projects UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: Embedded system. “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”. Carr and John M. ISR and Task – Concept of semaphore – Use of semaphore as event signalling – Use of semaphore as resource key – Shared data – Problem of sharing data – Shared data problem solutions – Priority inversion – Inter process communication – Signal function – Semaphore function – Message queue function – Mailbox function UNIT IV REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS:OS services – process management – Timer function – Event function – Memory management – Device.2. Joseph J. 3. Webster. File and subsystem management – Interrupt routine in RTOS environment – Task scheduling – Cooperative scheduling – Preemptive scheduling model – Petrinet model – Embedded software development process and tools – Host and target machine – Testing on Host machine – Simulators UNITV Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2009. Processor embedded into a system.

Ross.APPLICATIONS: Automatic chocolate vending machine – Smart card – Digital camera – stepper motor control – Temperature control – Embedded system in Automobile Text Book 1.8-35 . Timothy J.. Zurada. New Delhi. TMH 12EI234 NEURAL NETWORKS AND FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide knowledge of Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic Control andtheir application to control systems. Jaico Publishing House.. • Design a Fuzzy Logic Controller for a Real World Application. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Analyze the various Neural Network Models. 2008. “Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems”. Rajkamal Embedded systems: Architecture. Identification and control of dynamical systems – Case studies (Inverted Pendulum. 2006.M. Articulation Control) Text Books 1. Driankov D. 1996. programming and design . Articulation Control) Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy Operations – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzy conditional statements – Fuzzy Rules – Membership Functions – Defuzzification Unit V FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL: Fuzzy logic controllers – Adaptive Fuzzy Systems – Case studies(Inverted Pendulum. Hellendoorn H. • Create an Artificial Neural Network and train it. “An Introduction to Fuzzy Control”. 2. Narosa Publishing House. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Unit I NTRODUCTION: Introduction to biological neuron –Artificial neural networks – Classification of neural networks – Activation functions and their types – Single layer and multilayer neural Networks – Rosenblatt’sPerceptron – Back propagation algorithm Unit II SPECIAL NETWORKS: Hopfield’s networks – Kohonen self– organizing maps – Adaptive resonance theory – Associative Memory – Bi– directional associative memories – BAM structure Unit III NEURAL NETWORKS FOR CONTROL SYSTEMS: Schemes of neuro– control. and Reinfrank M. J. McGraw Hill. ‘Fuzzy Logic with Engineering Applications’. Reference Books 1.

5th Indian reprint.Z plane synthesis Unit V STATE VARIABLE ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS: Introduction . ‘Fundamentals of Neural Networks’.Digital position control system Unit IV DESIGN OF DIGITAL CONTROL ALGORITHMS: Introduction .Basic discrete time signals . Klir.Digital compensator design using root locus plots . G. • To study the stability analysis of digital control system..Implementation of digital controllers .Digital temperature control systems . Prentice Hall of India.2. 12EI235 DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of A/D and D/A conversion. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Use Z transforms to analyze Discrete Systems.Multivariable systems Text Books Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • Design controllers for a digital process.Sampled spectra and aliasing Reconstruction of analog signals .State description of systems with dead time . and Folger. 3. 2002.Sample and hold systems . T.Stability on the z-Plane and the Jury stability criterion .8-36 .Z domain description of sampled continuous time plants . “Fuzzy Sets. Uncertainty and Information”.Principles of discretization Unit III MODELS OF DIGITAL CONTROL DEVICES AND SYSTEMS: Introduction .Principles of signal conversion . Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL CONTROL: Need for digital control – Configuration of the basic digital control scheme .Practical aspects of the choice of sampling rate .Solution of state difference equations .J.Transfer function models Unit II ANALYSIS OF DIGITAL CONTROL: Frequency Response .Tunable PID controllers .Controllability and observability .State description of sampled continuous time plants . • To equip the basic knowledge of digital process control design.Z transform . LauranceFausett.State descriptions of digital processor .Digital compensator design using frequency response plots .Z plane specifications of control system design .Time domain models for discrete time systems . • Test the Stability of Discrete Systems.Z domain description of systems with dead time . Pearson Education. 2004.

2. Bishop. Unit I DISTILLATION COLUMNS: Piping and Instrumentation diagrams – Instrumentation and control in distillation columns: Distillation equipment. Conductivity. New Delhi. 2003. Feed control – Reboiler control – Reflux control – Variable Column feed – Super distillation – Analyzers – Feedforward control Unit II CHEMICAL REACTORS: Instrumentation and control in chemical reactors: Temperature and pressure control in batch reactors – Instrumentation and control in dryers: Batch dryers and Continuous dryers Unit III HEAT EXCHANGERS: Instrumentation and control in heat exchangers: Variables and degrees of freedom – Liquid toliquid heat exchangers – Steam heaters – Condensers – Reboilers and Vaporizers – Use of cascadeand feed forward control Unit IV EVAPORATORS: Instrumentation and control in evaporators: Types of evaporators. Density. “Modern control systems. 2008. New Delhi 2008. Liquid distillate. 12EI236 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PETROCHEMICAL INDUSTRIES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To expose the students to the Instrumentation and control applied in petrochemical industries. New Delhi.8-37 . Tata McGrawHill.1. Variables anddegrees of freedom. Ogata. Richard C. “Discrete Time Control Systems”.” Pearson Educatio inc. Dorf. “Digital control of dynamic systems”. Pearson Education Limited. Differential pressure and Flow Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Measurement and controlof absolute pressure. Course outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Appreciate the significance of Measurement in Petrochemical Industry. Robert H. Measurement and control of column pressure. • Use the Knowledge of Control to design new Control Algorithms. Franklin. Vapour distillate and inerts. “Digital Control and State variable Methods”. 2.2002. New Delhi. J. David Powell. Gopal M. Reference Books 1. Prentice– hall Of India. Gene F.

EFFLUENT AND WATER TREAMENT: Instrumentation and control in Effluent and Water Treatment: Chemical oxidation. Pharmaceutical’.. 2. Petrochemical.M. Chemical Reduction. 12EI237 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN PAPER INDUSTRIES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To expose the students to the Instrumentation applied in Paper industries. Fossil Power. Nuclear Power.”Process control instrumentation technology. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Appreciate the need of instrumentation and control in Paper making. ISBN– 0– 07– 012445– 0. Singapore. Neutralization. • Design a Controller for paper industries.. Glass.8-38 .”Prentice Hall . ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing.Precipitation and Biological control Text Book 1. ‘Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook’. Unit I DESCRIPTION OF THE PROCESS: Raw materials – Pulping process – Chemical Recovery Process – Paper making process – Converting Unit II INSTRUMENTATION: Measurements of Basic Weight – Density – Specific gravity – Flow – Level of liquids and solids– Pressure – Temperature – Consistency – Moisture – PH – Oxidation –Reduction potential – Graphic displays and alarms Unit III CONTROL OPERATIONS:Blow tank controls – Digester liquor feed pump controls – Brown stock water level control – Stock chest level control – Basic weight control – Dry temperature control Unit IV DENSITY AND FLOW CONTROL: Dissolving tank density control – White liquor classifier density control – White liquor flow control – Condensate conductivity control Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 1993. Lipták. Iron and Steel.Johnson. Curtis D . Food. McGraw Hill. Fourthedition. New Jersey2006. Considine D. Paper. Reference Books 1. Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California. Mining and Minerals. Béla G. Chilton Book Co.

Pharmaceutical’. Graphic displays and alarms Unit IV CONTROL SYSTEMS: Blast furnace – Stove combustion control system – Gas and water controls in BOF furnace – Strand Casting Mould Level control – Mould Level sensors – Ingot weight measuring system– Waste water treatment Unit V COMPUTER APPLICATIONS: Model calculation and logging – Rolling Mill Control – Annealing Process Control – Center Utilities Dispatch Computer Text Books 1. Temperature.COMPUTER APPLICATIONS: Computer applications in pulping process control – Liquid level control – Input stock control Text Book 1. Density. ‘Instrumentation in Process Industries’. Petrochemical.Weight. Nuclear Power.G Liptak. Process Control. Flow . Fossil Power. Paper. Iron and Steel. 1994. B. Liptak B. Food. Unit I DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS: Flow diagram and description of the processes – Raw materials preparation – Iron making – Blast furnaces – Stoves– Raw steel making – Basic Oxygen Furnace – Electric Furnace Unit II CASTING OF STEEL: Casting of steel: Primary rolling. Reference Books 1.. Thickness and shape. volume 2. Cold rolling and Finishing Unit III INSTRUMENTATION: Measurement of level. Béla G. G. 12EI238 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL IN IRON AND STEEL INDUSTRIES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide the fundamentals Steel Production and introduce the Instrumentation involved in such Industries. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Pressure. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Use the knowledge of Iron and Steel making Process to suggest better Instrumentation and Control Algorithms. Chilton Book Company. Chilton Book Co. Mining and Minerals. ‘Instrumentation in the Processing Industries: Brewing.8-39 . Instrument Engineers Handbook. Reprint 2003 Original from the University of California. Lipták. Glass.

Optical Method. 12EI239 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide knowledge on the basics of Ultrasonic Instrumentation and its Applications. Unit I ULTRASONIC WAVES: Principles and propagation of various waves – Characterization of ultrasonic transmission – Reflection and Transmission coefficients – Intensity and attenuation of sound beam – Power level – Medium parameters Unit II GENERATION/DETECTION OF ULTRASONIC WAVES: Magnetostrictive and piezoelectric effects – Construction and characteristics – Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method.M. Process / Industrial Instruments and Control Handbook. 1995.Third edition. Electrical Method – Precise Measurement: Pulse– echo Overlap – Cross correlation – Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse– Echo Overlap– Cross correlation– search unit types Unit III CLASSIFICATION OF ULTRASONIC TEST METHODS: Pulse echo – Transit time – Resonance – Direct contact and immersion type – Ultrasonic methods of flaw detection – Flow meters – Density measurement – Viscosity measurement – Level measurement – Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements Unit IV ULTRASONIC APPLICATION: Measuring thickness – Depth – Rail Inspection using Ultrasonic – SONAR – Inspection of Welds and defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials Unit V ULTRASONIC APPLICATIONS IN MEDICAL FIELD: Medical Imaging – Diagnosis and therapy – Acoustical holography Text Books Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Steel Designers Handbook 1)Branko 2)Ron Tinyou 3) ArunSyamGorenc Seventh Edition First Indian Reprint 2006. Considine D. London. Fourth edition. 3. 1993 – ISBN– 0– 07– 012445– 0. CRC press. McGraw Hill.8-40 . Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Use the knowledge of Ultrasonic Instrumentation to implement Practical Applications. 2. Singapore.

” John Wiley and Sons Inc.” CRC Press.Palanichamy. Panels and Layouts Unit II FLIGHT INSTRUMENTATION: Pitot– Static Instruments and Systems – Altimeter – Airspeed indicator – Machmeter – Maximum Safe Speed indicator– Accelerometer Unit III PRIMARY FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS:Gyroscope– Gyroscopic theory – Directional gyro indicator – Artificial horizon – Turn and slip indicator Unit IV MEASUREMENTS IN AIRCRAFT: Measurement of Engine Speed – Measurement of Temperature – Measurement of Pressure – Measurement of Fuel Quantity and Fuel Flow Unit V ENGINE POWER AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTS: Power Indicators – Pressure Indicators – Turbine Temperature Control – Engine Vibration Monitoring and Indicating Instruments Text Book Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.Zabashta. J.Coppens.USA. Florida. P. 2002.F.”Fundamentals and Applications of Ultrasonic Waves. 2. Baldev Raj. Koninklijke Brill.Rajendran. “Fundamentals of Acoustics. James V.Cheeke.2000. 2. “Science and Technology of Ultrasonics”.Alpha Science International. 12EI240 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR AIRCRAFT Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basics of Aircraft and the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems Course Outcome: • To give an introduction about the Aircraft and the Display Equipments • To learn the working of various sensors used in the Flight • To analyze in detail about the Gyroscopic Instruments and Power Plant Instruments Unit I INTRODUCTION: Instrument Elements and Mechanisms – Instrument Displays. Alan B.” VSP. Reference Books 1. “Ultrasonic Diagnostics in Medicine.David N.A.Frey. UK. Sanders. V. YU. 2004. LawrenceE. Bulavin.1.Kinsler.2007.Boston. Austin R.8-41 . L.

M.B. PIN diode. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation". Anuradha Agencies Publishers. 12EI241 OPTOELECTRONICS AND LASER BASED INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers and their applications in the field of Instrumentation. Welding and trimming of materials. E. 2006. the student will • Use Optical fibers for measurement • Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications. Laser Diode – Optical Detectors: Photo diode. APD. Atmospheric effects. Current and Voltage. Pallett. Photo – Thyristor. Photo – Thermistor – Charge coupled devices: Opto – couplers and their application in analogue and digital devices. Velocity. Arumugam.1.J. Flow and Level measurement Unit III CHARACTERISTICS OF LASERS: Laser Rate Equation – Properties – Two. Three and Four level system – Resonator configuration – Q switching and Mode locking – Cavity dumping – Types of Lasers Unit IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS OF LASERS: Lasers for measurement of distance and length. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Unit II OPTICAL FIBRE FUNDAMENTALS:Modes– Types of Optical Fibres – Fibre coupling – Fibre optic sensors for Temperature. Unit I INTRODUCTION:Characteristics of optical radiation – Luminescence –Optical Sources: Light emitting diode. Removal and Vapourization Unit V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic Interferometry and applications – Holography for non – destructive testing – Medical applications of lasers :Laser interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes Text Books 1. Melting. Pitman and sons. Photo – Transistor. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Kumbakonam. Sonic boom. Pollutants. Material processing: Laser heating. Heterojunction diode. Acceleration. 1981. Scribing. Splicing.“ Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications".8-42 . Pressure.

Ghatak A. Reference Books 1. G. New Delhi.2. McGraw Hill. • To familiarize the students with the methods of monitoring different parameters like speed. 1998. 12EI242 POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTATION Credit 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide an overview of different methods of power generation with a particular stress on thermal power generation. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply the knowledge of power plant instrumentation to control the boiler parameters. Pearson Education. • To bring out the various measurements involved in power generation plants. Cambridge University Press. Power factor – Non– electrical parameters:Flow of feed water. Frequency. 1995. Solar and Wind power– Importance of instrumentation in power generation – Thermal power plants – Buildingblocks – Details of boiler process – Piping and Instrumentation diagram of boiler – Cogeneration Unit II MEASUREMENTS IN POWER PLANTS: Electrical measurements: Current. Wilson and Hawkes. John M. Power.8-43 . vibration of turbines and their control. “Opto Electronics –An Introduction”. ‘Optical Fibre Communication’. Thermal. Prentice Hall. and Thiagarajan K. Fuel. 3. 1989. 2006. 3rd Edition. Unit I OVERVIEW OF POWER GENERATION :Brief survey of methods of power generation – Hydro. Voltage. Air and steam with correction factor fortemperature – Steam pressure and Steam temperature – Drum level measurement – Radiationdetector – Smoke density measurement – Dust monitor Unit III ANALYZERS IN POWER PLANTS:Flue gas oxygen analyzer – Analysis of impurities in feed water and steam – Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Chromatography – PH meter – Fuel analyzer – Pollution monitoring instruments Unit IV CONTROL LOOPS IN BOILER: Steam pressure control – Combustion control – Air/Fuel ratio control – Furnace draft control – Drum level control – Main steam and reheat steam temperature control – Superheater control – Attemperator –Deaerator control – Distributed control system in power plants – Interlocks in boiler operation Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Keiser.K. Nuclear. 2. TMH. Senior. Optical Electronics Foundation book . Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice.

Unit I AUTOMOTIVE ELECTRICALS AND ELECTRONICS: Basic Electronics components and their operation in an automobile – Starting Systems – Charging Systems – Ignition Systems – Electronic Fuel Control Unit II ADVANCED VEHICLE CONTROL SYSTEMS: Environmental legislation for pollution – Overview of vehicle electronics systems – Power train system – Chassis subsystem – Comfort and Safety subsystems Unit III EMBEDDED SYSTEM COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS: Introduction to control networking – Communication protocols in embedded systems – SPI. “Power Plant Instrumentation”. Vibration. Reference Book 1. • To provide a thorough understanding of automotive systems and various electronic accessories used in automobile.2011. P. 12EI243 AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the fundamental principles of electronics and to introduce the application of electronics in the modern automobile. Shell temperature monitoring and control – Lubricant oil temperature control Text Book 1. LIN.TURBINE MONITORING AND CONTROL: Speed. K. Krishnaswamy.K Nag. M. Tata McGraw Hill. Ponnibala.8-44 . USB – Vehicle Communication Protocols – Introduction to CAN. MOST. KWP2000 – Details of CAN Unit IV EMBEDDED SYSTEM IN CONTROL OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS: Engine management systems – Gasoline/Diesel Systems – Various Sensors used in System – Vehicle Safety System – Electronic Control of braking and traction – Introduction to control elements and control methodology – Electronic transmission control Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.. PHI Learning Pvt Ltd. • Use Communication protocols to perform advanced monitoring and control. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design instruments for automotive applications. I2C. • To develop ability to understand various latest Communication protocols used in automobiles industries. FLEXRAY. 2001. Power plant Engineering.

T. 2. Denton. Prentice Hall. Elsevier Butterworth– HeinemannPublications. 2. ISBN: 0470519363. 2008. William.John Wiley & Sons. Knowles.M. Unit I POWER SEMICONDUCTOR SWITCHES: SCRs – Series and parallel connections – Driver circuits – Turnon characteristics – Turn off characteristics Unit II AC TO DC CONVERTERS: Natural commutation – Single phase and three phase bridge rectifiers – Semi controlled and fully controlled rectifiers – Dual converters – Inverter operation Unit III DC TO DC CONVERTERS: Voltage – Current – Load commutation – Thyristor choppers – Design of commutation elements– MOSFET/IGBT choppers – AC choppers Unit IV DC TO AC CONVERTERS: Thyristor inverters – McMurrayBedford inverter – Current source inverter – Voltage control – Inverters using devices other than thyristors – Vector control of Induction motors Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.Unit V EMBEDDED SYSTEM IN AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATIONS:Body Electronics – Infotainment systems – Navigation Systems –System level tests – Software Calibration using engine and vehicle dynamometers – Environmental tests for electronic control units Text Books 1. “Automobile Electrical and Electronic System”. 12EI244 POWER ELECTRONICS Credits:4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of power semiconductor devices and their applications. “Automotive Electronic and Computer control Ignition Systems”.1988. “Automotive Electronic System”.D. Reference Books 1.“BOSCH– Automotive Handbook”. 7thEdition.2003.3rd Edition. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Design power semiconductor circuits for switching applications.2004.Elsevier Science.6th Edition.T. • Apply the knowledge of thyristors in practical applications.8-45 . RobertBoschGmbh .

nitrogen oxides. 1995. 2003. SMPS and Drives Text Books 1. 3. “Power Electronics”.AC TO AC CONVERTERS: Single phase and three phase AC voltage controllers – Integral cycle control – Single phase Cyclo– converters – Effect of harmonics and Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI)– Applications in power electronics: UPS. New Delhi. Devices and Applications”. pharmaceutical laboratories. VedamSubramanyam K. Mohan. • Apply the concepts of Analytical Instruments for Environmental Monitoring Unit I COLORIMETRY AND SPECTROPHOTOMETRY: Special methods of analysis – Beer– Lambert law – Colorimeters – UV– Vis spectrophotometers – Single and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR spectrophotometers – Types – Attenuated total reflectance flame photometers – Atomic absorption spectrophotometers – Sources and detectors – FTIR spectrophotometers – Flame emission photometers Unit II CHROMATOGRAPHY: Different techniques – Gas chromatography – Detectors – Liquid chromatographs – Applications – High– pressure liquid chromatographs – Applications Unit III INDUSTRIAL GAS ANALYZERS AND POLLUTION MONITORING INSTRUMENTS: Types of gas analyzers: Oxygen. Thermal conductivity analyzers. H. the student will • Develop instruments for clinical analysis. hydrocarbons. environmental pollution monitoring and control. “Power Electronics”. Undeland and Robbins. Reference Books 1. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. sulphur dioxide estimation – Dust and smoke measurements Unit IV Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. “Power Electronics”. 12EI245 ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with an adequate knowledge of a number of analytical tools which are useful for clinical analysis. McGraw Hill. 2003. 2nd Edition. New Delhi. 2003. 2nd Edition. Joseph Vithayathil. Rashid M. “Power Electronics – Circuits. John Wiley and Sons. 2. NO2 and H2S types.8-46 . New Age International Publishers. IR analyzers. New York. Analysis based on ionization of gases – Air pollution due to carbon monoxide. New York. Prentice Hall.

Singapore. Braun. H. Ewing. Khandpur. Reference Books 1.. EMG . 1992. ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’.. 2. • It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. 3. D. McGraw Hill. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. CBS publishing & distribution. ‘Introduction to Instrumental Analysis’. Dean. EOG and their characteristics and recording Unit III Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. ‘Handbook of Analytical Instruments’. J.. ‘Instrumental Methods of Chemical Analysis’. Willard. • It gives the introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration Course Outcome: At the end of the course. A.. Saunders Publishing. Robert D. D. 2. Merritt. R. M. Holt. 12EI246 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments.PH METERS AND DISSOLVED COMPONENT ANALYZERS: Principle of pH measurement – Glass electrodes – Hydrogen electrodes – Reference electrodes – Selective ion electrodes – Ammonia electrodes – Biosensor – Dissolved oxygen analyzer – Sodium analyzer – Silicon analyzer Unit V RADIO CHEMICAL AND MAGNETIC RESONANCE TECHNIQUES: Nuclear radiations – Detectors – GM counter – Proportional counter – Solid state detectors – Gamma cameras – X– ray spectroscopy – Detectors – Diffractometers– Absorption meters – Detectors – NMR – Basic principles – NMR spectrometer – Applications – Mass spectrometers – Different types – Applications Text Books 1. S. EMG. A. 2006. G. A.. W. and West. Skoog. F... ‘Principles of Instrumental Analysis’. 1987. 1992.8-47 . EEG and EOG – Bioelectric signals: ECG . Ltd. McGraw Hill. the student will • Apply the concepts of Medical Instrumentation to physiological measurements Unit I PHYSIOLOGY OF HUMAN BODY : Cell and its Electrical ctivity– Principle – Physiological system: Cardiovascular– Nervous system– Respiratory system– Vision– Muscular system Unit II ELECTRODES AND BIOELECTRIC SIGNALS: Bioelectrodes– Types of electrodes – Electrodes for ECG. Settle. 1995. this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments.

“Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design. 2. Prentice Hall of India. Prentice Hall of India. 2004. Delhi. Cromwell.8-48 . New Delhi. 3. Laser Diode – Optical detectors :PiN photodiode and Avalanche Photodetectors(APD) Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. S. 2003. scan – MRI instrumentation Text Books 1.MEASUREMENT OF PHYSIOLOGICAL PARAMETERS: Physiological Transducers– Classification of Transducer – Displacement – Position and Motion – Pressure – Photoelectric Transducer –Oximeters – Electromagnetic and Ultrasonic Blood Flowmeter – Blood pressure – Cardiac output Unit IV BIO–CHEMICAL MEASUREMENT: Blood pH – Blood pO2 – Blood pCO2 – Electrophoresis – Colorimeter – Spectro photometer – Clinical flame photometer – Automated Biochemical analyzer– Medical Diagnosis with chemical tests Unit V THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENTS AND IMAGING TECHNIQUE: Defibrillators – Pacemaker – Heart– lung machine – Dialyser – Anesthesia machine – Ventilators – Nerve stimulators – X– ray – C. 2003.T. Carr and John M. Joseph J. 2009. “Medical Instrumentation – Application & Design. Netherlands. Webster. 12EI247 FIBER OPTICS AND LASER INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of Optical Fibers and Lasers and their applications in the field of Instrumentation. Pearson Education India. Myer Kutz. Brown. Khandpur.” McGraw– Hill Publisher. Unit I OPTICAL FIBERS AND THEIR PROPERTIES: Principles of light propagation through a fiber – Different types of fibers and their properties – Optical sources: LED. “Introduction to Biomedical Equipment Technology”. New York. R. New Delhi. Course Outcome: At the end of the course.” John Wiley and sons Inc. 2. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. 2007. the student will • Use Optical fibers for measurement • Apply LASER in Instrumentation and Biomedical applications. “Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements”. Reference Books 1.

the student will • Apply principle of Ultrasonics to Instrumentation Unit I ULTRASONIC WAVES:Principles and propagation of various waves– Characterization of UltrasonicTransmission. Anuradha Agencies Publishers. 2.8-49 . Cambridge University Press. Optical Electronics Foundation book .K. Senior. G. Melting and Trimming of materials – Removal and vaporization Unit V HOLOGRAM AND MEDICAL APPLICATION: Holography – Basic principle – Methods– Holographic Interferometry and applications – Holography for non– destructive testing –Medical applications of lasers :Laser interaction with biomolecules – Photothermal applications – Photochemical applications – Endoscopes Text Books 1. Acceleration. 1995. and Thiagarajan K. Ghatak A. Length. Arumugam.INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF OPTICAL FIBERS: Fiber optic sensors – Fiber optic Instrumentation system – Application in Instrumentation: Measurement of Pressure. ‘Optical Fibre Communication’. Pearson Education. “Fiber Optics and Laser Instrumentation". 12EI248 ULTRASONIC INSTRUMENTATION Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the basics of Ultrasonics. 2006 Reference Books 1. McGraw Hill. Generation of ultrasonic waves: Magnetostrictive and Piezoelectric Effects– Search unit types– Phase array– Construction and Characteristics Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Liquid lasers. Keiser. Solid lasers. 1989 . John M. Kumbakonam. and atmospheric effect – Material processing: Laser heating. its production and applications Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Optical Fiber Communications: Principles And Practice. 2006. Semi conductor lasers Unit IV INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION OF LASERS: Laser for measurement of distance. 2. Welding.M. Velocity. Liquid Level and strain – Fiber optic gyroscope Unit III LASER FUNDAMENTALS:Fundamental characteristics of Lasers – Three level and four level lasers –Properties of laser– Laser modes – Resonator configuration – Q switching and mode locking – Cavity dumping – Types of lasers: Gas lasers. TMH. Temperature.

the student will • Use Aircraft and the Display Equipments. 2004.USA. Narosa Publishing House. Bamber.J. “Physical Principles of Medical Ultrasonics. • Apply the sensors to be used in the Flight.Palanichamy.” John Wiley and Sons Inc.Frey. P. Austin R. Lawrence E. “Fundamentals of Acoustics. G. Hill C. • Analyze Gyroscopic Instruments and Power Plant Instruments.. New Delhi.R. England.Coppens.Rajendran.C. 2. Sanders. Alan B.Kinsler. James V. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Reference Books 1.8-50 . Science and Technology of Ultrasonics– Baldev Raj.R. V.2000.” John Wiley & sons. terHarr. 2004.ULTRASONIC MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUE:Detection of Ultrasonic Waves: Mechanical method– Optical Method– Electrical Method– Precise Measurement: Pulse– Echo Overlap– Cross correlation– Computer Based Automated methods: Pulse– Echo Overlap– Cross correlation– Testing Methods: Pulse Echo– Transit time– Resonance– Direct contact and Immersiontype – Ultrasonic methods of Flaw detection Unit III ULTRASONIC SENSOR:Flow meters– Density measurement– Viscosity measurement– Level measurement– Sensor for Temperature and Pressure measurements– Thickness measurement Unit IV ULTRASONIC APPLICATION: Non– destructive Testing: Inspection of Weldsand defect detection in welds of anisotropic materials– Forgings Castings – Rail Inspection– Concrete Testing– Evaluation of Mechanical Properties: Tensile and yield Strength– Hardness– Fracture toughness– SONAR Unit V ULTRASONIC MEDICAL APPLICATION:MedicalImaging– Diagnosis and therapy– Acoustical holography Text Books 1. 12EI249 AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basics of Aircraft and the Instrumentation involved in Aircraft Systems. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Classification of Aircraft – Instrumentation– Instrument displays – Panels and Layouts Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

12EI250 AUTOMOTIVE INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: To introduce the various meters and Instrumentation used in Automobiles. Direct reading magnetic components– Compasserrors gyro magnetic compass Unit V POWER PLANT INSTRUMENTS:Fuel flow – Fuel quantity measurement. Pitman and sons.B..FLIGHT INSTRUMENTATION: Static and Pitot Pressure Source – Altimeter – Airspeed indicator – Machmeter – Maximum Safespeed indicator– Accelerometer UnitIII GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS: Gyroscopic theory – Directional gyro indicator artificial horizon – Turn and slip indicator Unit IV AIRCRAFT COMPUTER SYSTEMS: Terrestrial magnetism. Aircraft magnetism. • To understand the design and working of Indicating Instruments. E. Exhaust gas Temperature Measurement and Pressure Measurement Text Books 1. Trafficators– Flash System – Oil Pressure Warning System – Engine Overheat Warning System – Air Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. : " Aircraft Instruments – Principles and applications". Unit I AUTOMOBILE PANEL METERS AND SENSOR DESIGN: Ergonomics– Panel Meters– Controllers– Sensor for Fuel Level in Tank – Engine Cooling Water Temperature Sensors Design – Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Design – Speed Sensor – Vehicle Speed Sensor Design – Air Pressure Sensors – Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Unit II INDICATING INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN: Moving Coil Instrument Design – Moving Iron Instruments– Balancing Coil Indicator Design – Ammeter and voltmeter– Odometer and Taximeter Design – Design of Alphanumeric Display for Board Instruments Unit III WARNING AND ALARM INSTRUMENTS: Brake Actuation Warning System.J . Switching and Control Devices. Pallett. 1981.8-51 . • To learn the various Dashboard Amenities. Course Outcome: • To learn the design and construction of panel meters. Warning Instruments.

Unit I INTRODUCTION: Robots introduction – Basic components– Classification—Characteristics– Drives and Control systems – Actuators Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.A. ‘Modern Electric Equipments for Automobiles’. Course Outcome: • To introduce the basic concept of Robots.. • To learn the principle of operation of sensors used in Robotics. Walter. Judge.. Moscow 1989 12EI251 ROBOTICS AND AUTOMATION Credits: 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the Basic concepts of robots. Chapman and Hall. ‘Transducers and Display System’. W. the instrumentation involved.F. Chicago. ‘Automotive Electric Systems’.B. Macmillan Press Ltd. 1971. Walter E. New Delhi..8-52 .Ltd. Billiet and Leslie . 2. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. • To study the Robot motion Analysis. Robot Dynamics and Kinematics and Applications.London.W. 2. AmericanTechnical Society. ‘Electronic Measurements’. Dushin E.S. • To discuss the applications of robots. • To understand the working of End Effectors.F. Goings. 1977. MIR Publishers. 3. Reference Books 1. ‘Basic Metrology and Electrical Measurements’. 1975. London.Pressure Warning System – Speed Warning System – Door Lock Indicators – Gear Neutral Indicator – Horn Design – Permanent Magnet Horn – AirHorn – Music Horns Unit IV DASH BOARD AMENITIES: Car Radio Stereo – Courtesy Lamp – Timepiece – Cigar Lamp – Car Fan – Windshield Wiper – Window Washer – Instrument Wiring System and Electromagnetic Interference Suppression – Wiring Circuits for Instruments – Dash Board Illumination Unit V SWITCHES AND CONTROLS:Horn Switches – Dipper Switches – Pull and Push Switches – Flush Switches– Toggle Switches – Limit Switches– Ignition Key – Ignition Lock – Relay and Solenoid – Non– contact Switches Text Books 1. Sonde.

ISBN– 0– 07– 100534– X.. 12EI252 INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS Credits 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory and Instrumentation. Controller and control element. 2. Mikell P. 1986. Chemical plants– Industrial Automation Text Books 1.8-53 . Ramp function and sine function Unit II CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open and closed loop systems – Servo– mechanisms – Hydraulic and pneumatic controlsystems – Two– way control – Proportional control – Differential control and integral control . Course Outcome: • Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems. • Apply controller principles to typical applications.TRANSDUCERS AND SENSORS: Transducers and Sensors– Tactile sensors– Proximity & Range sensors– Image Processing and Analysis– Image Data reduction– Feature extraction– Object Recognition Unit III END EFFECTORS: End effectors – Types– Mechanical Grippers– Vacuum Cups– Magnetic Grippers– Robot/Endeffector Interface Unit IV ROBOT MOTION ANALYSIS: Robot motion analysis–Kinematics– Transformations– Robot DynamicsConfiguration of Robot controller Homogenous Unit V APPLICATIONS: Industrial Robots –welding painting– Assembly– Remote Controlled Robots for Nuclear. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL: System – Steady state design – Process control – Process control block diagram –Definition of a process. McGraw Hill. Grooveretal. 1980. YoramKoren. Loop – Damped andcyclic response– Feedback control – Transient responses – Laplace transform – Transforms of simple functions – Step function. • Test the stability of a given system. “Robotics for Engineers”. Measurement.Control valve – Construction and working of pneumatically operated valve and spring –Diaphragm actuator Unit III Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.Thermal. Exponential function. “Industrial Robots – Technology Programming &Applications” McGraw Hill Ltd. ISBN– 0– 07– 100442– 4.

Process Control Instrumentation Technology 2003..2006. Coulson &Richardson’s “ Chemical Engineering”.Measurement of composition – Electrical conductivity cell – non– dispersive photometers – pH meter – Gas chromatograph– Massspectrometer Text Books 1. RBA publications.. D. “Process System analysis and control” Mc– Graw Hill International Edition . 12EI253 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL LABORATORY FOR FOOD ENGINEERS Credits: 0: 0:2 Course Objective: • This lab imparts the practical methods for the measurement of temperature. Baskar S. 2. 4. G.I. torque speed.2004.(Chemical and Biochemical reactors and process control) Butherworth – Heinemann. an imprint of Elsevier . Donald R. 2. pressure. Stability – Concept of stability – Definition of stability in a linear system – Stability criterion – Characteristic equation – Routh test for stability Unit IV PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSORS: Pressure measurement – Construction and working of capacitive pressure sensor – Inductive pressure sensor– Strain gauge – Pressure sensor – Diaphragm – Bourdon tube – Differential pressure cell – Temperature sensors – Construction and working of RTD – Thermistors – Thermocouples– Bimetallic strips Unit V LEVEL SENSOR:Simple float systems – Capacitive sensing element– Radioactive methods(nucleonic level sensing) – Ultrasonic level sensor . Second Edition.Measurement of density – Utype densitometer – Buoyancy meter .8-54 . Study of characteristics of LVDT Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. F. Wiley EasternLimited. displacement. A. J. Study of characteristics of Load cell 3. first edition ninth reprint 2002 3. third edition reprint 2003. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. the student will: • Analyse the characteristics of sensors and transducers. • Apply the transducers for various applications List of Experiments: 1. Richardson. Nagrath.J. Nagoorkani. Peacock. CurtisJohnson. M. References Books 1.STABILITY ANALYSIS: Signal flow graph – Mason’s Gain formula – Block diagram reduction... and Gopal. weight. sound.”Instrumentation control system measurements and controls”anuradha agencies publishers. Study of characteristics of Strain Gauge 2.A “Control Systems”. Volume 3. “Control Systems Engineering”.. Coughanowr.

8-55 . Elastic transducers. • Test the stability of a given system. • Apply controller principles to typical applications. Pyrometer.4. Study of characteristics of Thermocouple 6. Strain gauge. Thermistors – Measurement of displacement. Recorders and integrators their working principles .Proportional control . Signal flow graphs . Study of characteristics of Loudspeaker 8.Differential and Integral control Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Unit 1 GENERALIZED MEASUREMENT SYSTEM:General concepts of Mechanical Instrumentation generalized measurement system . Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Study of characteristics of Humidity sensor 12. Bourdon.Ultrasonic flow meter Unit IV CONTROL SYSTEMS: Open and closed systems . Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer 7. the student will • Analyze the transient and frequency response of systems. Study of characteristics of Pressure transducer 10.Classification of instruments as indicators.Servo– mechanisms.Block diagram algebra . Study of characteristics of Viscometer 12EI254 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS Credit 3:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide sound knowledge in the basic concepts of control theory and Instrumentation.hydraulic and pneumatic control systems .Precision and accuracy: Measurement error and calibration Unit II PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: Pressure measurement: Gravitational. Gauge rosettes. Study of Tachogenerator characteristics 11. Thermocouples. Acceleration – vibrometer . Piezo Electric Transducer .Transferfunctions.Two – way control .Force measurement: Scales and torque measurement: Mechanical torsion meter. Measurement of high and low pressure – Temperature measurement: Bimetallic.Hot– Wire anemometer . Study of characteristics of Microphone 9. Electrical torsion meter. Resistance thermometer. Speed. Study of characteristics of RTD 5. Accelerometer Unit III STRAIN AND FLOW MEASUREMENT: Strain gauges types. Pressure cells.Magnetic flowmeter.

. 12EI255 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits: 0: 0: 1 Course Objective: • This lab imparts the practical methods for the measurement of temperature. “Electrical and Electronics Measurements & Instrumentation”. sound.K.’Instrumentation control system measurements and controls ‘anuradha agencies publishers.I. and Gopal. first edition ninth reprint 2002.J. Polar and Bode plots. Collet. Study of characteristics of strain gauge and Load Cell 2.8-56 . C. “Mechanical and Industrial Measurements” Khanna Publishers.D. A. Nagrath. List of Experiments: 1. Study of Tacho – generator characteristics 10. pressure. weight. Nagoorkani. Study of characteristics of LVDT 3. DhanpatRai& Co.2004. 2. Study of characteristics of RTD 4. 4. Routh stability criterion. Baskar S. 2002. Wiley eastern Ltd. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Jain R. Study of characteristics of Pressure transducer 9.. V.. 2000. M. and Hope. ‘Engineering Measurements’ 2nd Edition ELBS.2001. Reference Books 1. Study of characteristics of Thermocouple 5.K. A.Control systems Engineering.Unit V STABILITYANALYSIS:Time response of First Order and Second Order Systems. RBA publications.Study of ON– OFF Temperature Controller Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 3. displacement. Necessary condition for Stability. Study of characteristics of Resistive potentiometer 6. Sawhny. Nyquist plots Text Books 1.. Study of characteristics of Loudspeaker 7. torque speed. Concept of Stability. Study of characteristics of Microphone 8.A “Control Systems”. the student will • Analyse the characteristics of sensors and transducers. 2.

New Delhi. • The ability to solve various types of practical problems in DSP. Frequency sampling method. John . Sanjit . Least square error FIR filter design Unit V MULTI – RATE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING: Mathematical description of change of sampling rate – Interpolation and Decimation – Direct digital domain approach – Decimation by an integer factor – Interpolation by an integer factor – Sampling rate conversion by a rational factor. USA. Classification and properties of systems. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. multistage implementation of multirate system – Application – Phase shifters – Audio sub band coding Text Books 1. Structure realization of FIR filter.K. 2006. Computational advantages of FFT over DFT – Decimation in time FFT algorithm – Decimation – In Frequency FFT algorithm.Proakis.G. Power and energy spectral density – Radix 2FFT. Filter implementation for sampling rate conversion. Time domain characterization of DT system – Convolution – Difference equation Unit II DT SIGNALS IN TRANSFORM DOMAIN: Discrete Fourier Transforms (DFT) and its properties. Direct form FIR structures. Addision Wesley. 2. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.8-57 . Unit I INTRODUCTION: Signals and their origin – Characterization and Classification of continuous time signals and Discrete time signals. Students will have • A good knowledge about the advanced areas in DSP. Z – Transform and its properties – Inverse Z – transform Unit III DESIGN OF IIR FILTERS: Block diagram Representation of digital filter – Basic IIR digital filter structures – Structure Realization – Preliminary consideration in digital filter design – Bilinear transformation Unit IV DESIGN OF FIR FILTERS: Basic FIR Filter Structure. Mitra “Digital Signal Processing A Computer based approach”. FIR Filter design based on windowed Fourier series. Tata McGraw. 2001. Algorithms and Applications”. Window based FIR filter design .12EI301 ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • This course covers the techniques of modern signal processing that are fundamental to a wide variety of application areas. “Digital Signal Processing Principles. Equiripple linear phase FIR filter design. Polyphase filter structures.

12EI302 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4: 0: 0 Course Objective: • To provide the basic concepts of various industrial process measurements and measuring instruments.References Book 1. Addison– Wesley. 2002. Students will have the • Exposure of various industrial process measurements and measuring instruments. Maintenance and calibration of thermometers and thermocouples Unit IV LEVEL MEASUREMENT: Visual techniques – Float operated devices – Displacer devices – Pressure gauge method – Diaphragm box – Air purge system – Differential pressure method – Hydro – Step for boiler drum level measurement – Electrical methods – Conductive sensors – Capacitive sensors – Ultrasonic method – Point level sensors – Solid level measurement Unit V SMART INSTRUMENTATION AND RELIABILITY ENGINEERING: Smart intelligent transducer – Comparison with conventional transducers – Self diagnosis and remote calibration features – Smart transmitter with HART communicator – Reliability Engineering – Definition of reliability – Reliability and the failure rate – Relation between reliability and MTBF – MTTR – Maintainability – Availability – Series and parallel systems Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • Knowledge about smart instruments. • To give an exposure about smart instruments. Unit I PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Pressure standards – Dead weight tester – Different types of manometers– Elastic elements – Electrical methods using strain gauge – High pressure measurement – Vacuum gauges – Mcleod gauge – Thermal conductivity gauges – Ionization gauge – Differential pressure transmitters – Installation and maintenance of pressure gauges Unit II FLOW MEASUREMENT: Positive displacement flow meters – Inferential flow meter – Turbine flow meter –Variable head flow meters – Rotameter – Electromagnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meter – Coriolis mass flow meter – Calibration of flow meters – Installation and maintenance Unit III TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT: Temperature standards – Fixed points – Filled system thermometers – Bimetallic thermometer – Thermocouple – Laws of thermocouple – Cold junction compensation – Measuring circuits – Speed of response – linearization – Resistance thermometer – 3 lead and 4 lead connections – Thermistors – IC temperature sensors – Radiation pyrometer – Optical Pyrometer – Installation.8-58 . Emmanuel C. Course Outcome: At the end of the course.Ifeachor “Digital Signal Processing A Practical Approach”. California.

D.Reprint 2004. ‘Process Measurement and Analysis’. Patranabis. 1999. 2. Reference Books 1. 3rd Edition Chilton book company Radnor. Tata McGraw Hill. Tatamangalam R. Noltingk.I. 1995 ISBN 0 – 7506 – 2255. 12EI303 INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the fundamental concepts of Instrumentation System • To understand the importance of Instrumentation Course Outcome: • Select suitable transducer for a specific instrumentation system • Analyze the characteristics of transducers • Computer based instrumentation for real time applications Unit I INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEM: Introduction – Philosophy of Measurement – The general instrumentation system – Static and Dynamic Characteristics – The overall transfer function – Dynamic response of the sensor – The measurement system as a series of networks Unit II RESISTANCE AND INDUCTANCE TRANSDUCER: Basic principle – Potentiometer – resistance strain gauge– Measurement of torque– Stress measurement on rotating members – semi conductor strain gauges – Contact pressure humidity measurement – Basic principle– Linear variable differential transformer – LVDT equations – RVDT – application of LVDT – LVDT pressure transducer – Synchros – Synchros as position transducer – Induction potentiometer – Variable reluctance accelerometer – Microsyn Unit III CAPACITANCE AND PIEZOELECTRIC TRANSDUCERS: Basic principle – Capacitance displacement transducer – Differential pressure transducer feedback type capacitance proximity pickup – Condenser microphone – Pulse width modulating circuit – Introduction – Material for piezoelectric transducer – Equivalent circuit of a piezoelectric crystal – Piezoelectric Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Doeblin E. 1997. Fifth Edition. 5th edition (September 1. 2000 ISBN 1852332085. ‘Industrial Instrumentation and Control’. Springer Verlag. 5. SinghS. Liptak B. JainR. II Edition Butterworth Heinemann. Second Edition Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. 2003). ‘Industrial Instrumentation Principles and Design’.O.8-59 .E.. Pennsylvania. Ltd. K. ‘Mechanical and Industrial Measurements’.Text Books 1. Measurement Systems: Application and Design. ‘Principles of Industrial Instrumentation’. B. “Instrumentation Reference Book”.. 2. New Delhi.K. 4. 3.. 1996. ISBN 0074623346.. McGraw – Hill Publishing Co. New Delhi. Khanna Publishers..

2004. “Instrument Transducers”. 3. 5. 2003. Reference Books 1. S. 2.Patranabis. Tata Mcgrawhill.S. Allied publishers. 2008 4. Dr. Surekha . “Transducer Engineering”. McGraw Hill. D. Cambridge.O. Institute of Physics Publishing. • To understand various controllers and control algorithms. H K P Neubert. New Delhi. period and time measurements – Digital tachometers – Digital phase meters – Automation in digital instruments – Digital data recording – Digital Transducers Unit V COMPUTER BASED INSTRUMENTATION: Evolution of Virtual Instrumentation – Architecture of Virtual Instrumentation – Virtual Instruments Versus Traditional Instruments – Advantages of VI – PC based Data acquisition system – Interfacing techniques to the IBM PC – Plug– In data acquisition boards – Interface Buses: PCI. Mathivanan “PC– based instrumentation: concepts and practice” PHI. 2007. Jackson R G. Doeblin E. 2009 4. • To analyze complex control schemes. Oxford University Press.coefficients – Mode of deformation – Environmental effects General form of piezoelectric transducers – Unit IV DIGITAL METHODS OF MEASUREMENTS: Digital voltmeters and multimeters – Digital frequency. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Sumathi and P. “Novel Sensors and Sensing”. Bristol and Philadelphia.2000. 3. “Principles of Electronic Instrumentation. PXI. New Delhi. 2008 2.” Practical Data Acquisition for Instrumentation and Control Systems” Elsevier 2003.Steve Mackay. “LabVIEW based Advanced Instrumentation Systems” Springer. “Measurement Systems– Applications and Design”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Students will be able to • Develop mathematical model of a physical process.8-60 . 12EI304 ADVANCED PROCESS CONTROL Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To equip the students with the basic knowledge of Process Modeling.”Second Edition. Kalsi H S.Renganathan.” PHI.New York. “Electronics Instrumentation. • To introduce the concept of Multivariable systems and decoupling. VXI Text Books 1. John Park .2003.

design. Reference Books 1. New York.2008. Singapore. PD. Equal percentage and quick opening valve Unit III CONTROLLER TUNING AND ADVANCED CONTROL STRATEGIES :Optimum controller settings – Tuning of controllers by process reaction curve method – Damped oscillation method – Ziegler Nichol’s tuning – Pole placement method – Feed forward control – Ratio control – Cascade control – Split range control – Averaging control – Inferential control Unit IV DESIGN OF CONTROLLERS FOR MULTIVARIABLE SYSTEMS: Introduction to multivariable system – Evolution of loop interaction – Evolution of relative gains – Single loop and overall stability – Model equations for a binary distillation column – Transfer function matrix – Method of inequalities – Decoupling control – Centralized controller Unit V COMPLEX CONTROL TECHNIQUES: Internal model control – Adaptive control – Model predictive control: Dynamic matrix control – model – Generalized predictive control Text Books 1. New Jersey – 2003.R.. Integral. 2003.. John Wiley and Sons. 2. Integral wind – Up and prevention. Multi – Position. Duncan A. and simulation’ Prentice Hall . “Process Dynamics and Control” . McGraw – Hill Higher Education. Instrument terms and symbols – Regulator and servo control – Classification of variables – Process characteristics: Process equation. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS CONTROL: Process Control System: Terms and objectives. Load disturbance and their effect on processes – Self – Regulating processes – Interacting and non – Interacting processes Unit II CONTROL ACTION AND FINAL CONTROL ELEMENT: Controller modes: Basic control action. Derivative – Composite controller modes: PI. 2006. Mellichamp.’ Process control: modeling. New Delhi. “Process Systems Analysis and Control”. Gas. Prentice Hall. Demonstrate various control algorithms in the real time complex process. 2000. 3.8-61 . Second Edition McGraw Hill NewYork. Liquid systems. Dale E. Smith C. Two position. 4. PID.L and Corripio. Wayne BequetteB. Edgar. 2.• • • Design various controllers. “Principles and Practice of Automatic Process Control”...A. Floating control modes – Continuous controller modes: Proportional. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Thomas F. Auto/Manual transfer. Response of Controllers for different types of test inputs – Selection of control mode for different process with control scheme – Control Valve sizing – Control valve types: Linear. Degrees of freedom. Understand the knowledge of MIMO process and decoupling. Process lag. Seborg. Piping and Instrumentation diagram.B. Coughanowr D. Modeling of simple systems – Thermal. Process Control. 2006. “Chemical Process Control. Marlin. Stephanopoulos G.E. T.Willey India.

Ogata. • To inculcate the different types of digital control algorithm. Vu.2002. Dahlin. Pearson Education. • To introduce polynomial equations approach to control system design. • Will be able to design control system using polynomial equations approach. Optimal Discrete Control Theory The Rational Function Structure Model.8-62 . Library and archives Canada cataloguing in publication. Smith predictor and Internal Model Control algorithm with examples Text Books 1. Students • Will have the knowledge of discrete time Control systems. 2.12EI305 DISCRETE CONTROL SYSTEM Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • To inculcate the concepts of discrete time Control systems. Sigapore. “Discrete – Time Control Systems”.2007. • Will have an exposure in different types of digital control algorithm. Canada. Ky M. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Review of Z Transform – Impulse Sampling and data Hold – Reconstructing original signal from sampled signal – Pulse Transfer function – Mapping between the S plane and Z plane – Stability Analysis in Z domain – Transient and steady state response analysis – modified Z transform Unit II STATE SPACE ANALYSIS: State Space representation of discrete time Signals – Solving discrete time State Space Equations – Pulse Transfer Function Matrix – Discretization of continuous time State Space Equations Unit III POLE PLACEMENT AND OBSERVER DESIGN: Controllability – Observability – Useful Transformations in State Space Analysis and Design – Design Via Pole placement – State observer – Servo Systems Unit IV POLYNOMIAL EQUATIONS APPROACH TO CONTROL SYSTEM DESIGN: Diophantine Equations – Polynomial Equations Approach to Regulator system– Polynomial Equations Approach to Control system Design – Design of Model Matching Control Systems Unit V DIGITAL CONTROL ALGORITHM: Implementation of different digital control algorithms: Digital PID. Deadbeat. Reference Books Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

Introduction to LabVIEW I 2. Speed Control of DC Motor 12EI307 ADVANCED CONTROL SYSTEMS Credits: 3:1:0 Course Objective: • • To Understand the basics of mathematical modeling. David Powell. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Students will have • Knowledge of LabVIEW. Waveform Generation 4. List Of Experiments: 1. Tata McGrawHill. Introduction to LabVIEW II 3. Franklin. • The knowledge on DAQ Cards. 8. • Ability to analyze real world signals using LabVIEW. New Delhi. Tank Level Control 12. Digital Control and State variable Methods. 2. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Second Edition. Network Interface 7.1. 2003. Pearson Education Limited – 2002. 12EI306 VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW.J. Gene F. To study the stability analysis of linear and non linear systems. Stepper Motor Control 9. Analysis of Filter Using NI-ELVIS 10. Gopal M.8-63 . Thermocouple Interface. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. • To introduce the concept Data Acquisition Using LabVIEW. Embedded Implementation Of Digital Filter Using SPEEDY33 11. Analog Input/Output Interface 6. Frequency Measurement 5. Students will be able to • Apply the modeling concepts. “Digital control of dynamic systems”.

Prentice Hall Inc. Constructing phase portraits – Limit cycle – Describing function analysis Unit V ROBUST PID CONTROL: Introduction to robust control: PID Tuning– Modifications of PID control scheme – Two Degrees of Freedom Control – Design consideration of Robust Control Text Books 1. 4. Tata McGrawHill.8-64 . Jean – Jacques E. Slotine. Oxford University Press. 2001. New Jersey 2009.. Prentice Hall Inc. Pearson Education.M. “Nonlinear system analysis”. Ogata K. ‘Systems and Control’. Weiping Li. Singular points.. 2. Vidyasagar . 2. Unit I MODELING OF DYNAMIC SYSTEMS: Definition of System– Mathematical modeling – State space representation of system – Centrifugal Governor – Ground vehicle – Permanent Magnet stepper motor – Inverted Pendulum Unit II ANALYSIS OF MATHEMATICAL MODELS: State space method– Phase plane – Isoclines – Numerical methods – Taylor Series – Euler’s method – Predictor Corrector method – RungeKutta method – Principle of Linearization of Differential Equation Unit III STATE SPACE ANALYSIS: Reachability and controllability – Observability and constructability – Companion forms – Controller / Observer form – State feed – back control – State estimator – Full order and reduced order Estimator – Combined controller estimator compensator Unit IV STABILITY OF NONLINEAR SYSTEM: Stability of Nonlinear system – Lyapunov stability theorems – Lyapunov function for nonlinear system – Krasovskii’s method – Variable gradient method – Phase plane analysis. 3. Digital Control and State variable Methods.• Do stability analysis of linear and non linear systems. “Applied nonlinear control”. Rao. Singiresu S. Stanislaw Zak. 2003. New Jersey. 2004. “Modern Control Engineering”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. New Delhi. Gopal M. New Jersey 2002. New Jersey. Upper Saddle River. 12EI308 SOFT COMPUTING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of intelligent controllers and its applications in Control. Reference Books 1. “Applied Numerical Methods” Prentice Hall. 2003.

Zimmerman H. uncertainty and Information’. New Delhi – 2003. back propagation – Learning and training – Hopfield network Unit II NEURAL NETWORKS FOR CONTROL APPLICATIONS: Neural network for non – linear systems – Schemes of neuro control – System identification forward model and inverse model – Indirect learning neural network control applications – Case studies Unit III INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy operation – Fuzzy arithmetic – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzy relational equations – Fuzzy measure – Fuzzy functions – approximate reasoning – Fuzzy propositions – Fuzzyquantifiers – If then rules Unit IV FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL : Structure of fuzzy logic controller – Fuzzification models – data base – Rule base –Inference engine defuzzification module – Non – Linear fuzzy control – PID like FLC – Sliding mode FLC – Sugeno FLC – Adaptive fuzzy control – Fuzzy control applications – Case studies Unit V GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ITS APPLICATIONS: Fundamentals of genetic algorithm: Evolutionary computation – Search space –Encoding – Reproduction – Elements of genetic algorithm – Genetic modeling – Comparison of GA and traditional search methods – Genetic Algorithm in scientific models and theoretical foundations – Applications of Genetic based machine learning – Genetic Algorithm and parallel processors – Composite laminates – Constraint optimization – Multilevel optimization – Case studies Text Books 1. ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’. Adaptation and neural network's learning rules – Types of neural networks – Single layer.A. feedback networks. Ltd.S and G.8-65 . 2.. Hellendroon.Course Outcome: At the end of the course. multiple layer – Feed forward. Fuzzy Logic and Genetic algorithms.J. Prentice Hall of India. &Folger T. Synthesis and Applications’. Driankov.1993. 3.1994. ‘Introduction to Fuzzy Control’. Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms. Rajasekaran. Jacek M Zurada. ‘Neural Networks. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models – Learning. Narosa publishers. Prentice Hallof India Pvt. 2. ‘Fuzzy sets. Students • Will have understanding of Basic Neural Network.A VijayalakshmiPai. ‘Fuzzy set theory –and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic Publishers. Jaico Publishing House. • Will know how to use Soft Computing to solve realworld problems mainly pertaining to Control system applications. Klir G. Reference Books 1.J. 1999. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

Kernel services Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • Understand the real time models. John. R.1994. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’. B. OS tasks. LANGUAGE AND OPERATING SYSTEMS: Real time languages – Real time kernel.8-66 . Unit I SYSTEM DESIGN: Definitions – Classifications and brief overview of micro – Controllers microprocessors and DSPs – Embedded processor architectural definitions – Typical application scenario of embedded systems Unit II INTERFACE ISSUES RELATED TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS:A/D. Langari. Ltd. 5. Melanie Mitchell. Task scheduling. Task states. 6. ‘An introduction to Genetic Algorithm’. 12EI309 REAL TIME AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of Embedded Systems and the various techniques used for Embedded Systems with real time examples . Memory requirements and control.S. languages and operating systems. Prentice – Hall of India. ‘Fuzzy control synthesis and analysis’. Filev. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Edition: 2004. Clocking communication and synchronization.New Delhi.FarinWah S. Prentice – Hall of India Pvt. Interrupt processing.. • Analyze real time examples. D/A converters – Interfacing to External Devices – Switches – LED/LCD Displays – Relays – Dc Motor – Stepper Motor Unit III TECHNIQUES FOR EMBEDDED SYSTEMS: State Machine and state Tables in embedded design – Event based. Students will be able to • Understand the basics of embedded systems and the interface issues related to it • Learn the different techniques on embedded systems. Process based and Graph based models – Petrinet Models – Simulation and Emulation of embedded systems – High level language descriptions of S/W for embedded system – Java based embedded system design Unit IV REAL TIME MODELS. Control blocks. 4. D. Kosko.

• Be equipped with dynamic optimization: the Calculus of Variations. Tata McGrawHill . “Embedded Systems Architecture”. Pontryagin's Minimum Principle. Programming and Design”. 2005. Reference Books 1. Elsevier. Tony Givargis. 2. 2006.8-67 . • The purpose of this course is to give students background in dynamic optimization: the Calculus of Variations. 2. Palgrave. Students will • Have the basic knowledge of optimal control and its applications . Tammy Noergaard. RajKamal. Tim Wilhurst. and Bellman's Dynamic Programming. Pontryagin's Minimum Principle. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Problem formulation – Mathematical model – Physical constraints – Performance measure – Optimal control problem – Form of optimal control – Performance measures for optimal control problem – Selection of performance measure Unit II DYNAMIC PROGRAMMING: Optimal control law – Principle of optimality – An optimal control system – A recurrence relation of dynamic programming – Computational procedure – Characteristics of dynamic programming solution – Hamilton – Jacobi – Bellman equation – Continuous linear regulator problems Unit III CALCULUS OF VARIATIONS: Functions and Functional – Maxima and minima of function– Variation of functional – Extremal of functional – Euler Lagrange equation Unit IV Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. “Embedded Systems Design”. and Bellman's Dynamic Programming. 2004. 2008. “Embedded Systems Architecture. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Second Edition. Wiley India.MICRO C/OS – II REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM: Study of Micro C/OS – II RTOS – RTOS System Level Functions – Task Service Functions – Time Delay Functions – Memory Allocation Related Functions – Semaphore Related Functions – Mailbox Related Functions – Queue Related Functions Text Books 1. “An Introduction to the Design of Small Scale Embedded Systems. 12EI310 OPTIMAL CONTROL THEORY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide an introductory account of the theory of optimal control and its applications . Frank Vahid.

Kirk. 12EI311 INDUSTRIAL COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the System Interconnection and protocols. Students will be able to • Identify the protocol.8-68 . New Jersey. • To discuss the types of cables used for transmission. Prentice – Hall networks series. 2004. • Choose the require protocol and the communication modes for the given system. GopalM. Unit II DATA COMMUNICATION STANDARDS: Standards organizations – Serial data communications interface standards – Balanced and unbalanced transmission lines – EIA232 interface standard – Troubleshooting serial data communication circuits – Test equipment – Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. bytes and characters – Communication principles – Communication modes – Asynchronous systems – Synchronous systems – Error detection – Transmission characteristics – Data coding – The universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) – The high speed UART (16550). Bell mount MA. 2. Singiresu S. Publishers New Delhi – 2004. • To discuss the operation and applications of the Protocols used in Industries . Rao “Engineering Optimization: Theory and Practice” New Age International (P) Ltd.’Dynamic Programming and Optimal Control’ Vol –1 Athena Scientific. Bertsekas. 2. Optimal Control Theory: An Introduction. • Select a suitable cable for the transmission . Unit I OVERVIEW & BASIC PRINCIPLES: Open systems interconnection ( OSI ) model – Protocols – Physical standard – Smart Instrumentation systems – Bits. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. 2009. 2000.. Tata McGraw – Hill Companies New Delhi.VARIATIONAL APPROACH TO OPTIMAL CONTROL PROBLEMS: Necessary conditions for optimal control – Linear regulator problems – Linear tracking problems – Pontryagin’s minimum principle and state inequality constraints Unit V MINIMUM TIME PROBLEMS: Minimum control effort problems – Singular intervals in optimal control problems – Numerical determination of optimal trajectories – Two point boundary value problems – Methods of steepest descent – Variation of extremals – Quasilinearization – Gradient projection algorithm Text books 1. Dimitri P. “Digital Control and State Variable Methods”. Donald E. Reference Books 1. • To introduce the concept of communication protocols and give an overview of Data Communication Standards.

Course Outcome: At the end of the course. 2002. Architecture. “Computer Networks”. profileC– Modbus protocol – HART Protocol: Physical layer – Data link layer – Application layer – Foundation fieldbus – Use of fieldbuses in industrial plants Text books 1.8-69 . • To inculcate the various controller design. control and correction – Copper – Based cables – Twisted pair cables – Coaxial cables – Fiber – Optic cables – Definition of noise – Frequency analysis of noise – Sources of electrical noise – Electrical coupling of noise –Shielding – Good shielding performance ratios – Cable ducting or raceways – Cable spacing – Earthing and grounding requirements – Suppression technique – Filtering Unit IV MODEM AND MULTIPLEXER: Modes of operation – Synchronous or asynchronous – Interchange circuits – Flow control – Distortion – Modulation techniques – Components of a modem – Types of modem – Radio modems – Error detection/correction – Data compression techniques – Modem standards – Troubleshooting a system using modems – Multiplexing concepts – Terminal multiplexers – Statistical multiplexers Unit V INDUSTRIAL PROTOCOL: PROFIBUS: Basics. “Practical Data Communication for Instrumentation and Control”.S.Ethernet – Ethernet Protocol operation – Ethernet hardware requirements – The RS485 interface standard – Troubleshooting and testing with RS485 – The 20 mA current loop – Serial interface converters – Interface to serial printers – Parallel data communications interface standards – General purpose interface bus (GPIB) or IEEE488 or I EC625 – The universal serial bus (USB) Unit III CABLING. ELECTRICAL NOISE AND ERROR DETECTION: Origin of errors – Factors affecting signal propagation – Types of error detection. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Steve Mackay. William A Shay. John Park and Edwin Wright. 2. Prentice – Hall of India. Reference Books 1. USA. TanenbaumA. Hyderabad. 2002. “Understanding Data Communications and networks”. • To give an exposure about Programmable Logic Controller. Students will be able to • Measure various process measurements using the appropriate instruments. Communication model. Fourth Edition. 2003. USA. 12EI312 INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL LABORATORY Credits:0:0:2 Course Objective: • To demonstrate the various process Measurements. • Design control algorithms for different control loops. Newnes Elsevier. Pacific Grove.

Complex Control techniques Using MatLab. 9. 12. • Learn about the Serial communication protocol related to Embedded systems. Digital to Analog Converter 8. Activation of Buzzer 2.Study of Current to Pressure Converter. Simulink ToolBox – Internal Model Control. 5. • Discuss the basics of embedded hardware and the interface issues related to it. List of Experiments: 1. 6. • To understand the concepts of Embedded programming. Generating delay using timer for buzzer 3. Real Time Clock 7. Sine waveform generation 10. b. PID Controller. Control System Analysis Using MatLab. Stepper motor interfacing 12EI314 ROBUST CONTROL Credits: 4:0:0 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 8. 7. Control of Temperature Process Using LabVIEW. 12EI313 EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To impart the basic knowledge about Embedded systems.Calibration of Pressure Gauge Using Dead Weight Tester. Seven segment Display 6. Digital Voltmeter 11. Students will be able to • Write programs in an IDE and download it to the Embedded hardware. Generation of Sawtooth and Triangular waveforms 9. • To learn about the Embedded Processors with Real World applications. 2. a. Study of Pressure to Current Converter. Programmable Logic Controllers.• Write ladder logic in Programmable Logic Controller for Control purpose. Activation of LED 4. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Measurement of Viscosity using RedWood Viscometer. c. Control of Flow Process Station Using LabVIEW.8-70 . a. Keypad Scanning 12. Study of Pneumatic Control Valve. 10.Measurement of pH and Conductivity. 3. Control of Pressure Process Station Using LabVIEW.Calibration of Pressure Gauge Using U – Tube Manometer. b. List of Experiments 1. a. 11. Activation of LED using Switch 5. Control of Level Process Station Using LabVIEW. 4.

“Multivariable Feedback Control: Analysis and Design”. Skogestad and Postlethwaite. Structured Singular Values Unit III H – INFINITY DESIGN: Mixed Sensitivity H – Infinity Optimization– 2 degree of freedom H – Infinity design – H – Infinity suboptimal solutions – Discrete time cases Unit IV H – INFINITY LOOP SHAPING DESIGN PROCEDURE: Robust Stabilization against normalised Co – Prime Factor Perturbations – Loop Shaping Design Procedure – Discrete time case – Mixed Optimization Design Method with LSDP – µAnalysis and Synthesis: Consideration of Robust performance. and Andrey V Savkin. Springer. “Robust Control with MATLAB”. Students • Will have an exposure about Robust Control. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Gu D W. Performance Consideration. 2. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.Course Objective: • • • To inculcate the concepts of Robust Control. To train the students in Hinfinity design and H infinity Loop shaping procedure .8-71 . 2005. Konstantinov M M. • Can model Unstructured Systems. Valery A Ugrinovskii. Petkov. Ian R Petersen. “Robust control design using H – infinity methodUncertain Models and Robust Control”. References Books 1. John – Wiley & Sons Inc. µ K Iteration method Unit V LOWER ORDER CONTROLLERS: Absolute – Error – Approximation Methods– Reduction via Fractional Factors – Relative – Error Approximation Methods – Frequency Weighted Approximation Methods Text Books 1. 2005. • Will have exposure in Hinfinity design and Hinfinity Loop shaping procedure . Springer Verlag – London Ltd – 2000. µsynthesis – DK Iteration method. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Uncertainty and control an overview – Uncertain and approximate model – categories of uncertainty – Control System Representation – System Stabilities – Co prime Factorization and stabilizing controllers – Signals and system norms: Vector norms and signal norms – System norms Unit II MODELING OF UNSTRUCTURED SYSTEMS: Unstructured Uncertainties – Parametric Uncertainty – Linear fractional transformations – Structured Uncertainties – Robust Design Specifications: Small gain theorem and Robust Stabilization.. To introduce Modeling of Unstructured Systems.

Fenglin. Students • Will have an exposure Probability Theory and Random Process. Wiley India Private Ltd. Konstantinov M.. Monson H Hayes. To introduce estimation problems in Instrumentation and control .2.. Petkov. “Subspace Methods for System Identification” . Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2007. Third Edition– 2001. 12EI315 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • To inculcate the concepts of Probability Theory and Random Process.Springer. To inculcate system identification concepts. Unit I Probability Theory – Random Variables – Function of Random Variable – Joint Density – Mean and Variance – Random Vectors Random Processes – Random Processes and Linear Systems Unit II Linear Signal Models – Linear Mean Square Error Estimation – Auto Correlation and Power Spectrum Estimation – Z – Transform Revisited Eigen Vectors/Values Unit III The Concept of Innovation – Least Squares Estimation Optimal IIR Filters – Introduction to Adaptive Filters – State Estimation – Kalman Filter – Model and Derivation Unit IV Kalman Filter – Derivation – Estimator Properties – The time – Invariant Kalman Filter – Kalman Filter – Case Study – System identification Introductory Concepts – Linear Regression – Recursive Least Squares Unit V Variants of LSE – Least Square Estimation– Model Order Selection Residual Tests – Practical Issues in Identification – Estimation Problems in Instrumentation and Control Text Books 1. • Will be able to do estimation problems in Instrumentation and control . 2002. Tohru Katayama. David Stirzaker “Probability and random processes” Oxford University Press. 2005. Verlag London Ltd. “Statistical Digital Signal Processing and Modeling”. • Will have the knowledge of system identification concepts. 3. “Robust control design an Optimal approach”. Geoffrey Grimmett.8-72 . Course Outcome: At the end of the course. John Wiley & sons England. 2.

. 2001. Astrom.8-73 . Course Outcome: At the end of the course. 2006. “Adaptive Control” Pearson Education Asia. References Books 1.4. RikPintelon. BiornWittenmark. 12EI316 PROCESS MODELLING AND SIMULATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • To inculcate the concepts of Process Modelling. 2. • will be able to use grey box models and Empirical Model building. H (infinity) and non linear approaches. • will have the exposure of lumped and distributed parameter models. 3. Konstantinov M M. 2001. ”Optimal State Estimation: Kalman. 2006. Springer. To inculcate lumped and distributed parameter models. John Wiley & Sons Inc. GainlucaZito. Konstantinov M M. Gu D W. Karl J. Petkov. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MODELLING – A systematic approach to model building – Classification of models – Conservation principles – Thermodynamic principles of process systems Unit II DEVELOPMENT OF STEADY STATE MODELS: Lumped parameter systems– Dynamic models: Lumped parameter systems – Distributed parameter systems Unit III DEVELOPMENT OF GREY BOX MODELS: Empirical model building – Statistical model calibration and validation– Population balance models Unit IV SOLUTION STRATEGIES FOR LUMPED PARAMETER MODELS – Stiff differential equations – Solution methods for initial value and boundary value problems – Euler’s method – RK method – finite difference methods – Solving the problems using MATLAB Unit V Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Loan D Landau. Verlag London Ltd. Identification and implementation”. Petkov. Empirical model building. Dan Simon. IEEE press New York. Students • will have the exposure of Process Modelling. GainlucaZito. “System Identification A Frequency Domain Approach”. “Digital Control Systems Design. Gu D W. Second Edition. To introduce grey box models.

“Applied Numerical Methods for Engineers and Scientists”Prentice Hall. and simulation”. Elliptic and hyperbolic partial differential equations – Finite element and finite volume methods Text Books 1.. NJ. Pearson Education Inc. Reference Book 1. 2001. 2. To introduce Auto tuning and Gain Scheduling. • Will have an exposure about the practical issues in Adaptive control Implementation. “Process Modelling and Model Analysis”. Rao. Bounded output Stability – Applications to Adaptive control – Output feedback – Relations between MRAC and STR – Nonlinear Systems Unit III AUTO TUNING: Introduction– PID Control Auto tuning techniques – Transient Response methods: Ziegler – Nichols Step response method – Characterization of step response – Method based on relay feedback: Ziegler – Nichols closed loop method – Method of Describing function – Relay oscillations Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. T. To inculcate the practical issues in Adaptive control Implementation.SOLUTION STRATEGIES FOR DISTRIBUTED PARAMETER MODELS: Solving parabolic. To train the students in Model Reference Adaptive System Design. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Students • Will understand the need of Adaptive Control. “Process control: modeling. • Can able to do Gain Scheduling. Cameron. Upper Saddle River. 12EI317 ADAPTIVE CONTROL Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • • • • To inculcate the need of Adaptive Control. Academic Press. Wayne Bequette B. Singiresu S. 2001. • Will be able to design Model Reference Adaptive System. 2003. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Linear Feedback– Effect of Process variations: Non – Linear Actuators – Flow and speed variation – Variations in Disturbance Characteristics – Adaptive schemes – The Adaptive control Problem – Applications Unit II MODEL REFERENCE ADAPTIVE SYSTEMS :Introduction – MIT Rule – Determination of the Adaptation Gain – Lyapunov Theory – Design of MRAC using Lyapunov Theory – Bounded input. M. design. Hangos K.8-74 . and I.

2006. Gang Tao. Second Edition. “Adaptive Control design and Analysis”. 2001. BarisFidan. “Adaptive Control” Pearson Education Asia. • To study the development activities of real time system using UML. • To study the requirements. Astrom. 12EI318 EMBEDDED SYSTEM SOFTWARE DESIGN Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To study the software designing used in embedded systems. New Jersey. Reference Book 1. and behaviour of real time systems.8-75 . structure. BiornWittenmark. John Wiley & Sons. 2. Petrosloannou. Course Outcome: • To study the object oriented analysis and design for real time systems. Library of Congress CataloginginPublication Data. Karl J. “Adaptive Control Tutorial “.2003. • To study the Object Structure and Behavior analysis.Unit IV GAIN SCHEDULING: Introduction – The principle– Design of gain scheduling Controllers – nonlinear Transformations – Applications of Gain scheduling: Ship steering – PH Control – Combustion control – Fuel Air control in car Engine – Flight control systems Unit V PRACTICAL ISSUES AND IMPLEMENTATION: Introduction – Controller Implementation – Controller Design – Solving the Diophantine equation – Estimator Implementation – Square Root Algorithms – Interaction of Estimation and control – prototype algorithms – Operational issues Text Books 1. • To study the architectural design Unit I REAL TIME SYSTEMS AND OBJECTS: Introduction to real time system – Dealing with time – Model based development – Development of ROPES process – Advantages of objects – Object orientation with UML – Objects – Attributes – Behavior – Messaging – Concurrency – classes – Relations among classes and objects – UML Diagrams and notation Unit II REQUIREMENTS ANALYSIS OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS: Use cases – Actors – Requirements – Use case relations – Using use cases – Filling out the details of the use case – sequence diagram – Message properties – Capturing time and timeliness – Statecharts and use cases – Identifying use cases Unit III ANALYSIS:DEFINING OBJECT STRUCTURE: Key Strategies for Object – Identification – Underline the Noun Strategy – Identify the Casual Objects – Identify Services (Passive Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

• Students can be able to design the microcontroller for their projects. Second Edition.8-76 . Second Edition: Developing Efficient Objects for Embedded Systems (The Addison – Wesley Object Technology Series)”. 2 edition . Peter Coad. 3. Identify Control Elements– Identify object association – Class diagrams Unit IV ANALYSIS: DEFINING OBJECT BEHAVIOR: Object Behavior – Defining object state behavior – UML state charts – Basic state charts – The role of scenarios in the definition of behavior – Timing Diagrams – Sequence Diagrams – Event hierarchies – Defining operations – Types of operations – Strategies for defining operations Unit V ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN: Overview of design – Architectural design – physical architectural issues – Software architectural issues – Representing physical architecture in UML – Architectural patterns – Master – Slave pattern – Microkernel pattern – Proxy pattern – Broker pattern – Concurrency design – Representing Threads – System task diagram – Concurrent state diagrams – Identifying threads Text Book 1. “ Object Oriented Analysis. “Object Oriented Systems Analysis And Design Using Uml. Phillip A Laplante . First Indian Reprint 2001. 2.Addison – Wesley. Simon Bennett . Ray Farmer. • Students will have the knowledge of several different processors are employed in order to illustrate architecture differences and to show common characteristics. Bruce Powel Douglas. Third Edition Second Reprint. 2000 Reference Books 1. Course Outcome: • Students will have an ability to program microcontrollers for embedded applications. 12EI319 ADVANCED MICRO CONTROLLERS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn recent trends in advanced microcontroller applications. Steve Mcrobb. Unit I MICROCONTROLLER: Introduction – Architecture of microcontrollers – Types – Examples – Selection applications – Microcontroller resources – Bus width – Program and data memory – Parallelports– On chip ADC &DAC – Reset – Watchdog timer – Real – Time clock Unit II Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. “Real – Time UML. Edward Yourdon.Contributors) – Identify Real – World Items – Identify Physical Devices – Identify Key Concepts – Identify Transactions – Identify Persistent Information – Identify Visual Elements. “Real Time Systems Design And Analysis.

8-77 . Pearson Education. New Delhi. Interfacing and System Design”. prentice Hall of India. • To understand the theory of Image Morphology. 2006. • To learn the Image enhancement techniques.B. USA. 12EI320 DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING TECHNIQUES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the fundamentals of digital image processing techniques. John. 2000. USA. Kenneth Ayala . Mohammad Ali Mazide. 2. 2004. Pearson Education.Peatman.Mckinlay. Raj Kamal – “Microcontrollers – Architecture. Thomson Delmar Learning . New Jersey.”The 8051 Microcontroller”.” ARM system–on–chip architecture” Addison Wesley. Unit I DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS: Fundamental steps in Digital Image processing – Components of an Image Processing Systems – Light and the Electromagnetic Spectrum – Examples of fields that use Digital Image Processing – Visual Perception – Image sensing and Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2005. Course Outcome: • To understand the basic concept of image processing. RolinD. Hyderabad. SteaveFurber.Intel 8051: Architecture of 8051 – Memory Organization – Counters and timers – USART – interrupts – Peripherals and interfacing – Digital and analog interfacing methods – Addressing modes – Instruction set – Programming examples Unit III 8096/80196 FAMILY: Architecture of 8096 – Addressing Modes – Instruction set – Memory map in Intel 80196family MCU system – I/O ports – Programmable timers – Interrupts Unit IV HIGH PERFORMANCE RISC ARCHITECTURE: Introduction to 16/32 bit processor – ARM architecture – The ARM instruction set – The thumb instruction set – Programmers model – Operating Mode Selection. Segmentation. “ The 8051 micro controller and embedded systems using assembly and C”. • To analyze the methods of image Representation. Registers Unit V PIC MICRO CONTROLLER: CPU Architecture – Instruction set – Interrupts – Timers – Memory – I/O port expansion –I2C bus for peripheral chip access – A/D converter – UART Text Books 1. Reference Books: 1. Janice GillispicMazidi. “Design with PIC Micro Controller”. 2003. 2. Description and Recognition. 3. Programming.

Woods “Digital Image Processing” Third Edition. 12EI321 ADVANCED PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL PROCESSOR Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The course is aimed at providing the advanced programmable processors to meet range of practical applications. W. Reference Book 1. String Matching. Course Outcome: • The students will know the in depth knowledge in programmable processors and its applications. 2002. Text Book 1. 2007. Pratt. Fourier Descriptors. Structural and Spectral Approaches – Relational Descriptors Unit V OBJECT RECOGNITION: Patterns and Pattern Classes – Matching – Recognition based on Decision – Theoretic Methods: Optimum Statistical Classifiers – Structural Methods: Matching Shape Numbers. Gonzalez. illustrated. Syntactic Recognition of Trees. John Wiley & Sons. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Statistical Moments – Regional Descriptors: Topological Descriptors – Texture: Statistical. revised Published by Prentice Hall. 9780131687288. 3rd ed. New York.8-78 ..Acquisition – Image sampling and Quantization – Imaging Geometry – Basic relationships between pixels Unit II IMAGE ENHANCEMENT IN SPATIAL AND FREQUENCY DOMAIN: Basic Gray Level Transformations – Histogram Processing – Arithmetic and Logic Operations – Smoothing Spatial filters – Sharpening Spatial filters – Introduction to Frequency and the Frequency Domain – Smoothing Frequency Domain Filters – Sharpening Frequency filters Unit III IMAGE MORPHOLOGY AND SEGMENTATION: Dilation and Erosion – Opening and Closing – Hit or Miss Transformation – Basic Morphological Algorithms – Detection of discontinuities – Edge linking and Boundary detection – Threshold – Region based Segmentation – Use of Motion in Segmentation Unit IV IMAGE REPRESENTATION AND DESCRIPTION: Representation Approaches – Boundary Descriptors: Shape Numbers.K “Digital Image Processing. Rafael C. Syntactic Recognition of Strings. ISBN 013168728X. Richard E.

“Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDLDesign”. MACD instructions – FIR filter implementation Unit V DSP WITH FPGA: FPGA Technology pros and cons behind FPGA and programmable signal processors. Spinger. FIR filter. Convolution using MAC. “Digital Signal Processor”. Venkataramani B & M. “ Application Specific Integrated Circuits”. Causality and stability of discrete time systems – Z Transform – Advantages of Digital Signal Processing – DSP in the sample and transform domain – Fast Fourier Transform – Digital Filters – Multi – rate Signal Processing Unit II INTRODUCTION TO PROGRAMMABLE DSP: Multiplier and Multiplier Accumulator – Modified Bus structures and Memory Access schemes in P – DSPs – Multiple Access Memory – Multi – ported Memory – VLIW Architecture–Pipelining –Special Addressing Modes in P – DSPs – On – Chip Peripherals Unit III ARCHITECTURE OF TMS320C5X: Introduction – Bus Structure – Central Arithmetic Logic Unit – Auxiliary Register ALU – Index Register – Auxiliary Register Compare Register – Block Move Address Register – Block Repeat Registers – Parallel Logic Unit – Memory – Mapped Registers – Program controller – Some Flags in the status Registers – On Chip Memory – On Chip Peripherals Unit IV TMS320C5X ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE INSTRUCTIONS AND INSTRUCTION PIPELININGIN C5X: Assembly Language Syntax – Addressing Modes – Load / Store Instructions – Addition/Subtraction Instructions – Move Instructions – Multiplication Instructions – The NORM Instruction – Program Control Instruction – Peripheral Control – Pipeline Structure – Pipeline operation – Normal pipeline operation. Reference Books 1. 2003. 12EI322 DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN Credits: 4:0:0 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. New York. Meyer U – Baese “Digital Signal Processing with Field Programmable GateArrays”. Unit I OVERVIEW OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING AND APPLICATIONS: Signals and their Origin – Convolution and Inverse Filtering – Sampling theorem and discrete time system – Linearity. Shift invariance. 3. 2003. Michael John Sabastian Smith. Stephen Brown.USA.• The students can apply object oriented techniques and FPGA codings to the problem of extending a larger software system to implement digital signal processing techniques.8-79 . Implementation of basic MAC Unit.Pearson Education. McGraw – Hill Higher Education. TMH. ZvonkoVranesic.Bhaskar. FPGA structure.2005. New Delhi – 2005. 2. New Delhi. IIR filter in FPGA Text Book 1.

Course Objective: • To provide an in depth knowledge of the design of digital circuits and the use of Hardware Description Language in digital system design. Students can be able to write the program in VHDL & Verilog code.8-80 . 2006. “Fundamentals of Logic design” Jaico Publishing HouseMumbai. Roth Jr. Reference Books 1. Unit I PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES: Basic concepts – Design of combination and sequential circuits using PLD’s – Programming techniques – Programmable read only memory (PROMs) – Programmable Logic Array (PLA) – Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – Design of state machines using ASM – ASM chart – ASM realization Unit II FPGA AND CPLD: Types of ASICs – Semi custom and full custom IC design – Design Flow – Type of FPGA– Xilinx XC3000 Series – Xilinx XC4000 Series – Logic Cell Array (LCA) – Configurable Logic Blocks (CLB) Input/output Blocks (I/OB) – Programmable Interconnects – CPLD – Altera Max 7000 Series Unit III SYNCHRONOUS SEQUENTIAL NETWORKS: Structure and operation of clocked synchronous sequential networks (CSSN) – Analysis of CSSN – Modeling CSSN – State assignment – Realization using PLD – Static and Dynamic Hazards – Detecting hazards – Eliminating hazards – Essential hazards Unit IV INTRODUCTION TO VHDL: Basic concepts – Identifiers – Data operators – Data types – data objects –Behavioral modeling – Data flow modeling – Structural modeling – Subprograms and over loading – Packages and libraries Unit V Introduction to Verilog: Typical design flow – Basic concepts –Data types – Data operators – modules and ports –Gate level modeling – Data flow modeling – Behavioral modeling – Timing and delays examples Text Books 1. Stephen Brown and Zvonk Vranesic “Fundamentals of Digital Logic with VHDL Deisgn” Tata McGraw Hill. Pearson Publication. USA. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Students will have the knowledge of FPGA architecture. 2004. Course Outcome: • • • • Students will be able to design different programmable logic devices. 2. “Verilog HDL”. New Delhi 2002. Samir Palnitkar. Charles H. Students will be able to design the combinational & sequential logic circuits in FPGA.

Parag K Lala. Implementation of Multiplexer &Demultiplexer using Spartan 2E Fpga Kit. simulate. Implementation of ADC using Spartan3E FPGA kit. Implementation of Logic gates using Spartan 2E FPGA Kit. • Students able to analyze the results of logic and timing simulations and to use these simulation results to debug digital systems.2 ISE tool for designing and implementing digital systems on FGPA.. 11. 2. Pearson Publication. 4. Half Subtractor. (b)Realization of Encoder. Hyderabad. 7. Implementation of DAC using Spartan3E FPGA kit. The system consists of an integrated set of tools that allows one to capture designs. USA. “Verilog HDL”. “A VHDL Synthesis Primer”. 2006. Full Subtractor. • Students will have the knowledge through hands – on experimentation the Xilinx tools for FPGA design as well as the basics of VHDL to design. (a)Implementation Of Multitasking In ARM7 Development Board. 2004. 3. New Delhi. • Students able to design combinational and sequential digital systems. M. "Application Specific Integrated Circuits”. implement and test them.Smith.S . Decoder. 2006. (a)Realization of Flip flops and counters. Implementation Of DC Motor In ARM7 Development Board.8-81 . (b)Mini Project 12EI324 COMPUTER ARCHITECTURE Credits: 4:0:0 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 6. BS Publications. Hyderabad. LED Activation Using ARM7 Development Board. The lab exercises will make use of the Xilinx 9. Implementation of DC Motor using vertex II pro. Addison –WesleyLongman Inc. Bhaskar. “Digital System design using PLD” BS Publications. 9. 3.2003 Samir Palnitkar. 12EI323 ADVANCED EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To illustrate concepts discussed in the syllabus and to give the students the opportunity to build and test the digital systems. Course Outcome: • Students will have knowledge about the concepts and methods of digital system design techniques. List of Experiments : 1. Implementation of IO Module using Spartan 2E FPGA Kit. Full adder. J. 4. (b)Realization of S – RAM.J. (a)Realization of Half adder. 5.2. 8. simulate and implement the digital systems. 10. Implementation of LCD using Spartan3E FPGA kit. 5.

Third Edition. William Stallings. To study the storage devices. To understand the Hardware versus software speculation mechanisms. Morgan Kaufmann. “Computer Architecture: A Quantitative Approach”.Patterson.Course Objective: • To expose the fundamental concepts of computer architecture. Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF COMPUTER DESIGN: Review of fundamentals of CPU. “ Computer Organization and Architecture”. Memory and IO – Performance evaluation – Instruction set principles –Design issues – Example Architectures Unit II INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM: Pipelining and handling hazards – Dynamic Scheduling – Dynamic hardware prediction – Multiple issue – Hardware based speculation – Limitations of ILP – Case studies Unit III INSTRUCTION LEVEL PARALLELISM WITH SOFTWARE APPROACHES: Compiler techniques for exposing ILP – Static branch prediction – VLIW & EPIC – Advanced compilers upport – Hardware support for exposing parallelism – Hardware versus software speculation mechanisms – IA 64 and tanium processor Unit IV MEMORY AND I/O: Cache performance – Reducing cache miss penalty and miss rate – Reducing hit time – Main memory and performance – Memory technology – Types of storage devices – Buses – RAID – Reliability. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.8-82 . Prentice Hall of India. John L. Availability and dependability – I/O performance measures – Designing an I/O system Unit V MULTIPROCESSORS AND THREAD LEVEL PARALLELISM: Symmetric and distributed shared memory architectures – Performance issues – Synchronization –Models of memory consistency – Multithreading Text Book 1. 2006.Hennessey and David A. To study the pipelining and scheduling. Reference Books 1. Course Outcome: • • • • • To know the basics of computer designing. To analyze the different memory architectures. 6 Edition Fourth Indian Reprint 2005.

Location management. Terence Fountain. Dynamic host configuration protocol. Peter Kacsuk. Mobile TCP. 3. Handover. DECT. 12EI325 MOBILE COMMUNICATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To study the Mobile communication.11. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Infrastructure and ad hoc networks. CDMA – Comparison Unit II TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS: Telecommunication Systems: GSM. Reference model. Kai Hwang " Advanced Computer Architecture ". Functions. Raj Kamal. Radio access layer. • To analyze the different mobile communication layers. Fast retransmission/fast recovery. • To study the Telecommunication Systems. Modulation. TMH Edition 2001 Thirteenth Reprint 2006. Addressing. 4. First Reprint 2007. DezsoSima. Nicholas Carter. Advanced Computer Architectures Eighth Indian Reprint2005.HYPERLAN. Cellular Systems Medium Access Control: Motivation. TETRA.8-83 . Course Outcome: • To study the basics of transmission. Quality of service. IEEE 802. Signals. WATM services. Snooping TCP. Access point control protocol Mobile network layer: Mobile IP. SDMA. UMTS and IMT – 2000Satellite Systems: Basics – Routing – Localization – Handover Unit III BROADCAST SYSTEMS: Broadcast Systems: Cyclic repetition of data – Digital audio broadcasting. • To study the applications of Mobile communication.2. TDMA. Ad – hoc networks Unit V MOBILE TRANSPORT LAYER: Mobile transport layer: Traditional TCP. Signal Propagation. Digital video Broadcasting Wireless LAN: Infrared vs radio transmission. FDMA. Working group. Indirect TCP. ”Computer Architecture” Indian Special Edition 2006. Multiplexing. Spread Spectrum. Bluetooth Unit IV WIRELESS ATM: Wireless ATM: Motivation. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Introduction – Wireless Transmission: Frequencies for radio transmission. • To study the Broadcast Systems. Antennas. Selective retransmission.

• To study different security techniques.8-84 .1Architecture – Wireless Application Environment 1. 12EI326 MOBILE COMPUTING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To study the computing techniques of Mobile communication. Course Outcome: • To study the Pervasive Computing techniques. World Wide Web. Mobile Communications. Wireless application protocol Text Book 1.Transaction oriented TCP Support for mobility: File systems. JohnWiley and Sons. Pearson Education. 2004. Second Edition.ISBN 81 – 297 – 0350 – 5. Jochen Schiller. Reference Book 1. Second Edition. 2001.0 Architecture – I Mode – Voice – Voice Technology Trends – Voice On The Web –Web Services – Architecture – WSDL – UDDI – Soap – WSRP– Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • To study the Smart Sensor applications. Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Introduction – Pervasive Computing – Principles – Pervasive Information Technology – Information Access Devices – Handheld Computers – Palm OS – Based Devices – Windows CE – Based Handheld Computers – EPOC Based Handheld Computers – Phones – Cellular Phones – Data Transmission Capabilities – Smart Phones – Screen Phones Unit II SMART IDENTIFICATION: Smart Identification – Smart Cards – Smart Labels – Smart Tokens – Embedded Controls – Smart Sensors and Actuators –Smart Appliances – Appliances and Home Networking – Automotive Computing– Entertainment Systems – Television Systems – Game Consoles Unit III JAVA: Java – Characteristics – Libraries –Java Editions – Micro Editions – Personal Java & Embedded Java – Development Tool For Java – Operating Systems – Windows CE –Palm OS – Symbian OS – Java Card –Client Middleware – Programming APIS – Smart Card Programming – Messaging Components – Database Components Unit IV COMPUTER NETWORKING :Connecting The World – Internet Protocols And Formats – Http – Html – Xml –Mobile Internet The WAP 1. • To study application of JAVA in Mobile Computing.1 – WAP 2. Yi – Bing Lin and ImrichChlamtac. • To study different protocols.

Mobile Communication. JohnWiley and SonsInc. Pearson Education. Mobile Computing. and antenna theory for practical applications. Principles of Mobile Computing. Unit I TELEMETRY PRINCIPLES: The basic system – Classification – Non electrical and electrical telemetry – Local transmitters and converters – Frequency telemetering – Power line carrier communication. ISBN 81 – 7808 – 170 – 9.Nicklous and Thomas Stober. Tata McGraw – Hill Publishing CompanyLimited 2005. Martin S. ISBN 0 – 07 – 058807 – 4. Roopa R Yavagal. modem protocols. 2001. UweHansmann. Time Division multiplexed Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Wireless and Mobile Network Architecture. 2000. 2. Bits and symbols – Time function pulse – modulation codes –Intersymbol Interference – Error rate and probability of error Unit II FREQUENCY AND TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEXED SYSTEM: Frequency division multiplexed system: IRIG standards – FM and PM circuits. its transmission principles with discussion on modulations and associated circuits.8-85 . • Understand the key characteristics of frequency and time division multiplexing together with their relative benefits and drawbacks. Yi – Bing Lin and ImrichChlamtac. ISBN 81 – 8120 – 073 – 3. multiplexing. Course Outcome: • Analyze signals. 2. Asoke K Talukder. ISBN 0 – 471 – 39492 – 0.. • Understand the use of fiber optics in communication. Reference Books 1. 12EI327 TELEMETRY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • The aim of this course is to understand the principles of telemetry. Springer International Edition. LotharMerk. 2003.Connectivity – Wireless Wan – Short Range Wireless Communication – Home Networks – Universal Plug And Play Unit V DATA SECURITY: Security – Information Security – Security techniques and algorithms – Security Protocols – Public Key Infrastructure – Trust – Security Models – Security frameworks for Mobile Environment – Services – Home services – Travel services – Business Services – Consumer Services Text Books 1. Jochen Schiller. PLL. Second Edition. Signals – Theorems – Exponential Fourier series – Amplitude and frequency modulations – Phase modulation.

2003. Pipelining and parallel processing for low power Unit II RETIMING. 2. McGraw Hill. “Principles of Communication”. Doeblin E. 2007. Taub and Schilling.8-86 . 12EI328 VLSI SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course objective: • To introduce the basic approaches and methodologies implementation of signal processing systems in FPGA.D. Properties of unfolding. Patranabis D. Parallel processing. FOLDING AND UNFOLDING : Retiming – Definitions and properties.system: TDM – PAM . Loop bound and iteration bound – Longest path Matrix algorithm. Measurement Systems – Applications and Design. Retiming techniques. Pipelining and parallel processing– Pipelining of FIR digital filters. New Delhi 2008. Reference Books 1. “Telemetry Principles”.TDM – PCM system. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO DSP SYSTEMS: Introduction To DSP Systems – Typical DSP algorithms. Course outcome: • The students will design various algorithms for DSP applications in FPGA. Digital multiplexer – PCM Reception – Differential PCM Unit III MODEMS AND TRANSMISSION LINES: Modems – Quadrature amplitude modulation – Modem protocol – Transmitters and Receivers techniques – RF transmission lines – Microwave lines – Wave guide components – Micro strip lines – Digital transmission system in Satellite Telemetry Unit IV FIBRE OPTICAL TELEMETRY: Optical Fibre Cable – Dispersion – Losses – Connectors and Splices – Sources and Detectors – Transmitter and Receiver Circuits – Coherent Optical Fibre Communication Systems – Wavelength Division Multiplexing Unit V INTERNET BASED TELEMETERING: Data Acquisition System – Microprocessor – Based DAS – Remote Control – Networking – BLANs – Internet based Telemetering – Wireless LANs – Random Access System – Principles of Telephony Text Book 1. Tata McGraw Hill. Data flow graph representations. New York. Sample Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Tata McGraw Hill. New Delhi. Third Edition. Unfolding– An algorithm for Unfolding.

Parallel carry – Ripple array multipliers. Pearson education Pvt Ltd. Pipelined adaptive digital filters. VLSI Digital Signal Processing systems. Iterated Convolution– Cyclic Convolution Unit IV FILTERS : Parallel FIR filters. Course Outcome: • Students will be able to work on basic Linux Programming. Design and implementation. KeshabK. Relaxed look – ahead. Look – Ahead pipelining in first – Order IIR filters. • Students will be capable to develop embedded Linux program. Unit I FUNDAMENTALS OF OPERATING SYSTEMS: Overview of operating systems – Process and threads – Processes and Programs –Programmer view of processes – OS View of processes – Threads – Scheduling – Non – preemptive and preemptive scheduling – Real Time Scheduling – Process Synchronization – Semaphores – Message Passing – Mailboxes – Deadlocks – Synchronization and scheduling in multiprocessor Operating Systems Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Gary Yeap. Design of Lyon‘s bit – Serial multipliers using Horner‘s rule. • Students will be able to program in real – time systems with memory management. Folding– Folding transformation– Register minimizing techniques– Register minimization in folded architectures Unit III CONVOLUTION: Fast convolution – Cook – Toom algorithm. References Books 1. “Modern VLSI Design – system on chip”. Pipelined and parallel recursive filters– Inefficient/efficient single channel interleaving. Look – Ahead pipelining with power of two decomposition parallel processing of IIR filters. CSD representation. CSD multiplication using Horner‘s rule for precision Improvement Text Book 1. Wayne Wolf. Kluwer Academic Publishers. Modified Cook – Took algorithm– Winograd Algorithm. Inter Science. Parallel carry – save multiplier.Parhi.8-87 . Combined pipelining and parallel processing of IIR filters. Pipelined LMS adaptive filter Unit V BIT – LEVEL ARITHMETIC ARCHITECTURES: Bit – Level Arithmetic Architectures – parallel multipliers with sign extension.period reduction and parallel processing application. Wiley. 4x4 bit Baugh – Wooley carry – Save multiplication tabular form and implementation. Practical Low Power Digital VLSI Design. reprint 2008. bit – Serial FIR filter. reprint 2009. 12EI329 EMBEDDED LINUX Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To expose the students to the fundamentals of embedded Linux programming. 2004. 2. New Delhi.

2001. KarimYaghmour. Dhananjay M.Unit II LINUX FUNDAMENTALS: Introduction to Linux – Basic Linux commands and concepts – Logging in – Shells – Basic text editing – Advanced shells and shell scripting – Linux File System – Linux programming – Processes and threads in Linux – Inter process communication – Devices– Linux System calls Unit III INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED LINUX: Embedded Linux – Introduction – Advantages – Embedded Linux Distributions – Architecture – Linux kernel architecture – User space – linux startup sequence – GNU cross platform Tool chain Unit IV BOARD SUPPORT PACKAGE AND EMBEDDED STORAGE: Inclusion of BSP in kernel build procedure – The boot loader Interface – Memory Map –Interrupt Management – PCI Subsystem – Timers – UART – Power Management –Embedded Storage – Flash Map – Memory Technology Device (MTD) – MTD Architecture – MTD Driver for NOR Flash – The Flash Mapping drivers – MTD Block and character devices – Mtdutils package – Embedded File Systems – Optimizing storage space – Turning kernel memory Unit V EMBEDDED DRIVERS AND APPLICATION PORTING: Linux serial driver – Ethernet driver – I2C subsystem – USB gadgets – Watchdog timer –Kernel Modules – Application porting roadmap – Programming with pthreads – Operting System Porting Layer – Kernel API Driver – Case studies – RT Linux – uClinux Text Books 1. TataMcgraw – Hill.8-88 . 2002. 2003. Matt Welsh. 2005. U. London.Amol Lad . 2. Jeffrey Oldham and Alex Samuel “Advanced Linux Programming” New Riders. O’Reilly. 2. Reference Books 1. “Building Embedded Linux Systems”. “Running Linux”.K. UK. USA. SriramNeelakandan. Raghavan P . “Embedded Linux System Designand Development”. 12EI330 MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • With widespread use and requirements of medical instruments. 2006. Dhamdhere. Mark Mitchell. this course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments. Matthias KalleDalheimer. 3. O'Reilly. “Operating Systems A concept based Approach”. Auerbach Publications. New Delhi. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.

Webster. Anesthesia equipment. John G. Phonocardiogram Text Book 1. Nerve stimulator. CT. Pulse oximetry. Nuclear imaging Unit V SPECIALIZED THERAPEUTIC AND DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT: Cardiac pacemakers.• • It attempts to render a broad and modern account of biomedical instruments. “Biomedical Instrumentation and measurement”. Clinical laboratory instrumentation. EMG– Electrode theory – Bipolar and Unipolar electrode – Surface electrode – Electrode impedance – Equivalent circuit for extra cellular electrodes – Micro electrodes Unit II COMPUTER BASED MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION: Computerised versions of ECG. Unit I BIOPOTENTIALS AND THEIR MEASUREMENTS: Cell and its structure – Resting potentials – Action potentials – Bioelectric potentials – Measurement of potentials and their recording – Basic principles of ECG. Tata McGraw – Hill. Prentice hall of India. John Wiley and sons. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. It gives the introductory idea about human physiology system which is very important with respect to design consideration. Electro surgery. Hemodialysis. Bispectral Index EEG for depth of anesthesia monitoring Unit III OPERATION THEATRE EQUIPMENT AND CRITICAL CARE INSTRUMENTATION: Patient monitors. New Delhi. Khandpur R. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students • Will have knowledge about the principle of operation and design of biomedical instruments and specific applications of biomedical engineering. Suction apparatus. ICU ventilators. 2009. EEG. 2. Operating microscopes. Audiometer. Infusion pumps and syringe pumps. 2007. New York. Leslie Cromwell.8-89 . Reference Books 1. Heart lung machines. Defibrillators. Tread Mill Test ECG – Foetal monitor. “Medical Instrumentation Application and Design”. EMG. Bio – telemetry Unit IV MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES:X rays – Scanning techniques – Ultrasound scanner – Color Doppler system. 2003. MRI scanning techniques – Coronary angiogram.S. Motorized operation table. Event monitors. EEG. New Delhi. Cardiac arrthymias and its monitoring through Hotler monitor.

Collapsible vessels. Telemetering capsules.3. identify the key design criteria and suggest and an appropriate biosensor approach which is most likely to meet those design criteria. Pressure measurements in small vessels. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students will • Evaluate a sensor based on standard performance criteria and appropriateness for an application.2003. Standard Handbook of Biomedical Engineering & Design – Myer Kutz. • Given a specific biosensor application. McGraw – Hill Publisher. An overview of the current state of the art to enable continuation into advanced biosensor work and design. Microcontact printing. Screen printing. • Compare the relative advantages and disadvantages of the major approaches to biosensor design. • Communicate the most relevant challenges facing the biosensor research field and given a particular challenge suggest a reasonable approach to finding a solution to the challenge. Interstitial spaces – Differential pressure measurement – Indirect pressure measurement – Cuff design – Detection of korotkoff sounds – Oscillometric method – Doppler Ultrasound – Instantaneous arterial pressure – Internal pressure measurement by reaction forces Unit II MOTION AND FORCE MEASUREMENT: Units of quantities – Displacement and Rotation measurements by contact and noncontact methods – Linear and angular velocity measurements – Translational and angular acceleration – Force measurement. Photolithography. Ultrasonic Flowmeters – Indicator dilution method – Impedance cardiography – Laser Doppler flowmetry – RBC velocity measurement – Miscellaneous mechanical flowmeters – Tissue blood flow measurement – Venous occlusion plethysmography – Clearance technique – Measurement by heat transport – Laser Doppler flowmeter – NMR Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.8-90 . 12EI331 MEDICAL SENSORS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • An introduction to the field of medical sensors and an in – depth and quantitative view of device design and performance analysis. UK. MEMS – Physiological Pressure Measurement: Units of pressure. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Methods for biosensors fabrication: Self assembled monolayers. Muscle contraction measurements – Design of elastic beam – Force in isolated muscle – Invivo – Measurements – Stresses in the bone – Force plate – Stabilometer Unit III FLOW MEASUREMENT: Units – Blood flow measurement in single vessels – Electromagnetic. Physiological pressure ranges and measurement sites – Direct measurement – Dynamic response of catheter transducer systems – Catheter tip pressure transducers – Implantable pressure transducers.

Ake Oberg. HEAT FLOW AND EVAPORATION MEASUREMENT: Units – Thermistors.EEG electrodes – Micro & suction electrodes – Chemical transducer – Electrochemical transducers – Transducer with optical.EMG. Humidity transducers – Electrolytic water vapor analyzer. USA. Esophageal. Capacitive sensors. Evaporative water loss from skin and mucosa Unit V CHEMICAL MEASUREMENT: Electrode theory – Surface potential electrodes – ECG. Dewpoint – Hygrometer – Impedence. CRC Press. Thermo sensitive elements. CRC Press. “Bio – Medical Transducers and Instruments” – CRC Press. Crystal resonators. Microwave imaging clinical thermometers – Rectal. • Analyze the methods of medical image reconstruction. Volume 2. Joseph D. USA. 2010. Spirometer – Lung plethysmography Unit IV TEMPERATURE. Unit I Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • Understand the theory of Image Morphology. Bladder temperature measurement. tissue – Ex vivo measurements – Transcutaneous measurements – Respiratory gas analysis Text Book 1. technology & applications”. Transistors. Non contact temperature measurement techniques – Infrared measurements. Toshiyo Tamura. Pnemotachograph. 12EI332 MEDICAL IMAGE PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the fundamentals of medical image processing techniques. Tympanic thermometers.” The biomedical engineering handbook”. Tatsuo Togawa.8-91 . Thermography. GáborHarsányi. 2. Diodes. Acoustic and thermal principles – Mass spectrometer – Chromatography – Electrophoresis – Magnetic resonance – Other optical methods – Other analytical methods – Continous measurement – Intravascular. Bronzino. Hot – Wire anemometer – Time of flight – Ultrasonic vortex flowmeter. Course Outcome: At the end of the semester students will • Understand the basic concept of image processing.flowmeter – Respiratory gas flow measurement – Rotometer. Segmentation and Enhancement techniques. Thermocouples. 2000. Reference Books 1. p. USA. ”Sensors in biomedical applications: fundamentals. Thermoelectric Psycrometer. Zero heat flow thermometers – Heat flow measurements – Transducers – Direct calorimetry – Evaporation measurement. 2000.

Image fidelity criteria.” Biomedical signals and Image processing”. Transform operations.2004 4. Nuclear Medicine Imaging Modalities – SPECT. NJ. Region based segmentation – Image representation and analysis.Prince and Jnathan M.8-92 . Molecular Imaging Unit IV IMAGE ANALYSIS AND CLASSIFICATION: Image segmentation – Pixel based. ‘Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing’.C. Histogram modeling. John L.New York. 2002. Principal axis registration.E. Ultra sound imaging. Interactive principal axis registration. MTF of the visual system. Virtual reality based interactive visualization – Digital image watermarking. Atam P. Feature and image classification – Statistical. Jain. Rule based.CRC – Taylor and Francis.” Medical Imaging Signals and Systems”. K. Image visualization – 2D display methods. 3D display methods. USA 2003 2. Second edition Springer Verlag Network. Second Edition.IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS: Image perception. fMRI.Gonzalez and R. Feature based registration. Pearson Education. Shape.Pearson Education Inc.”Biosignal and Biomedical Image Processing Matlab Based applications” Marcel Dekker Inc. Image sampling and quantization – Two dimensional sampling theory. Neural Network approaches Unit V IMAGE REGISTRATIONS AND VISUALIZATION: Rigid body visualization. Image model. 3D Ultra sound imaging. Wiley Interscience Publication. Image transforms – 2D – DFT and other transforms Unit II IMAGE PREPROCESSING: Image enhancement – Point operation. Alfred Horowitz. Feature extraction and representation. Texture. Spatial operations. Text Books 1. Pearson education.. ‘Medical Image Analysis’. Image reconstruction in CT scanners. Indian Reprint 2003 References Books 1. Optimum mean square quantizer.PET.Links. Statistical. ‘MRI Physics for Radiologists – A Visual Approach’. MRI. Jerry L. Image restoration – Image degradation model. R. 3. 1991.Dhawan. 2.New York. Edge based.Semmlow.2006 3.Woods. Anil. Kavyan Najarian and Robert Splerstor. 2006 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. ‘Digital Image Processing’. Inverse and Weiner filtering – Image Compression – Spatial and Transform methods UNIT III MEDICAL IMAGE RECONSTRUCTION: Mathematical preliminaries and basic reconstruction methods. Elastic deformation based registration. Image quantization.

Pancreas. Physiology of micturition. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Hearing and smelling Unit IV DIGESTIVE AND EXCRETORY SYSTEM: Structure of alimentary canal. Ltd.. Afferent nervous system. S.S. Related digestive glands. Liver.8-93 .Chand&Co. 2008. USA. Reflex action. Venous return.Guyton. "Textbook of Medical Physiology" Prism Book (P) Ltd. Physiology of defecation Unit V ENDOCRINE SYSTEM: Pituitary gland. Secretion of digestive fluids. Regulation of breathing. Trachea and its branches. Thyroid and parathyroid glands. Structure and functioning of lungs. Regulation of posture – Physiology of emotion. Ranganathan. Ovary and testis Text Book: 1. "Text Book of Human Anatomy". Arthur. Regulation of temperature. Physiology of perspiration. Sensory end organs. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students will • Be able to study the structural and functional details of human body • Be able to relate how each body system works in coordination • Understand and appreciate how homeostasis is achieved in the body Unit I INTRODUCTION TO CELL STRUCTURE: Cell structure and organelles. • To explain the overall structure – function relationship of all systems. Mechanism of sight. Bladder and colon. • To apply this basic knowledge to changes in bodily functions as a result of disease and determine the reason for functional changes.C. Blood cells – Composition – Origin of RBC – Estimation of RBC – WBC –Platelet Unit II CIRCULATORY AND RESPIRATORY SYSTEMS: Structure and functioning of heart. Function of liver – Structure of kidney. Tongue. Neural control of cardio vascular system – Pulmonary Ventilation.12EI333 ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To define the different anatomical terms . Cerebrospinal fluid. Physiology of urine formation. Mechanism of alimentary canal. Hypoxia Unit III NERVOUS AND SENSORY SYSTEMS: Structure and function of nervous tissues. Function of each component of the cell – Membrane potential – Blood. General circulation – Capillary circulation. T.New Delhi 2007. Reference Book: 1.

Unit I INTRODUCTION TO NEURAL NETWORKS: Introduction – Biological neurons and their artificial models – Learning. Feedback networks.12EI334 SOFT COMPUTING TECHNIQUES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the basic concepts of neural networks and its applications in Control and biomedical applications. Multiple layer – Feed forward. Bio signal classification. Adaptation and neural network's learning rules – Types of neural networks – Single layer.8-94 . Pattern recognition Unit III INTRODUCTION TO FUZZY LOGIC: Fuzzy sets – Fuzzy operation – Fuzzy arithmetic – Fuzzy relations – Fuzzy relational equations – Fuzzy measure – Fuzzy functions – Approximate reasoning – Fuzzy propositions –Fuzzy quantifiers – If then rules Unit IV FUZZY LOGIC CONTROL: Structure of fuzzy logic controller – Fuzzification models – Data base – Rule base – Inference engine – Defuzzification module Case studies: Blood pressure monitoring during anesthesia using fuzzy logic. Home heating system Unit V GENETIC ALGORITHM AND ITS APPLICATIONS: Fundamentals of genetic algorithm: Evolutionary computation – Search space – Encoding – Reproduction – Elements of genetic algorithm – Genetic modeling – Comparison of GA and traditional search methods – Genetic Algorithm in scientific models and theoretical foundations – Applications of Genetic based machine learning – Genetic Algorithm and parallel processors – Composite laminates – Constraint optimization – Multilevel optimization – Case studies Text Books Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • To introduce fuzzy logic concept and its applications in biomedicine. Fuzzy Logic and Genetic algorithms. Back propagation – Learning and training Unit II SPECIAL NETWORKS AND APPLICATIONS: Associative memory – BAM – Hopfield network – ART Network – SOM – Case studies: Depth of anesthesia monitoring using neural networks. Course Outcome: At the end of the semester students • Will have solid understanding of Basic Neural Network. • Know how to use Soft Computing to solve real world problems mainly pertaining to Biomedical applications. Image processing using fuzzy logic.

J.1.J. Jaico Publishing House. Ltd. Course Outcome: At the end of the semester students will • Understand the concepts of mathematical modeling. Jacek M Zurada. and G. Illustration – Example of a physiological control system – Difference between engineering and physiological control systems – Art of modeling Physiological systems.1999. Chemical regulation of ventilation – Model of the heart – windkessel simplification – Models of Neuronal dynamics – Hodgkin Huxley model. uncertainty and Information’.1994 12EI335 MODELING OF PHYSIOLOGICAL SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand basic ideas related to modeling and different modeling techniques of certain physiological systems like respiratory system. B. 2. Regulation of glucose. Klir G. Rajasekaran S.. &Folger T. ‘Neural Networks and Fuzzy Systems’. Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithms. ‘Fuzzy sets.A VijayalakshmiPai.A.8-95 . Zimmerman H. • Model each physiological system and study the i/p – o/p characteristics. 3. ‘Fuzzy set theory – and its Applications’ – Kluwer Academic Publishers. 2. Generalized system properties – Models with combination of system elements – Linear models of physiological systems – Distributed parameters versus lumped parameter models – Linear systems and superposition principles Unit II OPEN LOOP VERSUS CLOSED LOOP SYSTEMS: Determination of steady state operating point – Regulation of cardiac output – Cardiac output curve – Venous return curve. ‘Introduction to Artificial Neural Systems’. Synthesis and Applications’. New Delhi – 2003. • Be able to simulate models based on the given system parameters and hence use it for diagnostic purposes. Kosko. Stability analysis of pupillary light reflex – Study of frequency domain analysis of circulatory control model and glucose insulin regulation model by MATLAB tools Unit III RESPIRATORY SYSTEM: Gas transport mechanisms of lungs – Oxygen and carbon dioxide transport in blood and tissues – Mass balancing by lungs – Modeling oxygen uptake by RBC and pulmonary capillaries Unit IV Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.1993. Prentice – Hall of India Pvt.1994.. Reference Books 1. Ltd. ‘Neural Networks. Prentice Hall of India. thermal regulation system and lung model. Prentice –Hall of India Pvt. Unit I INTRODUCTION: Introduction to Physiological control systems.

M. Reference Books 1. Netherland. David O.ULTRA FILTRATION SYSTEM: Transport through cells and tubules. centrifugation. “Pharmacokinetic and Pharmacodynamic Data Analysis: Concepts and Applications. Simulation and Estimation. Methods of waste removal. Physiological control systems: Analysis. Biomedical engineering principles: an introduction to fluid.Khoo. Pub: Prentice Hall of India Pvt. 4. 3.K. Katz. 2.2006. Cobelli. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins. Daniel Weiner. Academic Press. devices and biological molecules • Gain a better understanding of clinical lab techniques such as blood cell counter. John Wiley & Sons. New Jersey. heat. “ Nonlinear Dynamic Modeling of Physiological System”. By: Michael C. Course Outcome: At the end of the semester students • will be able to understand the spectroscopic techniques. • To give unique methods of separation of closely similar materials. and mass transport processes. Johan Gabrielsson. Tissues – Modeling bones. 12EI336 SPECIAL PURPOSE INSTRUMENTATION Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide various techniques and methods of analysis which occur in the various regions of the spectrum. • To learn about the techniques used in clinical labs. 2. Ltd. NMR techniques. electrophoresis and microscopy Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Counter current model of urine formation in kidneys. New Delhi. Stress propagation in bones.Mararelis. Diffusion.2008. microtomy. Sweden. Cooney. Facilitated – Diffusion and active transport. • To provide the important radio chemical methods of analysis. “Physiology of the Heart”. USA.2004. chromatographic techniques used for characterization of materials.8-96 . Modeling Henley’s loop Unit V MODELING BODY DYNAMICS: Principles of mechanical properties of bones. A. Computer aided modeling. Hills model of muscle mechanism – Current Trends: Pharmacokinetic modeling illustrated with example like drug diffusion. 2000. Text Books 1. Volume 2 of Biomedical engineering and instrumentation . : “Introduction of Modeling in Physiology and Medicine “.Z. Vasilis. These are the powerful tools used in clinical and research laboratories. Carson. the most powerful being gas chromatography.

3.”Handbook of Analytical Instruments”.A Seattle F. 12EI337 MEDICAL DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTIC LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Singapore.Unit I INTRODUCTION TO ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENTS AND SPECTROPHOTOMETERS: Fundamental elements of Analytical instrumentation system – Spectral methods of analysis – Beer’s Law – UV – Visible spectrophotometers – Single beam and double beam instruments – Sources and detectors – IR spectrophotometers– FTIR spectrometers – Atomic absorption spectrophotometers – Flame emission spectrophotometers – Sources of flame photometry – Applications Unit II NMR. 1987. Khandpur R.2006. MousumiDebnath. PH meters – Dissolved oxygen analyser – CO monitor – NO2analyser – H2S analyser – Chromatography – Paper. CBS Publishing and Distribution. Centrifugation – Types – Fractionation of cells. Gas chromatography – Liquid chromatography – Principles. MASS SPECTROMETER & RADIATION TECHNIQUES: NMR – Basic principle – NMR spectrometers – Applications – Introduction to mass spectrophotometers – Nuclear radiation detectors – GM counter – Proportional counter – Solid state detectors introduction to X ray spectroscopy Unit III AUTOMATED CHEMICAL ANALYSIS SYSTEM. Dean J. “Medical instrumentation application and design”. Tata MCGraw – Hill Publishing company limited.H.”Tools and techniques of Biotechnology”. TLC. Autoclave.. Biocabinet safety Unit V ELECTROPHORESIS AND MICROSCOPY:Electrophoresis – Principles – Types – Factors affecting electrophoresis – Microscopes – Classification – Methods of microscopy – Light microscope – Compound microscope – Phase contrast microscope – Fluorescent microscope – Electron microscope and their applications Text Books 1. 2. PH METERS AND CHROMATOGRAPHY: Automated chemical analysis system – Benefits – Types – Working. H. Willard. John G Webster.L. ‘Instrumental Methods of Analysis’.S.. 2. Introduction to Instrumental Analysis.. Automatic tissue processor – Microtome – Types – Microtome knives – Hot air oven. John wiley & Sons (Asia) Pvt Ltd. 2005.Braun. McGraw–Hill. Reference Books 1. Types and applications – High pressure liquid chromatography Unit IV CLINICAL INSTRUMENTATION TECHNIQUES: Haematology – Automated cell counters. RobertD.8-97 .L. 3rd edition. 1995. Merrit L. Pointer publications.

Recording of EMG waveforms using bio – kit physio – graph 8. TENS – physiotherapy 12EI338 MEDICAL IMAGING TECHNIQUES Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • This course gives knowledge of the principle of operation and design of Radiological equipments. MRI Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Surgical diathermy 5. Heel Pattern – Scattered radiation. Multi section Radiography. • To make the students to know about various physiological measuring instruments and to diagnose the various disease. Recording of peripheral pulse waveforms using bio – kit physio – graph 10. Principle of NMR. Porter Bucky system. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Fluoroscopy. Cooling system Unit II RADIO DIAGNOSIS: Radiography. Recording of EOG signals 6. Selection of anodes. • To make the students to know about various measurement techniques. Blood pressure measurement 2.8-98 . Unit I X – RAYS: Principles and production of soft and hard X rays. CAT. Recording of ECG waveforms using bio – kit physio – graph 7. Determination of blood flow velocity using ultrasonic Doppler blood flow meter 4.Course Objective: • To provide basic knowledge of physiological signals. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students • Will have knowledge about physiological signals. Determination of auditory capacity using audio meter 3. Determination of percentage of oxygen saturation in blood using pulse oximeter 12. Plane of Movement. • Can apply the various measurement techniques. Recording of PCG waveforms using bio – kit physio – graph 9. List of Experiments: 1. Image Intensifier. Multi section radiography Unit III SPECIAL RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS: Principle. Recording of EEG waveforms using bio – kit physio – graph 11. Angiography. the students • Will have in – depth knowledge about Radiological equipments and itsimaging techniques.

Handbook of Medical Imaging: Processing and Analysis(Biomedical Engineering). Text voice converter. Unit I PROSTHETIC AND ORTHOTIC DEVICES: Hand and arm replacement.2000 2.Academic Press. Vestibular implants. Screen readers Unit IV Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Khandpur R. Dot scanners. Speech trainer Unit III VISUAL AIDS: Ultra sonic and laser canes. I. SPIE Press 2000 Reference Book 1. Hearing aids. “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”. Different types of models for externally powered limb prosthetics. • Will have idea about the legal aspects related to rehabilitation. Medical Image Processing and Analysis .8-99 . students • Will have a good knowledge about various types of assist devices.Unit IV APPLICATION OF RADIOISOTOPES: Alpha. Principle of radiation detectors. • Will have the ability to choose which type of assist device is suitable for various disorders. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Jacob Beutel (Editor). N. Volume 2. Material for prosthetic and orthotic devices. Intra ocular lens. Tata McGraw – Hill. Voice synthesizer. Bankman . Principles of Radiation therapy Unit V : RADIATION SAFETY: Hazardous effect of Radiation. Sonka (Editor). Braille Reader. M.S. Isaac Bankman.2003. Radiation protection Techniques. Handbook of Medical Imaging. Mobility aids Unit II AUDITORY AND SPEECH ASSIST DEVICES :Types of deafness. Safety Limits. Tactile devices for visually challenged. Feedback in orthotic system. 12EI339 REHABILITATION ENGINEERING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide knowledge about various types of assist devices and its applications. Beta and Gamma emission. New Delhi. nuclearangiogram. Radiation Monitoring Text Books 1. Application of DSP in hearing aids.

Health organization in state. Health financing system. Sensory Assist Devices Unit V REHABILITATION MEDICINE AND ADVOCACY: Physiological aspects of Function recovery. Unit I NEED AND SCOPES OF CLINICAL ENGINEERING: Clinical engineering program. Job and in day to day life Text Book 1. Legal aspect available in choosing the device and provision available in education. Inter University Publication. • will apply the knowledge of computer and information technology in health care.8-100 . Health education.Editor. Steps of training. Location for Stimulation. CODES AND QUALITY MANAGEMENT IN HEALTH CARE: Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Advances in Bio Medical Engineering and Medical Physics. Health insurance. Course Outcome: At the end of the course.MEDICAL STIMULATOR: Muscle and nerve stimulator. NewJersy. Developing training program. Health legislation Unit III TRAINING AND MANAGEMENT OF TECHNICAL STAFF IN HOSPITAL: Difference between hospital and industrial organization.S.Cook and Webster J. Levels of training. Psychological aspects of Rehabilitation therapy. students • will appreciate the need for standard health policies and quality management in hospitals.G. 12EI340 HOSPITAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand the need and significance of Clinical Engineering and Health Policies. New York 1968. Role to be performed by them in hospital. Wages and salary. Employee appraisal method Unit IV STANDARDS. Staff structure in hospital Unit II NATIONAL HEALTH POLICIES: Need for evolving health policy. Reference Book 1. Educational responsibilities. Levine.. • To familiarize the training strategies. Albert M. Functional Electrical Stimulation. Prentice Hall Inc.N. Evaluation of training. quality management policies and information technology used in medicine and health care. Therapeutic Medical devices. 1982.

Englewood Cliffs. Model based ECG simulator – Spectral estimation – Blackman Tukey method. Application in EEG. Overview of Medical Device regulation and regulator y agencies Unit V COMPUTERS AND INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY IN MEDICINE AND HEALTHCARE: Computer application in ICU. “Clinical Engineering Principle and Practice”. Process order estimation. FDA. New Jersey. Adaptive segmentation. Picture Archival System (PACS) for Radiological images department.C.. students • Know various techniques in processing medical signals. PCG signals Unit III Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Course Outcome: At the end of the course. Simulation Text Book 1. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO RANDOM SIGNAL PROCESSING: Discrete Random Processes– Variance – Co – Variance – Scalar Product – Energy of Discrete Signals – Parseval’s Theorem – Wiener Khintchine Relation – Sample Autocorrelation – Sum Decomposition Theorem Spectral Factorization Theorem – Characteristics of some dynamic biomedical signals. Reference Books 1. PCG signals.. Prentice Hall Inc. • Will have the ability to solve various types of practical approach in cardiac and other bio signals. Time varying analysis of Heart – Rate variability. Methods to monitor the standards. “Handbook of hospital personal management”. Clinical laboratory administration. Noises – Random.C. Periodogram and model based estimation – Application in Heart rate variability. Communication. ICRP and other standard organization.8-101 . Fixed segmentation.Quality management in hospitals and clinical laboratories. Joint Commission of Accreditation of hospitals.Cook. 1979 . Prentice Hall of India. 1996 . NABH and NABL standards. Necessity for standardization and quality management. Patient data and medical records. Non stationary process. Lattice representation. Goyal R. and Albert M. Webster J. Structured and physiological noises Unit II TIME SERIES ANALYSIS AND SPECTRAL ESTIMATION: Time series analysis – linear prediction models. 12EI341 BIOMEDICAL SIGNAL PROCESSING Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn the techniques of signal processing that are fundamental to medical signal Processing applications.

Bopardikar. 2002 2. Scalogram.”Biomedical Signal Processing – Principles and Techniques”. Barrie W. C. Adaptive noise cancelling in ECG.”Insight into wavelet from theory to practice”. ARTECH House. Florida 1999. Spectrogram. D. Time – Scale representation. Adaptive wavelet detection. Willis J..TMH. Pearson Education. Detection of overlapping wavelets Unit IV BIOSIGNAL CLASSIFICATION AND RECOGNITION: Signal classification and recognition – Statistical signal classification. Feature extraction – Wavelet packets. ‘Biomedical Signal Analysis-A case study approach’.New York. Emmanuel C.New York. New Delhi. Improved adaptive filtering in FECG.” Advanced Methods and Tech for ECG Data Analysis”. 2003.2004 5.2004 Reference Books 1.A Practical Approach’ Pearson education Ltd. Rangayyan. New Delhi. ‘Digital Signal processing. Matched filtering. 2. PHI.2005 6. Wigner distribution. Arnon Cohen. Ifeachor. 12EI342 BIO MEMS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To understand a wide knowledge about MEMS and its role in medical Instrumentation area.P. WileyInterscience/IEEE Press.” Biosignal and Biomedical Image Processing Matlab Based applications” Marcel Dekker Inc.Jervis. KavyanNajarian and Robert Splerstor.Soman. K.New Delhi.2006. Reddy. 2002 3.ADAPTIVE FILTERING AND WAVELET DETECTION: Filtering – LMS adaptive filter. CRC Press Inc.Semmlow.K. GariD. 7. John L. Back propagation neural network based classification – Application in Normal versus Ectopic ECG beats Unit V TIME FREQUENCY AND MULTIVARIATE ANALYSIS: Time frequency representation. ECG characterization. Prentice Hall of India. Linear discriminate function. Rangaraj M.2006 3.McSharry. Multivariate component analysis – PCA.Boston. Direct feature selection and ordering. Rao and AjithS.8-102 . CRC – Taylor and Francis. ECG data compression... 4. Tompkins. Raghuveer M. India 2000. Bio-Medical Signal Processing Vol I and Vol II. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No.FranciscoAzuaje and Patrick E.” Biomedical signals and Image processing”. Wavelet detection in ECG – Structural features.Clifford.. Wavelet analysis – Data reduction techniques. Boca Rato. Biomedical Digital Signal Processing.IRamachandran. Wavelets transform – Introduction to theory and its applications.ICA Text Books 1.

Micromachining. • To study the tools used in medical information systems. DNA hybridization. Materials for MEMS and Microsystems. CRC Press. Volume I. Tai Ran Hsu . Lee.Peltier effect heat pumps . Wanjun Wang. “MEMS and Microsystems design and manufacture”. NewDelhi. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company. Springer 2006. Dielectrophoresis. Unit I MEMS AND MICROSYSTEMS: Working principle of Microsystems. Piezoelectric materials.Course Outcome: At the end of the course.Bio chip Text Books 1. Magnetic sensors and actuators – Magnetic Materials for MEMS Devices Unit III MICRO OPTO ELECTRO MECHANICAL SYSTEMS: Fundamental principle of MOEMS technology . NitaigourPremchandMahalik.Light modulators. Thermal sensors and actuators – Micro machined thermocouple probe . Fluid actuation methods.Micro lens. “ MEMS”. Digital micro mirror devices.2007. Boca Raton. New Delhi. BioMEMS and Biomedical Nano Technology. 2002. Microsystem approaches to polymerase chain reaction (PCR). Micro pumps – Continuous flow system.Thermal flow sensors. • Will have the exposure to micro opto electro mechanical systems. Reference Books 1. Expression for liquid flow in a channel. Light detectors. Beam splitter .8-103 .Micro needle. System modeling and properties of materials Unit II MICROSENSORS AND ACUATORS: Mechanical sensors and actuators – Beam and cantilever. 12EI343 MEDICAL INFORMATICS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To learn about the current scenario in medical informatics. Drug delivery system Unit V BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS: Micro total analysis systems (MicroTAS) – Detection and measurement methods. Abraham P. 2.Soper“ BioMEMS – Technologies and applications”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. students • Will have basic knowledge about MEMS and Microsystems. Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company. Lee and James L. 2. Electronic nose. Steven A. Micro fluid dispenser . Optical switch Unit IV MICROFLUIDIC SYSTEMS: Microscale fluid. 2007.

• To understand real time applications of medical informatics used in biomedical field. stored and used. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students • Will be able to demonstrate a thorough understanding of how medical information is created. Paper based medical record. • will understand how doctors use information to make decisions. Unit I INTRODUCTION TO MEDICAL INFORMATICS: Introduction to Medical informatics – Historical highlights – Medical Informatics programs–MI organizations – Structure of medical informatics – Medical informatics standards – Health level 7 – Medical data formats – PACS (picture Archiving Communication system standards) – DICOM standards and Quality improvement – Career in Medical informatics Unit II COMPUTER BASED MEDICAL INFORMATION RETRIEVAL: Database – DBMS basics – Types – Private. • will be aware of how telematics and information science will affect how they manage information when they qualify. Artificial intelligence approaches – Semantic networks. Personal health record Unit IV COMPUTER ASSISTED MEDICAL DECISION MAKING: Artificial intelligence in medicine – Expert systems in medicine – Need for expert systems – Applications – Computer aided decision making – General model – Tools for decision making – Various approaches – Categorical. ANN – medical applications – Decision tree with examples Unit V APPLICATIONS OF MEDICAL INFORMATICS: Computer assisted medical education and patient education: The Personal Health Record. Smart Cards. Wireless. Probabilistic. Cognitive models. Surgical Simulation – Virtual reality – Virtual environment – Three dimensional imaging – Virtual endoscopy – Tele education – Telemonitoring – Tele surgery – Materials and methods – Applications – Internet resources Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • will proficient in the use of Internet and on – line database resources to find relevant information . RFID. Public database – MEDLARS – PubMed– Bibliographic databases – Non bibliographic databases – Other databases important to medicine – Medical information from internet – web based search engines – Online databases – Electronic publishing – Electronic journals Unit III HOSPITAL INFORMATION SYSTEM & CPR: HIS Introduction – HIS functional areas – Advantages – Various modules – Central registration module – Patient care module – Blood bank module – Operation theatre module – Health information Resources – Electronic health record– Components –Need – Advantages and limitations. interpreted.8-104 .

Aluminum oxides. Course Outcome: At the end of the course students will be able • To understand the properties of the Bio compatible materials. CRC press. Surface characterization. Robert Hoyt. Joseph D Bronzino. 2. • To know the different types of Biomaterials. Visco elasticity. 2. Wound – healing process.”Medical Informatics: Practical Guide for the Healthcare Professional”.Bio Informatics: Introduction to Bioinformatics – Biological databases – Protein sequence databases – Training for bioinformatics and computational biology – Importance of bioinformatics in medical treatment – Human genome project – Drug discovery and drug designing with suitable illustrations Text Books 1. • To study about the different metals and ceramics used as biomaterials. Tata MCGraw Hill publishing company limited 2003. Tata MCGraw – Hill Publishing company limited. • To study the artificial organ developed using these materials. MohanBansal” Medical Informatics – A Primer”. 12EI344 BIOMATERIALS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To study the characteristics and classification of Biomaterials. Co – based alloys. Biological evaluation of materials based on ISO 10993. • To learn about polymeric materials and combinations that could be used as a tissue replacement implants. Mechanical properties. Thermal characterization. 2000. second reprint 2008. Stainless steels. 2006. "Computers in Medicine". Cimino. ”Biomedical engineering handbook Vol 2”. Unit I STRUCTURE OF BIO – MATERIALS AND BIO – COMPATIBILITY: Definition and classification of bio – Materials. 3. Reference Books 1. Ceramic implant materials. Ti – based alloys. SEM. Blood compatibility. Ann Yoshihashi. Hydroxyapatite glass ceramics carbons.D. 2007. Edward HanceShortliffe. Springer. James J. ISBN – 13:978 – 1 – 4303 – 2162 – 0. TEM. Lele R.” Biomedical informatics: computer applications in health care and biomedicine . Melanie Sutton.8-105 . Body response to implants. Medical applications Unit III Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. X ray difractometry Unit II IMPLANT MATERIALS :Metallic implant materials. • To design artificial organs using tissue materials. Physical characterization.

Roderic S. Internal fracture fixation devices. Joint replacements Unit V ARTIFICIAL ORGANS: Artificial Heart. Dental Implants. • Will have better understanding. 2007. USA. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the students • Will have the knowledge about the prevention of medical errors may seem to be a relatively simple task. “Biological Biocompatibility”. Limb prosthesis. some improvements can be reported. Unit I RELIABILITY AND SAFETY TESTING: Reliability – Types of reliability – Reliability optimization & assurance – Reliability’s effect on medical devices – The concept of failure – Causes of failure – Types of Failures in Medical devices – Safety testing – Device specific Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. or shortcomings in expected Medical Device performance. and more effective remedies and countermeasures in medical device errors. Rater B. • Will be able to search for reasonable. and techniques that could be selectively applied to reduce an intolerable rate of unacceptable errors. “Biomaterials Sciences – An Introduction to Materials in Medicine” Academic Press . 2004. Blood interfacing implants. Bronzino. Maxillofacial augmentation. 4. New York. knowledge. Narosa Publishing House. and directed motivation. Percutaneous and skin implants. acceptable. 5. concepts. Jonathan Black. SweeHinTeoh. achieving efficacious treatment. USA. and controlling health care costs. • To avoid patient injury. mistakes. 3. Joon Bu Park. “Biomaterials: an introduction”. Prosthetic Cardiac Valves. Externally Powered limb Prosthesis. 2004. USA. New Delhi. Hard tissue replacement implants. Bhat. Text Book 1. TeohSweeHin.8-106 .POLYMERIC IMPLANT MATERIALS: Polymerisation – Polyolefin – Polyamicles – Acryrilic –Polymers –Rubbers – High strength thermoplastics – Medical applications Unit IV TISSUE REPLACEMENT IMPLANTS: Soft – tissue replacements. 2003. goofs. 12EI345 MEDICAL DEVICES SAFETY Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To provide a source of useful ideas. Performance of Materials Fundamentals of Reference Books 1.D. there should be rapid advancement in the medical device management discipline. ‘Biomaterials: principles and applications’. Sutures. CRC press. 2. Joseph D. Sujata V. ‘Biomaterials’. Surgical tapes. 2002. and with heightened awareness. Lakes. • Medical error has proved to be a difficult and recalcitrant phenomenon. Adhesive. Joon Bu Park.China 2004. ‘Engineering materials for biomedical applications’ World Scientific Publishing Co.

Macroshock and Microshock – Earth and Protection – Leakage currents – Magnetic fields and compatibility – Basic assumptions in safety technology – Safety classes Unit V MEDICAL DEVICES STANDARDS. 2002. Process and choosing the appropriate directive – Active Implantable Medical Devices Directive (AIMDD) – In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Devices Directive (IVDMDD). 2. 2007. Deciding on acceptable risk. Springer Verlog/Wein. ENVIRONMENTAL & ECOLOGICAL SAFETY: Safe medical devices – Handling and operation – Medical Application safety – Usability – Clinical assessment – Environmental safety – Interference with the environment – Environmental conditions. IOP Publishing Limited.8-107 . REGULATIONS & DIRECTIVES: Medical Standards and Regulations – Device classification – Registration and listing – Declaration of conformance to a recognized standard – Investigational Device Exemptions (IDEs) – Institutional Review Boards (IRBs) – IDE format – Good laboratory practices (GLPs) – Good manufacturing practices (GMPs) – Human factors – Design control – The Medical Devices Directives (MDD) – Definition..“Reliable Design of Medical Devices – Second Edition”. Reference Books 1. Norbert Leitgeb “SafetyofElectromedicalDevicesLaw – Risks – Opportunities”. Impact on the environment – Ecological safety Unit IV MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SAFETY: Safety Mechanics – Electrical Safety – Biological aspect – Limitation of Voltages . Taylor & Francis Group.safety goals. 2. 3. 12EI346 BIO VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. 2010. 2006. Text Books 1. “Medical Device Safety – The regulation of Medical Devices for Public Health and Safety”. Marcel Dekker Inc. Elsvier Limited. “Safety Evaluation of Medical Devices” Second Edition. Shayne Cox Gad. Function test Unit II RISK MANAGEMENT: Safety and risk management – Risk. Richard Fries. “Medical Devices Use and Safety”. Bertil Jacobson and alan Murray. CRC Press. Bristol and Philadelphia. Failure assessment and Documentation – Visual inspection: External & Internal visual inspection – Measurement – Safety parameters. Gordon R Higson. Factors important to medical device risk assessment – Risk management – Tools for risk estimation – Liability – Manufacturer’s and physician’s responsibilities Unit III MEDICAL DEVICES HANDLING. 2002.

Introduction to LabVIEW II 3. Waveform Generation 4. 8. Network Interface 7. Embedded Implementation Of Digital Filter Using SPEEDY33. • Students will have the knowledge on Embedded Programing. Thermocouple Interface.8-108 . Introduction to LabVIEW II 3. Embedded Implementation Control Algorithm Using SBRIO 9631 .LabVIEW Graphical Programming List of Experiments: 1. Thermocouple Interface.DSP Processor 9. Waveform Generation 4. Analog Input/Output Interface 6. Frequency Measurement 5. Analysis Of PPG 12EI347 EMBEDDED VIRTUAL INSTRUMENTATION LABORATORY Credits: 0:0:2 Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW. Analysis Of EMG 11. Introduction to LabVIEW I 2. Introduction to LabVIEW I 2. Generation of ECHO using SPEEDY33 . Analysis Of ECG 10. Course Outcome: • Students will have knowledge of LabVIEW. Embedded Implementation Of Digital Filter Using SPEEDY33 9. 8.FPGA Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. • Students will be able to Implement Embedded Application using . Frequency Measurement 5.DSP Processor 10. Network Interface 7.Course Objective: • To strengthen the knowledge of Virtual Instrumentation Using LabVIEW • To introduce the concept Data Acquisition Using LabView Course Outcome: • Students will have knowledge of LabVIEW • Students will have the knowledge on DAQ Cards • Students will be able to analyze real world signal using LabVIEW List of Experiments: 1. Analog Input/Output Interface 6. Analysis Of PCG 12. • To introduce the concept Embedded Programming Using LabView.

Thermistor Unit III OTHER PROCESS MEASUREMENTS: Level Measurement: Direct methods. Condenser.2nd Edition. Chemical reactor. 2004. K. system. Filled System Thermometer. Radiation Level Detector. McLeod gauge. Thermal Conductivity Gauge:Pirani Gauge. Tata McGraw– Hill. Singh.8-109 . Unit II TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE MEASUREMENT: Pressure measurement: Pressure Standards. Embedded Implementation Control Algorithm Using LM3S8962 ARM CORTEX-M3 12EI348 ADVANCED INSTRUMENTATION AND PROCESS CONTROL FOR FOOD ENGINEERS Credits: 4:0:0 Course Objective: • To introduce the concept of process instruments for various physical variables. Evaporator Text Books 1. Elastic elements. New Delhi. Ionization gauge. Electromagnetic flowmeter. “Industrial Instrumentation and Control”. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Course Outcome: At the end of the course the student will • Apply the knowledge of Measurement to various applications. S.11. automation. Unit I BASIC CONCEPTS OF MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL: Purpose of Instrumentation– Measurement and its aim– Functional Elements of an Instrument– Performance Characteristics – Static and Dynamics Characteristics– Instrumentation symbols and labels – Control System– Open loop and closed loop systems– Response of First Order system for Unit Step input– Response of Second Order system for Unit Step Input. Thermocouple. • Analyze the characteristics of Instrumentation systems. Thermocouple Gauge.. Embedded Implementation Control Algorithm Using ARM 7 Processor 12. Rotameter. Ultrasonic flowmeter – Measurement of pH – Viscosity Unit IV PROCESS AUTOMATION: Process Variables– Degrees of Freedom– Control Modes: P– PI– PID – Final Control element: Actuators– Control Valve characteristics– Control Valve types Unit V COMPLEX CONTROL TECHNIQUES: Cascade control– Ratio control– Feed forward control– Split Range Control– Inferential Control – Case studies: Distillation column. Heat exchanger. Pyrometers. Ultrasonic Level Detector – Flow Measurement: Turbine flowmeter. RTD. Temperature Measurement: Temperature standards. Types of manometers. Expansion Thermometer.

Curtis Johnson.2004.. D.. L. “Process Dynamics and Control”.. Newyork. 2.8-110 . New Delhi. T. Reference Books 1.John Wiley and Sons. Newyork. Tata McGraw– Hill. “Chemical Process Control”. and Millichamp.“ Process systems analysis and control” . Springer. D. B.2004. 2nd Edition. B. Edger. “Advanced Practical Control”. D. Department of Electronics and Instrumentation Engineering Page No. Prentice Hall.2.2004. Betlem. 3. Stephanopoulos.2006. 2003. E. Roffle. Prentice Hall of India. H. A. 3. NewDelhi. F. “Process Control Instrumentation Technology”. Coughanowr.. and Koppel. Seborg.

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->